Home

505 TISOFT2 Rel. 6.3 User Manual - Internet

1. PLC IN RUNTIME EDIT MODE CONTINUE WITHOUT ACTIVATING PROGRAM CHANGES 545 NETDATA ED YES F2 Figure 7 4 Editing the RLL Program during RUN Mode TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFT for Disc rete Programming 7 5 Z3 Displaying Networks Displaying You can display networks with up to 32 contacts in series and 32 contacts in Networks parallel plus 32 output elements Figure 7 5 shows a network that extends beyond the right edge of the screen Absence of an output element in a display indicates that the network extends beyond the right edge of the screen Absence of the network starting address indicates that the network extends beyond the left edge of the screen ROW 2 COL 6 NETWORK STARTING ADDRESS 1 L MEMORY AVAILABLE 12293 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 4Ct1 i as x Lb TEE 3x Xi X X8 V100 4205 X5 WX100 P INT a X7 Yi Cursor non edit mode NOP in row 2 column 6 NOP ES NOP P 545 LOADER1 EXIT F1 EDIT F2 FIND F3 DOCUM F4 BLOCK F5 REPLAC F6 BLDCHT F7 WRITDK F8 Figure 7 5 Program Display Cursor Position Thetop line of the ladder display tells you the location of the cursor by network block row network block column network address and L memory words available off line only In Figure 7 5 the cursor is positioned in Row 2 Column 6 at Address 1 To toggle the cursor positi
2. EXIT F1 READ F2 WRITE F3 PLC OPERATIONAL MODES PORT LOCKOUT EEPROM PROGRAMMING PASSWORD OPERATIONS DIAGNOSTICS WATCHDOG TIMER TASK CODES PER SCAN 18 PLC TIME OF DAY SET PLC SCAN TIME TASK CODES PER SCAN 545 LOADER PG Figure 11 2 AUX 16 Programming Display TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions 11 11 CHAN TC 1 8 Setting Time Functions AUX 14 16 18 continued Reading Setting Contoller Time Display AUX 18 Use AUX 18 to read or set the date and time in the controller To invoke the funcion type in 18 at the AU X menu prompt and press netur This invokes the following display YEAR 98 MONTH 01 DAY 30 HOUR 14 MINUTE 29 SECOND 59 DAY OF WEEK 6 545 LOADER1 PG EXIT F1 READ F2 WRITE F3 To read the time press READ F2 To enter a new time complete the display by using the right arrow key to cursor from field to field and entering the desired number The hour is expressed in 24 hour format and the day of the week by 1 through 7 Press WRITE F3 to set the new time 11 12 Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 11 7 Performing Controller Diagnostics AUX 15 20 23 27 28 29 Show Software Part Use AUX 15 toread the software part number and the release number of Number AUX 15 the cards installed in your controller To invoke the function typein 15 at t
3. eene Setting Time Functions AUX 14 16 18 seeeeeee nnn nnn Performing Controller Diagnostic s AUX 15 20 23 27 28 29 eee 11 13 Comparing Controller Program to Disk AUX 17 ieeeenenn nn nn nn nh Setting Controller Scan Time AUX 19 ccc cece cece nn Hn nnn Performing I O Diagnostics AUX 21 AUX 25 lseeeeee nnn menn rr Checking RLL Program Syntax AUX 22 issseeeeee nnne 11 23 Converting S Record Format to Binary AUX 40 ccc cece cece cece Setting Controller Operating Mode AUX 81 82 ccccceeeeneeeneeeeeeeeeeenuee Locking out Programming Ports AUX 83 eeseeeennn nmn Programming EEPROMs AUX 84 isseeeeeeeeerrn enhn Password Selection and Access Level AUX 85 sess enn n nnns Setting PROHBUS DP Communications Mode AUX 86 eee TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxilia ry Functions 11 1 11 1 Accessing Contoller Auxiliary Functions Contoller Auxiliary Auxiliary Functions are available on line only since they require Functions communication with the controller Your operations available through these functions include the following types e Powering up and restarting of the controller e Clearing controller memory e Saving programs from the controller e Loading programs to the controller e Changing controller operating mode e Running controller diagnostics e Checkin
4. Mode Controller Disk User Aux 60 Save All Aux 90 Load All Comments No Password Password Password Allowed to Disk Allowed to PLC Not asked Yes No password Yes No password Selected program on disk for must have 5 0 format or greater There is no password for selected program on disk or in the controller User gives Yes Selected Yes Disk password Full access to controller and password program on disk is written to selected program on disk is for seleced password is controller if allowed program retained controller supports on disk password No Selected User does Only if controller Full access to controller is not give program on disk is supports password allowed Some reads and no password password protected writes are allowed to for selected program on disk program on disk Yes No User gives Yes Controller Yes Controller Full access to controller and controller password is written password is to selected program on disk password todisk retained is allowed 5 Yes No User does No Controller is No Controller is Partial to full access to notgivea password protected password protected controller is allowed password depending on access level Full access is allowed to selected program on disk 6 Yes Yes User gives Yes Selected Yes Controller Full access to selected disk a
5. 2 Press Return 3 Press ERASE F4 You receive the message ERASE THE EEPROM A Press YES F2 to erase the EEPROM or NO F1 to abort 11 30 Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 11 16 Password Selection and Access Level AUX 85 Password Selection Access Level AUX 85 Use AUX 85 to set or change the programmable controller password or set the level of access To execute AU X 85 use the numeric keys to enter 85 at the prompt in the AU X Functions menu Then press Return Figure 11 14 shows the on line password selection screen that is invoked with AU X 85 See Appendix H for a detailed discussion of password operation PASSWORD DISABLED PLC ACCESS LEVEL READ ONLY ACCESS 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 ENPSW F2 DISPSW F3 SETPSW F4 NOACC F6 RDONLY F7 FULL F8 Figure 11 14 On Line Password Selection Screen The keys in Figure 11 14 are defined below EXIT F1 or ESC Allows you to return to the main auxiliary AUX screen e ENPSW F2 or E Allows you to enable password protection for the controller and the selected program on disk e DISPSW F3 or D Allows you to disable password protection for the controller If you have not already entered a password for the controller TISOFT prompts you for the current password If the password you provide is not correct TISOFT does not disable the password protection This function does not work if you cannot provide
6. sssssssseeeeeeerse ee 7 10 Insert Function Keys uerius e pPRRLDRERREETERRORECRIGAG eG ee GUERRE RR E EUR e e Insert MOG ise RE ikke ue bined ideas ba aden Ru ades VERS E P REDE Wh RR ER cid Creating Horizontal Lines Creating Vertical UNES seek eR RR Re Ra ek dae ga Padded ade ER Inserting NetwOIKS 5 iid 9 ERDRERRERXTR RRERRECRIBERGGRRERPDEEEEEGX ERE Gu RE Re Inserting a ROW iai iscesRrdee E bh eed Ree Raices PRU VERE ERR ERI d ER E EE Inserting a Col lmm es sisii na eridi a ai bie vba ed bee hae eer ee be RE EE RES Deleting Horizontal Lines Deleting Vertical LINGS 0 ccc m re LadderElement Usage Table ssssssssseeeeeee eer 7 17 Find F nctlon Keys x cassette tes eaten De cd Poe d c DP n Red iR Tea RR RR dd 7 19 List Screen in Find Operation iislsssssssssseeeeeee eem I rre 7 20 Sring Enty FICO creir ia kr oder tacite d ace dado CR aou a AC aa Rel lad ea een CrossReference Display 0 0 e nnn 7 24 Menu Chart to SMemory Functions 0 00 eee eee 8 2 LOOP DIPECUOTY isa ceerdacarm ic iai once edhe kh a adaa theeh eens eaba dace 8 3 SF Program Subroutine Directory Screen 2 tte 8 3 Loop Tab Irem 8 7 Ramp Soak Ta ble wc tries Ee ere E E ie EE eta a 8 10 Contents xxi List of Figures continued 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 10 9 11 9 12 9 13 9 14 9 15 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11
7. 7 26 Using TISOFT for Discrete Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Chapter 8 Using TISOFT for Batch Programming 8 1 Accessing SMemory Operations ccc cece cece eee eee eee eee eee 8 2 Using S Memory Directories cc cc cece eee e eee eee nennen nn 8 3 Displaying Loops sseeseeee nnn nnn nhanh n nnn 8 4 Editing Loops sseeeeseee nnns eee naa aka raa aa a a n 8 5 Entering Ramp Soak Steps ssssseee nennen nr nn 8 6 Displaying Analog Alamms eeeseeeee nnnm 8 7 Editing Analog Alarms esee nmm 8 8 Special Function Program Subroutine Language esee nnns 8 9 SF Instructions and Parameters sssssssesn nennen rana 8 10 Displaying Special Function Programs Subroutines esseee eene 8 11 Editing SF Programs Subroutines seeoeeeeee nnn 8 12 Creating Documentation at Program Enty iseeeeeen n nnn 8 13 Seting Contoller Operating Mode seeeeeeeennn nnn 8 4 Enabling Disabling Control Blocks e memes 8 15 Compiling SF Programs Subroutines iissieeeeeee enn nnn TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming 8 1 8 1 Accessing S Memory Operations Using TISOFTin The area of controller memory reserved for loops analog alarms and SF S Memory programs subr outines is designated as S memory You must have S memory configured before you can access the menus for loops alarm
8. Comments includes S memory comments Synonyms NOTE Block operations on synonym words are also performed on bit of words 13 2 Performing Block Data Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 13 2 Block Functionality from Ladder Display Block Copy Block Move Block Delete Block Put In ladders Block Copy inserts a copy of the source block of ladder rungs before the rung that starts at the selected destination address The rungs starting at the destination address are moved toa higher address to make room for the new rung s When copying the source block to a lower address after the copy the source block parameters are adjusted to their new higher addresses The destination address cannot be within the source block range For V or K memory Block Copy overwrites the data starting at the destination address with data in the source block V or K memory addresses V or K memory formats are not copied For synonyms and comments Block Copy also overwrites data starting at the destination address with data from the source block Block Move operates in the same manner as Block Copy except that the selected source block is deleted after it is copied to the destination block Block Delete clears deletes or erases the selected memory block In ladders rungs after those deleted are moved up to fill the addresses in the deleted block NOPs are added at the end of L memory to replace the moved rungs In V or K
9. Contact Coil Toggle Cursor Position Display Decrement Address Delete Character Delete current element Delete previous element Enables or disables base Moves to last column row 1 of current rung Edit moves to next row current rung or appends new row torung Display moves to next row or rung Equal to Relational Contact Backspace E END Enable Disable END ENTER Equal to EXIT FIND Greater Than or Equal to HELP System Element List HOME Invokes Find function Greater than or E qual to Relational Contact Invokes help system List valid elements for current field Moves to column 1 row 1 of current rung Draws horizontal line 22 Glossary TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual HORZD Table L TISOFTKeys continued Deletes horizontal line Immediate I O Immediate contact and coil Increment Address F9 Valid CHGVAL in Status Insert Character INS Insert Mode INSERT INS Inserts a column INS J Inserts a row K M emory Editor Ctrl K L M emory Address L Less Than Less than Relational Contact Macro Functions Alt R Record macro Alt S Stop macro Alt P Play macro Alt L Loop macro play until key press Alt W Write macro to file Alt O Open macro file NO N For a YES N
10. The given error number has occurred on the FMS network The code xx Code xxx number gives a detailed description of the error From Boundary Thestarting range specified in the PRINT ALL and PRINT Exceeds To Boundary CROSS REFERENCE selections menu must be less than or equal to the ending range for the given option FTSR In SF Statement Take data out of register FTSR OUT before attempting to add more Performed on Full Shift Register FTSR Out SF Statement Put data in register FTSR IN before attempting to take out Performed on Empty Shift Register Function Not Available The selected write function is not available because this mode of TI SOFT Load Only Version is read only except for the following Aux functions 10 11 12 13 20 81 86 90 98 and 99 Function Not Available The attempted function did not work because it is not allowed in Read Only Version read only TI SOFT B 10 TISOFTMessages TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Help File Not Found H1 Network Error xx Code xxx High High Must Be Greater than or Equal to High Host Adapter Error hhhh O Configuration Error Too Many Points Illegal Aux Function Illegal Connection around Box Illegal Connection to Multiple Input Box Illegal Connection to Multiple Input Box at Address TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual The TISOFT help system file has not been found The given error code has occurred on the H1 network T
11. 5 Typein the element that will replacethe designated element in the WITH field If needed press O or Shift for a list of valid element types 6 Press START F8 NOTE f you receive an error message for example ERROR REPLACING Y1 WITH X1 AT ADDRESS 5 when you attempt to replace an element and you do not know why try replacing the element manually in the appropriate editor A more specific syntax error message may explain why the operation is not allowed TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using Global Search and Replace 12 3 12 2 Using a Global Search and Replace Table Invoking the Table You can build a table of up to 32 entries to replace multiple elements in one Display operation To access the Global Search and Replace Table Figure 12 2 complete the following steps from the Search and Replace menu 1 Enter memory type and memory range for the search operation at the prompt displayed on the Search and Replace menu 2 Press BLDTBL FT GLOBAL SEARCH AND REPLACE LADDER MEMORY RANGE 1 THRU 14 REPLACE THRU WITH REPLACE THRU WITH COPY COMMENTS NO COPY SYNONYMS NO 560 NETDATA ABORT F1 COMTGL F2 SYNTGL F3 CLRCHT F4 READ F5 CLRLOC F6 START F8 Figure 12 2 Global Search and Replace Table Copying To have the comments and synonyms copied from the replaced elements to Comments and the new elements use COMTGL F2 to change the fields for copying Synonyms comments to read YES Use SYNTGL
12. Chapter 2 Setting up the TISOFT Environment Configuring Color Option issssssssssee enne CONMGUNNG Colors peter Si eas eas ai hoe epos oc d ceo a eo oo Accessing Color Option isseseseeseseers e meer pee dade dace dac ker eed Selecting TISOFI GOolois ice ne e ERE EROR E e RE ERE ea p Rs Assigning Color Selections Managing Program Hles ssseesne nnne nnn nnn Basic Features of the PGMS System sssssssssseeeee eese Selecting a Dive isses eerte ene p Gaede eed ead RE na e e Re ER Creating a New Directory ssssssssssssssssse e e nnn Removing a Directory 00 cee ae Selecting a Directory cet ree eh edere Pe dece E ee ed ee Formatting a Floppy Disk cece ms Creating a New Program Name si sisas siada aiae aaa aaan nn Selecting aP gran 5o ced acte etae Foe Rep ees m ae ERROR E sacas Deleting a Pro gran uiae ep aec etre be ere Td ERE RA Renaming a Program ssssssssseess enne COPYING a Pogra isis dosti bebe kets bead et beret hebdo e dodetelu COR DA Non Program File Selection sssssssssseseeee ERE AEE E a aa Backing up Program Files and Directories leen nnn nnn Selecting Off Line Operation soeseeeenn nnn nn Selecting On Line Operation oen nnn Selecting On Line Operation forthe 575 Controller cc cece cece eee ees Reading 575 Port Configuration 0 cece Writing 575 Port Configuration
13. On Line PROFIBUS DP Slave Status Function Key Line 0 sc eee ees On Line PROFIBUS DP Slave Configuration Function Key Line sss 6 9 PROFIBUS DP Update Function Key Line ssssssssseeeeeee n On Line PROFIBUS DP Slave Configuration Screen Off Line PRO FIBUS DP Slave Configuration Screen On Line PROFIBUS DP Slave Edit Screen ssssssssse eens Off Line PROFIBUS DP Slave Edit Screen sssssssssss tte nes Off Line PROFIBUS DP Slave Status Screen sssessssssssess ees Off Line PRO FIBUS DP Slave Configuration Screen On Line PROFIBUS DP Slave Status Screen sssssssssess ees On Line PROFIBUS DP Slave Configuration Screen Show I O Configuration Display sssssssese I Find I O Point Prompt 2 eric cree hr e acie GP a CR UAR Rok a RT ada eo Element Eist Display i eie bbs tamer Y Un e ur Ope RR Re Y ket REA ced Ad 7 2 Off Line Ladder Display tse epe tack osa e E ns OR e ek Dan ed 7 3 Task Flow for Run time Ediits 4 exem extet Pee Pee e b der nare oed 7 4 Editing the RLL Program during RUN Mode 0 600 eee 7 5 Program Display sc esas os base Red e uet ba n Rd t Ma dais dees deena aea boe de 7 6 Edit Mode forLadderlogic seinni iiia E R ei i eee 7 8 Entenng Contacts 2 4 b bidon obe oa iniaa i ace paie dea bud Aati ia 7 9 Entering Relational Contacts iis dicas epe ere rae Euge arae d e atn 7 9 Multiple Input and Large Box Locations
14. RESETS ANI MISCELLANE PROGRAM2 PROGRAM4 FILENAME PROGRAM2 545 LOADER1 PG ABORT F1 COPY F2 DELETE F3 RENAME F4 DIR F5 FLDTGL F6 SELECT F8 Figure 11 12 File Selection Display Either type in or highlight with the cursor the S record filename to be converted Then press Return or SELECT F8 The display returns to the AUX menu and gives you a prompt as shown in Figure 11 13 CONVERT S RECORD FILE PROGRAM2 REC TO LOADER1 545 LOADER PG NO F1 YES F2 PGMS F7 Figure 11 13 Convert S Record Confirmation Prompt To abort the conversion press NO F1 to complete the conversion press YES F2 In the example above the file is PROGRAM2 REC and the conversion is being saved to LOADERTI which is the current program Your display contains the name of your REC file and the name of your current program 11 24 Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 11 13 Setting Contoller Operating Mode AUX 81 82 Changing Operating Mode AUX 81 Changing Ladder Mode Use AUX 81 to make changes in controller operating mode To invoke the operation typein 81 at the menu prompt then press Return When you have S memory configured you receive a display with three fields as shown in bold type below to change operating mode Use the arrow keys to position the cursor in the desired field Function keys are available fo
15. TISOFT attempted to read a program file and failed This can occur if the system attempts to open too many files simultaneously Make sure the command FILES 20 is in the CONFIG SYS file Or you might need to increase the maximum number of open files allowed to FILESz25 or FILES 30 If the problem persists the file may have been accidently deleted the disk drive may have been popped open data in the file may have been corrupted or a disk hardware failure may have occurred This message indicates that an error occurred at the specified ladder rung address during execution of a Global Search and Replace F or whatever reason the new element makes the specified rung invalid Perhaps the element causes a table in a box instruction to be out of a Or an output field may have been replaced with a read only element This message indicates that an error occurred in the specified ALARM during execution of a Global Search and Replace For whatever reason the new element makes the ALARM invalid Perhaps the element is out of range for the particular field or an output field may have been replaced with a read only element This message indicates that an error occurred in the specified LOOP table during execution of a Global Search and Replace F or whatever reason the new element makes the LOOP invalid Perhaps the element is out of range for the particular field or an output field may have been replaced with a read only element This message
16. Use the arrow keys and or Return to position the cursor in the fields to make entries Position the cursor in the TOTAL SYSTEM MEMORY field Typein the number of Kbytes that correspond to your controller model It is essential that you enter the correct memory size When you attempt to load the configuration to your controller you receive a controller error if the memory size is incorrect Type in the desired size for each memory type For example with the cursor in the Ladder memory field usethe numeric keys to changethe existing number Notethat the entries you makefor V K and L memory sizes are in kbytes not words Then use Return or arrow keys to move the cursor to the next memory type to be changed NOTE f you enter a memory configuration smaller than that required for a program you have entered the program is truncated to fit the smaller configuration To write the configuration to RAM press WRITRM F3 NOTE Programmable controller type internal C control relay and total system memory fields can be changed only when off line TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring Controller Memory 4 5 4 3 Configuring Memory On Line Accessing Access the on line memory configuration menu from the TISOFT Start up Configuration Screen by completing the steps listed below If you are already on line at the Menu ladder display begin with step 2 Figure 4 4 shows the on line menu 1 Press ONLINE F4 2 Press SP
17. configuration online to the controller in Run mode e SF expression operators have changed to support word and long word operations WAND is now amp WOR is now and WXOR is now e TheSFSUB box parameter string length limit has increased from 20 to 40 characters e TCC TCP synonyms in timer and counter boxes are now displayed e VMM VMS and G Memory data types in LOOP ALARM SF programs and SF subroutines are now supported 575 only e Anew Recover function RECOVR F8 in documentation recovers excess file space used by comments or synonyms by rebuilding the comment or synonym program files Features from The following features were added to releases of TISOFT after 6 0 Releases after 6 0 e Programming over an Ethernet network using the TCP IP protocol and the PPX 505 CP2572 module is supported See Appendix for details e Thestartup screen now offers a function HINTS F2 that lists useful key combinations for TISOFT operations e TISOFT now allows you to interrupt communications by pressing ALT C to minimize the long wait that you might experience during a normal communications timeout on the communication ports Such as when operating over modems e All Find operations can now be invoked with Lente the FIND function key F as well as from e Bit of word has been added to the Find operation in relay ladder logic TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Preface xxv
18. e 6 D e e7 DO DO e e3 DI 9 Pin D Type Male Connector Figure 1 4 RS 422 Pin Values TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Installing TISO FT Release 6 3 1 5 L3 Installing TISOFTin MS DOS Checking PC Memory Available Installing TISOFT Programming Software Installing TISOFT Upgrade Programming Software Your TISOFT kit contains two 3 5 inch TISOFT programming disks Use the MS DOS MEM and CHKDSK commands to make sure you have 540K bytes of conventional system RAM available and 3 0 megabytes of hard disk space available to load TISOFT Additional space is required for RLL program storage After checking memory available complete the steps listed below to load TISOFT onto the fixed disk NOTE f you need 5 25 inch disks use the MS DOS COPY command to duplicate the 3 5 inch disks 1 Insert the disk labeled 1 into the 3 5 inch drive 2 Typein the drive letter followed by a colon A or B or the letter for the drive you are using Press Return 3 Atthe prompt type INSTALL and press Return 4 Follow the step by step instructions on screen to complete the installation If this is an upgrade kit of TISOFT follow the steps listed below 1 Set the DOS default directory to the directory where your current TISOFT executable resides For example type CD C XVTI Return 2 Insert disk 1 into the appropriate drive and type the
19. e Insert Press INS to invoke the insert mode Add a Return after the insert to split a line at any point and move the text after the Return to the following line Toggle the insert mode off by pressing INS e Backspace Use Backspace to delete characters to the left of the cursor e DELLN F4 Press F4 to delete the line where the cursor is positioned e INSLN F5 Press F5 to insert a blank line above the line on which the cursor is positioned e FIND F6 Press F6 to locate another element you want displayed Type in the element type and identifier such as MCR6 and press Return e DELETE F7 Press F7 to delete a synonym or descriptor and dear the display e DESCR F8 and SYN F8 Press F8 to toggle the cursor between the synonym and descriptor fields 9 12 Documenting Programs TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Finding a Synonym Changing a Synonym Recovering and Rebuilding Synonym Files To find a synonym complete the steps below to locate and display it 1 Press DOCUM F4 2 Press SYN F3 3 Atthe prompt typein the element and identifier to be located such as C123 Y 256 etc 4 Press Return You can then also use FIND F6 to find other synonyms After you display the synonym the edit function keys are available Usethe arrow keys or F8 to position the cursor at the point you are changing Then insert or deletetext as desired The Recover function RECOVR F8 recovers space used by
20. 0 cc cece cts Displaying SYNONYMS eire ce eue RR CURRO DH RO DeM Ren ERE OR aor ana wo Comparing Controller and Base Configuration ssssssssrsssssssssnnsennns Using the Compare Function ssssssssseeeeeee eem rr Entering the Compare asiento n etaed etre D t olt Vol Mese Pee del ne Finding I O Point Locations cccccceee scene rinis nmm Finding an I O PONE oc et RO CREER ieee cene hie ad c dna TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring Series 505 I O 5 1 5 1 Reading an I O Configuration This chapter describes I O configuration for devices that use the Series 505 1 O channel For information about configuring devices that use the PROFIBUS DP I O channel see Chapter 6 Displaying the In off line mode complete the following steps to display a base configuration Configuration from from RAM RAM 1 Press SPACEBAR and then CONFIO F3 The 505 Base Status screen appears See Figure 5 1 505 CHANNEL 1 BASE STATUS ENABLED CONFIGURED YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 CONFIG F2 FIND F3 EN DIS F5 PRO DP F6 Figure 5 1 Off Line 505 Base Status Screen 2 Typethe channel number if desired 3 Usethearrow keys to highlight the desired base number on the screen 4 Press CONFIG F2 The Basel O Configuration screen appears See Figure 5 2 5 2 Configuring Series 505 I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Ma
21. 90 99 Executing Program Loads Use AUX 43 and AUX 90 through 99 toload specified memory types to your controller NOTE Your controller will list only the numbers for the memory types in that particular model Not all memory types are available in all models AUX 43 and AUX 91 99 require that the controller memory configuration be larger than or equal to the memory configuration on the disk AUX 90 loads ladder memory V memory K memory U memory Series 505 I O configurations for all bases PROFIBUS DP I O configurations for all slaves bus parameters for the PROFIBUS DP I O channel memory confi guration scan time and watchdog ti mer value AU X 90 does not load forced word I O or forced discrete I O X Y and C AUX 91 loads ladder memory only AU X 92 loads V memory only and AUX 93 loads K memory only AUX 98 loads forced word I O and forced discrete I O AU X 99 loads forced and unforced word l O AU X 43 loads U memor y AU X 94 97 loads S memory types To load programs to the controller with AU X 43 and AUX 90 99 use the numeric keys to enter the AU X number that corresponds to the type of load to be performed then press Return After pressing Return you receive the following display at the bottom of the AUX menu If you want the current program to be loaded press YES F2 LOAD memory type you selected TO PLC FROM current pgm name 545 LOADER1 PG NO F1 YES F2 PG
22. FROM RAM 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 SHOW F2 READRM F3 EDIT F7 Figure 6 13 Off Line PROABUS DP Slave Configuration Screen Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Displaying a In on line mode complete the following steps to display a PROFIBUS DP Configuration from slave configuration from a disk or a controller Disk or Controller 1 Press SPACEBAR and then CONFIO F3 The PROFIBUS DP Slave Status screen appears See Figure 6 14 PROFIBUS DP SLAVE STATUS ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT SLAVE ENABLED ASSIGNED ONLINE REQUIRED YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 STOP UPDATE IN PROGRESS 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 CONFIG F2 FIND F3 MERGE F4 EN DIS F5 5051O F6 OPR ST F7 DELETE F8 Figure 6 14 On Line PROABUS DP Slave Status Screen NOTE Theon line PROFIBUS DP Slave Status screen Figure 6 14 displays the message UPDATE IN PROGRESS This has nothing to do with the UPDATE F7 function accessed from the PROFIBUS DP Slave Configuration screen it means that the screen is being continuously refreshed to provide current slave status information 2 Usethearrow page keys to highlight the desired slave number on the screen 3 Press CONFIG F2 The PROFIBUS DP Slave Configuration screen appears See Figure 6 15 4 ThePROFIBUS DP slave configuration from the programmable logic controller is automatically displayed Press READDK F3 if you want to r
23. Programming discrete ladder program elements using TISOFT menus 7 Programming device requi rements 1 2 Programs converting to higher TISOFT release C 1 R Ramp soak table entering 8 10 entering address 8 11 making entries 8 11 RBC software part number Aux 23 11 14 Related manuals xxxi Relational contacts entering 7 9 Replace SeeGlobal search and replace RS 422 pinouts cable 1 5 RS 232 C pinouts cable 1 4 Run time editing 7 447 5 S S memory accessing block operations 13 7 block functions comments 13 6 control blocks determining compiled status 8 32 determining status 8 30 disabling 8 30 enabling 8 30 status during edits8 9 8 13 8 23 designating blocks 13 7 directories function keys B 4 information locating entries 8 5 using TISOFT menus 8 2 entering block parameters 13 8 functions accessing S7 5412 MS DOS Windows software for FMS communications Scan time setting 11 19 Search and replace See Global search and replace Selecting an element for comment 9 9 Selection table loading 10 22 saving SF programming compiled mode 8 31 elements 8 14 entering header 8 24 instructions 8 14 8 1818 19 invoking directory language 8 14 ordering expressions parameters 8 1448 19 programs editing 8 2248 25 entering 8 2418 25 statements 8 24 subroutines displaying 8 20 8 21 editing
24. SCP SIP SJ P SKP STP SVP SWP SYN Bit of word synonym pointer for K memory Bit of word synonym pointer for TCP TCC Bit of word synonym pointer for V memory Bit of word synonym pointer for word I O Synonym pointer for CR Synonym pointer for bit I O Synonym pointer for J MP M CR SSI EN D SK P LBL GTS LBL Word synonym pointer for K memory Word synonym pointer for TCP TCC Word synonym pointer for V memory Word synonym pointer for word I O Synonym data Comments CCP CIP C P CMT CSP Comment pointer for CR Comment pointer for bit 1 0 Comment pointer for J MP MCR SSI END SK P LBL GTS LBL Comment data Comment pointer for S memory S memory ALM LOP PGM SUB Alarm data Loop data SF program data SF subroutine data General APP KMM PFB PRT TTL x UMM VMM VP5 575 applications K memory data PROFIBUS DP data Printer setup and selection data Title data U memory data V memory data General disk information ladders memory and I O configuration Aux 17 I O value data scan time anyname CH 5 anyname F NL anyname M AC anyname REC anyname TB5 anyname T XC anyname T XP anyname T XS anyname 2BF TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Table K 3 TISOFTNon Program Files Status charts PROFIBUS FMS network node list Keyboard macros External subroutine S Record data Status select tables I mport export comment text data Temporary data I m
25. such as Notepad WordPad or DOS EDIT Follow these guidelines e Usea space or tab between each station address and device name e Begin each station address name on a new line e Do not use spaces within a name For example you may use Station1 Station 1 or Station 1 but not Station 1 e Create a separate file for each network of PROFIBUS FMS stations After creating your node list save the file in the directory of your choice for example the same directory as your TISOFT program and change the extension usually TXT to FNL FMS node list NOTE Windows may not automatically recognize the F NL extension of a node list file that you want to edit When you double click the file from Windows Explorer or File Manager a dialog then prompts you to select a program to open the file with and you can choose an editor such as Notepad or WordPad The dialog also allows you to set the text editor you choose as a default to open files with the FNL extension in the future TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFT with FMS j 5 j5 Establishing FMS Communications in TISOFT Initializing the TC PB Task Code Driver Invoking TISOFT with FMS Communic ations Creating a TISOFT Shortcut Icon to Invoke FMS Communications Toinitialize the task code driver that enables communications over the PROFIBUS FMS network follow these steps 1 Useany text editor to select and edit the AUTOEXEC BAT filein the drive where TISOFT is in
26. 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 C1 C1 C1 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 01234567890 01234567890 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 Y2 E Figure 14 5 Extended Rung Printout TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Printing 14 7 14 6 Using Print Cross Reference Operation Cross Reference Print Cross Reference allows you to cross reference the following elements Options X Y C WX WY V K Box Instructions STW DSP DSC DCP DCC TCP TCC SFEC Loop and Alarm Variables Cross Reference Each element selected for cross reference displays the following information Contents in the printout e Program location where used such as L memory rung 120 e Special Function program addresses appear in the following format P G ooxxl yyyy where xxxx is the Special Function program number yyyy is the instruction number and the asterisk indicates that this number is the starting point of consecutive locations If the instruction number appears as 0000 the memory address referenced is located in the header of the SF program e L memory type for example normally open contact parameter in a BITP box etc e Synonym and descriptor if selected Invoking Print The Print Cross Reference ope
27. 8 using PLC Start option l 4 with TISOF T 1 9 TCPFB task code driver installing Technical assistance xxxi Time functions scan time changing 11 19 setting watchdog timer task codes setting number per scan 11 11 time display reading setting 11 12 TISOFT DOS installation 1 6 multiple user wi ation G 12 program files K 2 K 2 single user installation specifying port 2 in Window Ws 95 1 9 using menus Windows 95 installation T 1 9 with COM PROFIBUS 6 3 TISOFT shortcut icon in Windows 95 1 8 6 TISTAR accessing TISOFT off line D 1 accessing TISOFT on line D 2 Title program documentation 9 144 9 15 Index 8 TIWAY host adapter card E 2 invoking TISOFT selecting secondary on line TIWAY 1 host adapter card selecting sendri 4 TSAP addressing for multiple user installations G 12 addressing in single user installation G 8 U Undelete duplicating restored element 7 15 restoring deleted element 7 15 Unilink host adapter changing confi JA E 6 configuring E 5 E 7 selecting EET address E 4 E 4 E 6 Unique checking elements 7 16 Upgrade programming software installing 1 6 Usage element listing 7 17 V V K memory table accessing changing numeric format 7 23 changing values displaying Synonyms displaying values reading altering contents 7 21 saving numeric displa brm Boi 21 using Read function W Wi
28. 8 22 8 25 using List screen 8 22 values 8 15 Shortcut icon 1 8 6 Single scan using 10 13 Software selecting Special function programming Seq SF Start up screen Starting TISOFT 1 14 Status chart accessing 10 3 accessing to build 10 4 building changing numeric format 10 5 clearing display 10 6 displaying 10 7 10 8 displaying saved 10 7 loading 10 7 making entries 10 4 saving 10 6 Status elements CH GVAL changing 10 16 readingj 10 16 Status functions e 03 accessing List display 10 3 available 10 2 controller modes changing 10 19 10 20 debugging programs 10 2 displaying comments 10 12 displaying ladder and charts displaying ladders 10 10 finding elements 10 9 finding ladders 10 9 invoking ladder display reading locating addresses 10 9 monitoring programs program run modes 10 2 10 19 single scan 10 2 10 13 Synonym selecting by SYNONYM field 9 9 Synonym pop up element list 9 10 Synonyms changing 9 13 displaying displaying in status 10 12 Index 7 Synonyms continued 9 9 9 12 9 20 importing 9 22 importing and exporting 9 18 9 20 9 22 in global search and replace TCP IP communications assigning an IP address building a host table file 8 connecting to Ethernet I 5 I1 6 installing PC TCP Kernel software installing the TCP IP module overview I 2 troubleshooting 1 1011 11
29. Connect the Module to the Ethemet Two words of memory are required to store the IP address which is in dotted decimal format Because TISOFT cannot display dotted decimal byte format you must enter the IP address in hexadecimal format Convert each decimal value to hex then enter two hex values per word Example For an IP address of 198 35 34 10 enter the first word V506 as hex C623 wherethe high byte C6 is the hex equivalent of decimal 198 and the low byte 23 is the hex equivalent of decimal 35 Similarly enter the second word V507 as hex 220A as shown in Figure l 2 IP Address 198 35 34 10 dotted decimal format memory required to store IP Address Hex value C623 V506 Two words of 220A V507 Figure l 2 Entering an IP Address in TISOFT If you want to load the IP address into the CP2572 module EEPROM then you must usethe TCP Module Configuration tool IPSET that comes with the module Refer to the included documentation for a description of how to use the IP address configuration tool The PPX 505 CP2572 module directly supports 10BaseT UTP and AUI cabling If you have an existing network that uses a different cabling medium but it is IEEE 802 3 compliant you can purchase a transceiver to connect your TCP IP module to your system Consult the SIMATIC 505 Ethernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP2572 User Manual for information about how to connect cables to the 10bT or
30. For loops alarms SF programs and SF subroutines Block Copy overwrites the control blocks starting at the destination control block with data in the source block The destination control block number cannot be within the source block range For ramp soak steps and SF instructions Block Copy inserts a copy of the source block data before the step or instruction that starts at the selected destination address The steps or instructions starting at the selected destination address are moved to a higher address to make room for the new steps or instructions The destination address cannot be within the source block range Block M ove operates in the same manner as Block Copy except that the selected source block is deleted after it is copied to the destination address Block Delete dears or deletes the selected memory block For loops alarms SF programs or SF subroutines data in the selected control blocks are cleared For ramp soak steps and SF instructions data after those deleted are moved up to fill the data in the deleted block Off line for all memory types Block Put copies a source memory block from a selected source program to the destination memory block in the current program On linefor all memory types Block Put copies a source memory block from a selected source memory block to the destination memory block in the controller Conversely using SRCTGL F8 source toggle Block Put copies a source memory block from the c
31. Index Contents xix List of Figures 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 3 3 3 4 3 5 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 6 5 7 6 1 6 2 RS 232 C 25 Pin to 25 Pin Cable iii isset pub eR xg Re RR Rana UR Gea dd 1 4 RS 232 C 9 Pin to 25 Pin Cable sssssssssseeseeene ee rn 1 4 RS 232 C 9 Pirrto 9 Pin Cable seien dv eye doen ets eee e ede dake amen 1 5 RS 422 Pin Values sic ise eer eb oe bct we Ruined iet e ree esce EI e th d ak A A 1 5 Installing TISOFT in WindOWs eR eke ei kRRIe E EIER EDO ERR Ru 1 7 Creating a TISOFT Shortcut Icon for Your Windows Desktop ssssssss 1 8 Accessing TISOFT Properties Dialog 0 e mm 1 9 TISOFEStAM UP SCTE E Miine aan uo hh temper tr a dae sce Hea wake RU acne 1 11 TISOFT Running In WINK OWS ibt ee oa eel Ra eed bead ka 1 12 ColorConfiguration Menuai i 0 aan eaaa ea i aah enn 2 2 PGMS Program Selection Screen assirian i isai a k aaa eene 2 5 PGMS Directory Selection Screen 1 cece ae 2 5 Selecting Status Charts 2 0 teeta 2 9 Off Line Ea dderDisplay i css eer pere epee eeu EE E Yee 2 11 On Line Ladder Display esset pere eR erre eb haee ei ATP na 2 12 Application ID Table for575 Controllers 0 0 0 2 13 Port Configuration Screen for575 Controllers cece cece eee n 2 14 Accessing Program Functions dae ierst tiii iee i ok ta ioia Aea een 3 2 Memory Configuration Menu si
32. LKC ALA APET LKD ALLA PPET LLA AODA SPET JMORE JMORE JMORE 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 HELP F4 SELECT F8 Figure 10 1 Element List in Build Chart TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using StatusFunctions 10 3 10 3 Building a Status Chart Accessing Build Chart Making Enties in the Chart To invoke the display for building a status chart complete either of the following sequence of steps from the Start up Screen Either Or 1 Press ONLINE F4 1 Press OFFLINE F8 2 Press CHART F8 2 Press BLDCHT F7 3 Press BLDCHT F3 Type in the element type and identifier number If you want to change the numeric format of the display complete the steps given in the section Changing Numeric F ormat page 10 5 before moving the cursor off the entry You can have a maximum of 57 entries per chart Figure 10 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the next field or copy the next element from field to field with Return To set the cursor movement of Return use DIRECT F2 After you press DIRECT F2 you have three options for cursor movement e LF gt RT F2 Moves the cursor left to right after a Return e RT gt LF F3 Moves the cursor right to left after a Return e TP gt BM F4 Moves the cursor top to bottom after a Return If you enter an invalid element while building a chart you must correct the error condition or clear the element before you can move the cursor or exit the displ
33. Local Database multiple TISOFT stations follow directions given in Step 12 Fora Single TISOFT Station Single User TISOFT Installations TouseTISOFT from a single station over H1 where TISTAR PCS is not in use only a minimum configuration is necessary Figure G 4 shows an example of TSAP addressing guidelines for UnitA and UnitB For peer to peer and TF Server applications you may need additional items configured in the 505 CP 1434TF refer to the 505 CP1434TF documentation F or cases where multiple TI SOFT stations are desired on the H 1 network you will need additional TSAPs configured These are described later in this section Oncea TISOFT PC makes a connection with a controller through the hidden connection both the controller and that PC must be power cycled in order to release the connection so that another PC can be allowed to connect tothe hidden TSAP of that same controller G 8 TISOFT with H1 Communications TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual PC TISOFT CP1413 Card Configurator CP1434TF TISOFT Optional TF DDE Optional UnitA Controller Local Address 0800060100FF 505 CP1434TF Local Address 080006010001 4 Configured by user Local TSAP UnitA Local TSAP CP1434TF Hidden Not Remote TSAP CP1434TF configured by user Remote Address 080006010001 Application Association1 UnitA UnitB Controller Application Association2 UnitB 505 Local TSAP UnitB aoe Co
34. Memory availability Aux 28 11 16 Index 5 Menus accessing 3 3 Merge I O from COM PROFIBUS 6 4 6 7 Message HELP 3 11 Message Strings 7 23 Messages error B 1 10 19 11 25 Modem requi rements F 1lF 2 Multiport transcei ver 6 16 Node list creating FMS network lists 5 O O S options selecting 1 10 Off line functions 3 4 43 6 Off line operation selecting 2 11 On line password operations H 8 On line functions 3 3 3 6 On line operation selection 2 12 2 15 On line programming using TI way E 2 P Password operations on line H 8 Pinouts modem F 1 RS 232 C ports RS 422 ports 1 5 PLC card failure class Aux 27 11 15 PLC operational status Aux 29 11 16 Port configuration for 575 reading port 2 14 writing port 2 15 Index 6 Print function available functions 14 2 cross reference contents 14 8 cross reference options 14 8 entering selections 14 4 14 5 invoking selection menu 14 4 parameters 14 9 print cross reference print menus accessing 14 4 printing screen display 14 3 setup menu 14 6 PROFIBUS FMS communications SeeFMS communications Program file management 2 4 2 9 Program files copying 2 9 creating a new directory 2 6 creating a new program name 2 7 deleting removing a directory renaming selecting a director selecting a drive selecting a program 2 8 Program selection screen 2 4 2 5
35. Only an authorized user may change delete or disable the password TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Contoller Three levels of access are available when a password has been entered and Password Access enabled in the controller Levels e NodAccess The controller program cannot be read or modified e Read only Access The controller program can be read but it cannot be modified e Full Access The controller program is not protected Password for TISOFT If a controller has a password releases of TI SOFT earlier than 5 0 cannot Releases Earlier display ladders loops alarms SF subroutines or SF programs If a than 5 0 controller does not have a password releases earlier than 5 0 can be used with that programmable logic controller TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using Password H 3 H 2 Password Selection and Access Level Off Line Password Selection and Access Level H4 Using Password When you are offline you can press fromthe ladder display to invoke the screen options that are shown in Figure H 1 Then you can either set or change the password or you can set the controller access PASSWORD NONE PLC ACCESS LEVEL FULL ACCESS 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 SETPSW F4 NOACC F6 RDONLY F7 FULL F8 Figure H 1 Off Line Password Selection Screen The keys in Figure H 1 are defined below e EXIT F1 or ESC Allows you to return to the ladder display screen e SETPSW F4 or S Allows you to set or change the p
36. Special Function Module No U Memory Configured Non Ladder Logic Address out of Range Offset out of Range Only One Constant Parameter Is Allowed Operating System Error Detected Operation Complete Operation Failed TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual This message is displayed during execution of AUX 25 to display failed I O and no failed I O exist This message is displayed during execution of the SEEK operation under STATUS or CHART It indicates that none of the addresses for the current I O type has been forced Information on the requested topic is not included in the TISOFT Help System Refer to your user manual This message indicates that a K memory address has been referenced when no K memory is configured This may occur when you attempt any of the following operations e AUX functions on Constant memory Clear 33 Save 63 Load 93 or Verify 17 e Editing K addresses in box parameters e Block operations on K memory ranges e Invoking the K memory editor e Editing K addresses in any response field where K would normally be a valid parameter for example Remote Setpoint field in a Loop or Alarm Table Use the CONFME function to configure K memory for 545 555 560 565 and 575 controllers This may be returned by an SF I O module that has lost communication with the controller SF moduleis not present or communication with the controller has been lost Indicates that an operation i
37. Start from the on line Base I O Configuration screen See Figure 5 4 2 Typein the desired channel number in the field at the top of the screen 3 Typein the desired base number at the BASE field at the top of the screen 4 Press CLRBS F8 5 Press WRITDK F3 to clear the disk or press WRITPC F5 to clear the controller TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring Series 505 I O 5 9 Changing I O Configuration continued Clearing a Base To clear an I O configuration from the programming device RAM complete I O Configuration the following steps Off Line 1 Start from the off line Base O Configuration screen See Figure 5 2 2 Typein the desired channel number at the CHANNEL field at the top of the screen 3 Typein the desired base number at the BASE field at the top of the screen 4 Press CLRBS F8 5 Press WRITRM F4 to clear RAM This change is also saved to disk clear configuration from disk 5 10 Configuring Series 505 I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Deleting a Channel Beaware of the following considerations before you enter the channel 560 565 Only number you wish to delete e You cannot delete the I O configuration for Channels 1 and 2 e Channels are paired on the RCC cards for example 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 etc When one of a pair of channels is deleted so is the other e All channels above the highest channel number entered are also deleted for example if you enter channel 5 channels
38. TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual SKP SUSPEND SKP SMC SOAK Soft Key Spacebar SPETn SQRT SQRT X SRCTGL S SCAN SSI SSR START STATUS STFE STFN STMTNO STOP STOPOE STRING STW SUB SUSPEND Skip skips execution of a section of ladder logic to the corresponding label see also LBL Scan Matrix Compare compares up to 16 user defined bit patterns steps against the current states of up to 15 I O points Selects a soak step Is a function key labeled from F 1 to F8 its action depends on the menu displayed on the screen Toggles between function key menus when a plus appears to the right of the function key line also inputs a space in text Provides for each SF subroutine a peak elapsed time that is the time from the SF subroutine being scheduled until the process completes execution n 1 1023 Square Root takes the square root of a positive integer and stores the result in the B location of memory The integer retains its original value Returns the square root of X in a math expression Source Toggle toggles between sources in BLOCK operations and AU X 84 EEPROM programming Single Scan initiates a single scan of the ladder program or configures the task scan table Scan Synchronization Inhibit controls synchronization of active with standby unit in hot backup configuration Sequential Shift Register shifts data in a register one location each time the statement is executed Vaca
39. TMRF TMR1MS TMR 1S TMRS 16 Glossary Reverses the order of the bytes in ASCII format Swaps the active and standby roles of CPU units in a hot backup system AUX 82 Swaps the active and standby roles of dual media RBCs on the selected base Synonym creates or modifies synonyms or selects synonym data Sets PROFIBUS DP communications mode to SYNCHRONOUS Validates RLL instructions and displays errors found Not all controllers support this function Synonym Toggle toggles display of synonyms on or off for displayed ladder rungs or I O points In both on line and off line modes the information is obtained from the currently selected program on the disk when synonym display is on In the replace table it toggles the copying of synonyms Designates temporary cleared by controller memory locations used in SF programming Moves from field to field in the synonym editor Tableto Table AND ANDs the corresponding bits in two tables and places the results in a third specified table Returns tangent of X in a math expression RLL Task box allows you to divide the RLL program into a normal task synchronized with the I O update and a cyclic task executed on a timed interrupt basis asynchronous to the I O update Timer or Counter selects timer counter and other related box types Timer Counter Current is the current value for a counter or timer Time Compare compares the time of the real time clock with the values con
40. are not found in the paging field then N None is the default Refer to Section 9 3 Entering Comments for more details on formatting comments The paging field and the type and ID field are automatically converted to upper case when they are imported Table 9 1 Comment Fields Field Description E em type Comment typeandID ID 1 Paging N B or O 3 18 a Comment text lines Table 9 2 describes the fields used in the synonym text file to identify and separate various parts of the data Refer to Section 9 4 Preparing to Enter Synonyms and or Descriptors for more information about synonym fields The type and ID field is automatically converted to upper case when it is imported Table 9 2 Synonym Fields Maxmumsi Description 48 Descriptor text lines TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Documenting Programs 921 Importing and Exporting Synonyms and Comments continued Rules for Importing Importing synonyms or comments loads all the synonyms or comments of a Synonyms and text file into the currently selected program according to the following rules Comments e Synonyms or comments not in the text file but in the selected program remain unchanged in the selected program e Synonyms or comments that are in both the text file and the selected program are overwritten in the selected program e Synonyms or comments in the text file but not in the selected program are added to t
41. displayed type in the parameters Use the arrow keys to move from field to field in the box If you decide not to complete an entry press ABORT F1 After completing the entry press Retum to write the box to the network When a network is complete press ENTER F8 Box Locations Figure 7 9 shows locations for multiple input and large boxes As shown below you can have no more than two contacts per input rung tothe multiple input and large boxes Small Multiple Input Box Large Box All multiple input and large boxes must start at this position 545 NETDATA ABORT F1 F2 VI F3 F4 F5 BOX F6 RI I F7 ENTER F8 Figure 7 9 Multiple Inputand Large Box Locations Conecting Entries You can correct entries by using Back Space to delete previous characters or you can keep typing until the field overflows and resets 7 10 Using TISOFT for Discrete Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 7 5 Entering Editing Program Elements for Extended Rungs To enter edit an element contact coil or box that extends beyond column 12 of the display you can either position the cursor in the output column and select an input contact or box or use the insert mode Complete the following steps to access the insert mode 1 Press EDIT F2 2 Press the INS hard key or press the SPACEBAR then press INSERT F8 Yo
42. enter the range of the SF programs subroutines that you want deleted and press Return For details on using Block functions see Chapter 13 of this manual TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming 8 25 8 12 Creating Documentation at Program Entry Accessing the Complete documentation of your programs can be created from the Documentation Documentation menus DOCUM F4 at the main ladder display menu For Editors your convenience TISOFT also provides the option of adding or editing documentation for your program whilein the Show and Edit menus Invoking the To create or edit a synonym or descriptor in S memory press Ctrl L Synonym Editor Synonyms are not displayed in S memory The synonym editor can be accessed throughout TI SOFT See Chapter 9 for details on using the synonym editor Invoking Comment To enter comments for your S memory programs while in an S memory Screen directory press the keys as listed below 1 Enter the desired Loop Alarm SF program or SF subroutine type and identifier for example LOOPO01 SF SU B001 at the prompt in the directory 2 Press SHOW F2 3 Press COMMNT FT Figure 8 9 shows the comment display for Show or Edit or 1 After selecting SHOW F2 press EDIT F2 2 Then press COMMNT F7 8 26 Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual LOOP 10 This is a sample comment Create a comment by keying in the desired text and pres
43. may be integer or real Loop Low Low Limit Alarm may be integer or real TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual LMN MCR LMN LMNA LMX LN X Local CR LOCK LODA LOG X LOOP LPETn LPV LPVA LPVH LPVL LRCA LRFA LRSA LRSF LRSN LSP LSPH LSPL LTD LTI LTS LVF LVFA LYDA M MATH MCAT MCR TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Loop Output may be integer or real Loop Output Address Loop Bias may be integer or real Returns natural logarithm of X in a math expression Is a type of CR that resides on the 560 CPU board Designates that loop card operating mode will follow discrete CPU mode a box that allows you to coordinate access to resources Loop Orange Deviation Alarm may be integer or real Returns the common logarithm of X in a math expression Accesses loop directory for using loop functions or selects loop data to ac on provides for each loop a peak elapsed time that is the time from the loop being scheduled until the process completes execution n 1 64 Loop Process Variable may be integer or real Loop Process Variable Address High Limit for Loop Process Variable must bereal Low Limit for Loop Process Variable must be real Loop Rate of Change Alarm Limit must be real Loop Ramp Soak Flag Address Loop Remote Sepoint Address Loop Ramp Soak Flags must be an integer Loop Ramp Soak Step Number must be an integer Loop Setpoint may be integer or real High Limit for Loop Sepoint
44. start up screen Refer to Chapter 2 for instructions on using these options To select an H1 network node name you need to press ONLINE F4 Siemens TISOFT 2 PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE SIMATIC R 505 FAMILY RELEASE 6 3 ORDER NUMBER PC505 6263 SOFTWARE PART NUMBER 2587783 0032 Copyright C 1998 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc All Rights Reserved WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law PRESS ALT H FOR HELP ANYWHERE WITHIN TISOFT NETDATA EXIT F1 HINTS F2 ONLINE F4 COLOR F6 PGMS F7 OFFLINE F8 Figure G 9 TISOFTStart up Screen TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFT with H1 Communications G 21 Steps for Installing and Configuring the CP1413 Module continued Step 19 Select the H1 Network Node Names The H1 Network Names screen appears as in Figure G 10 You can then select a node name These are the node names you configured using the COML 1413 TF software prior to rebooting Using the arrow keys select an H1 network node name and press ENTER F8 or Return Or Enter TI SOFT will go online Siemens H1 NETWORK NAMES NEW 1 ENTER F8 ABORT F1 PAGE F5 Figure G 10 H1 Network Names Screen NOTE The C
45. you may receive the message PROFIBUS DP IS STOPPED CONTINUE TO PLC RUN MODE Select either YES or NO TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using Status Functions 10 19 Changing Contoller Modes continued OPR ST F6 allows the changing of PROFIBUS DP communications mode OPE RATE ST OP SYNTAX F8 runs a syntax check on ladder memory L memory Changing Loop To select loop operating mode position the cursor in the Loops field You Mode then have the following options available PGM F2 places the loop card in PROGRAM mode and control blocks are neither running nor being queued for running NOTE Your loop card cannot bein PROGRAM mode while the discrete CPU isin RUN mode HALT F3 places the loop card in HOLD mode enabled control blocks are being queued to run but are not running Upon returning to RUN mode execution resumes where it was halted RUN F4 places the loop card in the RUN mode enabled control blocks are being queued and are running When you elect to goto RUN mode you may receive the message PROFIBUS DP IS STOPPED CONTINUE TO PLC RUN MODE Select either YES or NO OPR ST F6 allows the changing of PROFIBUS DP communications mode OPERATE ST OP SYNTAX F8 runs a syntax check on ladder memory L memory The loop mode can either follow that of the discrete CPU or bein RUN mode independent of the ladder program To invoke this option place the cursor in the LOCKED or UNLOCKED field Your function keys are
46. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 EXIT F1 NEXT F2 Figure 5 7 Find I O Point Prompt e fthel O Point is not found an ELEMENT NOT FOUND message displays e fonly one or the last I O Point is found the location CHAN BASE and SLOT and a DONE message displays e If morethan onel O Point is found the location CHAN BASE and SLOT and aMORE message displays Press NEXT F2 to display the next location e TISOFT searches both Series 505 and PROFIBUS DP 1 0 5 14 Configuring Series 505 I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 Chapter 6 Configunng PROFIBUS DP I O Introduction 0 cece eee eee eee Getting Ready enn nn 6 2 a Il rum 6 3 Configuring I O Modules in COM PRORHBUS seeseen nn nn n nnn Importing Configuration Data from COM PROHBUS into TISOFT Usno Merne cob baasditbdctad dido quae 1 ORO RUE RIA QR db da ER o db NUN E ed 6 6 Assigning or Modifying I O Addresses ssssssseeseee n 6 7 Loading a PRORBUS DP I O Configuration to the Contoller VO Configuration Guidelines ssssssssssseeeeeeen em m USING Update coi cie IERI dicic ba eoe ie lica delta cR HERZ ECRIRE ZR G Modifying an Existing I O Configuration sseeeeennnnn nn n nnn n nnn VO Configuration Guidelines e rrsieririsiari irait renin rae emm mm Adding or Deleting Slaves 0 cc cece ccna Modifying an I O Address
47. 00 06 01 00 03 lt from Step 7 INT 12 4 from Step 4 03EOH 4 from Step 1 sinec data startup L DB TheNETINST utility creates the directory Y sinec on the selected hard drive This directory holds the associated configuration files and the drivers needed to communicate over the H1 network You can change these settings later by running C SINEC BIN NETINST EXE G 6 TISO FT with H1 Communications TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Step 9 Ensure That the DRAM Address Does Not Conflict NOTE You can obtain additional information about running these utilities by consulting the Software Installation section of the SINEC TF NET1413 MS DOS Windows Manual If Configuration Fails f the default configuration operates incorrectly verify that the dual port RAM address or the AT bus interrupt is correct for the host computer Dual Port RAM DPRAM Address This parameter specifies an area of high memory that will be used by the CP1413 It is possible that this area of memory is already in use by another piece of hardware in the system Network cards and SCSI controllers often require an area of high memory check them for conflict with the CP 1413 If it is not possible to change the address of a conflicting card then you will have to change the dual port RAM address of the CP 1413 to OE 0000H and power cycle your computer Run C sinec bin netinst exe to re configure your system AT
48. 11 15 PROHBUS DP Communications Mode Screen The keys in Figure 11 15 are defined below EXIT F1 Allows you to return to the main auxiliary AUX screen e OPER F2 Puts PROFIBUS DP communications in OPERATE mode unless master is in FAULT state e STOP F3 Puts PROFIBUS DP communications in STOP mode unless master is in FAULT state e SYNC F5 Allows you to synchronize PROFIBUS DP communications to RLL scan This option can only be selected when PROFIBUS DP mode is set to STOP mode e ASYNC F6 Specifies that PROFIBUS DP communications shall not be synchronized to RLL scan This option can only be selected when PROFIBUS DP mode is set to STOP mode 11 32 Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Chapter 12 Using Global Search and Replace Using Global Search and Replace for One Element Search and Replace Functions 0 cece ect en Invoking Search and Replace Menu ssssssssseeeee eee ee Completing the Prompt Fields ssssssssssssssses nnns Replacing ar Element 22 2 isione eee eae Des e TY Meet Pe e alae ae Using a Global Search and Replace Table seeeeeser nnn nn nnn n nn Invoking the Table Display i er eere tree race d Ice darc bees Copying Comments and Synonyms iissssssssssssses nnns Cleaning a Table i uere DR ee en tae EH en EO ROI Ras ie ein Cleaning a Location oops beris p eer euer ERE ERE RR a HR wha we ECT Ra OG a
49. 1413 card the memory manager cannot have access to the region of memory reserved for the CP 1413 Use an ASCII text editor to install the memory manager of your choice in your CONFIG SYS Figure G 3 shows the appropriate instruction for installing CEMM QEMM DOS 5 x EMM386 or DOS 6 x MEMMAKER in that order The memory exclusion command for each line is represented by the bolded text rem Compaq DOS 5 0 device c dos cemm exe 384 noems romcompress x d000 dfff rem Quarterdeck expanded memory manager device c NqemmNqemm386 sys ram frame none exclude d000 dfff rem EMM386 from DOS 6 0 device c dos emm386 exe noems x d000 dfff Figure G 3 Three Memory Manager Setup Examples NOTE After you modify the CONFIG SYS filetoinstall the memory manager power cyde the system to verify that it will boot up correctly Configure your extended memory manager if applicable to excludethe DRAM address range of the CP 1413 For example in your CONFIG SYS file use DEVICE MM 386 E XE X D000 DF FF Refer to your memory manager s manual for additional information Select a uniquelocal Ethernet address e g 080006010003 that is not already in use on your H1 network a WARNING Using the same Ethernet H1 network address more than once on the same H1 network can cause unpredictable controller behavior Unpredictable controller behavior could cause death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Ensure that y
50. 1924 Note Not all data is available from all controllers 575 NETDATA PG Figure 11 6 Memory Availability AUX Function Screen EXIT F1 Use AU X 29 to obtain the operational status from the controller To invoke the operation type in 29 at the AU X menu prompt and press Return The operational status is then displayed in the format shown in Figure 11 7 565 OPERATIONAL STATUS COMMUNICATIONS P1 TBP SCAN 5MSECS VARIABLE KEY UNLOCKED MODE PROGRAM BAUD RATE 19200 BATTERY GOOD DOWNLOAD OFF PROGRAM IN RAM SF LOOP MODE PROGRAM SF LOOP FOLLOWS PLC TO PROGRAM MODE FATAL ERROR LOOP FATAL ERROR NON FATAL ERROR LOOP NON FATAL ERROR NONE NONE NONE NONE 565 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 Figure 11 7 Operational Status Display TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 11 8 Comparing Controller Program to Disk AUX 17 Invoking the Verification Menu AUX 17 Making Entries Use AUX 17 to compare the data on disk to that in the controller To initiate the operation type in 17 at the AUX menu prompt and press Return You recei ve a display Figure 11 8 for listing the types of memory to compare The memory configuration on disk and the controller must match to access this function VERIFICATION FUNCTION VERIFY MEMORY STATUS MISMATCHED LOCATIONS NO LADDER NETWORKS NO FORCED WORD I O NO FORCED DISCRETE I O NO FORCED CONTROL RELAYS NO SEQUENCER SCAN TIME NO LOOPS NO ANA
51. 9 17 etc Addresses not starting on an eight point boundary are changed to do so when you write the values e TISOFT does not flag duplicate I O points To add or delete slaves or modules you must return to COM PROFIBUS Modify your configuration file as appropriate and export it again See Section 6 2 Follow the procedure outlined in Section 6 3 toimport the new information by running Merge Next execute U pdate Section 6 4 where you are prompted to supply any necessary new I O addresses and out of date addresses are automatically corrected If you only wish to modify an I O address or change a slave s enable disable status you can do so by using Edit The Edit function can be accessed from either the on line Figure 6 8 or off line Figure 6 9 PROFIBUS DP Slave Configuration screen FROM PLC STOP 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 SHOW F2 READDK F3 READPC F5 EDIT F7 UPDATE F8 Figure 6 8 On Line PROHBUS DP Slave Configuration Screen FROM RAM 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 SHOW F2 READRM F3 EDIT F7 Figure 6 9 Off Line PROABUS DP Slave Configuration Screen TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring PROFIBUS DP O 611 Modifying an Existing I O Configuration continued Using On Line Edit The on line Edit screen gives you the option of reading from and writing to either the controller or the selected program on disk See Figure 6 10 PROFIBUS DP I O MODULE DEFINITION FOR SLAVE 15 1 0 NUMBER OF BIT AND WORD
52. DOS or 3 1 8 Mbytes 32 Kbytes 5 Mbytes TCP Module Configuration tool I PSET Not needed FMS CP 5412 A2 Card configuration s w DOS or 3 1 1 Mbytes 64 Kbytes 5 Mbytes FMS CP COM5434 Configurator Windows 95 8 Mbytes 3 5 Mbytes 1Requirements may differ depending on the version you choose The COM 5434 Configurator software for the 505 CP 5434 F MS module requires a 486 or greater processor 1 2 Installing TISO FTRelea se 6 3 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Expanded Memory TISOFT requires the use of expanded memory when large programs are in DOS used off line Follow these steps to check your computer memory 1 To determine if your PC has expanded memory type MEM at the DOS prompt and press Return f expanded memory EMS is not listed your PC does not have it To obtain expanded memory type one of the following groups of two line commands in the C CONFIG SYS file DEVICE C WINDOWS HIMEM SYS DEVICE C WINDOWS EMM386 EXE ON or DEVICE C DOS HIMEM SYS DEVICE C DOS EMM386 EXE ON Reboot your PC and repeat the MEM command to confirm that expanded memory is now listed Expanded Memory TISOFT requires the use of expanded memory when large programs are in Windows 95 used off line After installing TISOFT as described in section 1 4 use the following procedure to determine if your PC has expanded memory If necessary refer to pages 1 8 and 1 9 for the procedures on creating a s
53. K memory table 1 Press READ F7 The current values of the locations on the screen are read and displayed Any values you have modified on the screen but have not written are reset to their original value TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFT for Discrete Programming 7 21 Using the V K Memory Editor continued A WARNNG O TISOFT allows modification of V and K memory while the controller is in RUN mode However entries made to the program in RUN mode immediately affect the execution of the program and could cause unexpected process operation Unexpected process operation could cause death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Only qualified personnel who are authorized to perform system level operations and are knowledgeable in safety application and limitations should enter or modify a program with the controller in RUN mode Changing Memory To write a new value to a memory location complete the following steps Values beginning from the V K memory table 1 Press FIND F2 2 Typein the desired V or K address at the prompt 3 Press Return 4 Using the Retum or arrow keys position the cursor on the desired address in the new table display 5 Typein thedesired valuefor the location After completing inputs on the display press WRITE F8 to save the changes you made to the values Saving a Numeric Before making any numeric format changes that you
54. Kr dre eg Checking Memory Availability Selecting Application 575 sssseesseeeen nnn Chapter5 Configuring Series 505 I O 5 1 52 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 Reading an I O Configuration ssssseen eer Displaying the Configuration from RAM ssssssseee eene 5 2 Displaying the Configuration from Disk or Controller 0 000 0 cece eee 5 4 Displaying the Configuration from a Base sssssssssee 5 6 Configuring I O ssssssssssssse ennemi a a ar n a n Controller Functionality in Configuration VO Configuration Guidelines iiiki cece I e Configuration Procedure ssssssssssssssssss sese n Saving the Configura tiori eie deett teet ie P ace der ded vp oak bade bae Changing I O Configuration isses nnnm ms sena Clearing a Base I O Display sssssssssssses III n nnn Clearing a Base I O Configuration On Line Clearing a Base I O Configuration Off Line Deleting a Channel 560 565 Only cece ccc cece m Showing Individual I O Configuration Points cceeeeeeee eee nm nmn Showing I O Configuration Chart Display 0 cece ccc 5 12 Displaying Synonyms je a eee cee oe ot dd Recker er Kg 5 12 Comparing Controller and Base Configuration ssscccceeeeeeeeeeeeee eens Using the Compare Function 00 ccc eem rr 5 13 Entering the Compare aie viata ces ele ee Bae ua FR ex Pa ea ee ox bie 5 13 Finding I O Point Locations
55. On Line Password Operations There are nine on line operational modes for password The following paragraphs describe on line password operational modes and on line disk password operations On Line Password All on line password operational modes are summarized in Table H 1 The Operational Modes following numbered paragraphs detail the corresponding mode number information found in Table H 1 Model Ifthe controller and the selected program on disk do not havea password you will not be prompted for a password AU X 60 Save All and AUX 90 Load All functions will be allowed Check to make sure that the selected program on disk has TI SOFT 5 0 or greater format No password will be written to the selected program on disk or to the controller Mode2 Ifthe selected program on disk has a password and you enter a password for the selected program on disk at the on line prompt you will be able to use the AUX 60 Save All and the Aux 90 Load All functions If you choose to use Aux 90 the disk password is written to the controller if the controller supports password If you decide to use Aux 60 the password of the selected program on disk is retained You will also have full access to the controller and the selected program on disk Mode 3 Ifthe selected program on disk has a password and you do not enter a password for the selected program on disk at the on line prompt you will not be allowed to use the AUX 60 Save All function You w
56. Program Files for details of using the pop up file selection window 1 Press DOCUM F4 2 Press COM F2 to select comments or SYN F3 to select synonyms The synonym prompt line shown in Figure 9 15 appears The comment prompt line is similar to the synonym prompt line 3 Ensure that the delimiters are set up Refer to the following paragraphs in this section Setup Procedure Setting Field Delimiter Selecting Quotes Around Data and Selecting the E nd of Record Character 4 Press IMPORT F2 or EXPORT F3 5 Select a filename Refer to Section 2 2 Managing Program Files SYNONYM Y000001 545 LOADER1 EXIT F1 IMPORT F2 EXPORT F3 SETUP F5 RECOVR F8 Figure 9 15 Synonym Prompt Line The function keys in Figure 9 15 are summarized as follows e EXIT F1 or Esc Press F 1 or Esc to return to the main documentation screen e MPORT F2 Press F2 to import synonyms or comments from a text file e EXPORT F3 Press F3 to export synonyms or comments to a text file e SETUP F5 Press F5 to set parameters for import and export of synonyms and comments e RECOVR F8 Press F8 to recover space used by synonyms or comments by rebuilding the synonym or comment files 9 20 Documenting Programs TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Comment Fields Synonym Fields Table 9 1 describes the fields used in the comment text file to identify and separate various parts of the data If B Before or O Odd
57. Return TheTISOFT Start up Screen is displayed 4 Atthe prompt ENTER NEW PROGRAM NAME typein the name of the program to be converted 5 Press Return When the conversion is complete with no errors the following message is displayed FILE CONVERSION COMPLETE TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Converting Program Files C 3 Appendix D Using TISOFT with TISIAR PCS Users of SIMATIC TISTAR PCS can access TISOFT both off line and on line as described in this appendix Accessing TISOFT You can access TISOFT off line only when TISTAR Model 20 or Model 70 is Off Line not in the Operate State or when there is no communication between the DEU and the Operator Station If you select on line instead you will be prompted for a secondary name to connect to At the Start up Screen Figure D 1 press OFFLINE F8 Siemens TISOFT 2 PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE SIMATIC R 505 FAMILY RELEASE 6 3 ORDER NUMBER PC505 6263 SOFTWARE PART NUMBER 2587783 0032 Copyright C 1998 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc All Rights Reserved WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law PRESS ALT H FOR HELP ANYWHERE WITHIN TISOFT NETDATA EXIT F1 HINTS F2 ONLINE F4 CO
58. TIWAY I and UNILINK Host Adapters 0 cece cece nne Setting up the TIWAY Host Adapter Card ssssssseseee en TISOFTOn Line sess Selecting Secondary with TWAY I Host Adapter eseeeeennnn n n nn n Checking UNILINK Host Adapter Configuration een nnn Select Secondary with UNILINK Host Adapter or TIWAY Host Adapter Card Configuring UNILINK Host Adapter Contents Appendix F Setting Cable PINOUUS 2c d aera cete dot exe dote cea nent ueque eM INE a NS Using TIDIA bes ice 2 x Setting Appendix G G 1 Hardware and Software Requirements ccccc cece cece nnn G 2 Steps for Installing and Configuring the CP1413 Module eese Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 G 3 Toubleshooting the H1 Network eeeeee nnn nsn Tro bleshootinig ore eee rt reete ma OE UR CC EE d eai d RR ped nena cet For Expert Use Only Eror CodeS ccc cece cence en Appendix H H 1 OVOIVIOW icis tie sais dia uRRFUReRREEEMEE EE NERO NU ae ORG RUNDE wh ae ee A Re ee Disable Disable Control Passwo H 2 Password Selection and Access Level sse nennen rrr Off Line Password Selection and AccessLlevel sssessen eee een ens On Line Password Selection and Accesslevel ss
59. Too Complex Error Compiling aaannn INSTxxx Invalid Control BIk Size Error Compiling aaannn INSTxxx Invalid Instruction Error Compiling aaannn INSTxxx Invalid Operation in EXP Error Compiling aaannn INSTxxx Invalid SFSUB Number Error Compiling aaannn INSTxxx Invalid Variable Address Error Compiling aaannn INSTxxx Max IF Nesting Exceeded Error Compiling aaannn INSTxxx Max Label Count Exceeded Error Compiling aaannn INSTxxx Syntax Error Error Compiling aaannn LABEL xxx Undefined Label Error Creating File Error Deleting from Disk Error Detected during Runtime Edit Recommend Syntax Check B 8 TISOFT Messages Aa compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB a duplicate label definition was ound When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB the expression was too complex When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB the control block size was invalid in S memory When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB the referenced statement was invalid in a compiled SF program or subroutine When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB an expression contained an invalid operation When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB a reference to an invalid SFSUB number was encountered When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB an undefined or invalid variable address was encountered Either the address is misformed out of range or specifies a variable that is invalid in the context of its use When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB the maximum IF nesting was exceed
60. Used oce i oor dedica do c iot aca acd cid RO dcc iN Using PC TIWAY AdapterCard ssssssssssseeee eee eee Using HIINeWOIK 3 rati ne cic kac Ie RR Re cc eb ee ed le en ee Rn Using TCP Communications ssssssse mes Using FMS Communications ssssssse mm Displaying the Start up Screen ssssssssssssssseeeee eene Starting TISOFT In WINDOWS ceded bet tree eed knee RP wb ebore ie bau bese Configuring ColorOption isssssssssseee nnnm Configurnng Colors unxit eee em e ES ed a IH eB re Fa RA TO Accessing ColorOption arrian eaeh eee ees Selecting TISOFTCOIOIS o Lee s iiaii eaaa aah Bele iaa naera bie A ec dui a d Assigning ColorSelections 00 eee em mer Managing Program Files ccccccccee cece e eee eee eee eee eee rn nn Basic Features of the PGMS System 0 6 cee eee Selecting a DIVE odes doit eade DRY ERG ede Roe ue dd dad dab dd Creating a New Directory ssssssssssssssses esee Removirig a DIRECTONY oce Feci a Feb e gx bee ere ue a e ae a ec Contents iii 2 3 2 4 2 5 Selecting a De Ctoly a cre ex RAE TOR CHERRERRRERERERRE ER laa gees Fats ene ata Formatting a Floppy DISK eise Panacea ee aw EY VE E Veh pac edat d Creating a New Program Name sssssssssssssss sens Selectung a PIOgratit 1i cessus eter eme sured ERR ERR ies deed eed wena doe dd Deleting a Program e b etek je Lad tec IE EIE ek eed Renaming a PIOgtdtn ive eeve
61. User Manual TISOFT requires 540K bytes of available system memory conventional RAM memory in the computer in order to be executed In addition for off line operation and on line operations such as Block Put Controller to Disk and Configure Memory Write to Disk additional system memory is needed based on the amount of ladder memory configured For each 4K bytes of ladder memory configured above 16K bytes 4K bytes of system memory must be available To accommodate larger L memory configurations increase available RAM by removing unnecessary device drivers resident utility programs etc See Section 1 1 for more information about TISOFT s system memory requirements Check controller manual for allowed memory sizes Check controller manual for allowed memory sizes Check controller manual for allowed memory sizes Thelist of applications is required for operation a represents a list of application IDs The requested mode change has been denied by this list of applications a represents a list of application IDs This message indicates that the requested write operation completed successfully either writing the number of Task Codes per Scan tothe PLC AUX 16 or writing V K memory values An application has tried to assign an I O slot that is already assigned to another application a represents a list of application IDs An element has been used in the output column which must be the only output in the rung Remove th
62. Using the Prompt Line sssssssseeeeee nae Updatesand Messages iiias cused beber Prage bond Oed ea kha bhi Checking Numeric Format s iisas aragian aaan E a E E AGRA Incrementing Decrementing Element Addresses Using Single SCAN 1 cmo on pa ted nE aa RPA REOR OUR RC amiss a REOR SOR eg 10 11 Reading Changing Element Status 0cccee cece eee sense een eee eeeeeeeneeeed Reading Status we cet ti eda dk p to oe ek a EA Roe TR ER Writing Values secet ie eee e edad Gaede ee EE RR BR eee 10 12 Forcing Elements 255555446653 odo EROR GUCROCR R RCROACR GRO CR 806 8 RC XAR CERCA REOR 0 Forcing an Element 5 eR eka Ra Red Pe Puck dece kd Einding a Forced Element sos cese retener EIC sake hr PRU Ree FERE E REX dg 10 13 Unfoicing Elements cc cece eee UNTORE ING an Element 22k aiaia oe Blu Mek RU e Eo WER Reg a A LR Unforcing AllElements sssssssseeeeeee A fh 10 14 Changing Controller Modes eee H mmm mmn Toggling from Program to Run ssssssssseeee eee s Changing LadderMode se eerte e d e ns Changing Loop Mode siccchsictnecomn detach iare mans E E SUR RR gee opa cse Ra ee 10 15 Displaying Both Ladders and Chart cccccceee cece eee nnn nnn nnn nn Displaying Ladders with a Chart 0 ccc eee EE EE Saving a Selection Table scere Ree eee eee A bei Loading a Selection Table erre rrr ere RR eere HERE HC eda eh eae Chapterll Executing Contoller Auxiliary Functions 11 1 Acces
63. V flags to manual auto cascade mode for a loop or to enable disable for an alarm has no effect The control block must be enabled for the V flags to be active To enable or disable a control block from a directory complete the following steps 1 Select the control block by keying in the element and identifier and pressi ng Return or using the arrow keys to position the cursor on the desired loop alarm etc in the directory display 2 Press EN DIS F4 or DIS CP F4 3 Then press ENABLE F2 if you want to enable the control block or press DISABL F3 if you want to disable the control block To enable or disable a control block from a table display complete the following steps 1 Press EN DIS F8 or DIS CP F8 2 Then press ENABLE F2 if you want to enable the control block or press DISABL F3 if you want to disable the control block 8 30 Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 8 15 Compiling SF Programs Subroutines Why Choose When compiled mode is selected if your controller model supports compiled Compiled Mode mode the SF program or subroutine is translated to the native instruction for an SF Program set of the CPU s microprocessor The compiled code is then executed or Subroutine whenever the SF program or subroutine is scheduled for execution The advantages of compiled execution include the following e Compiled mode provides a significant improvement in execution speed e
64. an element usage listing press Ctrl U Type in the desired starting Hement Usage address at the prompt and press Return Figure 7 19 shows an example table Listing ROW 1 COL 1 NETWORK STARTING ADDRESS 1 x1 X5 X7 LADDER ELEMENT USAGE TABLE 9876543210 9876543210 X000000 X000080 X000010 X000090 X000020 X000100 X000030 X000110 X000070 X000150 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 FIND F2 Figure 7 19 Ladder Element Usage Table Reading the Listing Elements are shown on the display in increments of 10 CO C10 C20 etc Usage of the points between is shown in the adjacent column from 0 through 9 C1 under 1 C2 under 2 etc You receive a display showing use of the selected elements according to the following legend Blank Point does not exist Dot Point is not used in the program Asterisk Point used in program Dash Point not listed in program but is used within a range Right Bracket Indicates beginning of a range Left Bracket Indicates end of a range l Indicates point used as a beginning range and as an ending range at another location in the program TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Discrete Programming 7 17 7 10 Creating Documentation at Program Entry Accessing the Documentation Editors Documenting Your Program Complete documentation of your programs title comments synonyms and des
65. as shown in Figure 1 9 Figure 1 9 also shows some of the frequently used buttons You can select full screen display of TI SOF T which provides an easier to read display and a faster display update for example in status mode by clicking the Full Screen button shown To return to the Window view press Lart Return This key sequence toggles between full screen view and Window view The Properties button provides another way to access the TISOFT Properties dialog described on page 1 9 TISOFT Ii Ti505 PCSRT Minimize i Maximize Restore Siemens Properties TISOFT 2 PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE SIMATIC R 505 FAMILY RELEASE 6 3 Full screen display ORDER NUMBER PC505 6263 SOFTWARE PART NUMBER 2587783 0032 Copyright C 1998 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc All Rights Reserved WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law PRESS ALT H FOR HELP ANYWHERE WITHIN TISOFT NETDATA EXIT F1 HINTS F2 ONLINE F4 COLOR F6 PGMS F7 OFFLINE F8 Figure 1 9 TISOFTRunning in Windows 1 12 Installing TISO FT Release 6 3 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5
66. box instruction to execute in lineif the SF program or subroutine has been compiled When power flow is on for an in line SFPGM or SFSUB box instruction the box executes immediately as part of the ladder scan The result of the box s execution is available to the next element of the current rung In ladder edit accesses a menu that allows rows columns elements or rungs to be inserted for text data accesses character insert mode It is a hard key TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Glossary 7 INSERT LLLA INSERT INSLN INSMOD INSST INSTR INT JMP JMPE LABEL LACK LADB LADDER LBL LCF LCFH LCFL LDA LDC LEAD LAG LERR LHA LHHA LIMIT LKC LKD LLA LLLA 8 Glossary In ladder edit accesses a menu that allows rows columns elements or empty rungs to be inserted In Print Setup it inserts a print control sequence number Insert Lineinserts a line abovethe line or R S step on which the cursor is placed Insert Mode automatically inserts elements until you exit the edit operation or press the INSMOD key again Insert Statement inserts a statement in an SF program or subroutine Instruction selects SF instruction for find or block operations Integer is an unsigned decimal number from 0 to 65535 Any entry above the 65535 range checks to 65535 Also a relational contact parameter indicating a signed integer compare Draws a vertical line down from the bottom left edge of the cursor a hard key J
67. chart to a selected directory Write Disk sends the displayed memory configuration or O Module Definition tothe current program it then reads back what it sent and displays it on the screen In print it writes set up or selection parameters to disk After editing it saves off line modifications made to the program in RAM tothe currently selected program on disk Saves the changes on the screen when in V K memory editor In R S editor it saves the modified table In AUX 14 saves Watchdog timeout value in AUX 16 saves Task Code values in AUX 18 saves modified time of day in AUX 19 saves controller scan time values Write PLC sends the displayed I O Module Definition for the selected base or memory configuration to the controller It then reads back what it sent and displays it on the screen Available on line only Write RAM sends the displayed memory configuration or O Module Definition to the programming device RAM It then reads back what it sent and displays it on the screen Available off line only Word Rotate rotates a four bit segment of a designated word Write Table saves the displayed Select table to the disk Word to Table places a duplicate of a word in the destination table at the address specified Word to Table AND compares each bit in a source word to corresponding bit of a designated word in a table and places results in a destination table Word to Table OR ORs the corresponding bits of a word with a des
68. conventional memory To purchase these items contact the vendor at the following address FTP Software Inc Phone 508 685 3300 100 Brickstone Square E mail info ftp com Andover MA 01810 Website http www ftp com NOTE Do not purchase the OnNet 32 Kernel package for Windows 95 or Windows NT The 32 bit version will not work with TISOFT Only the use of the PC TCP Kernel software will be described here Before you commence installation talk to your system administrator and obtain all prerequisite information about your network IP addresses etc The PC TCP Kernel software comes with an installation checklist that identifies all of the information you need be sure to fill it out before you start the installation Unless you have specialized configuration needs you can follow the Express Install procedure For installation instructions consult the documentation that comes with your FTP software NOTE The following pieces of information are always required and must be entered accurately the Internet IP address of your PC the subnet mask and the IP address of your routers if you use any on the network l 6 Using TISO FT with TC P IP TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Verify the Installation Optional Specify a Path to the Host Table File The FTP software documentation describes how system files may be modified when you install PC TCP Kernel Some of these modifications are performed automatically by the FTP software T
69. create comments which are free form entries of descriptive text up to 16 lines x 60 characters tied to selected elements Further you can add synonyms which are 3 line x 11 character tags for selected elements When more detail is required along with each synonym you can add a 3 line x 48 character descriptor When you press SYNTGL F5 to toggle synonym display on your ladder program the descriptors are not shown You can add comments synonyms and descriptors for the following elements in programs Y C END ENDC GTS SBR J MP J MPE MCR MCRE SKP LBL SSI You can only add synonyms and descriptors for the following elements in programs X 1O V word and bit of word K word and bit of word WX WY WIO word and bit of word TCP TCC TCW word and bit of word You can only add comments for the following elements in programs LOOP ALARM SF PGM SF SUB For identifying a particular program you have the option of adding a title that is up to 16 lines x 60 characters You can also add the date and version of the program Using Extemal TISOFT provides editing capabilities for all available methods of Editors documentation However if you use another package such as a word processor or a spreadsheet e g Microsoft Excel TISOFT allows you to export comment and synonym including descriptor documentation as files for editing Refer to Section 9 8 for details on how to export and import documentation file
70. definition of ranges for the Global Search and Replace operation this message indicates that the user has specified an illegal element type to replace another For example replacing an X address with a V address is not permitted This message indicates that the specified math expression in an SFSUB box parameter in RLL or in an SF statement in an SF Program Subroutine is syntactically incorrect Perhaps an operand has been omitted Theinstruction at the specified address is not permitted within a subroutine Investigate moving the instruction to the main body of the program Therequested instruction cannot be displayed at the current block cursor position A box may be too large for example a 3 row x 3 column CTR box will not fit on the last 2 rows of the rung Also multiple input boxes must be positioned with the upper left corner of the box in the first row third column from the left power rail Shut down the system and reboot This message is displayed during a BLOCK PUT operation which accesses the disk that is DK RAM DK PLC PLC DK A network address has been specified for a rung on the disk that exceeds the RLL memory configuration of the User Program Specify an address within the configured range of RLL Check the local remote switch setting on the NIM This message indicates that the specified math expression in an SFSUB box parameter in RLL or in an SF statement in an SF Program Subroutine contains an operator wh
71. end of the main body of the RLL program and before the beginning of the first subroutine SBR is never executed This message is displayed when you edit a LOOP or ALARM The value inthe DEVIATION ALARM YELLOW field must beless than or equal to the value in the ORANGE field TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Appendix C Converting Program Files Overview To convert programs created with TISOFT releases prior to Release 5 0 use the file conversion software included with TISOFT Release 6 3 Status charts are not converted and must be re entered for releases earlier than 4 0 The file conversion program can be used on the following TISOFT releases e 545 560 565 Release 3 1 and earlier e 560T 520 530 525 Release 2 3 and earlier e Series 505 Release 4 x NOTE When converting 560 565 Rel 2 3 and earlier files check the following item if you have analog alarm tables in your program If you have the setpoint field in the table programmed to S P value the conversion will set the Remote Setpoint field in Release 6 3 to NONE and Monitor Remote Setpoint field to NO TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Converting Program Files C 1 Conversion Procedure for Releases Earlier than 4 0 Use the following procedure to convert user programs from TI SOFT releases earlier than Release 4 0 NOTE After you have converted a program to Release 5 0 or later it is no longer compatible with earlier releases Change to the Source Directory that c
72. eser Invoking the SF Directory ssssssssseseee RH Displaying the SF Table oss serere emen eR Ree he a ey aa ra wan ee ea beet Finding SF Statements ep c teme Idea ches ee Rr E ERR erie act i e bas Finding Start End of a Program Editing SF Programs Subroutines 00ccccceee cece eee nnn nnne nnn Invoking Edit MOE iio boxed btc a ite dedere dde nde aa Using the SF Entries LISTScreen 2 cece cette mn Status of Control Blocks during Edits PowerMath Functional Support 0 ccc eese eee Entering SF Redefined pnns a ere ee Res wer Ri e e a R Roe PCR Entering SF Statements obs er e ena o ey RE kde reae wc e Kd Deleting SF Programy Subroutines 0066s Creating Documentation at Program Entry iiseeeeeennnn n nnn Accessing the Documentation Editors Invoking the Synonym Editor 6 ee E AARE EARE Invoking Comment Screen ssssssssssseee eee eere Keyirig in Comments iere eee RACER ee Ee a c ita ie ede kd Documenting Yo rProgr tm vcsoeseneteRrb caged eed web E RE PE RE Pe Fd Setting Controller Operating Mode iieeeeeeeenn n n nnn Changing Operating Mode ssssssssssssssess enn Changing LadderMode cece ene nnn Changing Eoop MOGOe sires dee ei eb e etre b e go Dt redde Eo eq na mamas Enabling Disabling Control Blocks seen nn n n n M n nn n n nn Determinihg Status uu ouk cebat eee RR e wok ARR aged ead deeded rede o
73. expressions for example MATH and IF statements integer real parameter fields In non PowerM ath controllers IMATH statements and integer only parameter fields do not support the E xponentiation Relational AND OR operators or functions Refer alsoto Table 8 2 In PowerMath controllers IMATH statements IIF statements and integer only parameter fields support all expression operators except exponentiation PowerMath also supports the absolute value ABS function Refer also to Table 8 2 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming 8 15 8 9 SF Instructions and Parameters Program Headers The following list gives the parameters for the SF program header and SF SUB header Header Field s Parameters SFPGM HEADER TITLE Opt 8 Alpha numeric characters CONTINUE ON ERROR Y es or N o ERROR STATUS ADDR Opt Y C Single discrete Element SFSUB HEADER PROGRAM TYPE CYCLE TIME SEC TITEE WY V 3 word Element range Normal Priority Cyclic Restricted Real Constant Cyclic programs only Opt 8 Alpha numeric characters SF Instructions Thefollowing list gives the parameters for the SF instructions Instruction Field s Parameters i Any free format text up to 1021 characters in length with each line having 66 characters BCDBIN BCD INPUT Int Element or Address E xpression BINARY RESULT Int Output Element or Address Expression BINBCD BINARY INPUT I
74. i542 nt EC E Back tecto er teo de rent een Pe ata 10 7 FING Function Keys ie ED tee et ods hice denice Beccles die wads 10 9 ladder Status Display 2ss cias s pee Ra RR RE GOL RRRUE Rr OR PATE ACT Ro cic 10 10 Element Status Displays ees ho rbxerpe Rte RE HR n RE SR lee ede i e ed tend 10 10 Single Scan Task Selection Pop Up Menu sssssse e 10 13 Status Editor Menu Chants cet boe Et pu dee Ede Cee dn Eee tar P dan 10 14 Making Entriesfor Ladderand ChartDisplay s is 10 21 Auxiliaty Functions Mernu 11 hie re E e CE e orwell bebe ER A eti 11 3 AUX 16 Programming Display soricei isdan eee 11 11 System Software Part Number s Display isssssssee ee 11 13 RBC Software Part Number s Display ssssssssse ete naee 11 14 PLC Card Failure ClassDisplay 0 0c cece eee 11 15 Memory Availability AUX Function Screen 66 eee 11 16 Operational Status DISDIAY aee ee ade dae Rc RE ede 11 16 Verification Function Menu ssssssseeeeeee eee eee 11 17 Scan Time Display for 545 Controller AUX19 0 ccc eee eee eens 11 19 RBC DiagnosticeMenu sssssssses eene 11 21 Syntax Check STEEN cvv esece tir eel Ree Ba D de Po e CE e dort s er n 11 23 Contents 11 12 11 13 11 14 1 15 12 1 12 2 12 3 13 1 13 2 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 D 1 E 1 E 2 E 3 G 1 G 2 G 3 G 4 G 5 G 6 G 7 G 8 G 9 G 10 H 1 H 2 Hle Selection Display iine ice ies OC e t E er ath e ed a Convert S Re
75. ico if that is the directory location of your installed TI SOFT or dick the Browse button to locate the Tisoft ico icon In the Files of type field click the list arrow and select All Files Select the Tisoft ico file and click on Open The file path appears in the Command line field 4 Click the Next gt button give the icon a name for example TISOFT and dick Finish 1 8 Installing TISO FT Release 6 3 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using PC Port 2 If your programming cable is connected to port 2 on your PC you can set TISOFT to communicate over port 2 by following these steps Click the right Select A mouse button to TISOFT icon B om access the pop up cm Object Edit Menu Send To Cut Copy Create Shortcut Delete Rename Select Properties Properties Figure 1 7 Accessing TISOFT Properties Dialog 1 Select the TISOFT icon with a single click 2 With the mouse cursor on the selected TI SOFT icon click the right mouse button to access the pop up menu and select Properties as shown in Figure 1 7 A TISOFT Properties dialog appears 3 Click the Program tab in the TI SOFT Properties dialog 4 Inthe Cmd line field enter the port number in the path For example the command line might read C TI TI505 BAT p2 5 Click on OK Now every time you double click on the TI SOFT shortcut icon TISOFT establishes communications automatically over port 2 6 Forothe
76. in your ladder display as given in Figure 10 6 Bit of word elements are displayed in the same manner The areas shaded in the examples are shown in reverse video on your display FORCED ON FORCED OFF Figure 10 6 Hement Status Displays 10 10 Using Status Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual For box instructions the information shown in Status Mode is updated for each type of box listed in Table 10 1 Table 10 1 Status Information for Box Instructions TMR CTR UDC P 123 4 Preset value C 12 3 Current value MCAT DCAT C 12 3 Current value P 34 5 Preset value DRUM Preset 1 Preset step value Highlighted line is current step Count step in highlighted line is current count of current step EVENT DRUM Preset 1 Preset step value CNT STP Drum counter preset values Highlighted line is current step Count step in highlighted lineis current count of current step MASK DRUM Preset 1 Preset step value CNT STP Drum Counter preset values Highlighted line is current step Count Step in highlighted line is current count of current step Highlighted bits in drum are bits in the masks that are set to one IMC SMC Highlighted line is the current pointer step value Relational Contacts Current values being compared lt gt lt 5 gt s lt gt If Compare is TRUE the contact is highlighted TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using Status Functions 10 11 10 8 Di
77. memory Control Block while the Special Function CPU LOOP card is in RUN mode Loop Variable Required ThePACKLOOP SF statement in an SFPGM or SFSUB requires at least one LOOP data type variable for example LPVH after the PARAMETERS prompt ID numbers and other element types are not allowed Loop xxx The requested LOOP control block has not been programmed and is not Not Programmed induded in the LOOP DIRECTORY An unprogrammed control block cannot be enabled or disabled To create the LOOP type in the desired ID number and press SHOW F 2 Low Must Be Less The specified valuein a LOW range field of a Loop Alarm Table must be than High less than the valuein the HIGH range field Also in the SCALE or UNSCALE SF statement of an SF Program Subroutine the LOW LIMIT must be less than the HIGH LIMIT Low Low Must Be Less The valuein the PV ALARMS LOW LOW field of a Loop Alarm Table than or Equal to Low must be smaller than or equal to the value in the PV ALARMS LOW field Maximum Number of During execution of the READ function in a Global Search and Replace Elements Exceeded operation this message indicates that more elements were read than can actually be displayed Select smaller blocks of search limits that will contain a maximum of 32 different element addresses If you are editing large free format SF statements in an SF Program Subroutine MATH IMATH IF PRINT comment this message indicates that the maximum statement si
78. moves characters on the right to fill the vacated space it is a hard key Del amp e Channel deletes all channels configured in RAM from the selected channel through the last channel TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual DELETE ENABLE DELETE DELLN DELNET DELST DESCR DIR DIRECT DISABL DISPSW DIS CP DIV DOCUM DOUBLE DRM DRUM DSC DSET DSP EDIT EDRUM ELEMNT ELSE ENABLE Deletes block title comment synonym printer control number program PROFIBUS DP configuration on disk off line or in the controller on line etc De de Line deletes the line on which the cursor is placed The location of the cursor on the line is not important The rest of the lines of text move up to fill the vacated line Delete Network deletes the network on the screen from a ladder program Delete Statement deletes a Special Function statement from an SF program or subroutine Descriptor positions cursor in descriptor field in synonym operation Accesses the sub window and function keys for performing directory operations Enables selection of cursor movement direction in Build Chart Disables a control block to be non functional Disables Password Protection in the controller Disable Compileallows you to mark an SFPGM or SFSUB to be enabled or disabled and compiled or non compiled interpreted Dividedivides a dividend in two memory locations A and A 1 by a divisor in memory location B The quotient and
79. must be within configured memory range STATUS BIT Y or C Element address 2 bits GOTO LABEL Int Constant range 0 65535 IF Free format math expression using integer or real Elements and Constants May be up to 74 tokens the smallest indivisible unit such as an operator or constant in length All Operators and Functions are valid Assignment operator is optional HF Free format math expression using integer Elements and Constants May be up to 74 tokens the smallest indivisible unit such as an operator or constant in length All Operators except exponentiation are valid Only ABS function is supported Assignment operator is optional PowerMath only IMATH Free format math expression using only integer Elements and Constants May be up to 74 tokens in length Operators not supported x lt gt lt lt gt gt AND OR MATH IF Functions are not supported In PowerM ath all Eig iios except exponentiation are valid only ABS function is supported Assignment operator is required LABEL LABEL Int Constant range 0 65535 LEAD LAG INPUT Int Real Element or Address Expression OUTPUT Int Real Output Element or Addr Expression LEAD TIME MIN Real Constant greater than zero Element or Value or Address Expression LAG TIME MIN Real Constant greater than zero Element or Value or Address Expression GAIN 96 96 Real Constant greater than zero Element or Value or Address
80. no cursor is displayed e PGMFRZ F2 places the controller in PROGRAM FREEZE mode All outputs are frozen in their current states However intelligent I O modules still can update outputs When you elect to goto PROGRAM FREEZE mode you receive the message GO TO PROGRAM MODE WITHOUT CLEARING OUTPUTS Select YES or NO e PGMOFF F3 places the controller in PROGRAM OFF mode Discrete outputs are set to zero and all word outputs are frozen H owever intelligent I O modules still can update outputs When you elect to goto PROGRAM OFF mode you receivethe message GO TO PROGRAM MODE Select either YES or NO A WARNING Intelligent I O modules e g the 386 ATM module the Programmable BASIC module the Servo Axis module or the High Speed Pulse Input module can update outputs even when the controller is in PROGRAM mode if your code permits If an intelligent I O module writes directly to an image register point its write takes precedence even when PGMFRZ PGMOFF is in effect This could cause unexpected control action resulting in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Do not write directly to output image register points from an intelligent I O module Instead write to a control relay or V memory location and have your RLL program copy this location to the output point e RUN F4 places the controller in RUN mode beginning execution of the ladder program When you elect to go to RUN mode
81. oen dete Ee RUE HER d Ee Rl a TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Setting up the TISOFTEnvironment 2 1 2 1 Configuring Color Option Configuring Colors You have the option of configuring the colors for your TISOFT screens You can select colors for background and foreground of the displays messages cursor and error messages The range and shades of your colors depend upon the graphics adapter card and monitor you have Colors discussed in this section are available with the CGA EGA and VGA display standards and a color monitor If your color selections are different check the documentation for your particular monitor and graphics adapter card Accessing Color To access the menu for configuring color on your TI SOFT displays press Option COLOR F6 at the Start up Screen You receive the color configuration menu as illustrated in Figure 2 1 Siemens TISOFT 2 PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE SIMATIC R 505 FAMILY RELEASE 6 3 ORDER NUMBER PC505 6263 SOFTWARE PART NUMBER 2587783 0032 Copyright C 1998 BG FG DISPLAY 1 F SAMPLE MESSAGE 1 B SAMPLE copyright law and international CURSOR 7 1 SAMPLE ttt gt ERRORMSG 7 4 SAMPLE distribution of this program f e civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law NETDATA EXIT F1 READDK F2 WRITDK F3 Figure 2 1 Color Configuration Menu 2 2 Setting up the TISO FT Environment TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Selecting TISOF
82. on the H 1 network Transceivers must be properly grounded Cables must be wired properly Cables must be placed far enough from adjacent electrical devices and wiring sothat they do not pick up electrical noise TISOFT with H1 Communications G 23 For Expert Use Detailed information for the use of programmers is described in the CP1413 Only Enor Codes documentation SINEC TF User Interface order number 6GK 1971 1AB00 0AA1 but that information will not help you to resolve the cause of the error refer to the previous page for the most likely causes of the errors that can occur Programmers can refer to Table G 1 for a description of the error codes Table G 1 H1 Network Enors 1 App1Num larger than number of Application Reference Names defined at loading 2 GetApp1 Relld failed due to SCP send error 3 GetApp1 Relld failed due to SCP receive error 4 GetApp1Relld failed due to Request Block error 5 Initiate failed due to SCP_send error 6 Initiate failed due to SCP_receive error 7 Initiate failed due to Request Block error 8 Initiate failed due to AP Header error 9 Task code request exceeds PDU space 10 Task code request failed due to SCP_send error 11 Task code request failed due to SCP_receive error 12 Task code request failed due to Request Block error 13 Task code request failed due to AP Header error 14 Task code response ex
83. on the screen contains no Y C WY or V elements to be cross referenced TheH1TSR driver has not been installed TISOFT cannot communicate over the H1 network until it is installed This message indicates that the rung at the specified address contains invalid Boolean stack logic It is missing an element with an STR attribute Edit the rung and add the required STORE element This message is displayed when you attempt to display or enter a ladder rung that causes RLL to exceed the current L memory configuration Online or Offline This message can also occur when you attempt to display or create a rung too large to fit the TISOFT buffer Simplify the rung In addition this message can occur Offline during a BLOCK COPY or PUT LADDER operation which causes RLL to exceed the current L memory configurati on Online the user must take care not to push networks off the end of RLL The controller is keylock protected therefore the network cannot be deleted This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not valid Seethe following example C1 C2 C11 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 Note Up to 16 levels for 555 only All other controllers allow up to 8 levels TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual No Failed I O Found No Forced I O of Type Found No Help Available for the Current Topic No K Memory Configured No Response from the PLC No Response from
84. on your PC Configure CP 5412 card using S7 5412 software Install a 505 CP5434 FMS CP module in each PLC station on a PROFIBUS network Install the COM5434 Configurator software on your PC Configure the Module Local Configuration for the FMS CP module in each station using COM5434 Configurator software connected to the RS 232 port on the FMS CP module with a TISOFT programming cable Connect your PC from the CP 5412 card port and each FMS CP module to the PROFIBUS network Y Build an FMS Node list in a text editor such as WordPad Notepad DOS Edit Change extension of text file to FNL and save Invoke the TCPFB task code driver Invoke TISOFT with FMS communications Select ONLINE select Node List from menu and select desired station J 2 Using TISOFT with FMS TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual J 2 Installing CP 5412 Hardware and Software on the PC Installing the CP 5412 A2 Card in your PC Installing the S7 5412 MS DOS Windows Software Configuring the CP 5412 Card for Network Operation In order for TISOFT to communicate over a PROFIBUS network using Fieldbus Message Specification F MS protocol you must install the CP 5412 A2 PC AT card order number 6GK 1 541 2BA00 in your computer Set the DIP switch to select an I O area that is not used by any other card Refer to the documentation provided with the CP 5412 card for complete information on installing the card After instal
85. one row Box sizes vary according to box type The box sizes are 1x1 2x2 2x3 2x7 3x3 4x7 and 7x8 3 4 TISO FT Basics TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 3 4 TISOFT Functions On Line Off Line Defined On Line Off Line Functions You can use TISOFT in either the on or off line mode On line mode allows communication with the controller off line mode communicates with the programming device only Since there is no communication with the controller in off line mode you can only save programs or other inputs to a selected program on disk You can access the HELP system for information at virtually any point in TISOFT by pressing Alt H Certain functions are available either on or off line some are available on line only and some off line only Brief descriptions of the functions available in on and off line modes are given in the following paragraphs Thefollowing functions are available from both the on line and off line ladder display EXIT or ese returns to the start up screen EDIT allows you to enter or edit ladder programs FIND or Ctrl F locates addresses elements or NOPs ladder rungs that are not programmed BLOCK performs moves copies puts or deletes of selected data segments ladder memory only at main display PRINT enables you to set print parameters and select what to print as well as initiate the print operation CONFME enables you to display and edit memory configuration C
86. operations Parameterized Go to Subroutine This box instruction allows you to call a subroutine from RLL and pass parameters to the subroutine for execution Parameterized Go to Subroutine Zero This box instruction like PGTS allows you to call a subroutine from RLL and pass parameters to the subroutine for execution and also clears all discretes indicated as outputs when the subroutine is not executed PageU p displays the previous page it is a hard key Programmable Logic Controller Port Configuration For the 575 controller accesses menu to configure port parameters Provides for each SF program a peak elapsed time that is the time from the SF program being scheduled until the process completes execution n 1 1023 Function Key prints selected groups of program data Hard Key prints the screen display also an SF instruction that sends text and data through the ASCII message ports to a printer PROFIBUS DP switches status screen from displaying Series 505 to PROFIBUS DP I O Print Control accesses function menu for entering control characters for printers Copies a selected block of data from a source program to a destination program Source and destination options include controller programming device RAM and disk Terminates the print operation and keeps the printer paper on a page boundary Ramp Soak accesses ramp soak programming function or selects ramp soak data to act on Selects a ramp step Read
87. or Enable Disable Status Using On Line Ediesse naea ed RE RESURE RE a FR hebr eee eae g Using Off Line Edit cte bee EUER E CRM bed Cee ne ETUR whee EROR Reading an I O Configuration sesssenn nennen nnn Displaying a PROFIBUS DP Slave Configuration from RAM sssusa 6 15 Displaying a Configuration from Disk or Controller saaa 6 17 Showing Individual I O Configuration Points seen Showing I O Configuration Chart Display ssssssse e 6 19 Displaying SYNONYMS sperei asit phere ar EROR rian CR E gins 6 19 Finding I O Point Locations ccccceceee eee eee FINdING an I O PONU eis exis ns ie race ub ee t a ae ee RR EO E Rte 6 20 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O 6 1 6 1 Introduction This chapter describes I O configuration for devices that use the PROFIBUS DP I O channel For information about configuring devices that use the Series 505 I O channel see Chapter 5 Getting Ready You are ready to configure your I O when you complete the following tasks W Install TISOFT according to the procedure described in Chapter 1 of this manual W Install the version of COM PROFIBUS that is shipped with TISOFT following the procedure described in the SIMATIC ET 200 Distributed O System Manual PPX 505 8206 x Windows must be installed on your PC Import type files for any slaves not currentl y supported by COM PROFIBUS Seethe section on COM PROFIBUS in the SIMATI
88. slot affected Sets an SF program or subroutine to be compiled Composeis a mode in COM or TITLE it inserts a new line after pressing Return TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Glossary 3 COMTGL DELCHN COMTGL CONFIG CONFIO CONFME CONT CONTOE CONTACT Control Relays COPY COS X CTR CTRS CURDSK CURPRT CURRNT DCAT DCC DCMP DCP Del DELCHN 4 Glossary Comment Toggl etoggles the display of comments on or off for displayed ladder rungs In both on line and off line modes the information is obtained from the currently selected program when comment display is on In the Replace table it toggles the copying of comments Selects the I O module definition screen in I O configuration Configure nput Output configures or displays the inputs and outputs for the controller base RAM or selected program on disk Configure M emory allocates the memory areas of the selected program on disk or the controller On line it displays the memory ranges of the controller or disk and writes memory ranges to the disk or controller Off line CONF ME displays and selects memory ranges in the programming device RAM and allows selection of a controller type Continue scrolls display of I O in Aux Function 25 In the U pdate function Continue writes the PROFIBUS DP screen data to the controller and to the selected program on disk and advances the U pdate prompt to the next unconfigured slave Selects C
89. subroutine may be invoked from ladder programs using the SFSUB box instruction or from an SF program using the CALL SF instruction Each SF program or SF subroutine is stored in S memory as a control block Each SF statement in an SF program or subroutine is composed of the following elements e A statement number automatically assigned e AnSF instruction e Asc of parameters See the SF Instructions and Parameters section that follows for a listing of the Special Function instructions and parameters In addition to decimal format constants can also be displayed in either hexadecimal or binary format in math expressions e Toenter a hexadecimal constant precede the hex value with OH e g OH 7FFE OH3F e Toenter a binary constant precede the binary value with OB e g OB 1011100101110001 0B01100111 An element is an address that consists of a type WY for example and an identifying number Element types are used in the parameters for Special Function statements The element type must be followed by an identifying number For example LERR is the element type for loop errors The identifying number should refer to the particular loop that you wish to use For example LERR34 would be the type and identifier for loop errors for loop 34 8 14 Using TISO FT for Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Real and Integer Values Using Expressions Most elements can be either real or integer A real element is d
90. subroutines Integer IF IIF and Pet Scan Watchdog PETWD e Themath operators logical AND logical OR comparisons and absolute value ABS are now allowed in integer math e Support of unsigned 16 bit integer and long 32 bit signed operands is allowed where expressions are allowed An unsigned integer operand is identified with a U suffix for example V105U or 32768U and has a range of 0 to 65 535 A long integer operand is identified with an L suffix for example K15L or 200L and has a range of 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Refer to the Rd ease Notes for SIMATIC 575 2105 and 575 2106 Firmware Rd 5 0 2807266 0001 for a full description of PowerMath TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Additional Features TISOFT provides the following additional features and enhancements and Enhancements of TISOFT e TISOFT now supports 115 2 and 57 6 K baud rates on the serial ports Release 6 3 of SIMATIC 555 and 575 CPUs equipped with these baud rates e Math box instructions now show the relationship between parameters A new AU X function Memory Availability displays the number of bytes configured used and availablefor L CL S and CS memories e n Memory Configuration TISOFT now provides a message to confirm changing from Run mode to Program mode and back to Run mode when writing a new configuration to the controller in Run mode e TISOFT now provides a confirmation message when writing a 505 I O
91. then as follows 10 20 Using Status Functions UNLOCK F2 frees the loop card for selection of RUN operating mode independent of the ladder CPU LOCK F3 locks the loop card to follow the operating mode selected for ladders OPR ST F6 allows the changing of PROFIBUS DP communications mode OPERATE STOP SYNTAX F8 runs a syntax check on ladder memory L memory TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 10 15 Displaying Both Ladders and Chart Displaying Ladders with a Chart You can specify a display of up to seven rungs and a chart of 1 to 13 lines by using the select function from the Ladder Status display Enter your selections on a table invoked by pressing SELECT F6 To create a ladder and chart display complete the following steps from the Ladder Status display 1 Press SELECT F6 You receive a Selection Table shown in Figure 10 9 for making entries to define the rungs and chart to be displayed Use CLEAR F2 to delete entries from any of the Selection Table fields Selection Table SELECT RUNGS AND CHART FOR STATUS DISPLAY RUNG 1 000015 RUNG 000001 RUNG RUNG 2 3 RUNG 4 5 6 RUNG 6 RUNG 7 CHART CHART1 LINES 6 545 LOADER1 RN EXIT F1 CLEAR F2 NEXT F3 RDTBL F6 WRTBL F7 ENTER F8 Figure 10 9 Making Entries for Ladder and Chart Display Typein the ladder addresses of the rungs Move the cursor from field to field with the arr
92. to look at the README TXT file which is accessible from the installation diskettes before you load the software You can also access the readme file after installation Programs created on releases prior to Release 5 0 of TISOFT software can be converted to use with this release Programs created with Release 5 0 or greater do not need to be converted to 6 3 See Appendix C for details on converting user programs Thefollowing terms are used in this manual as defined below e Discrete Refers to relay ladder logic RLL programming on off conditions e Batch Refers to loop analog alarm and or special function programming e PC Refers to personal computers e PLC or controller Programmable Logic Controller such as a SIMATIC 545 or 555 used in TISOFT displays TISOFT2 Release 6 3 can be used with any Series 505 or Series 500 programmable logic controller Controllers supported by TISOFT include the following e SIMATIC 520 520C 530 530C 530T e SIMATIC 525 535 e SIMATIC 560 565 all models e SIMATIC 545 including the 545 1103 or Lite controller identified as 545L onscreen e SIMATIC 555 e SIMATIC 575 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Preface XXV New Features and Enhancements New Features for Release 6 3 Programming over PRO ABUS MS Network PowerMath Support xxvi Preface This new release of the TISOFT controller programming software package incorporates several new feature
93. type in element types to find At the prompt enter the element type and identifier or address to find as shown in Figure 7 20 Then press Return FIND WY101 9 BIT ONLY OUTPUT ONLY 545 LOADER1 PG EXIT F1 ADDR F2 NOP F3 NXTIN F4 WDBTGL F7 OUTTGL F8 Figure 7 20 Find Function Keys Thefollowing function keys are available for Find operations e ADDR F2 allows you to select the address for a rung of ladder logic as the element type you want to find e NOP F3 no operation finds the next occurrence of a non programmed rung of ladder logic e NXTIN F4 next instruction finds the next occurrence of a programmed rung of ladder logic e WDBTGL F7 allows you to toggle between BIT ONLY which restricts the word Find operation to bit of word only WORD ONLY which restricts the operation to word only and an unrestricted search e OUTTGL F8 allows you to toggle between OUTPUT ONLY which restricts the Find operation to outputs only and an unrestricted search which finds inputs as well as outputs If you are unsure of a box number type in the box type and a zero for the identifier Then press Return This finds the next occurrence of that box element type TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Discrete Programming 7 19 Finding Ladders and Elements continued Determining Valid Entries Find Operation Examples To determine valid entries for the Find operatio
94. use them 1 2 To select a drive follow these steps Press DIR F5 from the Program Selection screen Move the field cursor with the up down arrows to select the drive letter you want or press FLDTGL F6 and type the drive letter and colon at the DIRECTORY PATH prompt Press SELECT F8 or Return The drive and default directory appear in the PATH line and the sub windows are updated to reflect the new current drive and directory path Press EXIT F1 or Ese to get back to the Program Selection screen To create a new directory follow these steps Directory l Press DIR F5 from the Program Selection screen 2 Press FLDTGL F6 to move the field cursor tothe DIRECTORY PATH prompt 3 Typethe new directory name or path 4 Press MKDIR F2 The new directory appears in the DIRECTORY sub window 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 as needed to create your directory structure 6 Press EXIT F1 or zs to get back to the Program Selection screen Removing a To remove a directory follow these steps The directory must be empty to be Directory deleted l Press DIR F5 from the Program Selection screen 2 Movethe field cursor in the DIRECTORY sub window with the up down arrows to select the directory you want to delete 3 Press RMDIR F3 The directory is removed from the DIRECTORY sub window 4 Press EXIT F1 or Esc to get back to the Program Selection screen 2 6 Setting up the TISOFTEnvir
95. used with TISTAR Model 20 or Model the Baud Rate 70 Error Writing to Disk TISOFT attempted to write a program file and failed This can occur if the system attempts to open too many files simultaneously Ensure that the command FILES 20 is in your CONFIG SYS file Extra Elements Not This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not Allowed with an valid See following example Unconditional Output C1 END P ks ies uas Fatal Error Detected This message occurs ONLINE when the controller goes into a Fatal Error mode Use AUX 29 to determine the cause of the error FIFO Is Incompatible This is a run time error caused by the FTSR IN and the FTSR OUT with FTSR IN or having different lengths FTSR OUT Statement FIFO Is Invalid This is a run time error caused by invoking the FTSR OUT beforethe FTSR IN with the result that the FIFO has not been set up File Already Exists This message is displayed when the file name specified already exists In FILE CONVERSION specify a different program name to create I n the PRINT TO FILE option you can choose either to replacethe file append tothe end of the file or to abort and select a different file name File or Directory Specify a new file or directory name Already Exists Forcing Functions The force unforce and seek operations under STATUS and CHART are Cannot Be Used with available only for X Y C WX and WY element types This Element FMS Network Error
96. want to save verify Display Format with FMTGL F6 that FMT ON is displayed on the lower right of the screen The format must be on before format changes are made if they are to be saved 7 22 Using TISOFT for Discrete Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Changing Numeric To change the display format of a memory location complete the steps as Format given below starting at the V K memory table display l Press FIND F2 2 Typein the desired V or K address at the prompt 3 Press Return 4 Press SPACEBAR 5 Press the function key corresponding to the desired format HEX F1 DOUBLE F5 BIN F2 REAL F6 INT F3 TMR 1S F7 F4 TMR1MS F8 6 Press SPACEBAR After completing inputs on the display press WRITE F8 to save the changes you made to the formats You do not have to write the changes after each entry on a display Entering Message To enter a message string in V or K memory press STRING F4 The fields Strings shown in Figure 7 22 allow you to enter the starting address and number of words for the message F orty 40 is the maximum number of words for each string If you require the bytes be swapped for display or the data cleared enter Y in those fields Use the arrow keys to move from field to field After completing the field entries press Return or ENTER F8 Type in the message string at the prompt line Press ENTER F8 to write the string to memory You can type in up to 80 cha
97. was made to create a loop alarm SF Program or SF Already Exists Subroutine that is already programmed Select another number to identify the new block Control Block This message is displayed when the user attempts to enable or disable a Does Not Exist LOOP ALARM SFPGM or SFSUB that has not yet been programmed Control Block Enablethe loop alarm SFPGM or SFSUB control block Is Disabled Control Block Disablethe loop alarm SFPGM or SFSUB control block Is Not Disabled Control Block Check for an out of range reference to a loop analog alarm SF program Number out of Range or subroutine Control Block A single SF program or subroutine cannot exceed 32767 bytes To Size Error correct divide the program or subroutine to fit the maximum Corrupted Data on Disk Datain a TISOFT program file has been corrupted leaving the file in an unrecoverable state This error may result if an AUX SAVE or BLOCK PUT PLC DK operation fails due to loss of communications A power failure or popping the disk drive during writes to disk may also cause data corruption To recover retry the operation that failed If all else fails delete the lt ogmname gt VP5 file from DOS and redo the operation Note deleting lt ogmname gt VP5 will erase your ladder logic memory and I O configurations Current Value During CHGVAL in STATUS or CHART this message confirms that the value displayed on the screen is the current value in the controller at the time the data was
98. when the cursor is in the QUOTES AROUND DATA Or EACH RECORD ENDS WITH CR LF field 9 18 Documenting Programs TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Setting the Field Delimiter Selecting Quotes Around Data Selecting the End of Rec ord Character The set up function sets the type of field delimiter to a tab character or any printable character you choose except space numeral upper and lower case characters period or double quotes To change the delimiter character position the cursor in the DELIMITER field with the arrow keys and type the character you want to use as the delimiter Refer to Figure 9 14 Setup also allows you to select whether to have quotes around the data To select quotes around data place the cursor in the QUOTES AROUND DATA field and press YES F3 to select quotes or NO F2 to select no quotes See Figure 9 14 Setup also lets you decide whether to end records with a carriage return line feed or not To select the end of record characters place the cursor in the EACH RECORD ENDS WITH CR LF field and press NO F2 or YES F3 Refer to Figure 9 14 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Documenting Programs 919 Importing and Exporting Synonyms and Comments continued Import Export Naming or selecting an import or export filename is done through the Procedure pop up file selection window The comment text file has the file extension TXC the synonym text file has the file extension TXS Refer to Section 2 2 Managing
99. 0032 Copyright C 1998 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc All Rights Reserved WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law SELECT SECONDARY ADDRESS 001 ABORT F1 CONFIG F2 ENTER F8 Figure E 3 UNILINK Host Adapter Secondary Address Menu E 6 Using TISOFT with TIWAY TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual E 5 Configuring UNILINK Host Adapter If your UNILINK Host Adapter is not configured and you select the on line option complete the following steps to enter the desired configuration NOTE Changing the MHIU HIU parameter to a number other than 0 configures the UNILINK Host Adapter as a Host Interface Unit HIU mode rather than a Master Host Interface Unit MHIU mode There can be only one MHIU on a network Usethe left and right arrow keys to position the cursor in the entry fields 1 Toselect HOST address position the cursor on the MHIU HIU field and type in a number between 0 and 254 0 configures the UNILINK Host Adapter as MHIU 1 254 configures as HIU 2 Toenter secondary address position the cursor on the MAX SECONDARY ADDRESS field and typein a number between 1 and 254 default is 254 3 After completing the fields press ENTER F8 to configure the UNILINK Host Adapt
100. 2 cccrseceessececneecseenesncecsnseesseeecrnaerens Finding an AO PONE x vied anes orte orat ead cea Rr ett ote Recte bank eb AR D 5 14 Contents v Chapter6 Configuring PROHBUS DP I O 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 7 1 7 2 7 3 Introduction 2 cect ccc cere c cece eee cence eee eee arca raa aa rr Getting Ready cciscReeenereeEPEP CR Koa ne D Kee HERE RARO ERA eter Moiese 6 2 OVerVIe W cceherkiribrpb eri ferri a Dni edd Cid XR GR Nd A RO OR UR d a ee tan 6 3 Configuring I O Modules in COM PROHBUS sseseennn nn n nnns Importing Configuration Data from COM PROHBUS into TISOFT Li Usng Metis oor ERE PEVEURRPREUPEHUPELE ELE n LE dees PR HOP esa parade RA 6 6 Assigning or Modifying lO Addresses sssssssssessse eese 6 7 Loading a PRORBUS DP I O Configuration to the Contoller VO Configuration Guidelines ssssssssseeeeeeeeem m I e e Using Update eee tete eee e ERR NEC RO ee IN e XU Kd KS des dn Modifying an Existing I O Configuration ssseeeennnnn nnn n nnn n nnn VO Configuration Guidelines ssis garrie saiia I me Adding or Deleting Slaves eridenen erea e EEE E eens Modifying an I O Address or Ena ble Disable Status Using On Line Edit oo ecce eee e ae eta eh eu da adie alert Using Off Line Edit rte tage Ree RE EE eee ie ee ede es Reading an I O Configuration cccceccceee cece eee eee eee eee nnn nn Displaying a PROFIBUS DP S
101. 3 runs on any IBM9 compatible PC with MS DOS 6 0 or higher Requirements and a 386 or higher The PC must have a 3 5 inch floppy disk drive and an RS 232 serial communications port and meet the system requirements specified in Table 1 1 Memory TISOFT requires 540K bytes of available conventional system memory in Requirements order to be executed In addition for off line operation and on line operations such as Block Put PC to Disk and Configure Memory Write to Disk additional system memory is needed according to the amount of ladder memory configured For each 4K bytes of ladder memory configured above 16K bytes 4K bytes of system memory must be available NOTE Your PC may require expanded memory configuration for certain applications Refer to page 1 3 for information on expanded memory When TISOFT is used with H1 TCP IP or FMS networks or with COM PROFIBUS system memory requirements increase further Some of these software programs require Windows 3 1 or Windows 95 See Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Expanded System Requirements Software Program Windows Total RAM Conv RAM TISOFT software Not needed 2 Mbytes 520 Kbytes 2 5 Mbytes TISOFT program data 8MBytes TISOFT H1 TCP or FMS network driver Not needed 25 Kbytes COM PROFIBUS 3 1 or Win95 8Mbytes 560 Kbytes 10 Mbytes H1 Configurator for 505 CP1434TF module 3 1 40 Kbytes 5 Mbytes CP 1413 Configuration tools driver 3 1 22 Kbytes TCP Network Configuration s w
102. 305 X0234 X0235 X0236 2 3 4 X0162 X0163 X0164 10 11 12 X0170 X0171 X0172 2 3 4 Y0298 Y0299 Y0300 10 11 12 Y0306 Y0307 Y0308 X0238 X0239 X0240 6 f 8 X0166 X0167 X0168 14 15 16 X0174 X0175 X0176 6 7 8 Y0302 Y0303 Y0304 14 15 16 Y0310 Y0310 Y0311 565 NETDATA Figure 5 5 Show I O Configuration Display Displaying Synonyms After pressing SHOW you can choose to display the synonyms with the points in a base Press SYNTGL F2 to toggle the synonym display on and off With synonyms on you have 12 I O points and their synonyms displayed 5 12 Configuring Series 505 I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 5 5 Comparing Contoller and Base Configuration Using the Compare Function Entering the Compare To check the physical configuration of a base with the configuration stored in the controller use the compare function available on line only From the on line Basel O Configuration screen complete the following steps to initiate a comparison of a base configuration with that in the controller 1 Enter the desired channel and base numbers at the top of the screen See Figure 5 4 2 Press SPACEBAR 3 Press COMPAR F1 The Base and Controller I O Configuration Comparison screen appears When the compare finishes you receive a display such as that shown in Figure 5 6 The display highlights any mismatches between the controller and the base and places asterisks beside the highlighted line 0 MO
103. 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 xxii Analog Alarm Table eise eee eee RR I ake daw a ce RR etx UR oai D 8 12 SF Piogram Table sere Sane ders rene naib epee Pe eee ee EENE 8 20 SE Programming Entries USE iaieineea ie b b ag cR RD ae ye ce ds 8 22 Comment Screen Fields ce eR Rt e E CER AU REG ed ee EORR EORR RE RR 8 27 Accessing the Compile No Compile Function Key Line 0 00 eee eee 8 31 Documentation Menu 223i bea eere P ore CY ERR Ra Y dea et aie 9 3 Comment Prompt Ne sareei boit tal cicer Ec Ce ds dele Ei Ee de eee 9 4 Comment Pop up Element List orep iraniesa nnn 9 5 Comment Editor Menl peresrerreperrnr Ier trc E REX peat Re ac Re ea e e A aes Using the RECOVEFFUNCUON 44 4 42 09 13 04 d b dea drdrb d dchbnodwbvadabasdicbad aang Synonym Prompt Selection Screen afani aie a ka a E Aat AOE ee Synonym Pop up Element Lit me 9 10 Synonym EditorMenu cette tte teens 9 11 Pop up Synonym Editor scare terre eee RYE ER ae REM ERG E RO ETE P prec eg 9 12 Using the RecoverFunction sisicata deia aana nnn 9 13 Documentation MENU 222i iaae E e Awl at era ea d A 9 14 Title Editor Menu ettari eR a eie eee ee pe ET arco E 9 14 S Memory Comment Editor MenU sssssss eee 9 16 Set Up Prompt LING rcr eee teen ed e E e e ep KC Rn E ea i a ean 9 18 Synonym Prompt line ssssssssses ett 9 20 Element List in Build Chart 0 cece 10 3 Build Chart Display aena E HH hs 10 4 Status Chart Display
104. 5 6 7 and 8 are deleted To delete an I O channel configuration from RAM complete the following steps from the off line Basel O Configuration screen l Typein the desired channel number at the CHANNEL field at the top of the screen 2 Press DELCHN F7 3 In response to the message stating the channel numbers to be deleted press YES F2 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring Series505 O0 511 5 4 Showing Individual I O Configuration Points Showing I O Configuration Chart Display With the SHOW function you can display individual I O points for a base configuration either on or off line You also have the option of displaying the synonyms for each point Figure 5 5 illustrates the format of the display To use the SHOW function complete the following steps at the Base I O Configuration screen See Figure 5 2 for off line mode and Figure 5 4 for on line mode 1 Enter the desired channel and base numbers at the top of the Base I O Configuration screen and press the appropriate read key 2 Press SHOW F2 The Show I O Configuration screen appears See Figure 5 5 Use the PgUp PgDn keys to scroll the display one screen at a time Use the up down arrow keys to scroll the display one row at a time 505 I O CONFIGURATION CHART FOR CHANNEL 1 BASE 00 O POINTS 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 2 SLOT 3 SLOT 3 FROM RAM EXIT F1 SYNTGL F2 X0233 1 X0161 9 X0169 1 Y0297 9 Y0
105. 520 530 520C 530C 525 535 560 565 controllers 505 O switches status screen from displaying PROFIBUS DP to Series 505 I O Accesses the AU X function itis a hard key Alarm Acknowledge Flags must be an integer Alarm Deadband for Analog Alarm may be either integer or real Discards any changes made and returns to the previous display Returns absolute value of X in a math expression Takes the absolute value of a number RLL box instruction Alarm C Flags 32 bits must be an integer Analog Alarm C Flags most significant word must be an integer Analog Alarm C F lags least significant word must be an integer Adds a signed integer positive or negative in memory location A to a signed integer in memory location B and stores the result in memory location C The signed integers on which the addition is performed are not affected by the operation and retain their values in the original locations Address references a rung of ladder logic it also selects ladder logic Analog Alarm Error may be integer or real Analog Alarm High limit may be either integer or real Analog Alarm High High limit may be either integer or real Analog Alarm Low limit may be either integer or real Provides access to analog alarm function or selects alarm data to act on Analog Alarm Low Low limit may be integer or real Is the logical AND operator in Special Function MATH and IF statements Orange Deviation for Analog Alarm may be
106. 6 d cs Ma controller program to disk Aux 19 setting controller scan time 11 19 Aux 21 25 performing I O diagnostics 11 21 Aux 22 checking RLL syntax 11 23 Aux 40 converting S record format 11 24 Aux 42 60 67 saving controller memory data to disk 11 9 Aux 43 90 99 loading program to controller Aux 81 82 setting controller operating mode 11 25 Aux 83 locking out programming ports 11 28 Aux 84 programming EEPROMS 11 29 accessi ng menu 11 2 11 3 changing controller operating mode Aux 81 clear PLC Aux 13 11 8 clearing memory types Aux 31 37 Aux 41 Aux 74 77 11 8 compare controller program to disk Aux 17 converting S record format to binary Aux 40 display failed I O Aux 25 11 22 Bi cS emory types Aux 43 Aux 90 99 11 7 locking out programmi ng ports Aux 83 11 28 memory availability Aux 28 powering up the controller Aux 10 programming EE PROMs Aux 84 restarting the controller Aux 11 Aux 12 run controller diagnostics Aux 20 run remote base diagnostics Aux 21 ii ci d types Aux 42 Aux 60 67 11 9 selecting hot backup status Aux 82 setting controller scan time Aux 19 setting controller time display Aux 18 11 12 setting task codes processed per scan Aux 16 11 10 setting watchdog timer Aux 14 show software part number Aux 15 table of 11 4 Batch programmi ng alarms analog 8 12 creating comments 8 26 oop
107. 6 or INSLN F7 to delete or insert lines 1 2 Press Return to position the cursor for entry of the first step If a table already exists and you just need to modify it press EDIT F2 IntheR s field typein R for ramp S for soak or E for an end step Or press the equivalent function key The STATUS BIT field is optional If you wish to designate a status bit for a step type in a Y or C element type and identifier or NONE F2 f you selected a ramp step type in the desired values for SETPOINT and RAMP RATE f you selected a soak step type in the desired values for SOAK TIME and DEADBAND Press ENTER F8 Press Return to enter the next step Repeat steps 3 through 7 until you have entered all ramp soak steps To save the table press WRITE F4 before exiting the display TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming 8 11 8 6 Displaying Analog Alarms Invoking the Alarm To display the Alarm Directory press ALARM F7 from the Ladder Display Directory Displaying the To display the Alarm Table complete the following steps from the Analog Alam Table Alarm Directory Figure 8 6 shows the format of the table and the functions available 1 At the SELECT prompt enter the alarm number 1 128 you want to program or move the cursor to select the alarm you want 2 Press SHOW F2 ANALOG ALARM 128 TITLE MONITOR REMOTE SETPOINT NO REMOTE SETPOINT NONE ALARM VFLA
108. 8 Figure 7 1 ElementList Display 7 2 Using TISOFTfor Discrete Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 7 2 Accessing Program Entry Functions Using TISOFTMenus TISOFT functions are accessible through the menu keys available after the selection of on or off line Figure 7 2 shows the ladder display that appears off line The ladder display is the access point to the TISOFT functions Whenever the plus sign is visible at the end of a function key line press the spacebar to display the remaining function keys Since you communicate with the controller in on line mode the menu keys for on line include those functions that operate only with the controller See Appendix A for a mapping of function key menus Entering Editing To enter edit a ladder program first press EDIT F2 to access the ladder Programs programming functions ROW 1 COL 1 NETWORK STARTING ADDRESS 1 L MEMORY AVAILABLE 8192 NOP C 2 C 2 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 EDIT F2 FIND F3 DOCUM F4 BLOCK F5 REPLAC F6 BLDCHT F7 WRITDK F8 Figure 7 2 Off Line Ladder Display A WARNING TISOFT allows program entry and modification while the controller is in RUN mode However entries made to the program in RUN mode may immediately affect the execution of the program Failure to follow appropriate safety precautions could result in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Only qualified personnel authorized to perform s
109. A Block Functionality in SMemory sisn nens Block Copy cseiscena ku ache iain Bose opcra i RC e CR deca Rc date eho a a DC eS Block MOVe 1 obi Deni cet Drei sicui dod doc io aad ad acido Ra dd aed de haie Block Delete 0 0 HH hme BOCK PUL pc EMT SMemory Comments Accessing Block Operations in Memory een n n nnn nn nnn Accessing SMemory BlockOperations issssssssseeeeeeseee ee 13 7 Designating BlccksIn SSMemory ssssse m 13 7 Making Entries to Block Menus in Memory seeeenn nnnm mmn BlockParameters sssssssseseeeee ehe 13 8 Entering Block Parameters iicesseseses ede ete Ee uerba Leer e ha ka d dead d 13 8 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Performing Block Data Functions 13 1 13 1 Block Functions Defined Types of Block Block functions enable you to copy move or put contents of specified Functions memory addresses from one location to another as well as allowing deletion of specified ranges of data You have this feature available either at the ladder display or in the S memory directories Block operations can also be used with comments and synonyms The list in Table 13 1 shows the types of memory for block functions accessed from either the Ladder Display or an S Memory Directory Table 13 1 Memory Types Accessible by Block Functions From Ladder Display From S Memory Directory V Loops K Analog Alarms L SF Programs Title SF Subroutines
110. A compiled SF program or subroutine can be executed in line to the ladder logic program This means that when the enable input to the SFPGM or SFSUB box instruction is on the program or subroutine is executed immediately and its result is available for use in the next rung of the current ladder scan Selecting Press DIS CP F4 from the SF directory screen or DIS CP F8 from the SF Compiled Mode program display screen to access the enable disable and compile no compile functions as shown in Figure 8 10 Then press COMPIL F5 to set the selected SF program or subroutine to be compiled You can also change a compiled SF program or subroutine to interpreted mode by pressing NOCMPL F6 SPECIAL FUNCTION PROGRAM SUBROUTINE DIRECTORY S MEMORY AVAILABLE 32702 EN C EN C EN C EN DIS PROGRAM NC DIS PROGRAM NC DIS SUBROUTINE NC DIS SUBROUTINE PALLET 5 PALLET 6 PALLET 7 PALLET 8 PALLET 9 DIS CP accesses Enable Disable and Compile NoCompile functions SELECT SFPGMO001 575 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 SHOW F2 BLOCK F3 DIS CP F4 PG RN F5 LOOP F6 ALARM F7 SFSUB F8 575 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 ENABLE F2 DISABL F3 COMPIL F5 NOCMPL F6 Figure 8 amp 10 Accessing the Compile No Compile Function Key Line TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming 8 31 Compiling SF Programs Subroutines c ontinued Determining Compiled Status You must have Compiled Special CS memory configured in order to run compiled
111. ACEBAR 3 Press CONFME F2 PLC TYPE 555 MEMORY CONFIGURATION USER MEMORY SYSTEM MEMORY LADDER L 32 KBYTES 96 KBYTES VARIABLE V 52 KBYTES 52 KBYTES CONSTANT K O KBYTES 0 KBYTES SPECIAL S 32 KBYTES 32 KBYTES COMPILED SF CS 0 KBYTES 0 KBYTES USER SUB U 0 KBYTES 0 KBYTES TMR CTR 5 KBYTES DRUMS 3 KBYTES SHIFT REG 1 KBYTES TABLE MOVE 2 KBYTES ONE SHOTS v 1 KBYTES CONTROL RELAYS I O X Y WX WY TOTAL SYSTEM MEMORY 1856 KBYTES CONFIGURED SYSTEM MEMORY 192 KBYTES REMAINING SYSTEM MEMORY 1664 KBYTES FROM PLC 555 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 READDK F2 WRITDK F3 READPC F4 WRITPC F5 REQAPP F8 Figure 4 4 On Line Memory Configuration Menu NOTE You cannot change the controller type internal C control relay or total system memory fields when doing an on line configuration Configuration Use the arrow keys and or Return to position the cursor in the fields to make Procedure entries Type in the desired number of bytes for each memory type F or example with the cursor in the LADDER memory field usethe numeric keys to change the existing number Then use Return or arrow keys to move the cursor to the next memory type to be changed 4 6 Configuring Controller Memory TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual A WARNING If you enter a memory configuration smaller than that required for a program you have entered the program is truncated to fit the sma
112. ATE VERSION 545 LOADER1 EXIT F1 COM F2 SYN F3 TITLE F4 Figure 9 11 Documentation Menu DATE VERSION 545 LOADER DELLN F4 INSLN F5 EDIT F6 DELETE F7 ENTER F8 Figure 9 12 Title Editor Menu 9 14 Documenting Programs TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Tide Parameters Entering a Title Adding Date and Version Saving Titles You can create a title of up to 60 characters x 16 lines The DATE field accepts two numeric characters for each of month day and year The VERSION field accepts any five characters numeric or alphabetic Enter thetitle by keying in the desired text with the alphanumeric keys on your keyboard You can use Backspace to delete characters to the left of the cursor Thefollowing keys are available for editing e Delete Press DEL to delete a single character Use with the cursor at the end of a line to delete the Return and append the following line by fillingtheline at the cursor position e Insert Press INS to invoke the insert mode Add a Return after the insert to split a line at any point and movethe text after the Return to the following line Togglethe insert mode off by pressing INS e Backspace Use Backspace to delete characters to the left of the cursor e DELLN F4 Press F 4 to delete the line where the cursor is positioned e INSLN F5 Press F5 toinsert a blank line above the line on which the cursor is positioned e EDIT F6 and COMPSE F6 Press F6 to tog
113. AUI port of your module Consult the Siemens IK 10 catalog for information about how to purchase a Siemens transceiver if you need to use it with the AUI port TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISO FT with TCP IP l 5 L3 Setting Up the PC with TCP IP Connect YourPC to Your system administrator must determine what type of cable is best suited the Ethemet for your installation because it affects your choice of Ethernet card for your PC The FTP Software packages see below support industry standard Ethernet cards such as 3COM or NE 2000 cards NOTE The PPX 505 CP2572 module directly supports 10BaseT UTP and AUI cabling If your existing network does not use UTP or AUI but the cabling medium is IEEE 802 3 compliant you can purchase a transceiver to connect your TCP IP module to your system If you have not yet installed your system discuss with your system administrator whether you are able touse a 10BaseT UTP or AUI installation Your Ethernet card purchase should be guided by the type of cabling medium that is best suited for your network Install PC TCP In order for your PC to communicate with the PPX 505 CP 2572 module Kemel or OnNet you must install a software package from F TP Software on your PC Both Kemel DOS and Windows users can usethe PC TCP Kernel package from FTP Software Another option for Windows users is the OnNet16 Kernel package also manufactured by FTP Software which uses a significantly smaller amount of
114. Bus Interrupt The CP1413 card needs exclusive use of one hardware interrupt in order to function This parameter specifies that address Occasionally another device such as a mouse or a multi media card uses this interrupt In most instances changing the interrupt from 10 to 12 works Run CA SINEC BIN DPRAMTES This program requires two parameters The first parameter is the I O address The second parameter is the DPRAM address An example of both would be CA SINEC BIN DPRAMTES 03E0 D0000 If it displays an error the CP 1413 will not work properly at the DRAM address you selected For additional information refer to the Dealing with Problems section of the SINEC TF N 1413 MS DOS Windows manual After running DPRAMTES once you need to follow the note below DPRAMTES modifies the I O address and DPRAM address and can only be run once before power cycling NOTE TheCP1413 requires a hardware reset whenever its hardware I O or INT IRQ number addresses are changed If the addressing is changed you must turn off the power to your PC and wait a few minutes before reapplying power Rebooting your PC using ett acr pe is not sufficient The CP 1413 card determines the address settings only when electrical power is applied TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFT with H1 Communications G 7 Steps for Installing and Configuring the CP1413 Module continued Step 10 Preparing When the CP 1413 card and al
115. C ET 200 Distributed I O System Manual PPX 505 8206 x for a description of how to import a type file into COM PROFIBUS 6 2 Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Overview To configure I O used on the PROFIBUS DP channel for your Series 505 system you must use two configuration utilities The first utility COM PROFIBUS allows you to perform the following tasks Select a master and host thereby determining communication parameters Configure and parameterize the I O slaves including any 505 PROFIBUS DP RBCs that you wish to use on the PROFIBUS DP 1 0 channel Save your configuration This file should be archived in case you want to make configuration changes at a later time Export your configuration to a binary file TISOFT uses information from this binary file to perform further I O configuration f you need to add or delete slaves or modules or modify bus parameters later you must use COM PROFIBUS to modify the configuration file and adjust the necessary information before exporting and merging it into TISOFT again Section 6 2 provides further information about what you need to do to configure your I O in COM PROFIBUS The second utility TI SOFT allows you to perform the following tasks Use the Merge function to import information from the binary file that you created with COM PROFIBUS Assign or modify starting I O addresses for the modules of all PROFIBUS DP slaves used by your Se
116. C H1 Communication Processor U ser Manual for additional information 2 Connect your PC serial port cable to the CP 1434TF module using a programmable logic controller programming cable Part Number 2601094 8001 Use the configurator to transfer the configuration file containing at least the Ethernet address to the CP 1434TF NOTE When the configurator downloads a configuration file tothe CP 1434TF module a hidden application association is also transferred This association has the name CP 1434TF and TSAP CP 1434TF Its remote address and TSAP address are unspecified allowing any host to connect to it When several CP1434TF modules are on the same network each module has this same association but the local addresses will differ 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second CP 1434TF module but this time type a different unused local Ethernet address 080006010002 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFT with H1 Communications G 13 Steps for Installing and Configuring the CP1413 Module continued Creating a Matching Association with COML The next association that you create is for the CP1413 card allowing it to recognize and communicate with the CP 1434TF module Follow these steps to create an association for your CP 1413 that matches the TF Service that you just filled out on the CP1434TF 1 Invoke COML from Windows This opens the SINEC COML 1413TF window 2 Fromthe drop down File menu select New to create a new configur
117. CE UNFORC UN ALL WRITE 4 SPACEBAR 4 Figure 10 8 Status Editor Menu Charts 10 14 Using Status Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using the Prompt Line Updates and Messages Checking Numeric Format Inc rementing Decrementing Element Addresses Using Single Scan After you select the edit CH GVAL function a prompt line appears for entry of the element type and identifier The prompt line shows you the current format and forced state of the element type and identifier unless you have made a change to the prompt line in this case you need to perform a read to obtain the correct status The forced status is indicated by the word FORCED to the right of the format If the word FORCED is not displayed the element is not forced While you arein the Change Value function the main display continues to be updated All information and error messages remain on the screen until you press a key If no information or error messages are being displayed the message UPDATE IN PROGRESS is displayed Numeric formats you have selected for particular types of elements affect the manner in which you usethe edit functions For example both real and double formats require two consecutive words each for storage and display Since discrete el ements X Y amp C show only on and off status there is no format selection for discretes These elements can be forced Word loop and alarm el
118. Chapter 2 An easy way to construct this table is to press Ctrl V from the Ladder screen and then press FIND F2 to go to the desired location For instance the Ladder Logic Example in the TCP IP manual assumes that the command block is located in V memory starting at location V500 From the desired location you can simply key in the values from the Startup Network Command Block example table in the manual supplying the correct IP address IP router address and subnet mask for your network For even more permanency you can put the table into K memory instead of V memory If you use the example ladder program from the TCP IP manual you can just add a MOVW box to move the values in K to V as shown in Figurel 1 You can also trigger your logic from the first scan flag bit in status word 201 instead of creating a lock with coil C1 MOVW Network 2 A K500 B V500 N 15 Logic is triggered by first scan flag bit rather than coil C1 If C1 is used elsewhere in program it might come on unpredictably flag bit comes on exclusively for first scan STW201 10 LDC1 Network 3 WX1 3 A WY5 N 500 This rung is the same as the sample program in the TCP IP manual Chapter 2 WX2 3 WY4 3 di Figure I 1 Modified PLC Logic Example l 4 Using TISO FT with TC P IP TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Entering an IP Address in TISOFT Using the Autostart Option
119. Chart loads a status chart from the disk Read Date reads the date from the programming device and displays it on the print setup screen In password it selects Read Only controller access when the password is enabled Read Tableloads a saved Select Tableto replace the current table TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual READ RUNDIA READ READBS READDK READPC READRM REAL RECOVR RENAME REPLAC REQAPP RESTOR RESTRT RESUME RETURN RMDIR ROUND X ROW RST RSTI RSTPKS RTN RUN RUNALL RUNDIA In Status CHGVAL reads the value of the selected element In V K memory it refreshes the screen display In Replace edit it reads elements for the last selected range In AUX 14 it reads Watchdog timeout in AUX 16 it reads Task Code values in AUX 18 it reads time of day in AUX 19 it reads controller scan time In AUX 15 and AUX 23 it reads part numbers Read Base obtains the I O module Definition Chart for the selected base from the base Available on line only Read Disk displays the memory configuration or the 1 O Module Definition from the disk In Print it reads the setup or selection parameters from the disk Read PLC displays the memory configuration or the I O Module Definition from the controller Available on line only Read RAM displays the memory configuration or the I O Module Definition from the programming device RAM Available off line only A number format that uses decimal points and a floating p
120. Clamp may be integer or real Low Limit for Loop Setpoint Clamp may be integer or real Loop Rate derivativetime must be real Loop Reset must be real Loop Sample Rate must be real Loop V Flags must be an integer Loop V Flag Address Loop Ydlow Deviation Alarm may be integer or real Performs the vertical delete function in ladders it is a hard key Is an SF instruction that evaluates real floating point math expressions Motor Control Alarm Timer box instruction that operates with motor driven valves that drive in each direction Master Control Relay is a coil that turns off all coils within the zone of control between the MCR instruction and the MCRE instruction Each MCR instruction must be numbered 1 8 Numbers may be used more than once Glossary MCRE N MCRE MDRMD MDRMW MDRUM MERGE MHIU MHIUEHA MIRFT MIRTT MIRW MKDIR MOD MOVE MOVW MULT MWFT MWI MWIR MWTT 10 Glossary Master Control Rday End is a coil that terminates a master control relay funcion Mask Drum Discreeis a box that simulates operation of an electromechanical drum and allows specifying a mask for selection of discretes controlled Mask Drum Word is a box that simulates operation of an electromechanical drum and allows specifying a mask for selection of word outputs controlled Selects MDRMD and MDRMW drum types Reads the COM PROFIBUS parameter configuration binary file and merges this informatio
121. Column 7 14 Using TISOFTfor Discrete Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Deleting Lines and To delete lines and elements from your ladder program use the HORZD F3 Hements N DEL or Backspace for horizontal lines and VERTD F4 or M keys for vertical lines on the edit function key line Figure 7 17 and Figure 7 18 illustrate horizontal and vertical line deletes Cursor after pressing F3 Line Segment Deleted Cursor before pressing F4 Line Deleted Cursor after pressing F4 Figure 7 18 Deleting Vertical Lines To delete elements from a network position the cursor to the right of the element to delete and press Backspace You can also delete elements by placing the cursor on the element to delete and pressing HORZD F3 or the DEL hard key Using UNDEL to If you make a deletion in error press UNDEL F5 The element is restored at Restore a Deleted the current position of the cursor UNDEL F5 must be performed before Element making another entry The element is restored at the current position of the cursor Using UNDEL to After restoring a deleted element you can duplicate it repeatedly with Duplicate Elements UNDEL F5 wherever you position the cursor until you make another entry TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Discrete Programming 7 15 7 8 7 16 Determining If an Hement Is Unique To help in as
122. Completing the Table Fields 0 0 cece II Special Conditions icit nete cete oe CAO OU E IC ROLL Ra CC E Cento Building d Table i eisiied ic khu a uaa rbi T ER EET IaA uae naa s CEA BR Ta rd des B llditig a Table oed eee Lec eee vera tha ee ERR X Rana eA Roe t Building a Table from a Read Display ssssssssseeeeeeesee Building a Free Form Entry Table ssssssseeeeeee e TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using Global Search and Replace 12 1 12 1 Using Global Search and Replace for One Element Search and You can use Global Search and Replace to perform the following functions Replace Functions e Find and replace elements in ladders loops alarms SF programs and SF subroutines with designated elements and identifiers e Find and replace identifiers for example numbers not types for boxes in ladders Invoking Search To access the menu press REPLAC F6 from the off line ladder display and Replace Menu Figure 12 1 shows the Global Search and Replace menu and prompt 15 LADDER MEMORY RANGE 000001 THRU 0000014 REPLACE C000001 WITH C000001 565 NETDATA ABORT F1 LADDER F2 LOOP F3 ALARM F4 SFPGM F5 SFSUB F6 BLDTBL F7 START F8 Figure 12 1 Search and Replace Menu 12 2 Using Global Search and Replace TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Completing the The first two fields LADDER MEMORY RANGE and THRU set the range for Prompt Fields your search The star
123. DULE COMPARISON FOR CHANNEL 1 FROM PLC SLOT X 01 02 03 04 05 06 OF s 08 09 10 zx 11 x 12 5 Ee 14 Naa A85 is 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Y WX 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 WY 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Y WX 08 08 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 COMPARISON NOT EQUAL FAILED MODULE IN BASE EXIT F1 00 00 00 07 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 FROM BASE WY 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 SF NO YES NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 545 NETDATA RN Figure 5 6 Base and Contoller I O Configuration Comparison TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring Series505 O 513 5 6 Finding I O Point Locations Finding an I O To find an I O point complete the following steps Point 1 At the 505 Base Status screen press FIND F3 See Figure 5 3 2 TherrIND I O POINT prompt shown in Figure 5 7 appears 3 Typein thel O point you wish to find and press Return 505 CHANNEL 1 BASE STATUS BASE ENABLED CONFIGURED ONLINE YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES FIND I O POINT X0002 FOUND AT CHAN 1 BASE 2 SLOT 4 DONE 545 NETDATA PG
124. Drainwire Copperfoil Copperfoil Shield Connector Shell Connector Shell Shield P2 P1 25 Pin D Type 25 Pin D Type Male Figure 1 1 RS 232 C 25 Pin to 25 Pin Cable FOIL SHIELD BRA CY CN 2 Receive RD 3 Transmit TD 5 Signal Ground 2 Transmit TD 3 Receive RD 4 RTS 5 CTS 6 DSR 7 Signal Ground 8 DCD 20 DTR 0 OM e oom OQ 00 10 O14 CO IO O Q 000 1001 I CO PO joRoc ici cicicacaci cic NNN AON f Drainwire L Drainwire Copperfoil M Copperfoil Shield Shield Connector Shell Connector Shell P1 P2 9 Pin D Type 25 Pin D Type Male Figure 1 2 RS 232 C 9 Pin to 25 Pin Cable 1 4 Installing TISO FT Release 6 3 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Programming Device Controller DCD DSR RX DATA RTS TX DATA CTS DTR SIGNAL GND 9 Pin D Type 9 Pin D Type Female Connector Female Connector Figure 1 3 RS 232 C 9 Pin to 9 Pin Cable Cable Pinouts for If your controller has an RS 422 port you can connect through the RS 422 RS 422 Ports port on your programming device Use the pinout values shown in Figure 1 4 for the RS 422 cable Programming Device Controller Signal Pin Signal D DO DO 05 Dl GND e
125. EDIT F6 DELETE F7 ENTER F8 Figure 9 13 S Memory Comment Editor Menu Comment A comment for an element can be up to 16 lines in length with 60 characters Parameters in each line The pagebreak field has no effect in S memory programs 9 16 Documenting Programs TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Keying in Comments Saving Comments Enter the comments by keying in the desired text with the alphanumeric keys on your keyboard You can use Backspace to delete characters to the left of the cursor The following keys are available for editing Delete Press DEL to delete a single character Use with the cursor at the end of a line to delete the Return and append the following line by fillingtheline at the cursor position Insert Press INS to invoke the insert mode Add a Return after the insert to split a line at any point and move the text after the Return to the following line Togglethe insert mode off by pressing INS Backspace Use Backspace to delete characters to the left of the cursor DELLN F4 Press F4 to delete the line where the cursor is positioned INSLN F5 Press F5 toinsert a blank line above the line on which the cursor is positioned EDIT F6 and COMPSE F6 Press F6 to toggle between edit and compose modes E dit mode does not automatically insert a return at the end of a line To enter text continuously and have the cursor positioned automatically at a new line use compose mode DELETE F7 Press F 7 t
126. ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE LOOP DISABLE LOOP DISABLE LOOP DISABLE LOOP BOILER 3 BOILER 6 BOILER 7 BOILER 8 BOILER 9 D indicates Disabled Blank indicates Enabled SELECT LOOP0004 565 NETDATA EXIT F1 SHOW F2 BLOCK F3 EN DIS F4 R S F6 ALARM F7 SFPGM F8 Figure 8 2 Loop Directory SPECIAL FUNCTION PROGRAM SUBROUTINE DIRECTORY S MEMORY AVAILABLE 32702 C EN C EN C EN C EN NC DIS PROGRAM NC DIS PROGRAM NC DIS SUBROUTINE NC DIS SUBROUTINE PALLET 5 PALLET 6 PALLET 7 EET d Indicates Enable Disable C indicates Compiled Blank indicates Not Compiled SELECT SFPGMO0001 Press SFSUB F8 to move Selection cursor to the SF Subroutine directory 575 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 SHOW F2 BLOCK F3 DIS CP F4 PG RN F5 LOOP F6 ALARM F7 SFSUB F8 Figure 8 3 SF Program Subroutine Directory Screen TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFT for Batch Programming 8 3 Using S Memory Directories c ontinued S memory Each directory lists S memory available in bytes When you make a change Available to S memory either by adding to or deleting from your program S memory available is updated S memory available is also shown at the prompt line location bottom left of the screen of the Show screen and the Edit screen of a loop alarm or SF program subroutine Common S memory functions for loops alarms and special function programs are Function Keys initiated with a set of keys common to each direc
127. ERRO a eee a 4 Element SIZE ror CORRER HOOK eh ROC RE Ra RR Meads newman Race dol eli i ss 4 TSOFTFurclOnS 39 e 4e R33 prac abe Er RC REERIEERE eek ieee wee On Line Off Line Defined sssssssssssssssssess ene nnn On Line Off Line Functions Off Line Only F nctlons x x ete her i RE QUP Cp RAI RCCURUR A LR CH UERoe Las On Line Only F nc tons iiia eet eet ke e MEER D eel Rc deant Fra o dat e Using F nctlon Keys 2o dere eek Ricks C RR HERE REC KR GC ku ERR ER Rud Using Hard Keys isset eres re Rex ne pERESPPRDCPRREUAIPENEX a EXON OS RS Initiating TISO FT Functions with Hard Keys ssssssseeeeenn e TISOFTHELP System Hee emen e nnne nnn Accessing Help i meer heed ith bal dak ids ERU due cie Hot Key Help ss recis o rete e remedii BC aah put Baba ey de t ite al rece P Function Help eire ce e etie th ee Er X DECR PCR ea ex d Element Help ues tese ese teste Ree ERR Pede eR ero ede I aces eed Message Help eee eee e ERROR CY e Cac EX Kr ae Kd Element List oco ec eee ette ce elder hii ni f dor cito Maa Rea y d TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFT Basics 3 1 3 1 TISOFT Functionality Programming TISOFT provides a programming and diagnostic interface with your and Utilities controller You use TISOFT for entering and editing your programs as well as accessing programming utilities such as comment and block operations Menus enable simple step by step entry of program data For example when yo
128. ET Da ea Step 3 Installthe CP1413 Card sessin iaaii anina eee enn Step 4 Selectan Intemupt 0 mn Step 5 Selecta DRAM Address cece cect n Step 6 Configure Extended Memory Manager sasise Step 7 Select Unique Local Ethernet ACCI SS cece ccc eene Step 8 Install Software from Diskette ccc eee eee me Step 9 Ensure That the DRAM Address Does Not Conflict 0 cece cece ees Step 10 Preparing to Configure the H1 Network 0 ccc cee nee Step 11 Use COMLto Set up CP1413 Local Database Fora Single TISOFT Station Step 12 Use COMLto Set up CP1413 Local Database For Multiple TISOFT Stations Step 13 Reboot YOUF PC isis venie Rd Ue Ven dec ace ez e rac terion Step 14 Install H1 Cabling 2 0 0 teeta Step 15 Load C PIATS3 Dr Vets 2er teet e e osse Rieti AA dee Step 16 Load H1 Task Code Driver sssssssssssss nnn Step 17 Access H1 Devices Using TISOFT ssssseeeee e Step 18 Display TISOFT Start Up Screen oo cece ccc eee nnn Step 19 Select the H1 Network Node Names ssssssssse nnn Troubleshooting the H1 Network eeeeeeerrn nh Toublesh ootlhg J 25 exe haia iia dte C tide Rd f aed oe edo ll lf o dde For Expert Use Only Eror CodeS ccc cece ete eee eet teen etn eee nnn TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISO FT with H1 Communications G 1 G 1 Hardware and Software Requirements The hardware and software requirements needed for TI SOFT to c
129. Equal to Orange B 26 TISOFTMessages When you use AUX 19 to set the controller Scan Time this message indicates that the selected scan time has been written to the controller When you edit values CHGVAL in STATUS or CHART this message indicates that the selected value has been written to the controller This message is displayed when you edit a LOOP ALARM or Ramp Soak step The specified parameter must be greater than or equal to PV LOW and less than or equal to PV HIGH In a LOOP or ALARM the CLAMP SETPOINT LOW HIGH limits if non zero and the PV ALARM LOW LOW HIGH HIGH limits must be within PV range If the CLAMP SETPOINT limits are disabled both zero then the SETPOINT must be within PV range In a RAMP step the SETPOINT must be within PV range This message is displayed when you edit a LOOP ALARM or Ramp Soak step The specified parameter must be less than or equal to the PV span PV HIGH PV LOW In a LOOP or ALARM the ALARM DEADBAND and ORANGE DEVIATION ALARM must be within PV span In a SOAK step the DEADBAND must be within PV span This error occurs during edit of SF statements in an SF PROGRAM or SF SUBROUTINE The parameter indicated must be an element address for example V 100 Constant values or text are not allowed A non NOP instruction has been detected in an area of memory which will never be executed The instruction will beignored during program execution For example the area of L memory after the
130. Expression OLD INPUT Int Real Output Element or Addr E xpression MATH Free format math expression using integer or real Elements and Constants May be up to 74 tokens the smalled indivisible unit such as an operator or constant in length All Operators and Functions are valid Assignment operator is required TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming 817 SF Instructions and Parameters continued Instruction Field s Parameters PACK TO FROM TABLE TABLE ADDRESS NO OF POINTS Can have up to 20 pairs of NO OF POINTS and DATA START ADDR TorF Int Element or Addr Expression If TO table cannot be READ ONLY TABLE ADDR TOTAL NO OF POINTS 1 must be within configured memory range Int Constant greater than zero Element or Value or Address Expression DATA START ADDR 4 NO OF POINTS 1 must be within configured memory range parameters DATA START ADDR Int Real Constants Discrete or word Elements and Value or Address E xpressions DATA START ADDR 4 NO OF POINTS 1 must be within configured memory range If FROM table cannot be READ ONLY PACKAA TO FROM TABLE TorF TABLE ADDRESS Int Element or Addr Expression If TO table cannot be READ ONLY ALARM NUMBER Int Constant range 1 max Alarm Element or Value or Address Expression PARAMETERS Int Real F rom 1 to 8 Alarm data types may be listed NoID number If FROM table cannot be READ ON
131. F statement in an SFPGM SF SUB with both the 20 OFFSET and BI POLAR fields set to YES One or the other may be selected as YES not both Change one or both responses to NO The controller does not support the ability to find the requested element The user has attempted to delete Channel 1 or 2 in thel O Configuration Channels 1 and 2 are permanent defaults and cannot be deleted Additional channel configurations are optional This message is displayed during edit of ladder logic when the Comment editor COMMNT F 7 is invoked for an output type that does not havea comment associated with it for example NOP RTN Data received from the controller has been corrupted or lost perhaps due toa COMM PORT failure If using TI STAR Model 20 or Model 70 exit TISOFT check the cable connection between the DEU and the Operator Station and reenter TI SOFT Data received from the controller has been corrupted or lost perhaps due to a COMM PORT failure Data received from the controller has been corrupted or lost perhaps due to a COMM PORT failure Data received from the controller has been corrupted or lost perhaps due to a COMM PORT failure The selected COMM PORT does not exist Try a different port The task code error shown is unknown by TI SOFT You have terminated on line communications by pressing Alt C To restart communications return to the start up screen and press ONLINE F A4 Communications between TI SOFT and the
132. F3 to change the fields for copying word bit and bit of word synonyms to read YES Clearing a Table To clear a table press CLRCHT F4 Then press YES F2 This clears all entries from the table Clearing a To dlear a location from the chart display press CLRLOC F6 This clears all Location three fields of the line where the cursor is positioned 12 4 Using Global Search and Replace TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Completing the Table Fields Special Conditions Toreplace a range of elements type in the replacetype and starting identifier in the REPLACE field Then typein the ending identifier in the THRU field This defines the range of the element to be replaced Continue by keying in the new element type and starting identifier in the WITH field Therange of this element is defined by the range of the REPLACE and THRU fields For example replacing Y 1 through 4 with C11 will result in Y1 being replaced by C11 Y 2 replaced by C12 and so on see Figure 12 3 Filling in the table as shown in this example and pressing START F8 produces these results REPLACE THRU WITH Y1 gt C11 Y1 4 ctt Y2 2 C12 START BA Y3 gt C13 Y4 gt C14 Figure 12 3 Example of Search and Replace Operation You can make entries in the REPLACE and WITH fields to replace only a single element instead of a range of elements with an entry If you make an entry in the REPLACE column you must also make an entry in the WITH column otherwise y
133. FT Release 6 3 User Manual L4 Using TISOFT with TCP IP Starting TISOFT To start TISOFT you must perform the following tasks using TCP IP Communications 1 Install TISOFT as described in Chapter 1 2 Invoke the TCTCP task code driver as described below Toinvoke the TCTCP task code driver from the command line type TCTCP with the hex value of an unused interrupt from 80 to FF as the argument Often 0x80 and 0x81 are used by the CP 1413 TFNETDRV driver and the TF DDE driver n consequence 0x82 is usually a good choice If 0x82 is in use pick an unused value above 0x82 Example TCTCP 0x82 NOTE The TCTCP task code driver is a TSR terminate and stay resident program that resides in RAM and is lost every time you power cycle or reboot your machine Therefore the TCTCP task code driver must be invoked after every power cycle or reboot operation You can invoke the driver at the DOS command line or you can add the invocation to your AUTOEXEC BAT file sothat the driver is invoked automatically Invoke TISOFT using the TCP IP communications protocol Type the following command TI505 TCP At the TISOFT startup screen press ONLINE F4 TISOFT displays a list of connections that you specified in your host table file Select the controller connection that you want to use and press Return or ENTER F8 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISO FT with TCP IP F9 Using TISOFT with TC P IP continued Tro
134. Faux EE ANANKA KERIAN ca XX E See A RC RA Using FUNCTION Keys dx na epe ect Rr RR UR RET RR a eeea ended as Using Hard Keys score Loa bene ea a aaa BUE hee bed de de e ide dn ten Initiating TISO FT Functions with Hard Keys sssssssseeeeens e 3 7 pg eT Accessing Help HotKey Help ect 22 bre PERCHE ett teet e Be dk rte Dale atn F nctlon Help 3t rch eta toed aa oi E DIR daa peas Re E E a AAAA Und Ud Element Help nerd str rre mien aote ie t un ROPA En ae body dene yd d Message Help Element EISE 2 5 rx eet e rab a Eta etr Vet det o MR Et e Fate ea A Contents Chapter4 Configuring Controller Memory 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 Accessing Configuration Menu Reading Memory Configuration cccceeccee eere Displaying Memory Configuration sssi siiis ieii aa a eee ER Displaying OTf LIne iis sis e deine eniri e E EE ENEE I dar Rte kat ea aoh aa Displaying On Line siisii e REG RE EES ed AE RH ec EGER E Configuring Memory Off Line 0cccee eee eee menn Accessing Configuration Menu sissies 0 6 cece Configuration Menu FieldS 0 esee Selecting the Controller 2 cite cian RR a ee i each ew es Configuration Procedure 1 1 enn nn Entering Configuratio ore tete eee ieee e Rr nice eddies eid beds Configuring Memory On Line seeeeeseeennn nnns Configuration Procedure ssssssssssssssssses esee nn Entering Configuration serbe Ree a EDERR RUE I PI ee E XR ea
135. Figure 9 2 Comment Prompt Line 9 4 Documenting Programs TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using the Pop up To select an element using the pop up list use the following procedure List to Selectan Hement 1 Press V or Shift 2 to display a full listing of elements that may be commented See Figure 9 3 2 Usethearrow keys to select the element from the list For example if you want a comment tied to Y Highlight Y and press Return The element type Y xxx is displayed in the COMMENT field and you are returned to the previous screen See Figure 9 2 3 Typein the identifier for the element for example type in 450 in the COMMENT field 4 Press Return to go to the Comment Editor Menu Figure 9 4 Your Document Title LIST ELEMENT COIL MISC Y END LOOP C ENDC ALARM GTS SFPGM JMP SFSUB JMPE LBL MCR MCRE SBR SKP MORE DATE VERSION 545 LOADER EXIT F1 HELP F4 SELECT F8 Figure 9 3 Comment Pop up Hement List TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Documenting Programs 9 5 Preparing to Enter Comments continued Comment Parameters Invoking the Comment Editor Menu A comment for an element can be up to 16 lines in length with 60 characters in each line Options for printing with the page break field are begin a new page on the next odd page before the comment begin a new page before the comment or have no page bre
136. G ADDRESS NONE CLAMP SP LIMITS LOW 40 00000 SAMPLE RATE SECS 1 00000 HIGH 0 00000 PROCESS VARIABLE ADDRESS NONE PV RANGE LOW 0 00000 SPECIAL FUNCTION NO HIGH 100 000 PV IS BIPOLAR NO SQUARE ROOT OF PV NO 20 OFFSET ON PV YES ALARM DEADBAND 0 00000 MONITOR DEVIATION NO DEVIATION ALARM YELLOW 100 000 MONITOR LOW LOW HI HI NO ORANGE 4 100 000 MONITOR LOW HIGH NO PV ALARMS LOW LOW 0 00000 MONITOR RATE OF CHANGE NO LOW 0 00000 RATE OF CHANGE ALARM 40 00000 HIGH 100 000 HIGH HIGH 100 000 MONITOR BROKEN XMITTER NO S MEMORY AVAILABLE 384 ENABLED 565 NETDATA EXIT F1 EDIT F2 COMMNT F7 EN DIS F8 Figure 8 6 Analog Alarm Table 8 12 Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 8 7 Editing Analog Alarms Invoking the Edit Mode Making Entries to the Alam Table Status of Control Blocks during Edits Deleting Alarms To edit an alarm usethe Show function from the Alarm Directory to display the Alarm Table Then press EDIT F2 Use the arrow and Return to positi on the cursor on the field you wish to change Complete the fields in the Alarm Table by using the function keys available as you move the cursor onto each field or you can type in the element address or value required for each field Position the cursor in the fields with the arrow or Retum When you have completed entry of your alarm data press ENTER F8 to save the Alarm Table All entries i
137. HGVAL F2 2 At the prompt type in the element type either X Y C WX or WY along with the identifier for example X250 3 Usetheright arrow key to position the cursor on the value field 4 Ifyou wish to select another numeric display format press the SPACEBAR and then the function key for the desired format 5 Typein the valueto be forced for the selected element For discretes you can uselor 0 ON or OFF N or F or T or F 6 Press FORCE F4 Remember that if the format is real or double two consecutive memory locations will be forced Finding a Forced To find the next occurrence of a forced element for a specified type complete Hement the following steps from either the Status or Chart display 1 Press CHGVAL F2 2 At the prompt type in the element type either X Y C WX or WY 3 Typean identifier for the element type This number sets the starting point for the search The seek function will find the next occurrence of the forced element type after the number you select as the identifier 4 Ifyou wish to select another numeric display format press the SPACEBAR and then the function key for the desired format If the element you are trying to find is in double or real format both words must be forced or the seek operation does not read the element as forced 5 Press SEEK F3 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using Status Functions 10 17 10 13 Unforcing Elements Unforcing an To unforce an elem
138. I O SLAVE IDENT MODULE ADDRESS X Y WX WY 15 BCDO 32 16 16 0 32 ENABLED 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 FROM PLC OPERATE 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 READDK F3 WRITDK F4 READPC F5 WRITPC F6 EN DIS F7 f FROM PLC epee OPERATE 545 NETDATA PG RESTOR F8 X lt gt WX F3 Y lt gt WY F4 CMPACT F5 UNIFY F6 Figure 6 10 On Line PROHBUS DP Slave Edit Screen a WARNNG The WRITPC function sends new l O values immediately to the controller If your PROFIBUS DP communications are in OPERATE mode modifying your existing I O configuration can affect your ongoing process Unexpected process operation could cause serious injury or death to personnel and or damage to equipment Be prepared for the effect on your process and take any necessary safeguards if you choose to write an I O address value to the controller while your PROFIBUS DP communications are in OPERATE rather than STOP mode NOTE f you need to change communications from OPERATE to STOP mode before you perform an edit you can back out of the configuration screen press EXIT F1 and select the OPR ST F8 toggle at the status screen Next to return to the configuration screen where the Edit function is available press CONFIG F2 6 12 Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using Off Line Edit When you access the off line Edit screen you can only read and write the configuration from the selected
139. I SOFT has received an illegal value Verify your inputs Invalid parameter passed in a return from a subroutine During edit of a LOOP table this message indicates that the SPECIAL CALCULATION option has been selected but the SF Program number has not been specified Enter a valid SF Program number in the SPECIAL FUNCTION field A statement must be between 2 and 1023 bytes Check that size of statement conforms to these parameters An SF statement contains a data type that is not allowed The selected TI SOFT operation did not work because the password is enabled or the password operation is not allowed The CPU keylock can also cause this message This message indicates that a required parameter for a ladder element is missing Verify that all element parameters are supplied In output boxes PGTS PGTSZ XSUB an empty parameter cannot be before another parameter Instruction or rung exceeds program memory size ncrease L memory allocation The specified Label LBL is referenced in a Skip to Label SKP instruction but does not exist in the program The LBL must be defined in the same Task segment or Subroutine SBR as the SKP and must follow the SK P Either create the corresponding Label LBL or delete the Skip to L abel instruction referencing it TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFTMessages B15 Loop Card in Run Mode This message is displayed to alert the user who presses the EN DIS key to enable or disable an S
140. ISTAR reenter Programming Utilities using newly assigned security privilege Check TISTAR Model 20 or Model 70 cable connections between DEU and NIM Check NIM status Check DEU error log file Perform Auxiliary Function 29 to determine cause of failure This occurs when you try to delete a directory that still contains files Deletethe files in the directory first This message is displayed when you attempt to perform File Conversion to convert a program to Series 500 505 TI SOFT Release 5 0 or greater NoTISOFT user program files are found in the current source directory disk Change to the directory disk containing the program you wish to convert and invoke the File Conversion operation again This error occurs during a disk operation when either the source or destination directory becomes inaccessible while TI SOFT internally switches directories Perhaps the directory has been deleted or the disk drive has been popped open An attempt to open a TISOFT program file has failed becausethe file does not exist Perhaps the file has been accidentally deleted An attempt to write to a file has failed becausethe file which was previously opened successfully has been unexpectedly dosed This message occurs when you attempt to write data tothe disk and there is no more room on the disk to store data User must make room on the disk either by deleting documentation or program data OFFLINE or by exiting TISOFT and deleting non TI SOFT fi
141. ITDK F3 the color values will return tothe default settings when you exit and restart TISOFT This allows you to experiment with color combinations and still be able to revert to the default color scheme TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Setting up the TISOFTEnvironment 2 3 2 2 Managing Program Files The Program Management System PGMS feature in TISOFT enables you to store and use multiple programs and related functions such as creating directories deleting programs and related files and formatting diskettes within TISOFT The PGMS function is available from the Start up Screen Block Put and AUX functions TISOFT always shows the current program name on the status display line of the screen The default program is the one used in the last session You may store your programs in a single directory however if you have more than one series of SIMATIC controllers or if you have numerous application programs you may find it helpful to create a different subdirectory for each controller type or each large segment of your application Basic Features of A TISOFT program is a group of files with the same name but with different the PGMS System extensions A program or directory name can be up to eight characters long Two screen configurations are available to work with programs the Program Selection screen shown in Figure 2 2 and the Directory Selection screen shown in Figure 2 3 Both screens have a PATH line showing the current d
142. LE SELECTION PATH D TEST DATA __ SELECT CHART 4 LOADER1 LOADER2 PUMP7 FILENAME LOADER1 GS AND CHART TUS DISPLAY 000014 000000 i pr DHART1 ABORT F1 COPY F2 DELETE F3 RENAME F4 DIR F5 FLDTGL F6 Figure 2 4 Selecting Status Charts TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 545 LOADER1 RN SELECT F8 Setting up the TISOFT Environment 2 9 2 3 Backing up Program Files and Directories Always back up your files and directories on floppy disks to prevent losing data if you have a problem with the hard drive Use the DOS BACKUP and RESTORE functions to do this DOS BACKUP saves files from a source disk to a destination disk When the destination disk is full you receive a prompt to insert another floppy disk to store the remainder of the file DOS RESTORE transfers files previously stored on one disk to another disk both directories must have exactly the same name or the files will not transfer Refer to your DOS documents for instructions on how to use BACKUP and RESTORE 2 10 Setting up the TISOFT Environment TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 2 4 Selecting Off Line Operation To program off line using programming device only press OFFLINE F8 You then receivethe off line Ladder Display Figure 2 5 with function keys for accessing TI SOF T operations You are now ready to use TI SOFT ROW 1 COL 1 NETWORK STARTING ADD
143. LOG ALARMS NO SF PROGRAMS NO SF SUBROUTINES NO U MEMORY NO 1 V MEMORY 1 NO 1 V MEMORY 1 NO 1 V MEMORY 1 NO 1 V MEMORY 1 NO 1 V MEMORY 1 SELECT PLC MEMORY TO BE COMPARED AGAINST DISK 555 NETDATA RN ABORT F1 SAVE F2 LOAD F3 START F4 NO F5 YES F6 Figure 11 8 Verification Function Menu Use the arrow keys to position the cursor in the desired field Type in Yes or use F6 in the VERIFY field to indicate that a memory type is to be checked You also enter a memory range for the V and K memory locations After entering Yes in the VERIFY field use the right arrow key to position the cursor for entering beginning and ending memory addresses for verification To select either V or K memory press either V F5 or K F6 TISOFT checks the range for V and K memory entries and corrects the highest entry tothe memory configuration you have e fyou want to save your menu entries to disk press SAVE F2 e fyou want to display a compare screen that you have saved to disk press LOAD F3 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions 11 17 Comparing Controller Program to Disk AUX 17 continued Initiating the When you have completed entries to the verification menu press START F4 Compare to begin the compare Reading the After the comparison is run the status field displays whether the Compare Display comparison passed or failed for each location you selected You receive a listingin the MISMATCHED LOCA
144. LOR F6 PGMS F7 OFFLINE F8 Figure D 1 TISOFTStart up Screen TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFT with TISIAR PCS D 1 Accessing TISOFT When you select ONLINE F4 from the TISOFT Start up Screen the prompt On Line for selecting a secondary appears as shown in Figure D 2 ENTER SECONDARY NAME 13 CHARACTERS MAXIMUM 545 LOADER1 ABORT F1 ENTER F8 Figure D 2 Secondary Selection Screen To select a secondary follow these steps 1 Typein the appropriate name for the secondary that you configured in TISTAR PCS 2 Press ENTER F8 NOTE The system does not prompt you for a baud rate The baud rate is preconfigured at the factory f you receive any error messages while using TI SOFT refer to Appendix B D 2 Using TISOFT with TISIAR PCS TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual El E2 E3 EA E5 Appendix E Using TISOFT with TIWAY Communicating through TWAY eeeseeee nnns E 2 Setting up the TIWAY I and UNILINK Host Adapters 0 cc cece nnn E 2 Setting up the TIWAY Host Adapter Card sssssseeese nes E 2 TISO FT O N NE i ertet etre wae ESQ ame QUE Uv sax UR s eR BOR Eo bene a aa eats E 3 Selecting Secondary with TIWAY I Host Adapter 0c ccc ceee cece e eee eens Checking UNILINK Host Adapter Configuration een nnn E 5 Select Secondary with UNILINK Host Adapter or TIWAY Host Adapter Card Configuring UNILINK Host Adapter ssssssssnsnsnnnnnsn
145. LY PACKLOOP TO FROM TABLE TorF TABLE ADDRESS Int Element or Addr Expression If TO table cannot be READ ONLY LOOP NUMBER Int Constant range 1 max Loop Element or Value or Address Expression PARAMETERS Int Real From 1 to 8 Loop data types may be listed No ID number If FROM table cannot be READ ONLY PACKRS TO FROM TABLE TorF TABLE ADDRESS Int Element or Addr Expression If TO table cannot be READ ONLY LOOP NUMBER Int Constant range 1 max Loop Element or Value or Address Expression NUMBER OF STEPS Int Constant range 1 256 Element or Value or Address Expression TABLE ADDR No of Steps 6 1 must be within configured memory range STARTING STEP Int Constant range 1 256 Element or Value or Address Expression PETWD No parameters PowerM ath only 8 18 X Using TISOFT for Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Instruction Field s Parameters PRINT PORT 1 ASCII message printer port 1 2 ASCII message printer port 2 3 both ASCII message printer ports MESSAGE Free format entry Text enclosed in double quotes Formfeed F F gt enclosed in double quotes Element addresses and Expressions separated by a space no embedded spaces in Expressions To print date Element or Expression DATE To print time Element or Expression TIME To print text from memory Element or Expression nnn where nnn is number of characters If nnn 0 first word in
146. M data file Increase the U memory configuration TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Unable to Create Print File Unbalanced Parentheses Unconfigured Base Unexpected RTN Unexpected SBR Before END Unknown Instruction Unknown Secondary Unknown Standby Message Returned Value Must Be Greater than Zero Value Must Be within SP Range TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual This message occurs when you attempt to print toa file and for some reason the file cannot be created Perhaps the disk is write protected or full the disk drive may have been popped open or a disk hardware failure may have occurred This message indicates that the specified math expression in an SFSUB box parameter in RLL or in an SF statement in an SF Program Subroutine contains an improper number of left and right parentheses There must be one right parenthesis for each left one and vice versa This message indicates that a base on an unconfigured channel has been referenced during the I O Configuration operation An extraneous Return RTN instruction has been used in the RLL program The specified subroutine SBR is referenced in a Go to Subroutine GTS PGTS PGTSZ instruction but the corresponding SBR itself does not exist in the program Either create the corresponding subroutine SBR or delete the Go to Subroutine GTS PGTS PGTSZ instruction referencing it When you are editing or finding SF statement
147. ME SLICE MS LADDER SF SUB TIME SLICE MS NORMAL COMMUNICATION TIME SLICE 002 MS PRIORITY COMMUNICATION TIME SLICE 003 MS LADDER SF SUB ZERO 0 TIME SLICE 001 MS cu NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS TIME SLICE 000 MS i supported REPORT BY EXCEPTION TIME SLICE MS by controller PEAK TOTAL SCAN TIME MS READ ONLY TOTAL SCAN TIME LAST SCAN MS READ ONLY PEAK DISCRETE EXECUTION TIME MS READ ONLY DISCRETE SCAN TIME LAST SCAN MS READ ONLY 545 NETDATA RN EXIT F1 VAR F2 FIXED F3 LIMIT F4 READ F5 WRITE F6 RSTPKS F7 TSCAN F8 Figure 11 9 Scan Time Display for 545 Controller AUX 19 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions 11 19 Setting Contoller Scan Time AUX 19 continued To select a fixed scan time 1 Press FIXED FS 2 Position the cursor on the total scan time field and type in the desired scan time 3 Press WRITE F6 to enter the new scan time To select a variable scan time 1 Press VAR F2 2 Press WRITE F6 to enter the new scan time To select a variable scan time with an upper limit 1 Press LIMIT F4 2 Position the cursor on the total scan time field and type in the desired upper limit 3 Press WRITE F6 to enter the new scan time To tune the time slices allocated for each of the operations 1 Usethereturn or arrow keys to position the cursor on the time slice field and type in the desired upper limit 2 After completing your changes
148. MOVE DELETE PUT Only Figure 13 1 Menu Chartto Ladder Block Functions To invoke a block operation enter the memory type source starting and ending addresses and destination starting address The source addresses set the memory range of the block and the destination address sets the starting point for the destination range of the block F or block deletes the destination address is not needed For ladder memory the addresses are automatically adjusted to rung boundaries TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 13 4 Making Entries to Block Menus from Ladder Display Block Parameters Entering Block Parameters After you select the desired block function a prompt such as that shown below for the copy operation appears for entering addresses to be acted on by the function Usethe arrow keys to move the cursor through the address parameters COPY LADDER RANGE 00001 THRU 00001 BEFORE 00001 Memory Ending Source Type Beginning Source Address or Destination Block Type Address or Identifier Address or Identifier Identifier A WARNING Program integrity could be corrupted when performing a block copy or put ON LINE if you designate a block size that causes memory overflow program rungs can be pushed off the end of the program to accommodate the entire block operation Failure to follow appropriate safety precautions could result in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Requ
149. MS DOS Windows Software ccc cece cece eee eens Configuring the CP 5412 Card for Network Operation 0 ccc eens J 3 J 3 Installing the PROABUS AMS Communications Processor and Software Installing the FMS CP Module in a SIMATIC 505Base cece cece cece eee eens 4 Installing the COM5434 Configurator Software ccc eee n 4 Configuring the FMSCP Module sssssssssss ee J 4 J 4 J 5 6 6 6 J 7 Connecting to the PROFIBUS Network isssssssssssseesss e nnns J 4 Building an FMS Node List reoooeeeee n nnm Whatis a Node LIS siia i ke esce ide bee tor tede rte rbd eed bei Using a Text Editor to Create the Node List 0 eee Change the Extension to FNL triarii ien iie Ea nnn j5 Establishing RMS Communications in TISOFT eee nnn nnn Initia lizing the TC PFB Task Code Driver sssssssssseeeeeeee Invoking TISOFTwith FMS Communications sssssseeeeeer ae Creating a TISOFT Shortcut Icon to Invoke FASCommunications 00065 Selecting an FMS Station from the Node List cece eects TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISO FT with FMS J 1 J 1 FMS Communications Overview To establish FMS communications you must perform the following tasks These tasks are described in more detail on the pages that follow Install CP 5412 A2 card in your PC Install S7 5412 MS DOS Windows software
150. MS F7 To change to another program press PGMS F7 and select the new program name Then press YES F2 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions 11 7 11 4 Clearing Controller Memory AUX 13 31 37 41 74 77 Clear PLC AUX 13 Clearing Memory Types AUX 31 37 e Clear ladder and variable memory e Setthescan time to variable Use AUX 13 to perform the following operations e Clear discrete elements X Y and C including forced points e Clear DCP DSP DSC DCC TCP and TCC memories e Performa complete restart To execute AU X 13 use the numeric keys to enter 13 at the AU X menu prompt then press Return When you receive the message CLEAR PLC confirm by pressing YES F2 41 74 77 through 77 to dear S memory types 11 8 Use AUX 31 through 37 to dear ladder variable word constant TCC TCP or DSP DCP memory types Use AUX 41 to clear U memory and AUX 74 To clear memory types type in the number of the AUX function at the prompt on the AU X menu then press pressing YES F2 Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions Return Confirm the operation by TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 11 5 Saving Controller Memory Data to Disk AUX 42 60 67 Saving Memory Types AUX 42 60 67 Executing Program Saves Use AUX 42 and AUX 60 67 to save specified types of memory data from your controller to disk or directory NOTE Your control
151. Menu Completing the Prompt Fields 0 I n nnn Replacing an Element 3 esse eee eka eae eee bn eet eres Using a Global Search and Replace Table sseeeenn n n n n n n n n n Invoking the Table Display ssssseeeee m Copying Comments and Synonyms Cleanng a Table ixi ache Hada back baad PR CR Een ila a AEA EE ee ndn Clearing a LOCATION esee Completing the Table Fields siriani riai aia aea ia II Special Coriditioris s s rye iia ieataade d oret er Ee C eene Pil ear PROC Ra E atate x Building a Table 25 52isllouzrui iua ese adele weedeat anew RR era ae wee TR n Building Tables ioi erento eoe a e Res tek i Rte o ERI at ER b Aa A Building a Table from a Read Display 0 60 n 12 6 Building a Free Form Entry Table ssssssseeee eee kioii AAAA 12 7 Chapter13 Performing Block Data Functions 13 1 13 2 xiv Block Functions Defined useeereeeese nnn nnnm rrr Typesof Block Functions serbe e SR ERG EO DRY Wo R REG E CROCO RE ORE ed ee Block Functionality from Ladder Display seen n n n n n n n n n n n nn BIOCK CODY ro Potete ere esi at Ri au AB UR cnet Uc Ru ee OR DR ERU Ru d ys seduce P u Block Delete 153 veces eek reb pk Do HEC Ead OR aeiaU Rat Or FALSO opa OU bad ahd BIOS PRUE 32er Leere ex cic nok Goat egeat e dea aee PC ER ER I dde darn Accessing Block Operati
152. Module and AUI Drop TISOFT 6ES5727 1xxxx Figure G 8 Two Port Tansceiver Cabling NOTE Thetwo port transceiver must be terminated internally if the trunk cableis not installed See the transceiver manual 6GK 1 972 1A4A00 0AA 1 for instructions on terminating the transceiver TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFT with H1 Communications G 17 Steps for Installing and Configuring the CP1413 Module continued Step 15 Load CP1413 Drivers Verify CP 1413 Configuration To confirm that you have successfully accomplished the configuration of your CP 1413 card and the installation of your memory manager you can generate a textual database and use it to test the system 1 Display theY sinec com directory This directory contains the default database description H 1 TXT which was installed along with the TF NET 1413 software You can use the CVH1TF utility to create a sample local database LDB from the H1 TXT database description From the DOS command prompt enter cvhltf hl txt sinec data startup ldb Next change to the sinec bin directory To start up the CP card enter startcp bat f the system is correctly configured the messages CPok and LDB downloaded appear on the screen If a problem is reported or the system locks up it is probably due to a conflict in either the dual port address or the AT bus interrupt which you can correct Run cA sinec bin netinst exe and change the settings The prompts you
153. NSCALE operation is invalid This is an internal TISOFT error and should not occur under normal usage The TISOFT help system files may have been corrupted The controller or TISOFT malfunctioned The data in the selected file contains invalid data or has an invalid data format Make surethe data in the fileis correct The controller or TI SOFT malfunctioned Check MATH IMATH and IF THEN statements This error occurs if the specified directory path does not exist This error occurs if the specified drive does not exist Theimport of synonyms or comments has encountered invalid information in the element record following the given element Check the element type range case data size and delimiters Theimport of synonyms or comments has encountered invalid information in the first element record of the text file Check the element type range case data size and delimiters TISOFTMessages B13 Invalid Element Type Press for Valid Types Invalid Expression Invalid Instruction in Subroutine Invalid Location Invalid Message From DEU Invalid Network Address Invalid Operation with the Local Remote Mode Invalid Operator in an Expression B 14 TISOFTMessages This message is displayed when the user specifies an element type that is illegal for the current field Press the or Shift keys to display a screen listing valid element types for the current field Also during
154. O Point Locations Finding an I O To find an I O point complete the following steps Point 1 AtthePROFIBUS DP Slave Status screen press FIND F3 See Figure 6 14 2 TherrIND I O POINT prompt shown in Figure 6 17 appears 3 Typein thel O point you wish to find and press Return PROFIBUS DP SLAVE STATUS SLAVE ENABLED ASSIGNED ONLINE YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES FIND I O POINT X0002 FOUND AT SLAVE MODULE DONE 545 NETDATA PG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 EXIT F1 NEXT F2 Figure 6 17 Find I O Point Prompt e fthel O Point is not found an ELEMENT NOT FOUND message displays e f only one or the last I O Point is found the location SLAVE and MODULE and a DONE message displays e f morethan onel O Point is found the location SLAVE and MODULE and a MORE message displays Press NEXT F2 to display the next location e TISOFT searches both PROFIBUS DP and Series 505 I O 6 20 Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 7 1 7 2 73 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 Chapter 7 Using TISOFTfor Discrete Programming ladderPiogrammilij 2122229 RUDI erERRA TER RAREPEEREFAA S RRR RARRZRCERSNRPRRRARAR Accessing Program Entry Functions ssssseeeee nnne nnn Displaying Networks esseeennnn nnne nne rr n n Entering Editing Ladder Program Elements enn n n n n
155. O response Not Equal to Not E qual Relational Contact Off Line Password P Access password functions offline Output O Create edit output coil PageUp PgUp Page Down PgDn Page Left Ctrl Page Right Ctrl Pop Up Synonyms Ctrl L Edits synonym descriptor Print Screen Ctrl PrtSc PrtSc Quick SF Edit Ctrl O Go to SF to show or edit Quick Single Scan AltQ Perform single scan Single Scan V Invokes single scan function Status S Invokes ladder status function Usage Table Ctrl U V M emory E ditor Ctrl V VERT J Creates Down line U Creates Up line VERTD M Deletes vertical line On screen cross reference Ctrl X Valid Ladder display XREF rung where cursor is located YES Y For a YES NO response TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Glossary 23 Index A Aux 85 password selection and access 11 31 Aux 86 PROFIBUS DP communications mode Address 11 32 ethernet for each device G 5 G 10 G 13 Aux functions selecting for each device G 5 G 10 G 13 Addressing TSAPs multiple user installations single user Alarms analog sd ees invoking directory 8 12 Application ID for 575 2 13 4 8 Assistance technical xxxi Aux 10 powering up controller 11 5 Aux 11 partial restart Aux 12 complete restart Aux 13 31 37 41 74 77 clearing controller memory 11 8 Aux 14 16 18 setting time functions 11 10 Aux 15 20 23 27 28 29 performing controller diagnostic 11 13 11 1
156. OCK EN DIS PG RN LOOP ALARM SFPGM On Line Only epe pe wp I I I I epe D t ek ey See E PECES Vary with cursor position to display valid options AUX AUX On Line Only af Ie A 2 Menu Maps TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual BLDC HT BLDCHT On and Off Line EXIT DIRECT ASCII CLRCHT CLRLOC RDCHT WRCHT EXIT LF gt RT RT gt LF TP gt BM ABORT SWAP EHRE ENTER H4 _ SPACEBAR DOUBLE REAL TMR 1S TMR1MS BLOCK From Ladders From Ladders ABORT COPY MOVE DELETE PUT Only TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Menu Maps A 3 BLOCK From Loop Alam n a BLOCK From Loop Alarm or SF ABORT COPY MOVE DELETE PUT Only PUT Only peo T I II I e peor T DeepIe Tee PUT Only CHART EXIT READ SEEK FORCE UNFORC UN ALL WRITE 7 SPACEBAR A 4 Menu Maps TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual CONHO Series 505 cc r EY om rm CONFIG On Line EXIT SHOW READDK WRITDK READPC WRITPC READBS CLRBS COMPAR EN DIS SPACEBAR FIND On and Off Line EXIT SYNTGL EXIT NEXT CONFIG Off Line EXIT SHOW READRM WRITRM EN DIS DELCHN CLRBS EXIT SYNTGL TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Menu Maps A 5 CONHO PRORBUS DP C
157. ONFIO On Line CONFIO Off Line EXIT CONFIG FIND MERGE EN DIS 50510 NE DELETE epe pe Tel Tende On and Off Line EXIT NEXT EXIT SYNTGL On Line EXIT E READDK WRITDK READPC WRITPC evos gt SPACEBAR fuese EXIT E READRM WRITRM Iq EN DIS I SPACEBAR Lr On Line Only pem come CAN A 6 Menu Maps TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual CONFME CONFME On Line EXIT READDK WRITDK READPC WRITPC o REQAPP SPACEBAR 4 es nce se COLOR EXIT READDK WRITDK TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Menu Maps A 7 DOCUM EXIT TITLE COM EXIT IMPORT EXPORT SETUP EE RECOVR gt RETURN y ABORT DELLN INSLN EDIT DELETE ENTER SYN EXIT IMPORT EXPORT SETUP Sa RECOVR RETURN Y asort DELLN INSLN FIND DELETE DESCR TITLE ABORT EBEN DELLN INSLN EDIT DELETE ENTER COMPSE A 8 Menu Maps TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual EDIT On and Off Line except PG RN On Line Only eso T T T a a SPACEBAR IRI U asort lt gt 9 gt gt lt 7 74 peo ie ve T 2 Tn oem T een SPACEBAR HND FIND On and Off Line EXIT ADDR NXTIN a WDBTGL OUTTGL TISOFT Release 6 3 Use
158. ONFIO enables you to display and edit I O configuration COMTGL toggles the display of comments on or off SYNTGL toggles the display of synonyms on or off DOCUM allows you to display and edit comments synonyms and program titles Ctrl L invokes the pop up synonym editor Ctrl U accesses the Element Usage Table Ctrl V Ctrl K accesses the V K memory editor for modifying the values and display format for V and K memory locations Ctrl O jumps zooms to the SF program or SF subroutine that the cursor is on in ladders TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFTBasics 3 5 TISOFT Functions continued Off Line Only Functions On Line Only Functions 3 6 TISO FT Basics Alt H initiates help menu Alt R records keystrokes for reuse Alt S stops recording keystrokes Alt P plays recorded keystrokes Alt L initiates continuous replay of recorded keystrokes Alt W writes recorded keystroke macros to a file Alt O reads recorded keystroke macros from a file f S memory is configured you have the following additional functions available at the ladder display LOOP displays the loop directory for entry edit of loops and ramp soak steps ALARM displays the analog alarm directory for entry edit of analog alarms SFPGM displays the SF program and SF subroutine directory for entry edit of SF PGMs and SFSUBs These functions are available only from the off line ladder display menu P allows you to invoke the passwo
159. P1413 driver does not run in protected mode If you want to run more than one application for example H 1 Configurator or TISOFT over H 1 close one of the applications before running the other application G 22 TISOFTwith H1 Communications TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual G 3 Troubleshooting the H1 Network Troubleshooting Improperly matching up addresses and TSAPs between local and remote units leads to most of the communications problems in the H1 network The most common situations are discussed below Address mismatch problems for example Addresses set up using the configurator and downloaded into the 505 CP1434TF module need to match both with the addresses set up for the CP1413 card using COML 1413 TF and with the address given when the CP 1413 NETINST EXE program was executed Ethernet address chosen must be unique it cannot already exist on the H1 network Power problems for example Power may need to be connected to the H1 network transceiver Power must be connected to Series 505 base Power must be connected to personal computer Cabling problems for example TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Cable must be connected to CP1413 card Cable must be connected to CP1434TF H1 cable from CP 1413 and from 505 CP 1434 must be connected to an Ethernet transceiver Ethernet thicknet cable must be connected between transceivers Terminating Resistor must be connected to the transceiver on the two end nodes
160. PROFIBUS DP slaves There are three ways that you can assign or modify the starting module addresses of your PROFIBUS DP slaves You can edit on line edit off line or use the U pdate function Section 6 4 describes U pdate which is an automated procedure that loads bus parameters and prompts you to provide addresses for any modules requiring them If you want to edit individual module addresses selectively see Section 6 5 Tofamiliarize yourself with the options available from the on and off line status and configuration screens and practice moving between them before you load your configuration consult Section 6 6 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O 6 7 6 4 Loading a PROHBUS DP I O Configuration to the Controller I O Configuration Guidelines Using Update Before entering your I O configuration be aware of the following restrictions e For bit or bit and word modules but not for word only modules the number for the I O address must begin on an eight point boundary An eight point boundary is n 8 1 for example 1 9 17 etc Addresses not starting on an eight point boundary are changed to do so when you write the values e TISOFT does not flag duplicate I O points The Update function automatically writes bus parameters and any previously configured slaves to the controller and prompts you on a case by case basis to supply addresses for unconfigured slave modules In the case of a new con
161. READPC F 4 then WRITDK F3 PLC Memory This message is displayed during an AU X Load operation AU X 90 99 Configuration Is when the memory configuration in the controller is not large enough to Smaller than Disk accommodate the memory configuration on the disk Make sure the controller memory configuration is at least as large as the disk memory configuration Parameter out of Range If you are editing parameters in an SFSUB box in RLL or SF statements in an SF Program Subroutine this message indicates that the specified parameter is out of the valid range for the current field If specifying an element address for example V5121 or C2049 the address exceeds the current memory or I O configuration for the element type If specifying a constant value the value is either less than the minimum or greater than the maximum value expected Port Configuration Not The port configuration operation is only allowed from the programmable Supported from This logic controller local ports Other connections such as a remote base Connection controller RBC will generate this message Press Alt H for Help While using TISOFT if you need information on what hot keys are Anywhere within active a description of a TISOFT feature an explanation of how a TISOFT particular controller instruction operates or what an error message means press Alt H for context sensitive help Press Syntax to Verify The controller isin RUN TIME EDIT and may contain prog
162. REAL FTSR OUT ABS FRAC DCP AACK APVH K P BINBCD PRINT ARCCOS LN DSC ACF APVL V T BCDBIN CALL ARCSIN LOG DSP ACFH ARCA WX LADB SCALE PACK ARCTAN ROUND STW ACFL ATS WY LERR UNSCALE LEAD LAG CEIL SIN TCC AVE LKC AADB LHA MATH RETURN COS SQRT TCP LACK LKD AERR LHHA PACKLOOP EXP TAN C LCF LPVH AHA LLA PACKAA FLOOR TRUNC X LCFH LPVL AHHA LLLA PACKRS Y LCFL LRCA ALA LMN GOTO SFEC LVF LTD ALLA LMX LABEL PRINT OPTIONS LRSF LRSN ITI AODA LODA EXIT NNN TIME LTS APV LPV IIF lt FF gt DATE ASP LSP FTSR IN PETWD READ ONLY ASPH LSPH LONG UNSIGNED ASPL LSPL EXPRESSION OPERATORS AYDA LYDA C G NOT MOD lt lt gt amp Acs VMS VMM AND OR lt gt lt lt gt gt NOT VALID IN IMATH IF G HEX CONSTANT OH7FFF BINARY CONSTANT 0B01011010 EXIT F1 Figure 8 8 SF Programming Entries List NOTE You cannot use to invoke the SF Programming Entries screen you must use the SHIFT and keys 8 22 Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Status of Contol Blocks during Edits PowerMath Functional Support When you show or edit a particular special function program or subroutine the control block enabled disabled status remains constant However when you press ENTER F8 the control block is automatically disabled to enter your edit The control block is restored to its original status enabled or disabled upon exit to the directory You c
163. RESS 1 L MEMORY AVAILABLE 8192 eo 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 EDIT F2 FIND F3 DOCUM F4 BLOCK F5 REPLAC F6 BLDCHT F7 WRITDK F8 f i 545 NETDATA PRINT F1 CONFME F2 CONFIO F3 COMTGL F4 SYNTGL F5 LOOP F6 ALARM F7 SFPGM F8 Figure 2 5 Off Line Ladder Display To return to the Start up menu press EXIT F1 or Esc NOTE You can press ese from any function key line to exit to the next higher level or previous screen For information on the various TISOFT operations see the section that describes the function you plan to perform TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Setting up the TISOFTEnvironment 2 11 2 5 Selecting On Line Operation To use TISOFT on line communicating with controller press ONLINE F4 This displays the on line ladder screen as shown in Figure 2 6 NOTE If your controller is a 575 refer to the next sections for information on selecting applications and configuring ports ROW 1 COL 1 NETWORK STARTING ADDRESS 1 X 545 NETDATA RN EXIT F1 EDIT F2 FIND F3 DOCUM F4 BLOCK F5 AUX F6 STATUS F7 CHART F8 f SPACEBAR y 545 NETDATA RN PRINT F1 CONFME F2 CONFIO F3 COMTGL F4 SYNTGL F5 LOOP F6 ALARM F7 SFPGM F8 Figure 2 6 On Line Ladder Display From this display you can access the Edit mode for Relay Ladder Logic programming by pressing EDIT F2 or the Special Function programming menus by pressing the SPACEBAR followed by
164. Ramp Soak steps this message is displayed when the range of steps specified in the source Ramp Soak table exceeds the number of steps actually programmed An attempt has been made to read past the end of the table Specify the actual range of steps programmed For read operations in general this message simply indicates that part or all of the information requested does not exist TISOFTMessages B21 Reset Current Transaction Reverse Power Flow Reverse Power Flow or Connection to Element Missing RTN Missing in Subroutine SBR Referenced But Not Defined Secondary Connection Failed Secondary Is Not Valid S Memory Overflow B 22 TISOFT Messages Controller or TISOFT has malfunctioned This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not valid An example appears below C1 C2 C3 C8 ae C4 C5 C6 C7 This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not valid An example appears below C2 a ee A required Return RTN instruction has been omitted from the subroutine at the specified address A Go to Subroutine GTS PGTS PGTSZ instruction references an SBR that does not exist in the program Either create the specified Subroutine SBR or delete the Go to Subroutine GTS PGTS PGTSZ instruction that references it The DEU has failed to connect to the named TI STAR Model 20 or Model 70 se
165. Re Rc ROGER RI RR RU ee EORR ERU ob Ro bd d Saving Cornmmglits iion etcetera tape ante Ale de dee E ec nat o Ronde aea Contents 9 8 Importing and Exporting Synonyms and Comments eeeeeeener Setup Procedure eere ran eee dicke ich A Edi ie aede ios Setting the Field Delimiter llsssesseseseee Selecting Quotes Around Data cc eect eee Selecting the End of Record Character sssssessse ees Import Export Procedure eee RR eR RE ER ka ec e e Comment Fields 5 2 5 ax ect tte DUC OF ease eee AW Roe RO TORE SynonymiFlelds see carcere eer ge tale ue PR ara e cese ab o or e deae Rules for Importing Synonyms and Comments sasssa Exporting Synonyms and Comments sssssssssssse eese Chapter10 Using Status Functions 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 Status Functions Available sssssssssssssssuusuununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennunn Accessing Status Fictions 12292319 iiiebeecideecslisesvedasseusctasiassecdiiates Accessing Chart and Ladder SatusFunctions sss Accessing the List Display sssssssesseeeeeeee hs Building a Status Chart sseesseeeeseeee nnne nn nnn Accessing Build Chart 00 cece eese eee eee Making Entriesin the Chat i isioskibsse erbe anai ei aaa Reb ERE Paar ae Displaying Data in ASCII Format Changing NUMENC FOMMAt is ches erheben rep RE Rea ee daa RES Entering Elements in Sequence Clearing and Sav
166. Return NOTE Programming devices connected through the same Dual Communication Port DCP cannot lock each other out nor can multiple hosts on the same TI WAY Network Interface Module NIM If the controller is unlocked you receive the following display PLC IS UNLOCKED CURRENT lt PORT NAME gt EXIT F1 UNLOCK F2 LOCK F3 To lock the controller press LOCK F3 To confirm your request to lock the controller press YES F2 at the LOCK PLC prompt Press NO F1 if you decide not to lock the controller If the controller is locked the display shows the Comm Port or the address of the RBC port that executed the lock and gives the current port or channel connection PLC IS LOCKED AT PORT NAME gt CURRENT PORT NAME gt EXIT F1 UNLOCK F2 LOCK F3 Tounlock the controller press UNLOCK F2 from the port where the lockout was initiated Port Name can be one of the following COMM PORT CHAN BASE CHAN BASE SLOT CPU CPU CHAN BASE CPU PORT 11 28 Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 11 15 Programming EEPROMs AUX 84 AUX 84 Functions Selecting RAM or EEPROM Copying from RAM to EEPROM Use AU X 84 to perform the following tasks Your controller must be in PROGRAM mode when using AU X 84 e Copy the contents of RAM to EEPROM e Copy the contents of EEPROM to RAM e Erase the contents of EEPROM e Select EEPROM as the p
167. SF programs and subroutines See Chapter 4 for information on configuring memory NOTE You must disablethe SF program or SF subroutine before you can select compile or no compile mode When an SF program or SF subroutine is compiled a c is shown beside the number identifying the SF control block in the directory The absence of a C indicates that the SF control block is interpreted not compiled When displaying or editing an SF program subroutine the status is shown at the right margin of the prompt line The message then shows either CP for compiled or blank for interpreted not compiled 8 32 Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 9 1 Documenting Your Ladder Program ssssseeeen nnne nnn nnn 9 2 Preparing to Enter Comments sssessse nnne rn nn 9 3 Entering Comments 0 0c cc cece cece eee eee eee nana anra ra an a n n n n n nn 9 4 Preparing to Enter Synonyms and or Descriptors 9 5 Entering Synonyms and or Descriptors 9 6 Titling Programs eese nnn nnn n n nn 9 7 Entering Comments in S Memory Programs 9 8 Importing and Exporting Synonyms and Comments TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Chapter 9 Documenting Programs Documenting Programs 9 1 9 1 Documenting Your Ladder Program Available To help you in documenting your application program TISOFT provides Documentation three methods for identifying elements in your programs You can
168. SFPGM F8 To return to the Start up menu press EXIT F1 or Esc NOTE You can press Esc from any function key line to exit to the next higher level or previous screen 2 12 Setting up the TISOFT Environment TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Selecting On Line For 575 controllers pressing ONLINE F4 displays a screen for selecting the Operation for the application to be accessed by the controller See Figure 2 7 575 Contoller APPLICATION ID TABLE APPLICATIONS A B CONNECTION ID A NETDATA EXIT F1 CURPRT F2 CURDSK F3 PORTCF F6 ENTER F8 Figure 2 7 Application ID Table for 575 Controllers Typethe letter A to Z of the application you want to connect to or press F2 or F3 as described below You must assign a valid Connection ID in order to go on line Thefollowing function keys are available in the Application ID Table screen e CURPRT F2 sets the CONNECTION ID field to the current port assignment e CURDSK F3 reads the application I D of the user program on the disk and sets the Connection ID field If no Application ID exists the Connection ID field is blank e PORTCF F6 accesses the Port Configuration screen See the following sections for more information on configuring ports e Pressing ENTER F8 or Return sets the port assignment to the selected application and displays the on line ladder screen See Figure 2 6 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Man
169. SIEMENS SIMATIC 505 TISOFT2 Release 6 3 User Manual Order Number PPX TS505 8101 7 Text Assembly Number 2590576 0007 Seventh Edition ADANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation that if not avoided will result in death or serious injury DANGER is limited to the most extreme situations A WARNNG WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation that if not avoided could result in death or serious injury and or property damage A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation that if not avoided could result in minor or moderate injury and or damage to property CAUTION is also used for property damage only accidents Copyright 1998 by Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA Reproduction transmission or use of this document or contents is not permitted without express consent of Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc All rights including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design are reserved Since Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc does not possess full access to data concerning all of the uses and applications of customer s products we do not assume responsibility either for customer product design or for any infringements of patents or rights of others which may result from our assistance MANUAL PUBLICATION HISTORY SIMATIC 505 TISOFT2 Release 6 3 User Manual Order Manual Numb
170. SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 565 NETDATA RN EXIT F1 NEXTDM F2 SWPRBC F3 RUNALL F5 RUNDIA F8 Figure 11 10 RBC Diagnostics Menu TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions 11 21 Performing I O Diagnostics AUX 21 AUX 25 continued Locating Dual Media Bases Swapping RBC Roles Display Failed I O AUX 25 To locate the next dual media base after the channel and base number entered at the prompt line press NEXTDM F2 You receive a message either telling you no dual media was found or giving you the next base number with dual media To change active and standby roles of RBCs on a particular base complete the following steps from the diagnostics menu 1 At the prompt type in the channel and base number desired 2 Press SWPRBC F3 Use AUX 25 to determine the status of the I O modules in your system To invoke the operation type in 25 at the AU X menu prompt and press Return A listing of the modules is shown by channel base and slot number with any failures indicated 11 22 Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 11 11 Checking RLL Program Syntax AUX 22 Performing Syntax Use AUX 22 to check your RLL program for errors that will prevent the Check controller from entering RUN mode such as UNKNOWN INSTRUCTION LADDER ELEMENT OUT OF RANGE NO CORRESPONDING PAIR Of OUT OF MEMORY This Syntax Check is also available from various function key menu
171. T You can select foreground and background colors on your TISOFT displays Colors from the following list Enter the number or letter beside your color selection on the menu 0 Black 8 Gray 1 Blue 9 Light Blue 2 Green A Light Green 3 Cyan B Light Cyan 4 Red C Light Red 5 Magenta D Light Magenta 6 Brown E Yellow 7 White F Bright White The numbers 0 through 7 are valid for background colors 0 through F are valid entries for foreground colors Assigning Color The menu shows a sample of the color corresponding to each number that Selections you type in When the menu is displayed the cursor is in the background BG field for display color Complete the steps below to enter your color selection on the configuration menu 1 2 Type in the number of the color that you want the display background Use the right arrow key to move the cursor to the foreground FG field Type in the color number or letter 0 through 9 and A through F Press Return or the arrow key to position the cursor in the next field Repeat steps 1 4 until you have completed the color selection Press WRITDK F3 to save the new color configuration to disk or press READDK F2 to revert to the default colors or to previously saved color values Press EXIT F1 or ese to return to the start up screen and activate your color configuration NOTE f you do not save your new color configuration with WR
172. TI SOFT at any location Press Alt H to display the HELP menu Figure 3 4 shows the function help display from the ladder display screen As shown on the menu below four types of help are available Hot Key Help Function Help Element Help and Message Help To see another type of help use the arrow keys to position the cursor on any of the Help types in the top line You can also move the cursor down to any of the topics listed in the help window and press Return for additional information on the selected topic When you invoke the HELP menu F1 is always available to define the keys used for cursor movement and paging within the Help system ROW 1 COL 1 NEIWORKSIARTING ADDRESS 1 L MEMORY AVAILABLE 8192 C Hot Key Help gt lt Function Help Elem Help Msg Help EXIT or ESC returns screen to previous display EDIT accesses the function for editing ladder logic programs FIND or Ctrl F accesses the function which locates and displays specified elements boxes and rungs j DOCUM accesses the documentation function for entering displaying comments synonyms and program titles ESC Exit F1 Help on Help 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 EDIT F2 FIND F3 DOCUM F4 BLOCK F5 AUX F6 STATUS F7 CHART F8 Figure 3 4 HELP Display Hot Key Help Hot Key help gives you a listing of keys that are active both function and hard keys on the current display a
173. TIONS field of the ladder logic V or K memory and forced elements that do not compare Up to three mismatched locations are displayed If more than three mismatches exist three dots appear after the three locations displayed Sincethere is only one memory location for the controller scan time a passed or failed status is indicated by the message PASSED or FAILED If failureis indicated in the status field the number 1 also is listed in the MISMATCHED LOCATIONS field 11 18 Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 11 9 Setting Controller Scan Time AUX 19 Changing Scan Time AUX 19 For 520 C 525 530 C 560 565 Controllers Only For 545 555 and 575 Controllers Only Use AUX 19 to set and read scan time for the controller To invoke the AUX 19 menu type in 19 at the AU X Functions menu prompt and press Return Complete the set of steps below for the controller model that you have To select a fixed scan time 1 Press FIXED F3 2 Typein the desired time at the prompt 3 Press WRITE F4 to enter the new scan time To select a variable scan time 1 Press VAR F2 2 Press WRITE F4 to enter the new scan time Figure 11 9 shows the display for setting scan time on the 545 controller PLC SCAN TIME TOTAL SCAN TIME VARIABLE LOOP TIME SLICE MS ANALOG ALARM TIME SLICE MS CYCLIC SF PROGRAM TIME SLICE MS PRIORITY SF PROGRAM TIME SLICE MS NORMAL SF PROGRAM TI
174. TSR CP1413 Firmware Drivers DOS Hardware Layer CP1413 Card 7 H1 Protocol Figure G 1 Hierarchy Block Diagram G 2 TISOFT with H1 Communications TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual G 2 Seps for installing and Configuring the CP1413 Module These procedures are designed for initial setup Once the parameters have been set there is no need for you to change them unless you add another node to the network If you do not need to change the configuration you can proceed directly to Step 17 Figure G 2 shows an abbreviated list of the steps needed for installing and configuring your CP 1413 module It is provided to give you an overview of what you are about to do NOTE Do not install your 505 CP 1413 Module using the list in Figure G 2 Usethe detailed steps that begin on the next page to guide you through the installation Select an I O address that is available on your computer Set jumpers to chosen O address Install card in computer Select an available interrupt on your computer Select a DRAM address that is available on your computer Configure extended memory manager to exdude DRAM address if applicable of CP 1413 that is either D000 or E000 Select unique local ethernet address for CP 1413 module Install software from diskette Test to ensure that the DRAM address doesn t conflict with the PC Preparing to Configure the H1 Network Configure 505 CP1434TF H1 module using its conf
175. When you elect to goto RUN mode you may receive the message PROFIBUS DP IS STOPPED CONTINUE TO PLC RUN MODE Selec either YES or NO 8 28 Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual e OPR ST F6 allows the changing of PROFIBUS DP communications mode OPERATE STOP e SYNTAX F8 runs a syntax check on ladder memory L memory Changing Loop To select loop operating mode position the cursor in the Loops field You Mode then have the following options available e PGM F2 places the loop card in PROGRAM mode and control blocks are neither running nor being queued for running Your loop card cannot bein PROGRAM mode however while the discrete CPU isin RUN mode e HALT F3 places the loop card in HOLD mode enabled control blocks are being queued to run but are not running U pon returning to RUN mode execution resumes where it was halted e RUN F4 places the loop card in the RUN mode enabled control blocks are being queued and are running When you elect to goto RUN mode you may receive the message PROFIBUS DP IS STOPPED CONTINUE TO PLC RUN MODE Select either YES or NO e OPR ST F6 allows the changing of PROFIBUS DP communications mode OPERATE STOP e SYNTAX F8 runs a syntax check on ladder memory L memory Theloop mode can either follow that of the discrete CPU or bein RUN mode independent of the ladder program To invoke this option place the cursor in the LOCKED or UNLOCKED fiel
176. YTES 32 KBYTES COMPILED SF CS 0 KBYTES 0 KBYTES USER SUB U 0 KBYTES 0 KBYTES TMR CTR vas 5 KBYTES DRUMS ss 3 KBYTES SHIFT REG Pi 1 KBYTES TABLE MOVE a 2 KBYTES ONE SHOTS Sis 1 KBYTES CONTROL RELAYS 1 0 X Y WX WY TOTAL SYSTEM MEMORY 1856 KBYTES CONFIGURED SYSTEM MEMORY 192 KBYTES REMAINING SYSTEM MEMORY 1664 KBYTES FROM RAM 555 NETDATA EXIT F1 READRM F2 WRITRM F3 545 F4 545L F5 575 F6 555 F7 REQAPP F8 Figure 4 3 Off Line Memory Configuration Menu Configuration You can make entries only tothe USER MEMORY fields for specific memory Menu Fields types The SYSTEM MEMORY column cannot be edited except for Total System Memory The numbers in this column give you the bytes of system memory used by each type of user memory you configure The TOTAL SYSTEM MEMORY field must match the total memory available with your controller model Configured System Memory and Remaining System Memory numbers are supplied by TI SOFT d d Configuring Controller Memory TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Selecting the Contoller Configuration Procedure Entering Configuration Sincethere are differences in memory types among controllers your first step should be to select the controller model that you are configuring To do this press the function key that corresponds to your model number When selecting a 565 controller you must enter the S memory configuration before the controller type changes from 560
177. a password e SETPSW F4 or S Allows you to set or change the password for the controller TI SOFT prompts you for the current password If the current password is correct TISOFT prompts you for the new password twice If the new passwords are not the same or the current password is not correct the password is not changed To delete a password or to make it not password protected enter a null password e NOACC F6 or N Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for no access This function does not work without a password e RDONLY F7 or R Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for read only access This function does not work without a password e FULL F8 or F Allows you set the protection level of the controller for full read write access This function does not work without a password TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions 11 31 11 17 Setting PROHBUS DP Communications Mode AUX 86 AUX 86 Functions Use AUX 86 to perform the following functions e Change from OPERATE to STOP mode e Change from SYNCHRONOUS toASYNCHRONOUS mode To execute AU X 86 use the numeric keys to enter 86 at the prompt in the AUX Functions menu Then press Return Figure 11 15 shows the PROFIBUS DP communications mode screen that is invoked with AUX 86 PROFIBUS DP MODE OPERATE ASYNCHRONOUS 555 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 OPER F2 STOP F3 SYNC F5 ASYNC F6 Figure
178. ace ka a doe DECR ERR C RED Entenng Configuration dr hex E eee eR Gee eeu PRESE EE CREME e Checking Memory Availability Selecting Application 575 ssssessseeeeee nsn TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring Controller Memory 4 1 4 1 Reading Memory Configuration Displaying Memory You can display the memory configuration from either on line or off line Configuration The source of the display is determined by whether you are performing the read on or off line Off line you can read memory configuration only from programming device RAM On line you can read the configuration from either your selected program on disk or the controller When you initially access the Memory Configuration menu a read is performed that gives you the configuration from the source you are currently using Displaying Off Line To show the memory configuration in the programming device RAM 4 2 complete the following steps The illustration below shows the function keys from the off line configuration menu Refer also to Figure 4 1 1 Press OFFLINE F8 2 Press SPACEBAR 3 Press CONFME F2 4 Press READRM F2 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 EDIT F2 FIND F3 DOCUM F4 BLOCK F5 REPLAC F6 BLDCHT F7 WRITDK F8 f dr TRAN 545 NETDATA PRINT F1 CONFME F2 CONFIO F3 COMTGL F4 SYNTGL F5 LOOP F6 ALARM F7 SFPGM F8 FROM RAM 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 READRM F2 WRITRM F3 545 F4 545L F5 575 F6 555 F7 REQAPP F8 Figure 4 1 Accessing Memory Config
179. air of status bits is set when the register is full The second bit is set when the register is empty Used with the FTSR IN instruction In password it selects Full controller access when the password is enabled Global memory memory used to interface between applications available in 575 controllers only TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Global CR Ins Global CR GOTO GTS H HALT Hard Key HEX HINTS HIU HIUEHA Home HORZ HORZD IF IIF IMC IO IORW IMATH IMPORT INLTGL Ins Is a type of CR that can be accessed by any part of the program The range of global CRs is determined by the I O configuration and the controller model Causes program execution to continue starting at a specified LABEL Go to Subroutineis a coil that executes a ladder subroutine Accesses the horizontal line function it is a hard key Suspends operation of the loop card in the controller Is a predefined key on the keyboard that performs a TISOFT function H exadecimal is a number based on 16 the numbers 0 9 represent 0 9 and A F represent 10 15 The format takes 1 word 16 Bits Hints displays a list of useful key combinations for TISOFT operations Host Interface Unit configures UNILINK Host Adapter on TI WAY network Host Interface Unit Emulate Host Adapter configures Unilink Host Adapter on TIWAY network Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current rung in RLL or moves the cursor to the beginning of the line o
180. ak associated with the comment After you select the element for comment the Comment Editor Menu Figure 9 4 is displayed with function keys for editing Y 000450 PAGING NONE 545 LOADER DELLN F4 INSLN F5 EDIT F6 DELETE F7 ENTER F8 Figure 9 4 Comment Editor Menu 9 6 Documenting Programs TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 9 3 Entering Comments Keying in Comments Adding Paging Instructions Saving Comments When the Comment Editor Menu seeFigure 9 4 is displayed the cursor is positioned at the starting point for a comment Type in your comment for the selected element The following keys are available for editing Delete Press DEL to delete a single character Use with the cursor at the end of a line to delete the Return and append the following line by filling the line at the cursor position Insert Press INS to invoke the insert mode Add a Return after the insert to split a line at any point and move the text after the Return to the following line Toggle off the insert mode by pressing INS again Backspace Use Backspace to delete characters to the left of the cursor DELLN F4 Press F4 to delete the line where the cursor is positioned INSLN F5 Press F5 toinsert a blank line above the line on which the cursor is positioned EDIT F6 and COMPSE F6 Press F6 totoggle between edit and compose modes E dit mode does not automatically insert a return at the end of a line To enter text continuously and have the cu
181. am M anagement function keys All program management functions are available for use with table files in Status Chart 2 Either usethe arrow keys to select the filename from the window or type in a name at the prompt where the current table is to be stored 3 Press SELECT F8 or press Return To load a selection table that you have previously saved complete the following steps from the Select Display 1 Press RDTBL F6 to read a previously saved table from disk You now have access to the Program M anagement function keys All program management functions are available for use with table files in Status Chart 2 Either usethe arrow keys to select the filename from the window or type in a name of the table to be read at the prompt 3 Press SELECT F8 if you selected the filename from the window or press Return if you keyed in the filename 10 22 Using Status Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 11 1 112 113 1L4 11 5 1L6 11 7 1L8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 11 14 11 15 11 16 11 17 Chapter 11 Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions Accessing Controller Auxiliary Functions seen n n n n nn n n nnn 11 2 Powering up Restarting the Controller AUX 10 12 enne 11 5 Loading Program to Contoller AUX 43 90 99 issnnnn mmn Clearing Controller Memory AUX 13 31 37 41 74 77 eennnn e Saving Controller Memory Data to Disk AUX 42 60 67
182. an also enable the SF control block by using the DIS CP function key while in the SF Directory or SF display TISOFT supports PowerMath on all controllers However only certain controllers support PowerMath Table 8 2 lists the functional differences between PowerMath and non PowerMath controllers Table 8 2 PowerMath vs Non PowerMath Contollers Non PowerMath Controllers PowerMath Controllers SF instructions IIF and PETWD are not All instructions are supported supported Nofunction support in IMATH ABS function supported in IMATH and IF Operators not allowed in IMATH Operator not allowed in IMATH or IIF k KK lt gt lt lt gt gt AND OR 32 bit long L and 16 bit unsigned U 32 bit long L and 16 bit unsigned U integer elements are not allowed integer elements are allowed SF programs and SF subroutines SF programs and SF subroutines can be cannot be compiled compiled SFPGM and SFSUB boxes cannot be set SFPGM and SF SUB boxes can be set for IN LINE execution for IN LINE execution TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming 8 23 Editing SF Programs Subroutines c ontinued Entering SF Header Complete the title and header information by using the arrow and Return keys to move the cursor through the fields For a subroutine you havea title field only The length of the fields is the size of the highlighted cursor on the field If you do not make entries to
183. and coil types havea function key available select the type by pressing the function key and type in a numeric identifier If you select a box type in the box type at the prompt or press O or SHIFT to select from the on screen list shown in Figure 7 1 Although the entire TI SOFT Help system is available to you in the edit mode you may find the element List display particularly useful for element names You can access a display listing the valid entries for a field at any point that has a prompt requesting an entry For example at the prompt for entering boxes calling the List display gives a listing of all valid box types Figure 7 1 shows the List displayed after selecting BOX in edit mode Invoke the List display by pressing X or SHIFT Use arrow keys or PgUp PgDn Home End to select a box instruction from the menu The following function keys are available e HELP F4 Accesses the Help System and gives you a definition for the element where the cursor is currently positioned e SELECT F8 or Return Returns to the ladder display and writes at the prompt the element that was under the cursor before pressing F8 ROW 1 COL 1 NETWORK STARTING ADDRESS 1 L MEMORY AVAILABLE 8192 LIST BOX ABSV ADD BITC BITP BITS CBD CDB CMP CTR DCAT MORE 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 HELP F4 SELECT F
184. and edit hard keys The following list describes some of the commonly used functions available with hard keys ESC returns to the previous level of menu operations Print Screen invokes the print operation to print the current display Ctrl L invokes the pop up synonym editor to allow you to edit synonyms Shift 2 or displays a list of valid entries for the current prompt Alt C allows you to interrupt communications after a timeout Alt H accesses the Help System menus Ctrl F invokes the Find operation Ctrl X invokes the on screen cross reference function Ctrl U invokes the element usage operation Ctrl V invokes the V memory editor Ctrl K invokes the K memory editor X Y C V K W and G keys access the contact and coil editors the B key accesses box instructions NOTE You must disengage the Num Lock and Scroll Lock keys to enable the hard keys on the numeric keypad Whenever a function appears on the menu the hard key equivalent of the function is enabled You can use the hard key to invoke the function rather than using a function key available on a TISOFT menu Some operations are accessible through Ctrl and Alt keys only such as element usage Ctrl U Table 3 1 shows a listing of the function key alternatives and the CTRL ALT functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISO FT Basics 3 7 TISOFT Keys continued Table 31 TISOFTKeys Calls AU X screen Creates a box or edits an e
185. another location in V memory as specified by a table address pointer One word is moved in each memory scan MWFT amp MWTT instructions must have different numbers Move Word with Indirect addressing allows moving 1 to 256 words from one area of V memory to another Move Word to I mage Register allows a specific number of bits to be shifted from a word memory location to specified discrete image register locations in a single memory scan Move Word to Table moves words from a word source in V memory to a table destination address specified by a pointer in V memory One word is moved during each memory scan Performs the horizontal delete line function also a Noresponse It is a hard key TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual NEXT PC NEXT NO NOACC NOCMPL NODLST NONE NOP NOT NEXTDM NXTIN ODD OFFLINE ONLINE OPER OPR ST OR OS OUTPUT OUTTGL P PACK PACKAA PACKLOOP PACKRS PAGE PC TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Finds and displays the next programmed ladder rung address in status select In O configuration it finds the next location of an I O point A negative response to a prompt question No Access in password selects no controller access Sets an SF program or subroutine to not be compiled NodeList in FMS communications allows you to select a filethat contains a list of network station names in order to select a station for on line communications Selects no paging in comment allows
186. appear are 4 6 and 7 which indicate a problem in connecting to or communicating with the CP2572 module If one of these errors occurs shut down TISOFT and make sure that you can reliably ping the CP2572 module You may have an incorrect IP address in the host table or the FTP kernel may be configured with an incorrect router address When the error number x is 10 the error code value y contains either the CAMP error code which is described in the appendix of the SIMATIC 505 Ethernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP2572 User Manual or else one of the following special values 65535 Bad BCC checksum field in the received CAMP message 65534 CAMP Message ID field of response does not match Message I D of last request This comes into play if request message A times out and request message B is then sent but delayed response A is then received as the response to message B 65533 In casethe CAMP error code at offset 23 in the response message is zero Error number 12 occurs if the host table contains more than 64 entries When the error number x is 1 11 or 12 the error code value y is zero TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFT with TCP IP 11 Appendix J Using TISOFT with FMS J 1 FMS Communications Overview sssssssssssssssnsnnnsnnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn J 2 Installing CP 5412 Hardware and Software on the PC eee Installing the CP 5412 A2 Card in your PC sosse Installing the S7 5412
187. aras J2 Installing CP 5412 Hardware and Software on the PC eee Installing the CP 5412 A2 Card in your PC sssssseeeenn ee n Installing the S7 5412 MS DOS Windows Software 0 ccc cece eee eens Configuring the CP 5412 Card for Network Operation cece ees J 3 Installing the PROABUS AMS Communications Processor and Software Installing the FMS CP Module in a SIMATIC 505 Base s eee eee nee Installing the COM5434 Configurator Software 0660s Configuring the FMSCP Module 0 c ce e nnn Connecting to the PROFIBUS Network 0 nnns J 4 Building an FMS Node List seoeeeee ene nnnm What isa Node LIS ssia ene cei ote eere e si eg det ree tind pe e bd a aA Using a Text Editor to Create the Node Lst 0 cee Change the Extension to FNL 1 ett nnn j5 Establishing MMS Communications in TISOFT eee nnn nnn nnn Initializing the TC PFB Task Code Driver ssssssssssseeeeeeen nae Invoking TISOFT with FMS Communications sssssseeeeeern e Creating a TISOFT Shortcut Icon to Invoke FMSCommunications 00065 Selecting an FMS Station from the Node List cece cece TroUbleshootlhg i ted eed br eri Bite E BA e a a De d a AN ae Eh a xviii Contents Appendix K TISOFTProgram Files and Properties K 1 TISOFT Program Files K2 Windows 95 Properties Setup for TISOFT Glossary of TISOFT ems
188. assword for the selected program on disk TISOFT prompts you for the new password twice If the new passwords are not the same the password is not changed To delete a password or to make the selected program on disk unprotected enter a null password e NOACC F6 or N Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for no access This option is written to the controller when you perform an AUX 90 Load All function NOACC F6 or N does not work without a password e RDONLY F7 or R Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for read only access This option is written tothe controller when you perform an AU X 90 Load All function RDONLY F7 or R does not work without a password e FULL F8 or F Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for full read write access This option is written to the controller when you perform an AU X 90 Load All function FULL F8 or F does not work without a password TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual On Line Password When you are online you can use the AUX F6 key and type in 85 at the Selection and prompt to set or change the password or to set the level of access AUX 85 Access Level invokes the password selection screen shown in Figure H 2 PASSWORD DISABLED PLC ACCESS LEVEL READ ONLY ACCESS 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 ENPSW F2 DISPSW F3 SETPSW F4 NOACC F6 RDONLY F7 FULL F8 Figure H 2 On Line Password Selection Screen The keys in Figure H 2 ar
189. assword value consists of one to eight alphanumeric digits for example 0 9 uppercase A Z Online you can be prompted for the password for the controller program and or for the selected program on disk Offline you are prompted for a password only for the selected program on disk NOTE You do not need to enter a password to go online However if the selected program on disk is protected you must enter a password to go offline The selected program on disk may be in one of three states of password protection e NoPassword The selected program on disk is not protected Any user may enter an initial password e Disabled Password The selected program on disk is not protected Any user may change or delete the password e Enabled Password The selected program on disk is protected No write operations are allowed from online you cannot go offline without the password The programmable controller may be in one of three states of password protection e No Password The controller program is not protected Any user may enter an initial password e Disabled Password The controller program is not protected The user may change or delete the password Any user may enable the password e Enabled Password The controller program is protected according to the protection level assigned to the password see below If a protected operation is attempted from any communications port the operation is denied and an error response is given
190. ation file to hold the association that you want to make 3 Fill out the following fields in the SINEC COML 1413TF window Type a local station address that is not already in use on your H1 network 0800060100FF This address needs to be the same address you entered previously during CP 1413 software installation Step 8 or using the CA SINEC BIN NETINST EXE program Application association name UnitA UnitB Remote Adar 080006010001 080006010002 Local TSAP UnitA UnitB Remote TSAP PC1 PC1 For further information on how to use the COML 1413 TF software refer tothe COML 1413 TF for Windows Configuration Guide 4 Savethefilein text format in the directory CA SINEC DATA as a file name STARTUP TXT Generate a binary database file with the name STARTUP LDB in the directory CA SINEC DATA Exit the COML program G 14 TISOFTwith H1 Communications TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 5 For each additional TISOFT station install the CP1413 card and configure it as described in this appendix starting with Step 1 on that particular computer When configuring the local database for its CP1413 set its remote TSAP names such as PC2 MainOffice etc Then create a TF Service for each 505 CP1434TF configuration with the 505 configurator and include the Ethernet address of the second TISOFT station a remote TSAP name e g UnitA and a local TSAP name e g PC2 For example Type a local station address that is not alrea
191. ay STATUS CHART LOCATION STATUS LOCATION STATUS LOCATION STATUS 545 NETDATA RN EXIT F1 DIRECT F2 ASCII F4 CLRCHT F5 CLRLOC F6 RDCHT F7 WRCHT F8 Figure 10 2 Build Chart Display 10 4 Using Status Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Displaying Data in ASCII Format Changing Numeric Format Entering Elements in Sequence Using the ASCII feature enables you to display the contents of V K WX WY and G memory locations in ASCII characters To create a display complete the following steps from the Build Chart menu 1 Typein the desired address such as V100 2 Press ASCII F4 You receive a prompt requesting the number of words to display in the sequence beginning with the address entered above two ASCII characters displayed per word 3 Typein the number of words 1 8 If you want the bytes in the words to be swapped in the display press SWAP F2 4 Press Return or ENTER F8 To complete a chart type in a desired element location as V100 If the format is acceptable default is integer for word addresses and bit for discrete locations then press an arrow key to position cursor for next entry If you want to change the display format complete the following steps before pressing the arrow key 1 Press SPACEBAR to display format function keys 2 Select format by pressing one of the function keys F 1 F8 that corresponds to desired display format If you select a format that
192. box Re edit the box with the correct number of parameters The box just created in RLL implicitly refers to a memory address which is out of range for the current configuration Either reduce the length of thetable in the box or movethe starting table address to a memory address that can accommodate the length of the table or increase your configuration to accommodate the table range Spedify a destination filename which is different from the source filename TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Cannot Open File Cannot Put Program to Itself Cannot Request Both 20 Offset and Bipolar Cannot Search for Element Online Channels 1 and 2 Cannot Be Deleted Comment Cannot Be Tied to Element in Network Communications Error Communications Error Break Error Communications Error Overrun Error Communications Error Parity Error Communications Error Port Does Not Exist Communications Error Number hh Communications Terminated by User Communications Timeout Comparison Equal TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual This error should not occur except under extenuating circumstances TISOFT attempted to open a program file and failed The file may have been accidentally deleted or a disk hardware failure may have occurred The source and destination program filenames specified must be different This message is displayed when the user attempts to enter a LOOP an ANALOG ALARM or a SCALE or UNSCALE S
193. by a PC IP Address is not loaded unless CPU enters RUN mode if power is lost when CPU is not in RUN mode Easy to troubleshoot problems by you must manually bring CPU back to RUN mode via swapping CP2572 modules proper programming device in CPU s RS 232 port to restore PLC Start IP address is loaded from ladder Ethernet communications logic program as soon as CPU PERO RU N mode If multiple controllers perform the same function you must modify ladder logic program for each one so that it contains a unique IP address TheSIMATIC 505 Ethernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP 2572 User Manual describes the Autostart and PLC Start procedures in detail follow the instructions in the manual to configure the P address for your module NOTE New or modified IP address configurations do not take effect until you power cycle the base containing the PP X 505 CP 2572 module The CP2572 module must be logged into the controller 1 O configuration in order for it to run TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISO FT with TCP IP l 3 Setting Up the TCP IP Module continued Using the PLC Start Option Network 1 Use MOVW box to move table values stored in K memory to V memory for logic execution STW201 10 The SIMATIC 505 Ethernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP 2572 User Manual describes how to build a Startup Network Command Block table used with the PLC Start option in the chapter on installation
194. cations This message is displayed by the UNIQUE operation to indicate that the current element is not unique and is also used in the rung at the specified address This message is displayed by the UNIQUE operation to indicate that the current element is unique and does not appear anywhere else in the RLL program This message indicates that the requested element has been successfully forced to the specified value The box just created in RLL contains an element address which must be on an 8 point boundary for example C1 C9 C17 etc Changethe indicated element ID number to a valid 8 point boundary value During execution of the FIND or UNIQUE operations in RLL this message indicates that the requested element address or box type does not exist anywhere in theladder program During execution of the FIND operation during SHOW EDIT of an SF Program or Subroutine this message indicates that the requested element address or SF instruction type does not exist in the current SF Program or Subroutine When you specify ranges of elements to be replaced in the Global Search and Replace operation this message indicates that the element s you are replacing WITH exceeds the memory configuration for that element given the length of the range of elements you are REPLACING With 2048 CRs configured the following example would result in ELEMENT OUT OF RANGE REPLACE C1 THRU C100 WITH C2000 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Elem
195. cations TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Figure G 7 and Figure G 8 are functionally the same Both figures show a PC with a CP1413 module and a single Series 505 system Figure G 7 illustrates the use of a separate single port transceiver for each device Figure G 8 shows both devices attached to a single two port transceiver SIBUKO Package 2 SIBUKO Package 2 6GK1 100 0AB00 6GK1 100 0AB00 Personal Computer Terminator 4 Terminator La a with H1 Configurator Software and CP1413 Trunk Thicknet Series 505 Programmable Module and TISOFT Controller with SINEC H1 CP Transceiver Transceiver Module CP1434TF f 6GK1 901 0AA00 0AA0 ITO LI SINEC H1 CP a AUI Drop AUI Dro GES5727 1 00xx _ 1658872711000 Figure G 7 Single Port Tansceiver Cabling SIBUKO Package 6 6GK1 100 0AJ00 Trunk Thicknet Series 505 Programmable Controller with SINEC H1 CP Module 505 CP1434TF Transceiver pf 6GK1 901 0AA00 0ACO AUI Drop 6ES5727 1 xxxx Q O O 0 0 0 0 0 0 SINEC H1 CP Personal Computer with H1 Configurator Software and CP1413
196. ceeds RecvBufferSize 15 SetApplRelList failed due to SCP_send error 16 SetApplRelList failed due to SCP receive error 17 SetApplRelList failed due to SCP Request Block error G 24 TISOFTwith H1 Communications TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual H l H 2 H 3 Appendix H Using Password Oveni W cri ek 3x bie rete wa ruo a ET REEERERNRECERRE EAE E EE cu ES Disabled and Enabled Passwordsforthe Selected Program on Disk Disabled and Enabled Passwordsin the Controller 0 0 0 cece cee Controller Password Accesslevels 0 ccc ccc HH Password for TISOFT ReleasesEarlierthan 5 0 ccc ccc cece ete eee ees Password Selection and Access Level ssses enne Off Line Password Selection and AccessLevel sssssse teens On Line Password Selection and Accesslevel ccc ccc cece eee eee nes On Line Password Operations ssssssssses enne On Line Password Operational Modes ssssssseeee nnn On Line Disk Operations with Password sssssssssssss nnn TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using Password H 1 H 1 Overview Disabled and Enabled Passwords forthe Selected Program on Disk Disabled and Enabled Passwords in the Contoller H 2 Using Password The password feature provides protection for areas of memory that are part of the program There are two passwords one for the selected program on disk and one for the controller They do not have to be the same A p
197. condary The named TI STAR Model 20 or Model 70 secondary is the wrong type This message indicates that the total amount of S memory used by LOOPs Ramp Soak tables ALARMs and SF Programs Subroutines exceeds the amount of S memory configured This message can occur during any operation which increases the amount of S memory used creating a new LOOP or ALARM table adding R S steps entering new SF statements in an SFPGM SFSUB or performing BLOCK COPY or PUT operations on S memory Either increase your S memory configuration or delete any unused LOOPs ALARMS R S steps or SF statements TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Selected Base Does Not Have a Dual RBC SFPGM xxxx Not Programmed SFSUB xxxx Not Programmed Short Circuit Short Circuit or Reverse Power Flow Short Circuit Missing Connection or Reverse Power Flow This message is displayed when you try to use AUX 21 to perform a Dual Media RBC role swap and there is no Dual RBC configured in the current Base Therequested SF Program control block has not been programmed and is not included in the SFPGM Directory An unprogrammed control block cannot be enabled or disabled To create the SF Program type in the desired ID number and press SHOW F 2 Therequested SF Subroutine control block has not been programmed and is not included in the SF SUB Directory An unprogrammed control block cannot be enabled or disabled To create the SF Subroutine type in the des
198. controller have been interrupted Make sure the cableis securely connected to the proper ports on the controller and the TISOFT host machine Problem may also bethe result of a COMM PORT failure If using TISTAR M odel 20 or Model 70 exit TISOFT check the cable connection between the DEU and the Operator Station and reenter TI SOF T Comparison of the I O Configuration in the Base with the I O Configuration in the controller has passed configurations are the same TISOFTMessages B 3 Comparison Not Equal Comparison of the I O Configuration in the Base with the I O Configuration in the controller has failed configurations are not the same Slots which failed are highlighted on the screen display Comparison Not Equal Comparison of the I O Configuration in the Base with the I O Failed Module in Base Configuration in the controller has failed configurations are not the same Slots which failed are highlighted on the screen display In addition a failed module has been detected in the base which may have caused the comparison to fail Connection to This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not Element Missing valid An example appears below C1 C2 ED d X y Constant Value This error occurs during edit of SF statements in an SF Program or SF Required Subroutine The parameter indicated must be a constant value for example 10 Element addresses or text are not allowed Control Block An attempt
199. cord Confirmation Prompt 0 se nns On Line Password Selection Screen 2 en PROFIBUS DP Communications Mode Screen Search and Replace Meriu robert br esp ERA EE Rena Cas Fc GlobalSearch and Replace Table ccc ccc cece ccc mme Exa mple of Search and Replace Operation Menu Chart to Ladder Block Functions 6 60000 S Memory BIOCK FUNCTIONS rr 0 1 me Print Screen Function Key Menu PrnntMenu Map gc e etc e e GRO eR Pe ER eae n RN a RR oad Print Selection Menu xia eie iot irat eee E doe cre d dice 2S Print Setup Menu i224 ete pcr bte ado kellie eee Mia dede ta o da E Extended Rurtig PrIntoUut sitis iiai diet e eai etae bebe d eb aa bd benda Print Cross Reference Menu TOF Startup EEN die ea et Ee eo Reiki tici ih RE e I ntn Secondary Selection Sc teen iocis peer ONCE aac Ra eed dari ne dr RA TIWAY Host Adapter Secondary Address Menu UNILINK Host Adapter Configuration Screen s s s UNILINK Host Adapter Secondary Address Menu Hierarchy Block Dlagram i ius bed dee eerte con wel e e eee hb ve wo bad esi Overview List for Installing the CP1413 Module Three Memory Manager Setup Examples ssssssssseeeee eere Addressing TSAPsfora Single TISOFTStation Addressing TSAPsfor Multiple TISO FT Stations Multi Port TansceiverCabling aris merit seian ccc m es Single Port TansceiverCabling 1 0 0 0 eect eae Two Port Transceiver Cabling 00 ccc ees TISOFT Start p SCreen ze eere t pe
200. creen appears See Figure 5 3 505 CHANNEL 1 BASE STATUS BASE ENABLED CONFIGURED ONLINE YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 CONFIG F2 FIND F3 EN DIS F5 PRO DP F6 Figure 5 3 On Line 505 Base Status Screen 2 Typethe channel number if desired 3 Usethearrow keys to highlight the desired base number on the screen 4 Press CONFIG F2 The Basel O Configuration screen appears See Figure 5 4 5 Thebasel O configuration from the programmable logic controller is automatically displayed Press READDK F3 if you want to read the selected program on the disk An alternative procedure for displaying a base configuration is as follows 1 Press SPACEBAR and then CONFIO F3 The 505 Base Status screen appears See Figure 5 3 2 Press CONFIG F2 The Basel O Configuration screen appears See Figure 5 4 5 4 Configuring Series 505 I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 3 Usethearrow keys to highlight the CHANNEL field and type in the channel number 4 Usethearrow keys to highlight the BASE field and typein the base number 5 Press either READDK F3 or READPC F5 NOTE You can change the base number either by using the PgUp PgDn keys if the last operation was a Read operation or by typing a number in the BASE field and pressing READDK F3 or READPC F5 You can view bases by using the PgUp PgDn keys for the currently select
201. crie a e aa a EA A EE 3 3 On Line Ladder Display ssssssssssssssssses nnn 3 4 HELP Display ess or Lex bx oce tcr bd e eel ie ka e RO ERO x a RO eR Ke bu a 3 10 Element List SCree n sssssssssesseeeeeeee eee 3 11 Accessing Memory Configuration Menu Off Line suua 4 2 Accessing Memory Configuration Menu On Line s esses 4 3 Off Line Memory Configuration Menu 0 ccc eet nnns On Line Memory Configuration Menu 0 ete nnns Memory Availability AUX Function Screen sssusa 4 7 575 Application Selection Screen 0 ccc ttt ens Off Line 505 Base Status Screen 2 0 ene ene 5 2 Off Line Base I O Configuration Screen 20 eet nne 5 3 On Line 505 Base Status Screen 0 ene ett 5 4 On Line Base I O Configuration Screen 2 eens 5 5 Show I O Configuration Display 0 ieee eet 5 12 Base and Controller O Configuration Comparison 0 00 c eee 5 13 Find I O Point Prompt tea teres eoe E Pv oec pe a vea c 5 14 Off Line 505 Base Status Function Key Line sssssssssss e Off Line PROFIBUS DP Slave Status Function Key ine unilateral 6 6 Selecting COM PROFIBUS File to Merge in TISOFT aaau 6 7 On Line 505 Base Status Function Key Line ccccccce cece eee eee ueeeeeuna eens Contents 6 5 6 6 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 7 16 7 17 7 18 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 22 7 23 8 1
202. criptors can be entered from the Documentation menus DOCUM F4 from the main ladder display For your convenience TI SOFT also provides the option of adding or editing documentation for your program as you enter it To create or edit a synonym or descriptor for any elements in the rung press Ctrl L The element your cursor is currently on is the default element shown in the SYNONYM prompt field Press Return to select the default element or type in the appropriate element and identifier at the prompt and press Return T he pop up synonym editor can be accessed throughout TI SOFT To use the comment operation while entering programs press SPACEBAR then press COMMNT F7 to invoke the display for entering comments For detailed instructions on complete documentation of your program with comments synonyms and descriptors see Chapter 9 of this manual 7 18 Using TISOFTfor Discrete Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 7 11 Finding Ladders and Elements Find Functions Using Find Operation Finding the Next Box TheFind operation enables you to locate any ladder address or element type word or bit of word in your ladder program NOTE Depending on your program size and controller model an on line Find may take several minutes To use the Find operation to locate a particular ladder address or element press FIND F3 or Cet r from the ladder display You can use the function keys or you can
203. d Your function keys are then as follows e UNLOCK F2 frees the loop card for selection of RUN operating mode independent of the ladder CPU e LOCK F3 locks the loop card to follow the operati ng mode selected for ladders e OPR ST F6 allows the changing of PROFIBUS DP communications mode OPERATE STOP e SYNTAX F8 runs a syntax check on ladder memory L memory TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming 8 29 8 14 Enabling Disabling Control Blocks Determining Status When a loop alarm or SF program subroutine is disabled a D is shown beside the number identifying the control block in the directory The absence of a D indicates that the control block is enabled When displaying or editing a loop alarm or SF program subroutine the status is shown at the right margin of the prompt line The message then shows either enabled or disabled The default of a newly created control block loop alarm or special function program subroutine upon exit to the directory is enabled Enabling Disabling You can enable or disable control blocks either from the directory or the Control Blocks table display The Enable Disable key operates the same from either location Modifying the Enable Disable status in the Ramp Soak table of a loop operates on the entire loop To disable Ramp Soak only you must program NO for RAMP SOAK ON SP in the Loop Table If a loop or alarm control block is disabled setting the
204. d only version but allows Aux 10 11 12 13 20 81 86 90 98 99 Using PC Port 1 To use COM 1 type in the command for the TI SOFT operating software you selected from the list above e g T1505 and press Return to invoke TI SOFT Using PC Port 2 To use COM2 type in the command for the TI SOFT operating software you selected from the list above followed by the port number e g T1505 P2 Then press Return to invoke TI SOFT Using PC TIWAY To use a PC TIWAY Adapter Card PP X 2587716 8011 with TISOFT type Adapter Card in the command for the TISOFT operating software you selected from the list above followed by CVU e g T1505 CVU and press Return to invoke TISOFT Refer to Appendix E 1 10 Installing TISO FT Release 6 3 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using H1 Network Using TCP Communications Using AMS Communications Displaying the Start up Screen To use H 1 network with TISOFT type in the name of the TISOFT operating software you selected from the list above followed by H1 e g T1505 H1 and press Return to invoke TI SOFT Refer to Appendix G Tousethe TCP network with TISOFT typein the name of the TISOFT operating software you selected from the list above followed by TCP e g TI505 TCP and press Return to invoke TI SOFT Refer to Appendix I To use FMS communications over the PROFIBUS network with TI SOFT type in the name
205. d operation FIND WY101 9 BIT ONLY OUTPUT ONLY 545 LOADER1 PG EXIT F1 ADDR F2 NOP F3 NXTIN F4 WDBTGL F7 OUTTGL F8 Figure 10 4 Find Function Keys The following function keys are available for Find operations e ADDR F2 allows you to select the address for a rung of ladder logic as the element type you want to find e NOP F3 no operation finds the next occurrence of a non programmed rung of ladder logic e NXTIN F4 next instruction finds the next occurrence of a programmed rung of ladder logic e WDBTGL F7 allows you to toggle between BIT ONLY which restricts the word Find operation to bit of word only WORD ONLY which restricts the operation to word only and an unrestricted search e OUTTGL F8 allows you to toggle between OUTPUT ONLY which restricts the Find operation to outputs only and an unrestricted search which finds inputs as well as outputs TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using StatusFunctions 10 9 10 7 Displaying Ladder Status Invoking Ladder Status Functions Reading Ladder Displays The Ladder Status display shown in Figure 10 5 provides access to status and debug functions for ladders C 2 5 This is an example display A section of your ladder program will be displayed in this area UPDATE IN PROGRESS 565 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 CHGVAL F2 FIND F3 PG RN F4 S SCAN F5 SELECT F6 CHART F8 Figure 10 5 Ladder Status Display Status is shown for the elements
206. d to the Loop Directory 8 8 Using TISOFT for Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Status of Contol When you show or edit a particular loop the control block enabled disabled Blocks during Edits status remains constant However when you press ENTER F8 the control block is automatically disabled to enter your edit The control block is restored to its original status enabled or disabled upon exit to the directory You can also enable the Loop control block by using the EN DIS function key while in the Loop Directory or Loop display Deleting Loops To delete a loop usethe Block functions from the Directory Whilein the Loop Directory access the Block functions by completing the following steps 1 PressBLOCK F3 2 Press DELETE F4 3 When the prompt appears enter the range of the loop s that you want deleted and press Return For details on using Block functions see Chapter 13 of this manual TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming 8 9 8 5 Entering Ramp Soak Steps Displaying Ramp Soak Table To enter ramp soak steps display the entry table by completing the steps below from the Start up Screen From the Loop Directory begin at Step 4 Figure 8 5 shows the Ramp Soak Table The table provides S memory available and gives status enabled or disabled of the loop control block to which the ramp soak steps are tied Your loop must already exist before you enter ram
207. dders status chart O show and documentation Display comments in ladders status S memory and documentation Synonym toggle Comment toggle Load all AUX 90 if controller supports password AUX 17 compare controller to selected program on disk Load AUX 17 screen Table H 3 On Line Disk Operations Not Allowed by Password Protection Disk Operations that Are Not Allowed with a Password Protected Selected Program on Disk Go off line Block Put in ladder and S memory Write print setup table Write print selection table Read and write memory configuration to from selected program on disk Read and write application ID list to from selected program on disk in memory configuration Read and write I O configuration to from selected program on disk TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using Password H 9 1 2 Appendix Using TISOFT with TC P IP Oveni W escis i xax Erik GR is Fa se Sia eee EGER ar bbe e cei sche ee cbc a s Setting Up the TCP IP Module seeeeen nmm mmn nnn Install the TCP IP Module on a Series505 Base 2 eee Assign an IP Addressto the Module sssssssseeeeeeeen e Using the PLC Start Option rte eiecit Esc e Ie t Rec cS dcr cid Entering an IP Addressin TISOFT 00 ccc e Using the Autostart Option iore eee ee oec ici ed en bade ie cie Et Connectthe Module to the Ethemet cece nens Setting Up the PC with TCP IP iuuseeeeeeernnnm mmm rrr C
208. diate to set a specified bit of an immediate coil The bit is then immediately updated Set Reset Immediate can flag transient conditions such as alarms or operate as a latched output Creates changes or clears the password in the controller or on the selected program on disk Invokes print menu for setting up print parameters Also selects a prompt for selecting import export parameters Special Function Error Code an element used in SF programming must be an integer Special Function Program provides access to the special function programming and subroutine functions or it selects SF PGM data to act on a box that calls an SF program Special Function Program H de is used to define program title type behavior of SF program when an error occurs Special Function Subroutine provides access to special function subroutine programming functions or it selects SF SUB data to act on a box that calls an SF subroutine Special Function Subroutine Header is used to define subroutine title Displays selected program sections in S memory In I O configuration it displays the individual I O points Accesses shift register types Bit Shift Register creates a bit shift register in the Discrete I mage Register Word Shift Register shifts words from memory location A to the V memory beginning at location B The number of words to be shifted to create the shift register is specified in N Returns sine of X in a math expression
209. display 5 6 Configuring Series 505 I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 5 2 Configuring I O Contoller Functionality in Configuration I O Configuration Guidelines Configuration Procedure Keep in mind that while you can configure I O either on line with the controller or off line programming device only functional differences exist between the two modes When on line you can perform those functions that require interfacing with the controller For instance you must be on line to write your I O configuration to the controller or to read the configuration of a base from the base itself Configurations saved off line go to the selected program on disk Before entering your I O configuration be sure that the I O points you select conform to the following guidelines e Thenumber for thel O address must begin on an 8 point boundary An 8 point boundary is n 8 1 for example 1 9 17 etc Addresses not starting on an 8 point boundary are changed to do so when you write the values e Refertothel O module manual for the number of bit and or word I O points required for each module Valid entries for modules with more than 8 points are even numbers from 2 through 28 32 and 64 e Locations assigned to an I O module cannot cross O channel boundaries See your controller manual for details e TISOFT does not flag duplicate I O points NOTE 520 520C 530 530C and 525 are 8 slot programmable controllers Usethe fo
210. dit Mode ssir esdi enia rye e nnn Entering Contacts eich i tied eoa RN Goines Geico sick batts ick cic d ERR Entering Relational Contacts irsi sis rernimia aitamak eee eese Entering Coils z i eiae bo EE ed trei once ed Bach ies bead odes iones ieia sad qued A Entering BOXES iu essct eene e pact ten ebael COCR Reed as Bed CRA ptit eda Box Location Seiridir EORTURGR Re e teo doe ce Becr ute ch e tae n Cornecting ENNES oss pa eee eps x eb eR RR RR ea e Rp OL ween RU dcl Entering Editing Program Elements for Extended Rungs Adding Connecting Lines for Ladders Drawing LinesforNetworks 0 ees Drawing Horzontal Eines 2 5 ee petet EE CR EE ae E aae An oto Drawing Verticallines sssssssessseeeeee me Making Program Changes sennn eee eee eee nn nnn Editing PIOgralis oett XE a Rex REPE RIO ce PRU arene Repo EX Kr ted teg Sa Ving EdJIES ere seco eoe tee e DR MER debe beer ue e te Pee E pte e Due Inserting RUngs ts ens EC GER REGERE CORR Pada C OT A kan nina Rok cc cad Deleting RU ngs bd ient te bed babes td ced eee eda dace eased Inserting Elements ci edo ete Rhoden a Ooi ea Das hen ea Mele padres Deleting Linesand Elements 0 a a re Using UNDEL to Restore a Deleted Element 06000000 e eee Using UNDEL to Duplicate Elements 0 cece m Determining If an Element Is Unique eseeeern nnm nnnm nnn Showing Hement Usage c ccc eee eee nnn
211. dress at the prompt shown in Figure E 1 Your valid entries are from 1 to 254 The minimum value is 1 which is the default Press ENTER F8 to complete the configuration The controller program displays within a few seconds Siemens TISOFT 2 PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE SIMATIC R 505 FAMILY RELEASE 6 3 ORDER NUMBER PC505 6263 SOFTWARE PART NUMBER 2587783 0032 Copyright C 1998 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc All Rights Reserved WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law SELECT SECONDARY ADDRESS 001 ABORT F1 ENTER F8 Figure E 1 TIWAY I Host Adapter Secondary Address Menu EA Using TISOFT with TIWAY TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual E 3 Checking UNILINK Host Adapter Configuration If your UNILINK Host Adapter has not been configured you must select the configuration using the UNILINK Host Adapter Configuration Screen See Figure E 2 The default parameters are MHIU HIU address 0 and MAX SECONDARY ADDRESS 254 Siemens TISOFT 2 PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE SIMATIC R 505 FAMILY RELEASE 6 3 ORDER NUMBER PC505 6263 SOFTWARE PART NUMBER 2587783 0032 Copyright C 1998 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc All Rights Reserved WARNING This computer program is
212. drive letter followed by INSTALL For example insert the 3 5 inch disk in drive A and type A INSTALL Return Continue with the remaining disks as instructed on the screen The upgrade package will automatically install itself by overwriting the earlier release of TISOFT while leaving your program files intact when the upgrade is complete the DOS prompt is re displayed 1 6 Installing TISO FT Release 6 3 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 1 4 Installing TISOFTin Windows 95 Installing TISOFT For Windows 95 you can use the following procedure to install TISOFT as Programming shown in Figure 1 5 Software in Windows 95 Windows 95 Start Menu Programs x Documents E Settings Q Find Help Select Run Start Button Figure 1 5 Installing TISOFTin Windows 1 Insert Disk 1 in your computer 2 Click the Start button to open the Windows 95 menu 3 Click on the Run menu item 4 IntheRun dialog type A INSTALL 5 Click on OK or press Return to start the setup procedure 6 Follow the on screen prompts to complete the installation NOTE TISOFT may encounter communication timeout problems with your programmable controller when running from the Windows 95 desktop depending on the configuration of your particular computer and or the programs or applications running at the sametime as TI SOFT For suggestions on minimizi
213. dy in use on your H1 network 0800060100FE This address needs to be the same address you entered previously in C SINEC BIN NETINST EXE Application association name UnitA UnitB Remote Adar 080006010001 080006010002 Local TSAP UnitA UnitB Remote TSAP PC2 PC2 To automatically load the CP 1413 drivers initialize the CP 1413 and allow TISOFT to use the CP 1413 Type the following lines in your AUTOEXEC BAT file cd c sinec bin tfnetdrv Loads the CP 1413 driver scp mon c Loads the CP 1413 firmware scp mon 1 Loads the CP 1413 local database ed TI Usecd TI for TISOFT H1TC 0x82 Loads the H 1 Series 505 task code driver cd Returns default directory to root The H1 Series 505 task code driver H1TC is a TSR that handles Series 505 requests for the CP1434TF Configurator and TISOFT The task code driver uses one software address usually 0x82 0x80 and 0x81 are usually used by the CP 1413 TFNETDRV driver and the TF DDE driver If 0x82 is already in use pick an unused number above 0x82 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFT with H1 Communications G 15 Steps for Installing and Configuring the CP1413 Module continued NOTE The CP1413 driver does not run in protected mode If you want to run more than one application e g H1 Configurator or TISOFT over H1 dose one of the applications before running the other application Step 13 Reboot If conditions permit safely interrupting your PC you can reboot y
214. e use the up down arrow keys to scroll through the chart by rows TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using Status Functions 10 7 Displaying Status Charts continued Reading Chart Status is shown for the elements in your chart display in the format given Displays below The areas shaded in the examples are shown in reverse video on your display Controller Status CHART Display ON X23 ON OFF X23 OFF Forced ON X23 ON Forced OFF X23 OFF Value V23 126 Status for words shows the value in the location Forced Value WY56 126 Status for words shows the value in the location ASCII V125 ABCD Forced Status is not shown for ASCII format 10 8 Using Status Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 10 6 Finding Ladders and Elements Locating Ladder Addresses Locating Elements Display the section of the program you need by completing the following steps 1 Either press STATUS F7 from the Ladder Display or STATUS F8 from the Status Chart Display 2 Press FIND F3 or Ceti F SeeFigure 10 4 3 Press ADDR F2 4 At the prompt enter the address of the ladder rung you want displayed 5 Press Return To use the Find function in locating elements after pressing FIND F3 enter the desired element type and identifier at the prompt For example if you want to locate WX20 you can simply type in WX20 Press Return to execute the Fin
215. e 11 4 RBC Software Part Number s Display 11 14 Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Show PLC Card Use AUX 27 to specify the failure class of cards in your controller To invoke Failure Class the operation type in 27 at the AUX menu prompt and press Return AUX 27 The PLC Card Failure Class displays as shown in Figure 11 5 To change the failure class of a card use the arrow keys to position the cursor in the FAILURE CLASS field Press F2 to change the class to either fatal or non fatal PLC CARD FAILURE CLASS PLC SLOT PLC CARD FAILURE CLASS LOOP GLOBAL MEMORY RCC RCC 565 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 NONFATAL F2 Figure 11 5 PLC Card Failure Class Display TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions 11 15 Performing Controller Diagnostics AUX 15 20 23 27 28 29 continued Checking Memory Availability AUX 28 Show PLC Operational Status AUX 29 11 16 Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions Use AUX 28 to determine how much memory is configured used and available The Memory Availability screen shown in Figure 11 6 displays the number of bytes for L CL S and CS if supported memory MEMORY AVAILABILITY CONFIGURED BYTES USED BYTES AVAILABLE BYTES AVAILABLE WORDS LADDER L 188 32580 16290 COMPILED L CL 65536 256 65280 SPECIAL S 66 32702 COMPILED SF CS 2048 124
216. e 12 5 12 3 Building a Table Building a Table Building a Table from a Read Display Your options for building a global search and replace table enable you to create the table from free form entries or froma read display of elements of selected locations which can also be edited To build your search and replace table from a read of a specified range and memory type complete the steps as listed below 1 Enter memory type and range for the table at the prompt displayed on the Search and Replace menu The read is restricted to the range and memory type you set at the menu prompt Press BLDTBL F7 Press READ F5 to list elements for the range you selected The elements are displayed in the REPLACE column of the table The Read function does not duplicate elements in the table listing only one occurrence of an element within the selected range is listed Null elements are not listed When all elements that will fit on one display are listed you receive a table full message At this point you can begin editing of the listing by combining or deleting entries Then do another Read Repeat the edit Steps and reads as needed Completing the table from this point is free form entry You can now edit the elements listed from the Read to fit your application Press START F8 to initiate the global search and replace 12 6 Using Global Search and Replace TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Building a To build your search and replac
217. e ade Enabling Disabling Control BlOCkKS 6 0 cece e m Compiling SF Programs Subroutines cc cece nnn enn Why Choose Compiled Mode foran SF Program or Subroutine 8 31 Selecting Compiled Mode 1 ccc ccc tee mnn 8 31 Determining Compiled Status ssssssssseeeeeee em e 8 32 Contents ix Chapter9 Documenting Programs 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 Documenting Your Ladder Program sssseee nnn nennen nnn nn Available Documentation ssssssssssseeeeeeee eee hm Ueirig Extemal ECO FSi seiret persenan aaa re CE eed wed A REA PEU PEDE Eee ea Accessing Documentation Functions sssssssseeee eese Preparing to Enter Comments ccccccceec cece eee nnns Selecting an Element 4e xrE erent de tC ede CE de er nde t Ua etae Using the Comment Field to Select an Element ussu Using the Pop up List to Selectan Element 0 cece eects Comment Parameters i ekerktEee pex e RPG a Den eR Rp dede dee pal bakes Invoking the Comment Editor Menu sssssseeeeee ee Enteng Comments 25355 0x 6h FERRE HRURGORRRRURR ERR NENE NEL EEEN NEE EREN LAUR Keying In Comments oiu cese eate cre cto oe nia Fe lt oh cac ue dC aca ac Adding Paging Instructions sairis ieee vie evi er eee xen her i REY Eu Ee A Saving COMMENTS educat heck anc RO RD ROC E EORR Ra Ted eras EANA UR n RACER Finding a C ommen Esme dipiin eden aai cowed oue beg ba Reb an d
218. e called HOST TXT located in subdirectory PCTCP on your C drive the path would be c petcp host txt This is the only data you need to add to the configuration file after you answer the Hosttable prompt you can save your configuration and exit the Config utility TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISO FT with TCP IP F7 Setting Up the PC with TCP IP continued Build a Host Table In order for TISOFT to communicate to your system over the Ethernet File network you must build a host table that identifies an IP address and logical name for the controllers that you want to use on your network The file name should correspond to the path that you specified when you ran the configuration utility for your FTP software You can use any standard DOS text editor to construct the host table file It should follow the format illustrated in Figurel 3 THHEBHHBHHBHHEHEHBHHBHBHHHHHHBHEHBHHHE a sample host table THHEBHHBHHBHHEHEHHHHBHBHHHHHHHBHHEHBHHIRE it ProNet 3 host names 128 127 126 1 blender1 128 127 126 125 mixer2 128 127 126 128 masher end of file Figure l 3 Sample Host Table File Thefollowing rules apply when you construct a host table file e Lines beginning with the pound symbol are comments e A maximum of 64 host names may be included in the host file e Host names for example blender1 are limited to 32 characters Spaces are not allowed within host names F8 Using TISO FT with TC P IP TISO
219. e defined below EXIT F1 or ESC Allows you to return to the main auxiliary AU X screen e ENPSW F2 or E Allows you to enable password protection for the controller and the selected program on disk e DISPSW F3 or D Allows you to disable password protection for the controller If you have not already entered a password for the controller TISOFT prompts you for the current password If the password you provide is not correct TISOFT does not disable the password protection This function does not work unless you provide a password e SETPSW F4 or S Allows you to set or change the password for the controller TI SOFT prompts you for the current password If the current password is correct TISOFT prompts you for the new password twice If the new passwords are not the same or the current password is not correct the password is not changed To delete a password or to make the controller not password protected enter a null password e NOACC F6 or N Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for no access This function will not work without a password e RDONLY F7 or R Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for read only access This function will not work without a password e FULL F8 or F Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for full read write access This function will not work without a password TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using Password H 5 H 3
220. e ee ee eR HOUR RACK ECRUR ERU GRECI ACT Rr OR C 11 4 13 31 Memory TypesAccessible by Block FUNCtIONS 0 cee cee cece eee eens 13 2 F 1 Cable Pinoutsfor Modem Communications 0 cee ete F 1 G l HLNetwOoIKEmOIS ic need ox epos sed dade desde daa pe CAL A ea an G 23 H 1 On Line Password Operations ssssssssssssss e nnn H 8 H 2 On Line Disk Operations Allowed by Password Protection ssssssssss H 9 H 3 On Line Disk Operations Not Allowed by Password Protection ssssss H 9 l 1 Altematives for Loading IP Address 00 l 3 l 2 Eror Numbers cieri cided isana eared AA E E E e Rd l 10 J 1 FMS Network Error Codes 21 or ranee he a ei eed AREE Y eR A os J 8 K 1 TISOFT Program Files Alphabetically Listed 0 00 0 K 2 K 2 TISOFT Program Files Listed by Function 0 0000 n K 3 K 3 TISOFTNon Program Files sssssssssssseeee hh K 3 Gloss A es qa rae doen ce ce d tate ents aiat ue dime eap aret xxiv Contents TISOFT 6 3 Programming Package Converting Programs from Earlier Releases Tems in this Manual Contollers Supported Preface Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc is pleased to announce the release of TISOFT2 Release 6 3 programming package for SIMATIC 505 controllers The new features and enhancements of this release are summarized in this Preface NOTE For up to the minute information about the software release and installation guidelines you may want
221. e other outputs from the rung This message indicates that the rung at the specified address contains invalid Boolean stack logic It contains an extra element with a STR attribute Edit the rung and deletethe extra STORE element This message indicates that a large box superbox used in the specified rung address cannot be drawn at screen position 1 3 because the network is too complex Edit and simplify the network This message indicates that a multiple input box used in the specified rung address cannot be drawn at screen position 1 3 because the network is too complex Edit and simplify the network This message indicates that the rung at the specified address contains a midline output coil or out box followed by more input logic contacts Edit the rung and remove any midline output elements TISOFTMessages B 17 Network Contains No Coils at Address Network Contains No Cross Referencable Elements Network Driver Not Installed Network Missing STR Element at Address Network Too Large to Fit into Program Network Was Not Deleted Network Will Cause Stack Overflow in PLC B 18 TISOFTMessages This message indicates that the rung at the specified address contains no coils Edit the rung and define one or more coils or deletethe rung Also contact or box data may be missing This message is displayed during the On Screen Cross Reference operation It indicates that the current rung displayed
222. e retained state information The timer counter and drum instructions are examples of these instructions The chapter about Controller Memory in the SIMATIC 545 555 575 Programming Reference M anual PPX 505 8204 x lists the various memory areas in the controller where retained state information is maintained it also lists the restrictions that exist in assigning instruction numbers for the boxes that reference these areas You must design your program to accommodate these requirements A WARNING Incorrect assignment of instruction numbers for retained state instructions could result in inconsistent controller action If this occurs it could cause unpredictable controller action that could result in death or serious injury and or damage to equipment You must ensure that instruction numbers are assigned uniquely for boxes with retained state information Refer to the chapter about Controller Memory in the SIMATIC 545 555 575 Programming Reference Manual Editing an Active Performing edits on an active process involves a number of considerations Process that are detailed in the section called Doing Run Time Program Edits in the chapter of the SIMATIC 545 555 575 Programming Reference Manual that is about Programming Concepts You must read and fully understand this information before you make any edits to the control program of an active process a WARNING Incorrect application of run time edits could cause the contr
223. e table from elements that you type in Free Form Entry complete the steps as listed below Table 1 Enter memory type and range for the table at the prompt displayed on the Search and Replace menu 2 Thereplacement is restricted to the range and memory type you set at the menu prompt 3 Press BLDTBL F7 4 Typein the elements and ranges as needed for your application Usethe arrow and return keys to move the cursor from column to column to make your entries 5 Press START F8 to initiate the global search and replace TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using Global Search and Replace 12 7 Chapter 13 Performing Block Data Functions Block Functions Defined cccccceccccucucucuuuueucucucuvaucucusuvuvunununnnnns Types of Block Functions Block Functionality from Ladder Display ze esdenlm hs SH a ee ees Block MOVE ibus t piae ko ie cies ERR ead ticks batterie bile Ke Block Delete 0 prn eee eoe cem tek CRT d a DL Aa eu EPA VRAC cb a edP TMMT Accessing Block Operations from Ladder Display enn n n nnn Accessing Ladder Display Bock Functions 0c cece cece e INVOKING a Bloclc ODGEFatiDEi s aed iacent ool dedic Oe a erar E de aria Making Entries to Block Menus from Ladder Display sese Block Parame teisi asied ibd etri beer e YA B n ako cde tue d abies eb leido 13 5 Entering Block ParametelS iiiiesssossisem hm RR REG HARE TY RRRTRORERR RA KERI
224. e tities ere anert Galea Gave ales itc a ce E a Copying a Program e eee entera Ea aeta doe WARE Pai kd ci ies Non Program File Selection sssssssssseeeeeee m re Backing up Program Files and Directories leen nnn n Selecting Off Line Operation ccc cece eee nnn Selecting On Line Operation ccc eee nnn Selecting On Line Operation forthe 575 Controller Reading 575 Port Configuration sssssssssssseeeeee eee Wnting 575 Port Configuration uote ee te bk e P e eb e lo as Chapter3 TISOFTBasics 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 D tgpl os 50 m Programming and Utilities sssssssssssseeee em 3 2 Diagnostics Memory and I O Configuration 6000s 3 2 WSOFTMenUus iceuchka hm ene eee AR ENEE ale ee DR CC RT eae RANAR Reading TISOFTDISOIayS xx tet iiaa e or Cad Pca yb Biden A ae 3 3 Accessing TiSOFTFunctions seen Using the LadderDisplay Menus sssssssseeee aa ee rre 3 4 Display SZE x 25s cts discs eae eie bd eee ee Pete ER RARE ER era 3 4 Element SZE s aiii eben deba deb bd una e Binet dn SUR Gea aed eed tb And nd Bod bea 3 4 TSOFTFunctions sseeesenn nnns eee aa a aa rr rn n n n On Line Off Line Define sese eese ke reet eed tree Y e C ob eA On Line Off Line Functions Off Line Only FUNC HONS ete bere cenae e de t te e ewe edere a Toe On Line Only F nctlons ien peek rece pU eR Race Re CER Da e RECRUIT ho TISOFTKGeyS isin kk xxx
225. ead the selected program on the disk TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring PROFIBUS DP O 617 Reading an I O Configuration continued 6 18 An alternative procedure for displaying a PROFIBUS DP slave configuration is as follows 1 Press SPACEBAR and then CONFIO F3 The PROFIBUS DP Slave Status screen appears See Figure 6 14 2 Press CONFIG F2 The PROFIBUS DP Slave Configuration screen appears See Figure 6 15 3 Usethe arrow page keys to set the SLAVE field or type in the slave number 4 Press either READDK F3 or READPC F5 The configuration of the selected slave is displayed at the top of the screen with the source FROM DISK or FROM PLC indicated on the prompt line of the display SeeFigure 6 15 PROFIBUS DP I O MODULE DEFINITION FOR SLAVE 003 1 0 NUMBER OF BIT AND WORD I O SLAVE IDENT MODULE ADDRESS X Y WX WY Bis 32 16 16 0 ENABLED 9 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 0 DISABLED 0 0 6 0 0 4 8 CcOoooooooooo CcOOocoococoocoooooooocoo FROM PLC 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 SHOW F2 READDK F3 READPC F5 EDIT F7 UPDATE F8 Figure 6 15 On Line PRORBUS DP Slave Configuration Screen Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 6 7 Showing Individual I O Configuration Points Showing I O With the SHOW function you can display individual I O points for a slave Configuration configuration either on or off line You also have the option of displaying Chart Display the sy
226. ears See Figure 6 12 PROFIBUS DP SLAVE STATUS ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT SLAVE ENABLED ASSIGNED REQUIRED YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 CONFIG F2 FIND F3 MERGE F4 EN DIS F5 50510 F6 DELETE F8 Figure 6 12 Off Line PRORHBUS DP Slave Status Screen 2 Usethe arrow page keys to highlight the desired slave number on the screen 3 Press CONFIG F2 The PROFIBUS DP Slave Configuration screen appears See Figure 6 13 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O 6 15 Reading an I O Configuration continued 6 16 An alternative procedure for displaying a PROFIBUS DP slave configuration is as follows 1 Press SPACEBAR and then CONFIO F3 The PROFIBUS DP Slave Status screen appears See Figure 6 12 2 Press CONFIG F2 The PROFIBUS DP Slave Configuration screen appears See Figure 6 13 3 Usethe arrow page keys to set the SLAVE field or type in the slave number 4 Press READRM F3 The configuration of the selected slave is displayed at the top of the screen with the source FROM RAM indicated on the prompt line of the display See Figure 6 13 PROFIBUS DP I O MODULE DEFINITION FOR SLAVE 003 1 0 NUMBER OF BIT AND WORD I O SLAVE IDENT MODULE ADDRESS X Y WX WY Sau 32 16 16 0 ENABLED 9 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 0 DISABLED 0 0 6 0 0 2 4 cOooooocooooo CcOOocooocoocoooooooocoo
227. ebuild a chart each time To save a status chart from the Build Chart Display complete the steps below 1 Press WRCHT F8 to write the chart to disk 2 Either usethe arrow keys to select the filename from the window or press FLDTGL F6 and type in a name at the prompt where the current chart is to be stored 3 Press SELECT F8 or press Return 10 6 Using Status Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 10 5 Displaying Status Charts Loading a Status Toload a chart complete the following steps from the Status Chart or Build Chart Chart Display Figure 10 3 shows the Status Chart Display Read Chart is F7 on either display Remember that the newly loaded chart will overwrite the current chart display 1 Press RDCHT F7 to read a chart previously saved on disk 2 Either usethe arrow keys to select the filename from the window or type in a name at the prompt where the current chart is stored 3 Press SELECT F8 or press Return STATUS CHART LOCATION STATUS LOCATION STATUS LOCATION STATUS UPDATE IN PROGRESS 565 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 CHGVAL F2 BLDCHT F3 PG RN F4 S SCAN F5 SYNTGL F6 RDCHT F7 STATUS F8 Figure 10 3 Status Chart Display Displaying You have the capability of displaying synonyms on Status Charts in the Synonyms in Charts on line mode Press SYNTGL F6 to show the synonyms in a chart press F6 again to return the display to Chart only Use PgUp PgDn to scroll through the display by pag
228. ec caa cet ae onus acea a ote ants H1 Network Names Screen asisikie caai ri aE AE TE A AEA R Off Line Password Selection Screen 2 reanna nananana H 4 On Line Password Selection Screen 2 anana H 5 Modified PLC Logic Example 52 5 o EEERCC OR Rr ese dank Cp bea eda I A Entering an IP Addressin MSOFE hasesiad aiana hata aa a l 5 Sample Hog Table Fe sncnccctncsconwekcins ei E aie Pa Fc E EI eA 1 8 FMS Network Na mes Node List Example 60 000s J 5 FMS Network NamesScreen sess J 7 Accessing TISOFT Properties Dialog ssssssseseeeeere e K 4 Contents xxiii List of Tables 1 1 Expanded System Requirements 00 ccc ae 1 2 3 1 TSOFTKEYS c 3 8 6 1 Configuring Slavesin COM PROFIBUS sssssssssee n nne 6 5 6 2 PROFIBUS DP Slave Edit Function Keys suussa 6 14 7 1 Cursorand Editing Keys sgp ina acii a A nnn 7 7 7 2 Firid EXAMPpPlGS siii aii eek da ee ee AA Sas Rara E EAE ee e a 7 20 7 3 Keystroke MaCrOS 1 ccc teen ens 7 26 8 1 SMemory FUNCHOM REVS 2x3 cache satis bd cold dede Da era decla aci E ACE Ea 1 0 ded 8 2 PowerMath vs Non PowerMath Controllers 2 0 0 ee 8 23 9 1 ComnmentFields iicet ci gee bPi as e babe EE EX eed ee eda eel Ea ets dente ees 9 21 9 2 SynonymiFlelds eet REX EGeekRE Pune Rack eR oe ER bead Phe ERGO Tuck dbs 9 21 10 1 StatusInformation for Box Instructions ssssssssseeeeeeee ee 10 11 lll Au uxliaty FUNCOMS seirene esa ee
229. ecution of a ladder subroutine Initiates run mode in controller or loop card Runs base diagnostics on all bases Runs base diagnostics on the selected channel and base TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Glossary 13 RUNG SIN X RUNG S SBR SCALE SDT SEEK SELECT SEND SET SETI SETPSW SETUP SFEC SFPGM SFPGM Header SFSUB SFSUB Header SHOW SHR SHRB SHRW SIN X 14 Glossary Inserts an empty rung in your ladder program when in ladder editor insert mode Accesses the ladder status it is a hard key Subroutineis a coil that defines a subroutine in ladder logic Converts binary inputs into engineering units Available in SF programs and SF subroutines Sequential Data Table writes the value at an indexed table location to the specified output address The index is incremented to the next table entry each time the statement is executed The restart bit is set when the index is at any point other than the beginning of the table Availablein SF programs and SF subroutines L ocates the next occurrence of a forced element type Allows the selection of ladder rung and charts to be displayed in status selects a program or file in multiple programs PGMS Sends the print control sequence to the printer Se Coil used with Reset Coil to set a specified bit Set and Reset can flag transient conditions such as alarms or operate as a latched output Se Coil Immediate used with Reset Coil Imme
230. ed When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB the maximum number of label definitions was exceeded When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB a syntax error was encountered indicating that there is a problem with the content of S memory When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB an undefined label was encountered This error should not occur except under extenuating circumstances TISOFT attempted to create a file on the disk and failed The disk drive may deat been popped open or a disk hardware failure may have occurred TISOFT attempted to delete a file from the disk and failed The file may be write protected or may have been accidentally deleted the disk drive may a been popped open or a disk hardware failure may have occurred An error occurred while the controller was in RUN TIME EDIT mode To clear this error take one of the following actions e Perform a successful syntax check AU X 22 Syntax Check or SYNTAX F8 on the PG RN menu and then goto RUN mode e GotoPGM mode TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Error Reading from Disk Error Replacing aaaannnn with aaaannnn at Address Error Replacing aaaannnn with aaaannnn at Alarm xxx Error Replacing aaaannnn with aaaannnn at Loop xxx Error Replacing aaaannnn with aaaannnn at Loop xxx R S xxx Error Replacing Element at Address Error Replacing Element at SFPGM xxxx INST xxxxx Error Replacing Element at SFSUB xxxx INST xxxx TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual
231. ed Passwords forthe Selected Program on Disk d and Enabled Passwordsin the Controller 0 0 cece cece eee eee ler Password ACCeESSLEVEIS 2 ccc cc nn rd for TISOFT Releases Earier than 5 0 0 ccc ccc eee eens Contents xvii Appendix Using TISOFT with TCP IP 1 1 OVCIVIOW 22x res UR EROGO ERI Ferenc asa eee R A E cd kee IR 1 2 Setting Up the TCP IP Module eee nnnm mmn Install the TCP IP Module on a Seres 505 Base l a Assign an IP Addressto the Module sssssssseeeeee eee Using the PLC StartOption sere itisman a o a E e a eed nena Entering an IP Address in TISOFT sieiicsisetii ccc a E re Using the Autostart Option ccc cece A a Eaa Connect the Module to the Ethemet cece eee teens 1 3 Setting Up the PC with TCP IP iuseeeeeeenrn nmm mnn Connect YourPC to the Ethemet isses rn Install PC TCP KemelorOnNetKemel sssen cee eee tenn eens Verify the Installation Optional ccc cece I Hn Specify a Path to the Host Table File sssssssee eee Build a Host Table File sssssee RR IIR RR 1 4 Using TISOFT wih ICP IP a cise ecient at ieee eae uum ree ax EREEREETERRRR T RR Starting TISOFTusing TCP IP Communications 0 cece eee eens To bleshooting serere her dank bie Ree ER ED RES RR ad XR XR EG uec Appendix Using TISOFT with AMS J 1 FMS Communications Overview ern nnn nnn nnn r
232. ed channel number only The configuration of the selected base is displayed with the source FROM DISK Or FROM PLC indicated on the message line of the display See Figure 5 4 505 I O MODULE DEFINITION FOR CHANNEL 1 BASE 00 1 0 NUMBER OF BIT AND WORD I O SPECIAL BASE SLOT ADDRESS WX WY FUNCTION ENABLED FROM PLC 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 SHOW F2 READDK F3 WRITDK F4 READPC F5 WRITPC F6 READBS F7 CLRBS F8 Figure 5 4 On Line Base I O Configuration Screen TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring Series 505 I O 5 5 Reading an I O Configuration continued Displaying the You must be on line to read a base configuration from the base To read a Configuration from base configuration complete the following steps See Figure 5 3 a Base 1 Press the SPACEBAR and then CONFIO F3 The 505 Base Status screen appears See Figure 5 3 2 Typethe channel number if desired 3 Usethe arrow keys to highlight the desired base on the screen 4 Press CONFIG F2 The Basel O Configuration screen appears See Figure 5 4 5 Press READBS F7 NOTE You can change the base number either by using the PgUp PgDn keys if the last operation was a Read operation or by typing a number in the BASE field and pressing READBS F7 You can view bases by using the PgUp PgDn keys for the currently selected channel number only The configuration of the selected base is displayed with the source FROM BASE indicated on the prompt line of the
233. ed integer You can also change the relation of the contact when INT or UINT is highlighted by typing one of the other sign keys for example gt lt lt gt gt or lt 4 Enter the identifiers for each field and press Return to write the contact to the network The editing cursor moves to the next available position Rung 1 after pressing R l F7 followed by F2 V0000001 V1 1 Lx Use arrow keys to move cursor to each field Type element identifier then press ENTER Figure 7 8 Entering Relational Contacts TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISO FT for Disc rete Programming 7 9 Entering Editing Ladder Program Elements continued Entering Coils To enter or edit a coil position the cursor on the network Usethe coil function key or press the O hard key to position the cursor in the output column and make the entry Type in the element identifier If you decide not to complete an entry press ABORT F1 Press Return to write the coil tothe network When a network is complete press ENTER F8 Entering Boxes To enter or edit a box position the cursor in the column of the rung where the box is to be created Press BOX F6 Type in the mnemonic for the box or press or Shift to show a listing of valid box types then place the cursor on the box type you want and press SELECT F8 or Return T he selected box type appears in the prompt Press Reur again When the box is
234. ed to copy discrete and word data to from a table Pack Analog Alarm copies alarm data to from a specified table Up to eight alarm data type parameters may be copied Copies loop data to from a specified table Up to eight loop data type parameters may be copied Pack Ramp Soak copies ramp soak data to from a specified table In print mode it lets the printer continue to the end of the page and then stop In H1 TCP or FMS communications Page allows you to select a list of names Personal Computer Glossary 11 PETWD RDTBL PETWD PgDn PG RN PGM PGMFRZ PGMOFF PGMS PGTS PGTSZ PgUp PLC PORTCF PPETn PRINT PRO DP PRTCTL PUT QUIT R S RAMP RDCHT RDDATE RDONLY RDTBL 12 Glossary Pe Scan Watchdog is an instruction in SF programs and SF subroutines that allows you to extend the scan watchdog while performing an in line SF PGM or SFSUB of an RLL program Page Down displays the next page it is a hard key Program Run allows the selection of discrete CPU mode loop card mode and interaction between the two Program initiates programming mode in the loop controller or SF module Program Freeze places the controller in Program mode with all outputs remaining in the state they were prior toinitiating Freeze mode Program Off places the controller in Program mode with discrete outputs set to zero and word outputs frozen Accesses the function keys that enable performing program selection
235. een installed change to the directory on Task Code Driver your computer where you placed TI SOFT and type H1TC 0x82 The H1 Series 505 task code driver HITC is a TSR that handles Series 505 requests for the CP1434TF Configurator and TISOFT The task code driver uses one software interrupt number usually 0x82 0x80 and 0x81 are usually used by the TFNETDRV and the TF DDE drivers If Ox82 is already in use pick an unused number above 0x82 Step 17 Access H1 After TI SOFT is installed you are ready to select the TISOFT operating Devices Using software you need The listing below defines the options you have available TISOFT e T1505 selects main TISOFT operating software and proceeds to start up screen e TIXREF selects print cross reference and proceeds to start up screen e LO505 selects the load only version of TISOFT e ROB505 selects the read only version of TISOFT To access the H1 network with TISOFT type in the name of theTISOFT operating software you selected from the list above followed by H 1 for example TI505 H1 and press Return or Enter to invoke TI SOFT G 20 TISOFTwith H1 Communications TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Step 18 Display After you enter the TISOFT operating software selection you wish to use TISOFT Start up the start up screen is displayed as shown in Figure G 9 Your options for Screen choosing on or off line operation color and programs are accessed from the
236. een two applications using SINEC H1 TISOFT references the application association by using the local name of the application association labeled application association name when set up in COML program G 12 TISOFTwith H1 Communications TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Select an Ethernet Address for Each Device on the H1 Network Perform the following steps to select an Ethernet address for each device A WARNING Using the same Ethernet H1 network address more than once on the same H1 network can cause unpredictable controller behavior Unpredictable controller behavior could cause death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Ensure that you do not repeat an Ethernet H1 network address on the same H1 network 1 Usethe505 CP1434TF H1 Configurator to create a configuration file for the first CP1434TF module in File menu Enter a unique local Ethernet address for example 080006010001 that is not already in use on your H1 network Create a TF Service with the remote ethernet address set to the address of your CP 1413 card The remote TSAP name should be set to the same name as the local TSAP name on the CP 1413 The local TSAP name should be set to the same name as the remote TSAP name on the CP 1413 Additional TF Services are not needed for TI SOFT access You can configure additional TF Services if you add another application that requires them Refer tothe TF User Interface section of the SINE
237. eld to select an element e Or use the pop up list to select an element Details of the ways to select an element are shown in the next two sections NOTE 10O X and Y with the same identifier refer to the same point and synonym WIO WX and WY with the same identifier refer to the same word and synonym TCW TCP and TCC with the same identifier refer tothe same synonym Word synonym elements can have bit of word synonyms Using the Synonym To use the SYNONYM field to select an element use the following procedure Field to Selectan Hement 1 Typein the element type at the SYNONYM field For example type in Y SeeFigure 9 6 2 Typein theidentifier at the SYNONYM field For example type in 450 3 Press Return to go to the Synonym Editor Menu Figure 9 8 Your Document Title DATE VERSION SYNONYM Y000000450 545 LOADER EXIT F1 IMPORT F2 EXPORT F3 SETUP F5 RECOVR F8 Figure 9 6 Synonym Prompt Selection Screen TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Documenting Programs 9 9 Preparing to Enter Synonyms and or Desc riptors continued Using the Pop up To select an element using the pop up list use the following procedure List to Selectan Hement 1 Press Vjor Shift 2 to display a full listing of elements that may be selected See Figure 9 7 2 Usethearrow keys to select the element from the list For example if you want a synonym tied to Y highlight Y and press Return Y
238. elds The first field shows the controller model and the second field shows the program name I n on line mode a third field is added that shows the operating mode of the controller e Thelast line on the screen is the function key menu TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFTBasics 3 3 3 3 Accessing TISOFT Functions Using the Ladder You access all TISOFT primary functions programming and utilities from Display Menus the ladder display The plus sign at the lower right of this and other screens indicates that you can access additional function keys by pressing the spacebar Figure 3 3 illustrates the initial on line ladder display After you enter a program your ladder display then shows a section of that program when you invoke the display All references in this manual to Ladder Display refer to this screen The numbers on the left side of the display are the ladder addresses being displayed ROW 1 COL 1 NEIWORKSIARTING ADDRESS 1 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 EDIT F2 FIND F3 DOCUM F4 BLOCK F5 AUX F6 STATUS F7 CHART F8 ft Em 545 NETDATA PG PRINT F1 CONFME F2 CONFIO F3 COMTGL F4 SYNTGL F5 LOOP F6 ALARM F7 SFPGM F8 Figure 3 3 On Line Ladder Display Display Size Your TI SOFT ladder display is 12 columns wide and 7 rows long The actual ladder rung can be much longer Eement Size Each element of a ladder program is displayed in a specific size Contacts and coils are 1x1 one column by
239. ements show a value for status Only WX and WY word elements can be forced F9 increments the element address F 10 decrements the address Both keys perform a read with the address change provided the operation before using the F9 and F 10 keys was a read If any operation other than a read was performed before pressing F9 or F 10 a read is not done You can use Alt Q to execute a single scan while you arein Change Value refer to Section 10 9 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using Status Functions 10 15 10 11 Reading Changing Element Status Reading Status Toread the status of an element complete the following steps 1 Press CHGVAL F2 2 At the prompt type in the element type and identifier to be read 3 Ifthe display format needs to be changed press the SPACEBAR to select the desired format before going to the next step 4 Press READ F2 Whiting Values You can write a value to almost all elements A WARNNG EO In both PROGRAM mode and RUN mode all changes made to the output image register are reflected in the output modules Manually changing the state of an output writing a value or forcing an element could put the process in an uncontrolled state Death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment could ensue Use caution when using the Write and Force functions in your application A WARNING A change made in chart or ladder status updates the program as entered If made in RUN mode th
240. ent Range An invalid boundary crossing has occurred in the range of the element Crosses Invalid For example some 560 565 functions do not allow a control relay C Boundary range to cross the 8192 8193 boundary or the 24576 24577 boundary Element Too Large This message occurs if you attempt to create a rung that exceeds the to Fit into Network maximum number of elements allowed per rung 120 contact sized nodes To correct the entry either delete some ladder elements or break the logic into two rungs Elements require node sizes as listed below Contact 1 node 2 x 3 box 6 nodes 7 x 8 box 56 nodes Coil 21 node 3 x 3 box 29 nodes 4 x 7 box 28 nodes O S Box 1 node 2 x 7 box 14 nodes Element Type Not The specified element type is an invalid type for the current field Press Allowed Press the or Shift keys to display a screen listing valid element types for for Valid Type the current field Element Unforced This message indicates that the requested element has been successfully unforced Element within The specified Control Relay address exceeds the maximum Global CR Invalid Range range determined by your current I O Configuration but is less than the minimum Internal Local CR range Change the Control Relay address to a value within your Global CR range or within the Internal CR range C8193 C56320 Empty Parameter This message is displayed when you edit parameter fields in eithe
241. ent from either status or chart complete the following Hement steps l Press CHGVAL F2 2 Atthe prompt typein the element type either X Y C WX or WY along with the identifier for example Y 150 3 f you wish to select another numeric display format press the SPACEBAR and then the function key for the desired format 4 Press UNFORC F5 Remember that if the format is real or double two consecutive memory locations will be unforced Unforcing All To unforce all elements in a program complete the following steps from Hements either status or chart 1 Press CHGVAL F2 2 Press UN ALL F6 The prompt UNFORCE ALL 1 0 is displayed Press YES F2 10 18 Using Status Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 10 14 Changing Controller Modes Toggling from You can change operating mode of the controller from either the chart or Program to Run ladder status display First press PG RN F4 When you have S memory configured you receive a display with three fields as shown in bold type below to change operating mode Use the arrow keys to position the cursor in the desired field Function keys are available for each field to select the desired option LADDERS PROG LOOPS PROG LOOP MODE LOCKED TO FOLLOW LADDER MODE Changing Ladder When you position the cursor on the LADDERS field the following options Mode are available With no S memory configured the LADDERS field is the only option for changing program mode and
242. er TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISO FT with TIWAY E 7 Appendix F TISOFT with Modem Setting up a When using modems to create a communication link between your TISOFT Modem Link programming device and the controller you need to observe the following guidelines e UsetheMNP or other error correction system Modems will not work reliably if error correction is not used If your modem does not support error correction it should not be used e Turn compression off This is sometimes termed MNP4 error correction e Forhigher modem throughput you may want to use the baud rate conversion feature This will allow you to communicate at a higher baud rate than the actual data transmission over the telephone line For example both the PC and the controller can be set to 9600 baud whilethe modem is communicating over the phone line at 2400 baud Cable Pinouts Depending on the port hardware on your computer and your controller use the corresponding cable configuration as listed in Table F 1 Table F 1 Cable Pinouts for Modem Communications 9 Pin Port to Modem 25 Pin Port to Modem PC or PC or Controller Controller 9 Pin 25 Pin HP 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFT with Modem F 1 Using TIDIAL TIDIAL is an optional operating software that is supplied with TISOFT TIDIAL allows you to set modem parameters dial the modem and go online with TISOFT To invoke TIDIAL f
243. er PPX T5505 8101 7 Refer to this history in all correspondence and or discussion about this manual Event Date Description Original Issue 02 90 Original Issue 2590576 0001 Second Edition 05 91 Second Edition 2590576 0002 Update Package 04 92 Third Edition manual with visible revision bars 2590583 0001 Third Edition 04 92 Third Edition 2590576 0003 Fourth Edition 06 93 Fourth Edition 2590576 0004 Fifth Edition 03 95 Fifth Edition 2590576 0005 Sixth Edition 03 96 Sixth Edition 2590576 0006 Seventh Edition 04 98 Seventh Edition 2590576 0007 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES Pages Cover Copyright History Effective Pages iii xxxi 1 1 1 12 2 1 2 15 3 1 3 11 4 1 4 9 5 1 5 14 6 1 6 20 7 1 7 26 8 1 8 32 9 1 9 22 10 1 10 22 11 1 11 32 12 1 12 7 13 1 13 8 14 1 14 9 A 1 A 15 B 1 B 26 C 1 C 3 D 1 D 2 E 1 E 7 F 1 F 2 G 1 G 24 H 1 H 9 l 1 l 11 J 1 J 8 K 1 K 5 Glossary 1 23 Index 1 Index 8 Registration Description Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Ed
244. er memory L memory Theloop mode can either follow that of the discrete CPU or bein RUN mode independent of the ladder program To invoke this option place the cursor in the LOCKED or UNLOCKED field Your function keys are then as follows UNLOCK F2 frees the loop card for selection of RUN operating mode independent of the ladder CPU LOCK F3 locks the loop card to follow the operating mode selected for ladders OPR ST F6 allows the changing of PROFIBUS DP communications mode OPERATE STOP SYNTAX F8 runs a syntax check on ladder memory L memory 11 26 Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Selecting Hot Use AUX 82 to select the status of a hot backup unit To execute AUX 82 Backup Status use the numeric keys to enter 82 at the prompt in the AUX Functions menu AUX 82 Then press Return Press either ONLINE F2 or SWITCH F3 to select the status for your hot backup configuration e ONLINE F2 puts the standby unit in RUN mode e OFFLINE F2 puts the standby unit in PROGRAM mode e SWITCH F3 switches the roles of the active unit and standby unit TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions 11 27 11 14 Locking out Programming Ports AUX 83 Programming Port Lockout AUX 83 Use AUX 83 to prevent program changes from being made at different ports simultaneously To execute AU X 83 use the numeric keys to enter 83 at the menu prompt then press
245. esired selection e g statement number instruction name or element type and identifier at the prompt 4 Press Return Finding Stary End of n addition to locating a particular statement or element within a program a Program you can use the Find operation to go to the beginning or end of a program e TofindtheSF header beginning of program Press INSTR F3 type in SF at the FIND INSTRUCTION prompt and press Return e Tofindthe beginning of a program Press STMTNO F2 typein 1 at the FIND STATEMENT prompt and press Return e Tofindthe end of the program press INSTR F3 typein END at the prompt and press Return TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming 8 21 8 11 Editing SF Programs Subroutines Invoking Edit Mode Using the SF Entries UST Sc reen To edit an SF program or subroutine use the Show function from the SF Directory to display the SF Table Then press EDIT F2 Use the Page Up Dn keys the arrow keys or FIND F4 function key to locate the SF statement instruction or element to edit At many prompts requiring an element entry in SF programming press SHIFT and 7 to access a display that lists SF instructions element types expression operators and functions and the PRINT instruction options Figure 8 8 shows the List display you receive SF INSTRUCTIONS MATH IF FUNCTIONS ELEMENTS INTEGER REAL INT
246. essing Print Access the Print Program Selection menu by pressing PRINT F1 located at Menus theladder display either on or off line Figure 14 2 shows the mapping of of the Print function keys PRINT On and Off line EXIT EXECUTE SETUP S READDK WRITDK ABORT SUSPEND EXIT READDK WRITDK PRTCTL RDDATE bod ABORT PAGE RESUME QUIT EXIT DELETE INSERT BENE SEND Figure 14 2 Print Menu Map Invoking Print The Print Selection Menu shown in Figure 14 3 appears after you press Selection Menu PRINT F1 Select the data types to print from this menu Y N FROM TO SYN DES COM TITLE N MEMORY CONFIGURATION N LADDERS RANGE N 000001 016384 INLINE XREF EXC CR N 00000 00000 SKIP NOPS N ELEMENT USAGE TABLE N N 000001 026624 N 000000 000000 S MEMORY LOOPS N 64 ANALOG ALARMS N 128 SF PROGRAMS 1023 1023 0 CONFIGURATION 505 CHANNEL BASE 115 PROFIBUS DP SLAVE 112 8192 32768 255 JMP MCR END 565 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 EXECUTE F2 SETUP F3 READDK F5 WRITDK F6 Figure 14 3 Print Selection Menu 14 4 Printing TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Print Selection Options Entering Print Selections The options on the Print Selection menu provide you with program documentation as described below e Title Prints the program title e Memory Configuration Gives you a copy of the completed
247. figuration this means that you are prompted to supply all addresses if you have modified an existing configuration in COM PROFIBUS to add or delete slaves and merged the data into your TISOFT program U pdate compares the data of the selected program on disk to the data in the controller and modifies the controller data as necessary to match the additions or deletions indicated by the comparison A WARNNG Update writes configuration data immediately to the controller If your PROFIBUS DP communications are in OPERATE mode modifying your existing configuration can affect your ongoing process Unexpected process operation could cause serious injury or death to personnel and or damage to equipment Be prepared for the effect on your process and take any necessary safeguards if you choose to execute Update while your PROFIBUS DP communications are in OPERATE mode Follow the steps below to load your I O configuration to the controller 1 Ifyou are off line press ONLINE F4 to change to the on line state 2 Press the spacebar to get the secondary function key line and then press CONFIO F3 to get the status screen 3 Ifthe status display is set to Series 505 I O press PRO DP F6 to toggle the display to PROFIBUS DP I O See Figure 6 4 NOTE Once you select PROFIBUS DP all status and configuration screens display PROFIBUS DP 1 0 information until the end of your TISOFT session or until you use the 505IO F6 to
248. figuration screens display PROFIBUS DP 1 0 information until the end of your TISOFT session or until you use the 505IO F6 toggle to return to Series 505 I O configuration 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 CONFIG F2 FIND F3 MERGE F4 EN DIS F5 50510 F6 DELETE F8 Figure 6 2 Off Line PROHBUS DP Slave Status Function Key Line 66 Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Assigning or Modifying I O Addresses 4 Press MERGE F4 to execute the Merge function 5 Press YES F2 in response to the prompt MERGE COM PROFIBUS BINARY FILE INTO DISK PROGRAM TheTISOFT File Selection screen appears as shown in Figure 6 3 PROFIBUS DP SLAVE STATUS ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT m TISOFT FILE SELECTION REQUIRED PATH CAT SELECT COM PROFIBUS FILE 4 STATION 1 STATION 2 STATION 3 STATION 4 FILENAME STATION 1 545 NETDATA ABORTF1 COPY F2 DELETE F3 RENAME F4 DIR F5 FLDTGL F6 SELECT F8 Figure 6 3 Selecting COM PROHBUS File to Merge in TISOFT 6 Usethelist to select the binary file from which you want to import configuration data If you typethe filename at the prompt do not type the 2BF extension type only the filename Press Return or SELECT F8 Result The PROFIBUS DP Slave Status screen displays configuration information obtained from the COM PROFIBUS binary file that you have just merged into TI SOFT You are now ready to configure starting I O addresses for your
249. for Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Deleting SF Programs Subroutines Toinsert a new SF statement position the cursor on the SF statement which is to follow the new one and press INSST F6 or the INS hard key To delete an SF statement position the cursor on the statement and press DELST F5 or the DEL hard key To change a parameter within a particular statement use the Return key or arrow keys to position the cursor on the desired field Then typein the new entry Delete and insert characters or lines by selecting the appropriate function keys or hard keys To edit the SF instruction type of a particular statement type in the desired instruction type over the existing one and delete any extra characters At the prompt REPLACE STATEMENT type in Y or press YES F2 The parameter fields for the new instructions arethen displayed for editing Thefollowing sets of instructions are functionally related and parameter values are automatically swapped and redisplayed when you change from one statement to the other BINBCD gt BCDBIN MATH MATH lt F 4 IF SCALE UNSCALE FTSR IN FTSR OUT When you complete an edit of statement parameters press ENTER F8 to save the statement To delete an SF program or subroutine usethe Block function When in an S M emory Directory complete the following steps 1 PressBLOCK F3 2 Press DELETE F4 3 Atthe prompt
250. forming Controller Diagnostic s AUX 15 20 23 27 28 29 eese 11 13 Show Software Part Number AUX 15 sssssse RH Run Controller Diagnostics AUX 20 svitania i cece m Show RBC Software Part Number s AUX 23 Show PLC Card Failure Class AUX 27 2 ccc cc eee teens Checking Memory Availability AUX 28 2 ete Show PLC Operational Status AUK 29 4 orisni a E EC acd ea e ka doit e Fac eae Comparing Controller Program to Disk AUX 17 seeenennn nnn nnn nn nh 11 17 Invoking the Verification Menu AUX 17 Making Entries ses eee RERO e Pace eed ku Percent ence Pan e exce ei ces Initiating the Compare p eseprinr trinita Tania ka mh Reading the Compare Display 0 cece teens Setting Controller Scan Time AUX 19 c cece cece eects Hn nnn Changing Scan Time AUX 19 orei esis edd eek ee je deere eee ea For 520 C 525 530 C 560 565 Controllers Only 00000 11 19 For 545 555 and 575 Controllers Only 00 00 cee e 11 19 Performing I O Diagnostics AUX 21 AUX 25 lseseeeeennn n menn rr Run Remote Base Diagnostics AUX 21 Locating Dual Media Ba58S uia eec iE ee RC ke ota de a Swapping RBC Roles moonii oree aa a deh eda eased ERAN ERR ER ERE fad a Display Failed O AUX 25 wa ceca esser bern thawte aaae a kde Rates eee RC e Checking RLL Program Syntax AUX 22 nennen nnn 11 23 Performing Syntax Check 0 cece eene 11 23 Converting S Record Forma
251. g 8 7 8 4 Editing Loops Showing Loops Invoking Edit Mode Making Entries to the Loop Table Display loops by completing the following steps from the Start up Screen If you arein an S memory directory begin at Step 4 1 Select either ONLINE F4 or OFFLINE F8 2 When the Ladder Display screen appears press SPACEBAR 3 Press LOOP F6 4 AtthesELECT prompt type in the loop number 1 64 to be displayed or move the cursor to the loop to be displayed 5 Press SHOW F2 To edit a loop use the Show function from the Loop Directory to display the Loop Table Then press EDIT F2 Use the arrow keys or Return to position the cursor in each of the fields in the Loop Table Then complete the fields in the Loop Table by using the function keys or by typing in the element address or value required for each field For example if you want the RAMP SOAK FOR SP field to read vES either press YES F2 or typein Y Numeric entries such as sample rate must be typed in with the hard keys Remember there is more than one screen of loop data Press PgDn to see the remainder of the table When you have completed entry of your loop data press ENTER F8 to save the Loop Table All entries in the Loop Table are verified after you press Enter If invalid entries are detected the field cursor is placed on the invalid field and an error message is displayed If no errors are detected the loop is saved and the display is returne
252. g slave address slave status Edit function changing values 10 14 10 22 Element usage listing 7 17 Elements replacing 12 2 building a table 12 4 12 7 using search and replace tabla 12 4 status values changing with force function 10 17 writing 10 16 Error messages B 1IB 26 B s binary file from COM PROFIBUS Index 4 F Files backing up 2 10 converting existing c 1Ic 3 Find function using 7 19 Find I O point PROFIBUS DP Series 505 5 14 FMS communications invoking 6 overview FMS CP 505 CP5434 F MS module configuring J 4 installing 4 FMS network station selecting J 7 FMS node list creati ng J 5 FMS task code driver installing 6 Force function forcing 10 17 unforcing 10 18 unforcing alT 10 18 Formatting Diskettes 2 7 Function HELP 3 10 Functions TISOFT accessing 3 4 off line and on li ne 3 5 off line only 3 6 on line only 3 6 programming and utilities 3 213 11 Global search and replace accessing 12 2 building a tabld 12 8 clearing a table 12 4 clearing location 12 4 completing table fields 12 5 copying comments and synonyms 12 4 functions 12 2 prompt fields 12 3 replacing elements replacing elements using a table 12 4 invoking qum El invoking table display 12 4 12 3 H H1 communications accessing devices addresses G 8 cabling confi
253. g RLL program syntax 11 2 Executing Controller Auxilia ry Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Accessing To display the auxiliary functions menu press AUX F6 or A from the Auxiliary Functions on line ladder display Since AU X functions are controller based the Menu selections available on the AUX menu depend on the controller model you have Figure 11 1 shows the auxiliary functions menu as you highlight the function category the individual auxiliary functions available are displayed To select a particular AUX function either use the arrow keys to position the cursor on the AUX function or type the number of the function then press Return e TITLE F2 displays the current program title e PGMS F7 accesses the file management system to select the program name to be accessed and to copy delete or rename files and directories AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS DIAGNOSTICS DIAGNOSTICS eee PLC DIAGNOSTICS CLEAR PLC REMOTE BASE DIAG RESETS AND RESTARTS d SU MISCELLANEOUS DISPLAY FAILED I O MEMORY AVAILABILITY PLC OPERATIONAL STATUS COMPARE PLC TO DISK SYSTEM PART NUMBER RBC PART NUMBER ENTER AUXILIARY FUNCTION NUMBER 00 EXIT F1 TITLE F2 PGMS F7 545 LINE1 RN Figure 11 1 Auxiliary Functions Menu To select an AUX function either use the arrow keys to highlight an AUX function or enter the number of that AUX function and press Re
254. ge indicates that the user has attempted to use a non Series 500 505 program during TI SOFT operations Make surethe selected Program Disk Directory used for OFFLINE AUX SAVE LOAD BLOCK PUT FILE CONVERSION operations etc is a Series 500 505 Program An operation is not allowed when the controller is in RUN mode Place the controller in PROGRAM mode by means of either the PG RN function key or AUX 81 and retry the operation Your program is in EPROM or EEPROM and the requested operation cannot writetothe EPROM The specified I O configuration for a slot s designated as a SPECIAL FUNCTION moduleis illegal The current controller configuration does not recognize or support the specified Task Code Task code length field does not agree with number of characters sent This message indicates that the user has attempted to usea pre Series 500 505 Release 5 0 program during TISOFT operations Use the File Conversion operating software TI CON to create an converted version of the Program files This message also indicates that the specified U memory file contains an invalid S record type Modify the file and specify a valid S record type TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Input Element Missing Instruction Number out of Range Integer vs Real Value Conflict Invalid Action Invalid Block Parameters Invalid Code Invalid Context Invalid Control Block Type Invalid Data Received Invalid Data Sent With Command In
255. ggle to return to Series 505 I O configuration 6 8 Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 CONFIG F2 FIND F3 EN DIS F5 PRO DP F6 Figure 6 4 On Line 505 Base Status Function Key Line 4 If necessary press OPR ST F7 to ensure that you arein STOP mode Figure 6 5 shows the location of the OPR ST toggle NOTE The standard for PROFIBUS DP I O DIN 19245 Part 3 stipulates certain bus parameters that cannot be changed while communications are in OPERATE mode If you modified those bus parameters when you set up your configuration filein COM PROFIBUS set communications to STOP mode before you execute U pdate in order to prevent bus errors UPDATE IN PROGRESS 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 CONFIG F2 FIND F3 MERGE F4 EN DIS F5 5051O F6 OPR ST F7 DELETE F8 Figure 6 5 On Line PROHBUS DP Slave Status Function Key Line NOTE In the slave status screen Figure 6 5 the message UPDATE IN PROGRESS does not refer to the U pdate function rather the screen is being continuously refreshed to provide current status information 5 Press CONFIG F2 The PROFIBUS DP Slave Configuration screen appears See Figure 6 6 FROM PLC STOP 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 SHOW F2 READDK F3 READPC F5 EDIT F7 UPDATE F8 Figure 6 6 On Line PROHBUS DP Slave Configuration Function Key Line TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O 6 9 Loading a PROHBUS DP I O Configuration to the Contr
256. ging program mode and no cursor is displayed e PGMFRZ F2 places the controller in PROGRAM FREEZE mode All outputs are frozen in their current states However intelligent I O modules still can update outputs When you elect to goto PROGRAM FREEZE mode you receive the message GO TO PROGRAM MODE WITHOUT CLEARING OUTPUTS Select either YES or NO e PGMOFF F3 places the controller in PROGRAM OFF mode Discrete outputs are set to zero and all word outputs are frozen H owever intelligent I O modules still can update outputs When you elect to goto PROGRAM OFF mode you receivethe message GO TO PROGRAM MODE Select either YES or NO A WARNING Intelligent I O modules e g the 386 ATM module the Programmable BASIC module the Servo Axis module or the High Speed Pulse Input module can update outputs even when the controller is in PROGRAM mode if your code permits If an intelligent I O module writes directly to an image register point its write takes precedence even when PGMFRZ PGMOFF is in effect This could cause unexpected control action resulting in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Do not write directly to output image register points from an intelligent I O module Instead write to a Control Relay or V memory location and have your RLL program copy this location to the output point e RUN F4 places the controller in RUN mode beginning execution of the ladder program
257. gle between edit and compose modes Edit mode does not automatically insert a return at the end of a line To enter text continuously and have the cursor positioned automatically at a new line use compose mode e DELETE F7 Press F7 to delete an entire title and clear the display Confirm by answering YES or NO tothe prompt After keying in your title use the up down arrow keys to position the cursor on the DATE field and or VERSION field The DATE field accepts three sets of two numeric characters The VERSION field accepts any five characters numeric or alphabetic To save the title you have created press ENTER F8 before exiting the Title Display TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Documenting Programs 9 15 9 7 Entering Comments in S Memory Programs Accessing Comments for S memory programs can be entered from the Documentation Comment Display Menu shown in Figure 9 11 as well as from the S memory menus To access the comment menu for S memory complete the following steps The S M emory Comment E ditor Menu is then displayed as shown in Figure 9 13 1 Press DOCUM F4 2 Press COM F2 3 Press or Shift 7 4 Select an element for commenting that is LOOP ALARM SFPGM or SF SUB from the pop up list and press the SELECT F8 or Return 5 Keyinan identifying number after the element type such as 2 6 Press Return PAGING NONE 545 LOADER DELLN F4 INSLN F5
258. gram name TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Setting up the TISOFTEnvironment 2 7 Managing Program Files continued Selecting a To select an existing program follow these steps Program 1 Select the directory path where the program resides Refer to Selecting a Directory 2 Movethe field cursor in the TISOFT PROGRAMS sub window to select the program you want or type the name at the FILENAME prompt 3 Press SELECT F8 or Return The program function is dismissed and the selected program name appears on the lower right status line Deleting a Program To delete an existing program follow these steps NOTE Chart table and certain other files are not part of the program and are not copied deleted or renamed when the program is See Appendix K for a list of program and non program files 1 Select the directory path where the program resides See Selecting a Directory 2 Movethe field cursor in the TISOFT PROGRAMS sub window to select the program you want to delete or type the name at the FILENAME prompt 3 Press DELETE F3 The prompt DELETE filename appears 4 Press YES F2 The program is removed from the TISOFT PROGRAMS sub window NO F1 aborts the operation Renaming a Torename an existing program follow these steps Program 1 Select the directory path where the program resides See Selecting a Directory 2 Movethe field cursor in the TISOFT PROGRAMS sub window to select the program you
259. guide to help you in correcting error conditions The following symbols are used aaaannnn an element address alphabetic and numeric characters XXXX decimal number value hh hex number value HHRHH ladder address a application list 575 If an error occurs that you cannot resolve please call your Siemens Energy amp Automation distributor or sales office in the U S for assistance Alarm Variable The PACKAA SF statement in an SFPGM or SF SUB requires at least Required one ANALOG ALARM data type variable for example APVH after the PARAMETERS prompt ID numbers and other element types are not allowed Alarm xxx Not The requested ANALOG ALARM control block has not been Programmed programmed and is not included in the ALARM DIRECTORY An unprogrammed control block cannot be enabled or disabled To create the ALARM type in the desired ID number and press SHOW F2 All NOPS to End of This message is displayed when there are no more programmed ladder Memory rungs from the starting address to the end of ladder memory Application Is The selected application is not installed in the controller Undefined or Unassigned Arithmetic Error Invalid loop or alarm parameter check loop and alarm parameters Detected Arithmetic Overflow Invalid parameter in a math statement check parameters in math statements Attempt to Access a Access the variable as a real value Real only Variable as an Integer Attempt to Access an Acces
260. guration Data from COM PRORBUS into TISOFT Using Merge TheMerge function in TISOFT allows you to import configuration data from the binary file that you created with COM PROFIBUS described in Section 6 2 The steps you take are the same regardless of whether you are importing data from an entirely new configuration or merely importing selected items that have been modified from a previous configuration session in COM PROFIBUS The Merge function performs a comparison between the current configuration information and the contents of the selected binary file exported from COM PROFIBUS Only new information is written to TI SOF T pre existing unchanged configuration information for example O addresses is not lost To execute Merge you must be running TI SOFT and the binary file with its 2BF extension that you created with COM PROFIBUS must bein a known location Follow the steps below to execute Merge 1 Ifyou areon line press OFFLINE F8 to change to the off line state 2 Press the SPACEBAR to get the secondary function key line and then press CONFIO F3 to get the base status screen Figure 6 1 shows the function key line 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 CONFIG F2 FIND F3 EN DIS F5 PRO DP F6 Figure 6 1 Off Line 505 Base Status Function Key Line 3 Ifthe status display is set to Series 505 I O press PRO DP F6 to toggle the display to PROFIBUS DP I O See Figure 6 2 NOTE Once you select PROFIBUS DP all status and con
261. guring network G 5 memory manager G 5 selecting network node names G 22 troubleshooting with TISOFT G 2 Hard keys for common functions 3 7 HELP screen accessing 3 10 HELP system types of help 3 1d Hints 1 11 Host adapter configuring Unilink E 7 selecting secondary E 6 TIWAY 1andUnilink E 2 TIWAY card E 2 using TI WAY I to select secondary E 4 using Unilink E 5 Hot key HELP 3 10 Hotline for technical assi stance xxxi I O configuration See Configuration I O Importing synonyms 9 22 Inserting elements rungs 7 13 Installation CP1413 card G 3 CP1413 module G 3 Installing TISOFT 1 6 upgrade software 1 6 Invoking TI sorr 1310 K Keystroke macros 7 26 L Ladder and charts displaying both 10 21 Ladder display using 3 4 Ladder programs accessing block operations 13 4 accessing documentation functions 9 3 available documentation 9 2 cross reference accessing on screen 7 24 using on screen entering block parameters 13 5 making entries to block menus 13 5 placing box instructions 7 10 unique elements 7 16 Ladder status displaying synonyms and comments 10 12 List display elements 3 11 finding elements 7 20 editing Lr making entrTes 8 8 Macros keystrokes 7 26 Managing program fi les 2 4 2 9 Manuals related xxxi Memory configuration See Configuration memory system memory requi rements 1 2
262. hard keys 7 7 CVU card See TI WAY host adapter card CVU host invoking TisorT 1 10 D Deleting lines and elements 7 15 network 7 13 Diagnostics controller 11 13 I O bases 11 21 I O failed display 11 22 O remote base 11 21 Directory program selection screen 2 4 2 15 Directory selection screen 2 5 Discrete programming accessing program entry 7 3 comment screen 7 18 documentation editor 7 18 FTO entering boxes entering coils entering elements on screen cross reference 7 24 synonym editor 7 18 unique elements 7 16 V K memory editor 7 21 Display size 3 4 Documenting programs ladder programs accessing function 9 3 comments adding ea instructions 9 7 changing 9 8 finding 9 8 invoking menu 9 6 keying in 9 7 parameters saving 9 7 descriptors entering 9 12 preparing to enter 9 9 selecting an element 9 9 synonyms entering finding 9 13 invoking menu keying in modifying 9 13 parameters 9 10 pop up editor 9 11 preparing to enter 9 9 selecting an element 9 9 Index 3 titling 9 14l 9 15 entering a program invoking displa parameters parameters DOS BACKUP using 2 10 DOS RESTORE using 2 10 Edit drawing lines for networks 7 12 entering boxes 7 10 entering coils 7 10 entering contacts entering extended rungs entering relational contacts 7 9 inserting elements inserting run
263. he AUX menu prompt and press Return The part number and release for each card along with the slot number and name of the card displays as shown in Figure 11 3 SYSTEM SOFTWARE PART NUMBERS PLC SLOT PLC CARD NAME PART NUMBER RELEASE 575 2596626 0200 2 0 575 2596626 0200 2 0 565 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 READ F2 Figure 11 3 System Software Part Number s Display Run Controller Use AUX 20 torun diagnostics on your controller To invoke the operation Diagnostics type in 20 at the AUX menu prompt and press Return AUX 20 When you receive the message RUN PLC SELF DIAGNOSTICS confirm by pressing YES F2 To abort the function press NO F1 instead TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions 11 13 Performing Controller Diagnostics AUX 15 20 23 27 28 29 continued Show RBC Software Use AUX 23 to display the RBC software part number s and release Part Number s number To invoke the operation type in 23 at the AUX menu prompt and AUX 23 press Return The RBC software number s and release number are displayed in the format shown in Figure 11 4 The only editable field on this screen is the channel number To exit the function press EXIT F1 CHANNEL 1 RBC SOFTWARE PART NUMBERS ACTIVE STANDBY BASE PARTNUMBER RELEASE PARTNUMBER RELEASE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 d 8 9 2591810 0201 2 0 1 555 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 READ F2 Figur
264. he selected program NOTE To exactly copy the synonyms and comments in the text file you must delete all synonyms and comments in the selected program before running the import function Exporting Exporting synonyms or comments writes all the synonyms or comments in Synonyms and the currently selected program on disk to a text file If the text file exists a Comments FILE EXISTS OVERWRITE prompt is displayed Press YES F2 to overwrite the file or NO F1 to abort the operation 9 22 Documenting Programs TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Chapter 10 Using Status Functions 10 1 Status Functions Available ssseeee nnnm 10 2 Accessing Status Functions ssssrssrssssssunsununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunn 10 3 Building a Status Chart ccccc cece eee eee 10 4 Clearing and Saving Status Charts ccece eee eee eens 105 Displaying Status Charts iiicessdaekks eEREXRARRRREREREAWEERERFRRSA bassaiws coneee 10 6 Finding Ladders and Hements cccceece cece cece eee eee eene een nnn 10 7 Displaying Ladder Status c cece cece eee eee eee 10 8 Displaying Synonyms and Comments in Ladder Status ese 10 9 Using Single Scan cece cc ccc e cece 10 10 Using the Edit Function cccce cece eects 10 11 Reading Changing Element Status 0 ccc cece nn nnn nnne 10 12 Forcing Elements cc cece cece eee 10 13 Unforcing Elements c ccc cece ees 10 14 Changing Controller Modes een nn
265. he valuein the PV ALARMS HIGH HIGH field of a LOOP ALARM table must be larger than or equal to the value in the PV ALARMS HIGH field An error has occurred with the TIWAY network Refer to the TI WAY user s manual for the definition of the given error code Check for duplicated points in 1 O numbering The AUX function number requested is undefined for the current controller Configuration This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not valid See following example Box instructions may be AN Ded but may not be STRed or ORed C1 C3 L BITC1 o A V1 This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not valid Each input of a multiple input box cannot have ORed contacts or more than two AN Ded contacts See example C1 C2 TMR1 C3 P 0 1 C4 This error has occurred at the specified ladder rung address not necessarily in the current rung See above example for Illegal Connection to Multiplelnput Box TISOFTMessages B 11 Illegal Instruction at Address Illegal Memory Configuration Illegal Network Illegal Network Too Many Elements in Parallel Illegal Network Too Many Elements in Series Illegal Network Too Many Elements in Series and Parallel Illegal Network Too Many Elements in Series or Parallel Illegal Number of ASCII Characters Received Illegal PLC Type on D
266. hortcut icon with the MS DOS mode property set so that you can easily choose which mode to run TI SOFT in K 4 TISOFT Program Files and Properties TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Font Available types Both font types or as desired Font size Auto or as desired Memory Conventional memory Total Auto Initial environment Auto Protected not checked Expanded EMS memory Total Auto Extended XMS memory Total None or Auto Uses HMA checked MS DOS protected mode DPMI memory Total Auto Screen U sage Full screen not set Window set Initial size Default Window Display toolbar checked Restore settings on startup checked Performance Fast ROM emulation checked Dynamic memory allocation checked Misc Foreground Allow screen saver checked Background Always suspend not checked Idle sensitivity low to medium Mouse QuickEdit not checked Exdusive mode not checked Termination Warn if still active checked Other Fast pasting not checked Windows shortcut keys all checked TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFT Program Files and Properties K 5 5nn 50510 A AACK AADB ABORT ABS X ABSV ACF ACFH ACFL ADD ADDR AERR AHA AHHA ALA ALARM ALLA AND AODA APETn APV APVA APVH APVL ARCA ARCCOS X ARCSIN X ARCTAN X ARSA Glossary of TISOFT Terms Selects the controller model to be configured in the Memory Configuration function These include the 545 545L 575 555
267. hortcut icon for TISOFT and accessing the Properties dialog 1 2 Select the TISOFT icon with a single dick With the mouse cursor on the selected TI SOFT icon click the right mouse button to access the pop up menu and select Properties as shown in Figure 1 7 A TISOFT Properties dialog appears Click the Memory tab in the TISOFT Properties dialog Look at the Expanded EM S memory field If it is grayed out your PC does not have expanded memory To obtain expanded memory exit to a DOS prompt and type the following two lines in the C CONFIG SYS file DEVICE C WINDOWS HIMEM SYS DEVICE C WINDOWS EMM386 EXE ON Reboot your PC and repeat the procedure above through step 4 to check the expanded memory field in the TISOFT Properties dialog TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Installing TISO FT Release 6 3 1 3 1 2 Cable Requirements Cable Pinouts for Connect your programming device to the controller with a double shielded RS 232 C Ports null modem RS 232 C cable Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 and Figure 1 3 show pinouts for the RS 232 C cables Programming Device Controller FOIL FOIL SHIELD BRAID BRAID SHIELD CY C CN f 2 Transmit D 3 Receive RD 4 RTS 5 CTS 6 DSR 7 Signal Ground 8 DCD 20 DTR Qo 00 40 014 Q2 IO O XO 00 40 01 I COO UU Drainwire I M
268. hts LOAD3 PUMP3 MATCH STAMP This comp treaties or any po and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law FILENAME NETDATA 545 NETDATA ABORT F1 COPY F2 DELETE F3 RENAME F4 DIR F5 FLDTGL F6 SELECT F8 Figure 2 2 PGMS Program Selection Screen Once the Program Selection screen is displayed press DIR F5 to access the Directory Selection screen shown in Figure 2 3 Siemens 4 TISOFT FILE SELECTION TISOFT 2 PATH CASUBDIR1 PLC PRO SIMATIC 1 TISOFT PROGRAMS DIRECTORY RELEASE BATCH1 MIXI TESTI m BATCH MIX TEST SUBDIR1 Software BATCH3 MIX3 TEST3 SUBDIR2 BATCH4 NETDATA DOS Copyright LOAD1 PUMP1 A Siemens LOAD2 PUMP2 B All Rights LOAD3 PUMP3 C MATCH STAMP This comp treaties or any po and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law DIRECTORY PATH 545 NETDATA EXIT Fi MKDIR F2 RMDIR F3 FORMAT F4 FLDTGL F6 SELECT F8 Figure 2 3 PGMS Directory Selection Screen TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Setting up the TISOFT Environment 2 5 Managing Program Files continued Selecting a Drive Creating a New The PGMS subsystem of TISOFT allows you to execute a variety of DOS related functions using screen menus and function keys without the need to exit TISOFT and return to DOS Thefollowing sections describe the functions available in PGMS and how to
269. i a a a EE E E A a i a Cable Requirements cccccccece eee enn Cable Pinouts for RS 232 C POS ssid eroe E Face ac E Ca et eed ceca Cable Pinoutsfor RS 422 Ports 2 ccc cece eee eee ae Installing TISOFTin MS DOS ccccccccceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeneneeeeeeage Checking PC Memory Available 2 0 0 n Installing TISOFTProgramming Software 6 6 e Installing TSOFTUpgrade Programming Software sssusa Installing TISOFTin Windows 95 cece cece eee eee eens Hmmm Installing TISO FT Programming Software in Windows95 sees Creating a TISOFT Shortcut Icon on Your Desktop ssssssssseeeee Using PC IPOIE2 oia coves eec ydo iet t qn seb onde Suspe Dui do eno det ai Selecting TISOFTOperating Software Options 0 cece Using PC POTE ius eu rate oed e eae ee ene i etl ne Oc P ibl a E acho Using PC POM 2 ei ainda tines aida DER OR a a Pelee ditte i RR Using PC TIWAY AdapterCarmd ssssssssssesee eee Using ELE NeEWOTEK indie Pedo td Diete eh aea e sere Patch i erede dea a Using TCP Communications sssssseeeee en Using FMS COMMUNIC atiOfis iiic dre SER ERR eC te RA het ah Displaying the Start up Screen sssssssssssseseeeeee eee Starting TISOFT in WINA OWS 2 ba ce tex rcg e REED Ra CR ud E ed je Eo de e TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Installing TISO FT Release 6 3 1 1 1 1 Programming Device Requirements Hardware TISOFT 6
270. ich is illegal or unrecognized by the expression type For example the exponential operator is invalid for Integer math expressions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Invalid Parameter Invalid Return Value Invalid SF Program Type Invalid SF Statement Size Specified Invalid Variable Data Type for This Operation Keylock or Password Protect Error Ladder Element Required Parameter Missing Ladder Logic Address Out of Range LBL Referenced But Not Defined During BLOCK operations on V K memory this message indicates that the specified V K memory address exceeds the V K memory configuration of the program During BLOCK operations on RAMP SOAK steps this message indicates that the specified R S step number exceeds the maximum number of R S steps permitted During definition of the search limits of a Global Search and Replace operation this message indicates that the specified start address exceeds the specified end address If you are editing parameters in an SFSUB box in RLL or SF statements in an SF Program Subroutine this message indicates that the specified parameter is illegal for the current field Real constants are displayed with at least one digit before and after the decimal point for example 1 0 or 0 1 If you are programming EEPROMs via AU X 84 this message indicates that the specified source is unrecognized something other than RAM or EEPROM Otherwise this message generally indicates T
271. ideration and ensurethat the controller environment can react safely if a Fatal Error occurs a WARNNG O It is possible that the system could fail without being able to execute the Fatal Error actions It is also possible for the system to continue to operate while producing incorrect results Operating and producing incorrect results could cause unpredictable controller behavior that could result in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment You must provide for manual overrides in those cases where operator safety could be jeopardized or where equipment damage is possible because of a failure Refer to the Safety Guidelines section in the S MATIC 545 555 575 System Manual or other hardware system manual NOTE Some user program errors can also cause the controller to enter the Fatal Error mode Examples indude corruption of SF instruction control blocks retained in V memory all systems supporting SF programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Preface xxix Safety Considerations c ontinued Inconsistent You must ensure the correctness of your control program before you Program Operation introduce it to the controlled process An incorrect control program can cause the process to act incorrectly or inconsistently Although any number of programming errors can cause control problems one of the more subtle problems occurs with the incorrect assignment of instruction numbers for box instructions that hav
272. ied 505 5 12 editing slave address 6 11 guidelines pn PROFIBUS DP 6 11 Serie 505 5 7 merging from COM PROFIBUS procedure Series 505 reading base 5 6 showing display PROFIBUS DP 6 19 Series 505 5 12 Configuration memor accessing off line accessing on line 4 6 displaying memory 4 2 displaying off line memory displaying on line memory off line memory 4 4 on line memory 4 6 reading memory 4 2 Contacts enteri ng 7 9 Control key sequences cross reference 7 24 cursor movement 7 7 keystroke macros 7 26 Controller auxiliary functions 11 2 11 3 diagnostics base 11 21 card failure dass PLC operational status 11 16 RBC part number 11 14 EEPROMS programming 11 29 hot backup status selecting 11 27 1 0 diagnostics 11 21 memory types operating modes ladders loops selecting hot backup status 11 27 port lockout programming 11 28 powering up program loading saving verification menu restart complete restart partial 11 6 restart power up 11 5 time functions changing scan time 11 19 reading setting date and time 11 12 setting watchdog timer task codes setting number per scan Converting programs from earlier releases xxv CP 5412 A2 card configuring 3 installing 3 CP 1413 installing module G 3 module cabling G 16 CP1413 card and COML G 8 configuring G 3 Cursor movement
273. ignated word in a source table Word to Table Exdusive OR exclusively ORs the corresponding bits in a specified word and a word from a source table Results are placed in a destination table Designates a word input that is connected to a physical input 16 bits In ladders a box instruction that exclusively ORs a word in a memory location with a word in a second location Results are placed in a third memory location In SF replaced by Designates a word output that is connected to a physical output 16 bits TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Y lt gt WY YES Represents a discrete ON or OFF open or closed input device Toggles the image register type for the selected module between discrete and word inputs External Subroutineis a box instruction in RLL that invokes a user defined subroutine in the 545 555 and 575 controllers Represents a discrete ON or OFF open or closed output device also a Yes response Toggles the image register type for the selected module between discrete and word outputs A positive response to a prompt question TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Glossary 19 Symbols RI 1 4 gt gt lt lt 20 Glossary Represents a normally open bit or bit of word input or monitored bit or bit of word output using its status as input Contact Closed is a normally closed input Rdational Contact Immediate Contacts and Coils Output
274. igurator for a single TISOFT station Configure 505 CP1434TF H 1 module using its configurator for multiple TISOFT stations Reboot your PC Install H1 cabling Load CP 1413 drivers Load H1task code drivers Access H1 devices using TISOFT Display TISOFT start up screen Select the H1 network node name Figure G 2 Overview List for Installing the CP1413 Module TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFT with H1 Communications G 3 Steps for Installing and Configuring the CP1413 Module continued NOTE If at any point your PC locks up power down the system and go back tothe previous steps and try other options for the settings Step 1 Selectthe Select an available I O address for the CP1413 This number should be one I O Address of the following 03E 0 0390 03E 8 or 0100 The I O address chosen should be onethat is not already being used on your computer Step 2 Setjumpers Set the jumpers on the CP 1413 module as shown in the Hardware Installation section of the SINEC TF N 1413 MS DOS Windows manual Try a configuration register address of OxO3E 0 first if you are unsure what O addresses are available on your computer A WARNING Before you install the H1 Communications Module CP1413 into your personal computer make sure your power supply is turned off to guard against sudden equipment startup or shock Control devices can fail in an unsafe condition which could result in death or serio
275. ii New Features and Enhancements continued e TheSF DCP format has been changed to correspond to the format that is used elsewhere in ladders from DxxxxSyy to DCP xxxx yy e Theload size of TISOFT has been reduced e The speed of Aux loads to the controller for L memory V memory and K memory types has been increased when large amounts of space or variables are unused e When you change your password TI SOFT prompts you to supply the current password even if you have already used the password to log on e Flexibility in choosing modules for a PROFIBUS DP slave such as a COROS operator panel is enhanced A secondary function key line has been added to the PROFIBUS DP 1 0 configuration edit function e Aload only version of TISOFT is provided Theload only version is just like the read only version except that the following Aux functions are allowed Aux 10 11 12 13 20 81 86 90 98 and 99 e ThePROFIBUS DP merge operation which merges the COM PROFIBUS binary file with the selected program on disk when you are configuring PROFIBUS DP I O is available online as well as offline e TheH1and TCP network error messages now contain an additional error code that provides more detailed error information e TISOFT now forces the H1TC and TCTCP drivers to reread the list of network names every time TISOFT goes online This ensures that TISOFT always has the most up to date list TISOFT no longer uses network names from the co
276. ill however be able to use the AUX 90 Load All function but only if the controller supports password You will also have full access to the controller and the selected program on disk Mode 4 Ifthe controller has a password and you enter a password for the controller at the on line prompt you will be able to use the AU X 60 Save All and the AUX 90 Load All functions AUX 60 writes the controller password to the selected program on disk AUX 90 retains the controller password You will also have full access to the controller and the selected program on disk Mode5 Ifthe controller has a password and you do not enter a password for the controller at the on line prompt you will not be able to use the AUX 60 Save All and the AUX 90 Load All functions Depending on the controller password access level you will be allowed partial to full access to the controller You will also have full access to the selected program on disk H 6 Using Password TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Mode 6 If both the controller and the selected program on disk have passwords and you enter a password for both at the on line prompt you will be able to use the AUX 60 Save All and the AUX 90 Load All functions The passwords for both the selected program on disk and for the controller are retained You will also have full access to the selected program on disk and to the controller Mode 7 If both the controller and the selected program on disk have
277. indicates that an error occurred in the specified RAMP SOAK step for the given LOOP during execution of a Global Search and Replace For whatever reason the new element makes the R S step invalid Perhaps the element is out of range for the particular field or an output field may have been replaced with a read only element This message indicates that an error occurred in an SFSUB box at the specified ladder rung address during execution of a Global Search and Replace For whatever reason the new element makes the specified rung invalid Perhaps the element is out of range for the particular field or an output field may have been replaced with a read only element This message indicates that an error occurred in the specified SF statement of the given SF Program during execution of a Global Search and Replace For whatever reason the new element makes the SF statement invalid Perhaps the element is invalid or out of range for the particular field or an output field may have been replaced with a read only element This message indicates that an error occurred in the specified SF statement of the given SF Subroutine during execution of a Global Search and Replace For whatever reason the new element makes the SF statement invalid Perhaps the element is invalid or out of range for the particular field or an output field may have been replaced with a read only element TISOFT Messages B 9 Error when Setting An invalid baud rate has been
278. indows This opens the SINEC COML 1413TF window 2 Fromthe drop down File menu select New to create a new configuration file to hold the association that you want to make 3 Fill out the following fields in the SINEC COML 1413TF window Type a local station address that is not already in use on your H1 network 0800060100FF This address needs to be the same address that you entered previously in CA SINEC BIN NETINST EXE Application association name UnitA UnitB Remote Addr 080006010001 080006010002 Local TSAP UnitA UnitB Remote TSAP CP1434TF CP1434TF For further information on how to use the COML 1413 TF software refer tothe COML 1413 TF for Windows Configuration Guide 4 Savethefilein text format in the directory CA SINECY DATA as a file name STARTU P TXT Generate a binary database file with the name STARTUP LDB in the directory C SINEC DATA Exit the COML program 5 Skip Step 12 and proceed to Step 13 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFT with H1 Communications G 11 Steps for Installing and Configuring the CP1413 Module continued Step 12 Use COML Multiple Station TISOFT Installations TouseTISOFT on multiple to Setup CP1413 stations over H1 you must configure a set of TSAPs for each connection see Local Database Figure G 5 This includes installations where TISTAR PCS is in use For Multiple TISOFT because PCS expects to use the hidden TSAP connection in the CP 1434TF Stations For the multi user in
279. ing Status Chars isses Clearing a Chart Display oosa aaaea iid np ck ende ar Yee d deor ak ees Saving ar Status CHAM isse reru rear Go ERE RH eR nra ede tace en 10 6 Displaying Status Charis coe faeces eas ects paa a Vaga ees Loading a Status Chalt s cacic2cadcntinictnd on Teka Reg DE eR ahaa ai dae r Rc Roo dcs 10 7 Displaying Synonyms in Charts wsiada a eS eaaa eem 10 7 Reading ChartDisplays sssssssssssssee ees 10 8 Finding Ladders and Hements issseeeseeennen ennemi Locating LadderAddresses ssssssssssssssseeeee eee 10 9 Locating Eletriehts oos tuere en ere n et n aee ee Ra ac Pe Dba Roe a ente red 10 9 Displaying Ladder Status ssseseeeee nennen nnn nnn na Invoking LadderStatusFunctions 0 0 ee 10 10 Reading Ladder DisplayS cc eee eek ha era er xa e x e are e 10 10 Displaying Synonyms and Comments in Ladder Status sese Displaying Synonyms iere Redo ee EPR RE REG RERRRE RR IER RIPE REPGadg be pr 10 12 Displaying Comments sorito cane Lad e RE EH CREER REG S EAR RR ence ue 10 12 Using Single Scan rseeseeeesennn nana nnn nana na a n n n n n n Initiating a Single SCAM xz eeb ree eere T Ere dog dag opu Ee IR RR ad an 10 13 Selecting Tasksto Execute during Single Scan ssssssssssseeeeeeeeeel 10 13 Contents xi 10 10 Using the Edit Function cece eee essen eee nmn Accessing the Change Value Function 0 000
280. ing the DOS memory manager configure the TI WAY Host Adapter Card by adding the following lineto your CONFIG SYS file DEVICE C DOS EMM386 EXE X C800 C900 2 Toinstall the TIWAY Adapter Card Driver CVUTA DEV add the following line to your CONFIG SYS file DEVICE C TI CVUTA DEV 3 If conditions permit you to safely interrupt your PC reboot your PC E2 Using TISOFT with TIWAY TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFT On Line NOTE You must add Step 1 and Step 2 to your CONFIG SYS file in the order given above before you can load any other TSRs To use the TI WAY Host Adapter Card to invoke TI SOFT follow these steps 1 Keyin the name of the operating software followed by CVU For example TI505 CVU 2 Press Return To use the other adapters to invoke TISOFT follow these steps 1 Key in the name of the operating software followed by the port number For example TI505 P10r TI505 P2 2 Press Return After you select ON LINE F4 with a TIWAY network TISOFT establishes the means of communication The type of TIWAY device you are using determines which menu is displayed on the screen For example Figure E 1 shows the display that appears if you are communicating through a TIWAY Host Adapter TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISO FT with TIWAY E 3 E 2 Selecting Secondary with TIVAY Host Adapter If you are using a TI WAY Host Adapter type in the controller secondary ad
281. integer or real Provides for each analog alarm a peak elapsed time that is the time from the alarm being scheduled until the process completes execution n 1 129 Analog Alarm Process Variable may be either integer or real Alarm Process Variable Address Alarm Process Variable High high limit for alarm process variable must be real Alarm Process Variable Low low limit for alarm process variable must be real Rate of Change Alarm Limit for Analog Alarm must be real Returns inverse cosine of X in a math expression Returns inverse sine of X in a math expression Returns inverse tangent of X in a math expression Alarm Remote Setpoint Address TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Glossary 1 ASCII CBD ASCII ASP ASPH ASPL ASYNC ATS AUX AUTORN AVF AVFA AYDA B Backspace BCD BCDBIN BEFORE BIN BINBCD BITC BITP BITS BLDCHT BLDTBL BLOCK BOX C CALL CBD 2 Glossary Accesses the prompt to select memory locations to be displayed in ASCII format availablein BLDCHT function Analog Alarm Setpoint may be either integer or real High Limit for Analog Alarm Sepoint may be either integer or real Low limit for Analog Alarm Setpoint may be either integer or real Sets the PROFIBUS DP communication mode to asynchronous Analog Alarm Sample Rate must be real Auxiliary Functions refers to on line functions that interface with the controller Automatic Rung Insert automatically inserts r
282. irectory where TISOFT looks for the selected program Both screens also have a TISOFT PROGRAMS sub window containing a list of all programs in the current directory TheTISOFT Program Selection screen contains the FILENAME prompt where program names can betyped The FLDTGL F6 key toggles the field cursor between the TISOFT PROGRAMS sub window and the FILENAME prompt Inside the sub window the arrow keys PageUp PageDn Home and End keys are used to move the cursor See Figure 2 2 TheTISOFT Directory Selection screen contains the DIRECTORY PATH prompt where directory names can be typed The FLDTGL F6 key toggles the field cursor between the DIRECTORY sub window and the DIRECTORY PATH prompt Inside the sub window the arrow keys PageUp PageDn Home and End keys are used to move the cursor Letters followed by colons are drives See Figure 2 3 NOTE f you select the field containing two dots pressing Return allows you to go back to the next higher directory level 2 4 Setting up the TISOFTEnvironment TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual At the TISOFT Start up Screen press PGMS F7 to display the Program Selection screen shown in Figure 2 2 Siemens TISOFT FILE SELECTION TISOFT 2 PATH C PLC PRO SIMATIC TISOFT PROGRAMS RELEASE BATCH1 MIXI TESTI BATCH2 MIX2 TEST2 Software BATCH3 MIX3 TEST3 BATCH4 NETDATA Copyright LOAD1 PUMP1 Siemens LOAD2 PUMP2 All Rig
283. ired Choose slave s such as the 505 PROFIBUS DP RBC Optional Note if you are configuring a 505 PROFIBUS DP RBC PPX 505 6870 you may want to change the settings for I O mismatch Parameterize slave s handling and RS 232 port communications consult the SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS DP RBC User Manual for a description of the software parameters of the RBC Modify bus parameters Required You can use either the ID or the Order Number list to select O module types and assign them to the appropriate slots in your slave device The Comment field is optional Do not fill in the I Addr or O Addr fields you will assign starting I O addresses to each module in TISOFT and any data you assign to these fields in COM PROFIBUS is overwritten Configure slave s Optional Allows you to add or delete slaves from your configuration later without re entering all data into COM PROFIBUS Required For convenience you can select the disk drive and directory where your TISOFT program is stored and assign the binary file the same name as the program where you intend to use the I O An extension 2BF is automatically assigned to the binary file do not changethis extension Exit COM PROFIBUS You are ready to perform configuration tasks in TISOFT see Section 6 3 Save the file Export binary file to TISOFT TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O 65 6 3 Importing Confi
284. ired ID number and press SH OW F 2 This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not valid See the following example C1 C2 C7 C8 N 7 C6 C4 C5 E This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not valid Seethe following example C3 C2 A SN See Short Circuit or Reverse Power Flow Make sure all elements are connected TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFTMessages B23 Short Circuit Unconnected Elements or Reverse Power Flow Slave Mismatch Special Calculation Variable Not Specified Stack Overflow Evaluating Math If IMath Expression Step Not Found Task Code Buffer Overflow Task Code Request Buffer too Large TCP IP Network Error Xx Code xxx The Store and Forward Buffer Is Busy Too Many Elements in Series or Parallel at Address Too Many Immediate l O References Top of Screen U Memory Data File Is Larger than PLC U Memory Configuration B24 TISOFTMessages See Short Circuit or Reverse Power Flow Make sure all elements are connected The source slave does not match the destination slave This message is displayed when you are entering a LOOP table where an SFPGM number has been specified in the Special Function field but the SPECIAL CALCULATION parameter has not been specified Either enter an option in the SPECIAL CALCULATION field or set Special Functio
285. ired interlocks and overrides independent of the process must be used to avoid corruption of program integrity To perform a block operation copy move delete or put complete the following steps from the ladder display 1 Press BLOCK F5 2 Select COPY F2 MOVE F3 DELETE F4 or PUT F5 If you select Put continue with step 3 otherwise go to step 4 3 For on line PUT operations only use SRCTGL F8 to switch the source and destination between controller to disk and disk to controller 4 Atthe prompt select LADDER F2 V F3 K F4 COM F5 SYN F6 or TITLE F7 The RANGE and THRU fields accept only numeric entries for ladders V or K memory 5 At the RANGE prompt type in the beginning address of the block to be acted on Use the right arrow key to move to THRU field and type in the ending address of the source block 6 Movethe cursor tothe BEFORE field and typethe destination address 7 Press Return to execute the block operation If the selected address fields encompass an invalid source block that is the starting address is greater than the ending address or if the operation would cause memory overflow offline you receive either the message INVALID BLOCK PARAMETERS Or BLOCK TOO LARGE TO FIT IN PROGRAM TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Performing Block Data Functions 13 5 13 5 Block Functionality in S Memory Block Copy Block Move Block Delete Block Put S Memory Comments
286. is a normally open coil Selects a normally closed coil Indicates that more function keys are accessible on a display by pressing the spacebar also the addition unary plus operator in SF IMATH MATH IF and IIF statements Also designates a positive constant in RLL e g 32767 Is asigned decimal integer with the range of 32767 to 32768 This format takes one word 16 bits Is a subtraction unary minus operator in SF IMATH MATH IF and IIF statements also a minus sign for a signed number Also designates a negative constant in RLL e g 32768 Is an SF statement used to insert comments for an SF program Not executed when the SF program runs is also the multiplication operator in a math expression Is the assignment operator in a math expression Assignment operator is not required in IF statements Is equal to operator in a math expression or a relational contact Is less than operator in a math expression or a relational contact Is less than or equal to operator in a math expression or a relational contact Is not equal to operator in a math expression or a relational contact Is greater than operator in a math expression or a relational contact Is greater than or equal to operator in a math expression or a relational contact Is a shift right operator in a math expression Is a shift left in operator in a math expression Is used to indicate offset indexing in a math expression also used to override defaul
287. is change is effective as soon as the controller reads it Exercise caution when using the Write function in your application Failure to follow appropriate safety precautions could result in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Use caution when writing values in RUN mode To do so may seriously affect system level safety From either the ladder or chart display complete the following steps l Press CHGVAL F2 2 At the prompt type in the element type and identifier for changing value 3 Usetheright arrow key to position the cursor in the value field 4 Ifthe display format needs to be changed press the SPACEBAR to select the desired format before going to the next step 5 Typein the new value to be written 6 Press WRITE F8 10 16 Using Status Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 10 12 Forcing Elements a WARNING A change made in chart or ladder status updates the program as entered If made in RUN mode this change is effective as soon as the controller reads it Exercise caution when using the Force function in your application Failure to follow appropriate safety precautions could result in death or serious injury and or damage to equipment Use caution when forcing values in RUN mode To do so may seriously affect system level safety Forcing an Element To use the Force function from either the Status or Chart display complete the following steps 1 Press C
288. is not allowed for a particular element type an error message is displayed to tell you that the format is not allowed for that type No key is required for bit format it is selected automatically for discretes and cannot be altered When entering consecutive locations on a chart rather than pressing arrow keys after an entry you can use Retun to move to the next field TISOFT automatically enters the next location with the same format For example if you enter V102 and press Return V103 is displayed and so on If thelocation is in double or real format the next location displayed is incremented by two Elements with ASCII format are increased by the number of words selected When you reach the end of the memory locations for a particular memory type TISOFT duplicates the last element without incrementing TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using StatusFunctions 10 5 10 4 Clearing and Saving Status Charts Clearing a Chart Display Saving a Status Chart To clear either a single location on a display or an entire display complete the following steps from the Status Chart Display Clearing a single location 1 Using the arrow keys position the cursor on the location to be cleared 2 Press CLRLOC F6 Clearing a display 1 Press CLRCHT F5 2 Press YES F2 You can save charts to recall for later use This enables you to monitor and debug a variety of locations in your program without having to r
289. isk Illegal Request in Current Operational Mode Illegal Request when Running from EPROM Illegal Special Function Module Illegal Task Code Request Incorrect Amount of Data Sent with Request Incorrect File Format B 12 TISOFTMessages The sequencer found an illegal instruction at the specified address during a PROGRAM to RUN transition Edit and re enter the logic at the given address The specified memory configuration exceeds the capacity of the total system memory Either decrease the configuration for selected memory types or increase the total system memory capacity to accommodate the larger configuration This error should not occur except under extenuating circumstances The network just entered contains an error that TISOFT does not recognize Attempt to edit and re enter the network with valid ladder logic This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that contains more than 32 contact sized elements in parallel This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that contains more than 32 contact sized elements in series This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that contains more than 32 contact sized elements in series and or in parallel This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that contains more than 32 contact sized elements in series and or in parallel Maximum number of ASCII characters in a single task code is 72 for NITP protocol This messa
290. istinguished from an integer by placing a period at the end of the element F or example V110 designates a real element while V110 designates an integer element In PowerMath the suffix L indicates a long integer 32 bits and the suffix U indicates an unsigned 16 bit integer Theterm expression is used in this manual to mean a logical grouping of tokens smallest indivisible unit such as an element address or an operator that evaluates to an address or to a value Endosing an expression in parentheses indicates that the expression is to be evaluated to a value Otherwise the expression evaluates to an element address Check the Glossary if you are uncertain of the function of any of the expression operators and usethe help display in SF programming if you only need to see what expressions you can use and how they should look in a statement The order of evaluation of the operators is left to right except exponentiation which is performed right to left in the following precedence e Math Functions as ABS X etc Exponentiation NOT Negation e Multiplication Division MOD e Addition Subtraction e Shift Left lt lt Shift Right gt gt e Relational Operators lt lt s gt gt lt gt e AND amp word or double word AND e OR word or double word OR word or double word XOR e Assignment The operators listed above are available for integer real math
291. ition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Seventh Edition Pages Description Contents Preface Chapter1 Installing TISOFTRelease 6 3 1 1 12 1 3 1 4 1 5 Chapter2 Setting up the TISOFT Environment 2 1 22 Programming Device Requirements serere msn Hardware Requirements ssssssssssseee eee ener Memory Requirements 404 beeecepe X RES ERE RETE RE FED ERE BEEF tiga Bes Expanded Memory in DOS isse ree eer wo eek uere obe oae eae a Expanded Memory in Windows 95 ssssssssessee eese Cable Requirements sseueseee enn Cable Pinouts for RS 232 C Ports 2 RR aas Cable Pinoutsfor RS 422 Ports oo ccc cet ee Hu es Installing TISOFTin MS DOS eser nnn n n 8 nn n Hm nmn Checking PC Memory Available ssssssssssssse e Installing TISOFTProgramming Software ssssseeeeeeees e Installing TSOFTUpgrade Programming Software s sess Installing TISOFTin Windows 95 reeeeenenen n nm Hmmm nnn Installing TISO FT Programming Software in Windows95 sees Creating a SOFT Shortcut Icon on Your Desktop eee Using PC POZ iuis tee acer ede duck a do c e Robe E dca RU dt e Selecting TISOFTOperating Software Options 0 cece Using PC POTE L sascha eae Dextera oce Ce Ce ol eoe RR rh de doe abide Using PC POIE 2 1n ddcCe eid ete
292. l TF NET software have been installed you to Configure the H1 can proceed to configure the network First time H 1 users will find two Network software tools helpful the H 1 Configurator which is shipped with the CP1434TF modules and the SINEC Configuration Management L ocal COML which is automatically installed when you run INSTALL to set up the CP 1413 Both of these programs run under Windows Before TISOFT can communicate using the SINEC Communications Processor CP 1413TF the associations on the CP1413 card and the CP1434TF module must be correctly configured The H 1 Configurator allows you to create a Technology Function TF Service for the CP1434TF module you can then use COML to create a matching association for the CP 1413 card NOTE If you have not yet installed the H1 Configurator you must do so before continuing Consult the Installing the Software section in the SIMATIC 505 SINEC H1 Communication Processor User Manual for the proper procedure to follow In order for one node to communicate with another each node must be configured to recognize the other one When you create associations you give each node an identifier that is Transport Service Access Point or local TSAP and you tell it the identifier remote TSAP of the other node Step 11 Use COML Set up TSAP addresses for either a single TISOFT or multiple TISOFT to Setup CP1413 stations For a single TISOFT station follow the directions in this step For
293. lave Configuration from RAM ssu 6 15 Displaying a Configuration from Disk or Controller 000000 ccc eee 6 17 Showing Individual I O Configuration Points ccccseeeee sees eee Showing I O Configuration Chart Display sissie si 00 cece e 6 19 Displaying Synonyms 0 emen 6 19 Finding I O Point Locations cccceeeeee cece eee eee eee eee eee eee Finding ari l O POIDE ue cee aed pean pelea das a Mind hs ee yale RR E RO eR RR 6 20 Chapter7 Using TISOFT for Discrete Programming Ladder Progamming 6i2deteyectisecdconcutescovasresdiee duns ivasecentecotieees LadderProgram Elements 0c eee 7 2 Using the Element List Screen sssssssssesseeee eee em rr 1 2 Accessing Program Entry Functions 0 cceecee eee nnn Using NSO FT Mentis riisiin ania Rt eb ale e e ure eat o e P c e ed NAT A 7 3 Entering Editing Programs sssssssssssssee eee 7 3 Ruristime EGIES 245 seid eere Ede bec dau adn dut e eed thas crab dues aA 7 4 Displaying Networks c cc cece eee eee eee Displaying NetbWOITKS faci cccs tits ce scar ce Eiche UR e c CR ean ae rt ait ands diode ed 7 6 CUISOFPOSHION ioo aoos e prr E teqe Flyer Bpod pol zii e RR ROLE RU DE SOR REO URS 7 6 Status Eine Infotrriatio n see exact soars tiere act rette e db e ete at e Fontes ees tt 7 6 Contents 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 Entering Editing Ladder Program Elements een nnn Getting into E
294. ler will list only the AUX numbers for the memory types in that particular model Not all memory types are available in all models To save memory data type in the number of the AU X function at the AUX menu prompt then press Return AUX 42 and AUX 61 67 requirethat the selected program on disk memory configuration be the same as that of the controller If the configurations do not match the message PLC MEMORY CONFIGURATION DOES NOT MATCH is displayed and the AU X function does not complete Use AUX 60 to save a program from controller to the selected program on disk AUX 60 saves ladder memory V memory K memory U memory Series 505 I O configurations for all bases PROFIBUS DP I O configurations for all slaves bus parameters for the PROFIBUS DP I O channel memory confi guration discrete el ements forced elements scan time and watchdog timer value To execute AU X 60 use the numeric keys to enter 60 at the menu prompt then press Return After pressing Return you receive the following display at the bottom of the AU X menu If you want the controller memory saved to the current program on disk press YES F2 SAVE memory type you selected FROM PLC TO current pgm name 545 LOADER1 PG NO F1 YES F2 PGMS F7 To change to another program press PGMS F7 and enter the new program name Then press YES F2 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxiliary Func
295. les An attempt to writeto a TISOFT program file has failed becausethe file or the disk is write protected Remove the write protection mechanism and try the operation again TISOFTMessages B 5 Disk Not Initialized Disk Timeout Error Duplicate SBR Reference Element Address Corrected to Valid Boundary Element Cannot Be Displayed in This Format Element Exists at Rung Address Element Exists Only at Current Rung Element Forced Element Must Be on an 8 Point Boundary Element Not Found Element out of Range B 6 TISOFT Messages This message is displayed when you attempt to perform File Conversion to convert a program to Series 500 505 TI SOFT Release 5 0 or greater NoTISOFT user program files are found in the current source directory disk Change to the directory disk containing the program you wish to convert and invoke the File Conversion operation again An attempt to access the disk has failed Perhaps the disk drive has been popped open or a disk hardware failure has occurred The specified subroutine SBR number has been dedared more than once in the RLL program The element address was adjusted to a legal value for the controller This error occurs during BLDCHT or CHGVAL in STATUS or CHART The element selected cannot be displayed in the requested format F or example if the configured range for V memory is V 1 V 2048 V2048 cannot be displayed as DOUBLE because it requires two word lo
296. lication IDs that must transition to RUN mode at the same time Pressing READRM F2 off line or READDK F2 or READPC F4 on line displays the current application ID configuration After modifying the configuration press WRITRM F3 off line or WRITDK F3 or WRITPC F5 on line to save the new configuration relationships TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring Controller Memory 4 9 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 Chapter 5 Configuring Series 505 I O Reading an I O Configuration cccccccceee cece eee eee eee eee eee eee Displaying the Configuration from RAM sssssseeeeee esee Displaying the Configuration from Disk or Controller 0000 cece ee Displaying the Configuration from a Base sssssssssesee seen Configuring I O wn cc eee cece eens aaa an n Controller Functionality in Configuration cette tees VO Configuration Guidelines 0 cece I me Configuration Procedure s s3 seo kei ete ede nee ea ee eo aa Saving the Configuration sms esiaine ten ack dae Ed ae darc d e eke Changing I O Configuration 0ccccee cece eee msn sen Clearing a Base I O Display 0c III nnn Clearing a Base I O Configuration On Line Clearing a Base I O Configuration Off Line Deleting a Channel 560 565 Only cece cece cence m Showing Individual I O Configuration Points ccccceeeee eens eee n nnn Showing I O Configuration Chart Display
297. ling the CP 5412 A2 card in the PC you must install the S7 5412 M S DOS Windows software to configure the card for PROFIBUS network operation NOTE Windows 95 and Windows NT versions of the S7 5412 software may not operate correctly with TI SOFT Refer to the documentation provided with 7 5412 M S DOS Windows for information on installing the software After installing the software usethe diagnostic function with the menu command E dit Diagnosis to check the hardware and software installation NOTE The CP 5412 A2 card must be assigned an interrupt that is not used by any other device on your computer You can usethe diagnostic function in the S7 5412 MS DOS Windows software to determine the available interrupts The software cannot however detect the interrupt used by a SCSI driver Follow the guidelines provided by the S7 5412 MS DOS Windows documentation for configuring the CP 5412 card for PROFIBUS network operation NOTE Make sureto select the bus parameters the baud rate and the highest station address HSA that match those of the network Also be sure to select a unique network address for the CP 5412 device TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFT with FMS 3 J 3 Installing the PRO ABUS AMS Communications Proc essor and Software Installing the FMS CP Module in a SIMATIC 505 Base Installing the COM5434 Configurator Software Configuring the FMS CP Module Connecting to the PRORBUS Netw
298. ller configuration This can cause unexpected process operation to a controller in RUN mode Unexpected process operation can cause death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Use caution when writing a changed memory configuration to a controller in RUN mode Entering To save the configuration to disk press WRITDK F3 Configuration To write the configuration to the controller press WRITPC F5 NOTE You can change memory configuration in Program Mode only If the controller is in Run mode TISOFT prompts you to confirm changing to Program mode before writing the new memory configuration to the controller After the operation the controller goes back to Run mode Checking Memory You can determine how much memory is available by accessing AU X 28 Availability under Diagnostics The M emory Availability screen displays the memory information that your controller supports as shown in Figure 4 5 MEMORY AVAILABILITY CONFIGURED USED AVAILABLE AVAILABLE BYTES BYTES BYTES WORDS LADDER L 188 32580 16290 COMPILED L CL 65536 SPECIAL S 66 32702 Note Not all data is available from all controllers Figure 4 5 Memory Availability AUX Function Screen 555 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring Controller Memory 4 7 4 4 Selecting Application 575 When you configure a 575 controller off line you must first select the applicatio
299. llowing procedure to enter the desired configuration 1 Press the SPACEBAR and then CONFIO F3 to produce the 505 Base Status screen See Figure 5 1 for off line operation or see Figure 5 3 for on line operation 2 Press CONFIG F2 The Basel O Configuration screen appears See Figure 5 2 for off line operation or see Figure 5 4 for on line operation 3 Usethearrow keys to position the cursor at the CHANNEL field and type in the desired channel number TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring Series 505 I O 5 7 Configuring I O continued Saving the Configuration 4 Usethearrow keys to position the cursor at the BASE field and typein the desired base number NOTE You can change the base number either by using the PgUp PgDn keys if the last operation was a Read operation or by typing a number in the BASE field and pressing a read function READRM READPC READDK or READBS You can view bases by using the PgUp PgDn keys for the currently selected channel number 5 Usethe arrow or Return to select the I O Address field of the slot to be configured 6 Typein the beginning I O Address 7 Typein the number of I O points X Y WX or WY required for the type of module being configured 8 Ifyou are configuring a special function module type in Y es in the SPECIAL FUNCTION column 9 Toenableor disable the current base press EN DIS F6 off line EN DIS F2 on line or C The following message ap
300. lso Automatic Rung I nsert On Indicates that RUNG INSERT modeis active This mode is used to enter a series of rungs before existing ladder logic rungs After pressing ENTER F8 to enter a rung a new blank rung is created To toggle this mode on off press INSERT F8 AUTORN F6 in ladder edit An attempt was made to run Remote Base Diagnostics AU X 21 on a Dual RBC and the specified base is not configured Configure the base and perform AU X 21 again Bit of word is not allowed for this element to be entered Bit of word is required for this element to be entered When you use the down arrow to scroll through a status chart with synonyms this message indicates that the bottom of the chart is on the screen The box just created in RLL implicitly refers to a Control Relay which is out of range for the current configuration Either reduce the length of the table of Control Relays in the box or move the starting table address to a CR that can accommodate the length of the table or increase your I O configuration to accommodate the extra Control Relays The box just created in RLL contains a table of Control Relays which spans the boundary between Global and Internal Control Relays The table must fit entirely within either the Global CR range C1 C8192 or the Internal CR range C8193 C56320 not both This message is displayed when a box at the specified rung address contains more parameter data than expected for the particular
301. lues Displaying Synonyms Reading Values With the V K memory editor you can display read and write V or K memory addresses in the format you select To help in determining program function of the addresses you can display the memory locations with synonyms listed as well To access the V K memory editor press Ctrl V or Ctrl K from any display in TISOFT The memory table you selected V or K is then displayed Forty consecutive memory locations are listed in thetable with the value given for each location The format of the value is also shown The default format for all locations is integer After accessing the V K memory table complete the steps below to display a specific memory location l Press FIND F2 2 Typein the desired V or K address at the prompt 3 Press Return The display is changed to show the V or K address you requested as the first entry in the table along with 39 consecutive entries following the requested location First locate the address by using the steps above Then complete the following steps to display synonyms with a particular location 1 Using the Retum or arrow keys position the cursor on the desired address in the memory table 2 Press SYNTGL F5 The address synonym and descriptor you requested are displayed along with the next three locations Complete the following steps to read the current values on your display Begin the steps at the V
302. m nhanh aaa an Valid Element Types iu bere eee onere ede e e Pie e Yr t D a Creating an Element Usage Listing Reading the USING siasii oe esie oh bao dee c eue a an e e Baba P HA d RR e ded Creating Documentation at Program Entry ccc cece cece cece nnn nnn Accessing the Documentation Editors sssssssessseessee eee Documenting YourProgram sssssssssses ees Finding Ladders and Hements esssesee nnne nnn FING FUNCUONS esset prora ox e mneA KR ER e MEER RR UTRR Ney haa Pa taal teda EE Using Find Operation s see eb ERR es bs ei ODER RH R ERG KU ER Finding the Next BOX ss ecerehde rh I RR Diao eee Gree eed RES eas Determining Valid ENTES seista eiecit ceu t Pe n aee eph e bead dh bead Find Operation Eamples isssssssssseeee eee re Using the V K Memory Editor eseeeeen nn I mmm mmm Reading Altering V and K Memory Contents ssssssssessee eere Displaying Memory Values pigaan aaia ee Ihrer Displaying Synonyms i Leto io epecenRpRZeRPAO RR GREEK PR MERE RR RU P Paca Reading Valles iste bie e EE perdet bete dede ier ole Paci a Dado Changing Memory Values sssssssssssssssse sese Saving a Numeric Display Foma s seras seaside cece een Changing Numeric Format sssssssssssssssse sese nnn Entering Message Strings 4 is Cei dan Eee er bere ee tue D ded Fa ie ent d Contents vii 7 13 7 14 7 15 8 1 82 8 3 8 4 Using Onscreen Cross Refere
303. memory configuration menu showing types and sizes of memory configured e Ladders Gives you a copy of the ladder program within the address range you specify Synonyms descriptors and comments are included if you indicate YES in the Syn Des and Com fields e Inline XREF Lists the address of the first occurrence where an input is used as an output in each rung performs a full cross reference for each output It also allows you to exclude a range of control relays in the cross reference e Skip NOPS Allows you to not print NOPS within your ladder program e Element Usage Table Prints all X Y WX WY elements and indicates if used in the program e V K Memory Provides a listing of V and K memory address and contents in the range specified e S Memory Provides a copy of each programmed loop analog alarm and SF program subroutine e O Configuration Gives you a copy of the I O configuration for each Series 505 base and or PROFIBUS DP slave with synonyms if selected U nused bases and slaves are not printed e Synonyms Prints the synonyms and descriptors within the range selected for each of the types listed on the menu Usethe arrow keys to position your cursor from field to field to select the desired print options The v N field is one character long Indicatethe parameters for printing by typing in Y at the selected element type The FROM and To fields vary in size with memory type and size is indicated by le
304. memory contains number of characters RETURN No parameters SCALE BINARY INPUT Int Element or Address Expression SCALED RESULT Int Real Output Element or Addr Expression LOW LIMIT Real Constant LOW lt HIGH HIGH LIMIT Real Constant LOW lt HIGH 20 OF FSET Y es or N o NOT Yes if BIPOLAR BIPOLAR Y es or N o NOT Yes if 20 OF FSET SDT INPUT TABLE Int Real Element or Address Expression OUTPUT Int Real Output Element or Addr Expression TABLE PTR Int Output Element or Address Expression TABLE LENGTH Int Constant greater than zero Element or Value or Address Expression INPUT TABLE TABLE LEN 1 must be within configured memory range RESTART BIT Y or C Element address SSR REGISTER START Int Real Output Element or Addr Expression STATUS BIT Y or C Element address REGISTER LENGTH Int Constant greater than zero Element or Value or Address Expression REG START REG LENGTH 1 must be within configured memory range UNSCALE SCALED INPUT Int Real Element or Address Expression BINARY RESULT LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT 2096 OFFSET BIPOLAR Int Output Element or Address Expression Real Constant LOW lt HIGH Real Constant LOW lt HIGH Y es or N o NOT Yes if BIPOLAR Y es or N o NOT Yes if 2096 OFFSET TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming 819 8 10 Displaying Special Function Programs Subroutines Invoking the To enter special function programs or subro
305. memory data in the selected block are set to zero 0 The V or K memory formats are not cleared For synonyms and comments data in the selected block is erased blanked Off line for all memory types Block Put copies a source memory block from a selected source program to the destination memory block in the current program On line for Ladders V memory and K memory Block Put copies a source memory block from a selected source program to the destination memory block in the controller Conversely using SRCTGL F8 source toggle Block Put copies a source memory block from the controller to the destination memory block in a selected program Block Put of synonyms and comments online copies a source memory block from a selected source program to the destination memory block in the current program Block Put of a title copies thetitle from a source program to the current program overwriting the current title if any If the source program does not have a title an error message DISK FILE NOT FOUND is displayed TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Performing Block Data Functions 13 3 13 3 Accessing Block Operations from Ladder Display Accessing Ladder Display Block Functions Invoking a Block Operation 13 4 Performing Block Data Functions You can access block functions from the ladder display either on or off line by pressing BLOCK F5 Figure 13 1 shows menu options after pressing BLOCK From Ladders ABORT COPY
306. ments by rebuilding the comment program files It does this by writing all comments in the selected program on disk to a temporary text file All of the comment files in the selected program are then deleted and rebuilt using the data in the temporary text file The temporary text fileis then deleted This reduces the size of the comment files and may also fix some comment editing problems To execute the Recover function follow these steps 1 Press RECOVR F8 at the comment selection prompt see Figure 9 5 TheTISOFT File Selection screen appears The default directory is the selected program on disk and the default file name is TEMPFILE 2 Press SELECT F8 or Return to accept the default file and directory or choose another drive directory or filename TISOFT executes the Recover function as described above NOTE If thereis not enough space in the default drive and directory to temporarily store the comment data choose another drive and or directory Select RECOVR F8 COMMENT Y000001 LOADER1 EXIT F1 IMPORT F2 EXPORT F3 SETUP F5 RECOVR F8 Figure 9 5 Using the Recover Function 9 8 Documenting Programs TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 9 4 Preparing to Enter Synonyms and or Desc riptors Selecting an To create synonyms and or descriptors after pressing DOCUM F4 press Hement SYN F3 to display the prompt line shown in Figure 9 6 You can select the element in one of two ways as follows e Usethesynonym fi
307. mmand line of the driver Functionality Not The following functions which are available in certain controller models are Supported by not supported by this release of TISOFT TISOFT e Automatic tuning of loops e More than 64 loops e More than 128 analog alarms xxviii Preface TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Safety Considerations Overview Failure of the Control System A programmable controller is a programmed system When you create or modify the control program you must be aware that your program affects control actions that manipulate physical devices If the program contains errors these errors can cause the controlled equipment to operate in unpredictable ways This could cause harm to anyone who uses the equipment damage to the controlled equipment or both You must ensure that the control program is correct before you introduce it to the operational environment of the controlled process Read this section carefully before you create or modify the control program TheSeries 500 and Series 505 controllers are highly reliable systems However you must be aware that these systems can fail If a failure occurs and if the control system is ableto respond tothe failure the controller enters the Fatal Error mode The Fatal Error mode sets all the discrete outputs to zero off and freezes all the word outputs at their values when the failure was detected Your control system design must take the F atal Error mode into cons
308. mpleting the Print Setup Menu soe nnn msn Invoking the Print Setup Menu ssssssseeeeee ee s Completing the Menu usui tee eth Re c eR gh dete dee eB E thank Pede Printing Extended Networks eseusseeeeeee nnne Using Print Cross Reference Operation s seen n nn n n nn nn nnn Cross Reference Options 6 sese Cross Reference Contents kris peii iia iiaii ene nnn Invoking Print C ross Reference 0 ccc Completing Cross Reference Menu ccc ete Setting up Print Parameters 0 ttt een Executing the Printout eb Wena haadl 4 ERR ba EE hewn Eee awed Y uq efr Contents xv Appendix A Menu Maps On Line Off Line Ladder Displays ALARM 122r rera dad BLDC AY a reial er de C ect ees BLOCK From Ladders BLOCK From Loop Alam SF CHART raae CONFIO Series505 CONFIO PROFIBUS DP CONFME ccc eee eee LO OPs e a ObE es PG RN s skrireh eiat iee e REPLACE tcccteceiv ere asi SIATUS wc iesu nn Appendix B TISOFT Messages Appendix C Converting Program Files Overview se ne Conversion Procedure forReleasesEarierthan 4 0 sss nnn Conversion Procedure for Release Lo qu Appendix D Using TISOFT with TISIAR PCS Accessing TISOFTOff Line Accessing TISOFTOn Line Appendix E Using TISOFT with TIWAY El E2 E3 EA E5 Communicating through TWAY Setting up the
309. n Press the spacebar CONFME F2 and then REQAPP F8 as shown in Figure 4 6 to select the desired application You can change the Application ID only during off line configuration Configuring the controller on line displays the current application PLC TYPE 575 MEMORY CONFIGURATION USER MEMORY SYSTEM MEMORY LADDER 32 KBYTES 96 KBYTES VARIABLE 52 KBYTES 52 KBYTES CONSTANT 0 KBYTES 0 KBYTES SPECIAL 32 KBYTES 32 KBYTES COMPILED SF CS 0 KBYTES 0 KBYTES USER SUB U 0 KBYTES 0 KBYTES GLOBAL TMR CTR 5 KBYTES APPLICATION ID J REQUIRED APPLICATIONS Application ID field can be edited off line only These fields can be edited on or off line OPTIONAL APPLICATIONS CPU MODE LOCKED TO 575 NETDATA EXIT F1 READRM F2 WRITRM F3 575 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 READDK F2 WRITDK F3 READPC F4 WRITPC F5 Figure 4 6 575 Application Selection Screen 4 8 Configuring Controller Memory TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual The following fields display information about applications Only the IDs listed in the REQUIRED or OPTIONAL fields are valid for use as G memory parameters in your RLL program e APPLICATION ID displays the ID of the current application e REQUIRED APPLICATIONS displays a listing of the application IDs needed for the current application to complete a process e OPTIONAL APPLICATIONS displays a listing of the application IDs that are not required but may be present e CPU MODE LOCKED TO displays a listing of the app
310. n below for the move operation appears for entering identifiers to be acted on by the function Usethe arrow keys to move the cursor through the parameters The actual prompt line varies according to the memory type selected MOVE LOOP 0001 THRU 0001 TO LOOP 0001 Memory T Block Type Beginning Ending Destination Identifier Identifier Identifier Entering Block To perform a block operation copy move delete or put complete the Parameters following steps from either of the S memory directories 1 Press BLOCK F3 2 Select COPY F2 MOVE F3 DELETE F4 or PUT F5 If you select Put continue with step 3 otherwise goto step 4 3 For on line PUT operations only use SRCTGL F8 to switch the source and destination between controller to disk and disk to controller 4 At the prompt select LOOP F2 ALARM F3 R S F4 SFPGM F5 SFSUB F6 or INSTR F7 All fields accept only numeric entries or function keys 5 Atthe memory type prompt type in the beginning address of the block to be acted on Usethe right arrow key to moveto THRU field and type in the ending address of the source block 6 Movethe cursor tothe destination field and type in the destination address 7 Press Return to execute the block operation If the selected address fields encompass an invalid source block that is the starting address is greater than the ending address or if the operation would cause S memory overflow you receive ei
311. n you can access a List display by pressing or SHIFT at the prompt line The List display lists the valid entries for that particular field Figure 7 21 shows theList display available at the FIND prompt ROW 1 COL 1 NEIWORKSIARTING ADDRESS 1 x1 X5 LIST COIL BOX LOOP ALARM MISC END ABSV LACK AACK OUTC ENDC ADD LADB AADB OUTY GTS BITC LCFH ACFH NEXT JMP BITP LCFL ACFL NXTIN JMPE BITS LERR AERR L LBL CBD LHA AHA ADDR MCR CDB LHHA AHHA DSP MCRE CMP LKC ALA DSC RTN CTR LKD ALLA DCP SBR DCAT LLA AODA DCC JMORE JMORE JMORE MORE iMORE 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 HELP F4 SELECT F8 Figure 7 21 List Screen in Find Operation Table 7 2 shows examples of Find operations and the corresponding field settings Table 7 2 Find Examples Sample FIND Operation Type Field Word Bit Field Output Field Word and bit inputs and V2 outputs Word elements only V2 Word Only Bit of word only V2 7 All bits of a word V2 Bit Only All bits of a word used as V2 Bit Only Output Only an output Timer 4 box TMR4 All timer boxes TMR and TMRSO TMRF All boxes that use timer TCO memory TMR TMRF CTR UDC MCAT DCAT 7 20 Using TISOFTfor Discrete Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 7 12 Using the V K Memory Editor Reading Altering V and K Memory Contents Displaying Memory Va
312. n into the selected TISOFT program on disk Master Host I nterface Unit configures Unilink Host Adapter on TI WAY network Master Host Interface Unit Emulate Host Adapter configures Unilink Host Adapter on TI WAY network Move Image Register from Table allows moving of data from a table of consecutive word locations to the mage Register Move Image Register to Table allows moving of data from the mage Register to a table of consecutive word locations Move I mage Register to Word clears memory location A and shifts the number of bits specified from the discrete image register X Y or C tothe word in memory location A in a single memory scan Enables creation of new directory in PGMS function Operator in SF MATH statements that performs modulo arithmetic X MOD Y yields the remainder of X Y In Block moves the selected block to another location then deletes the source block The M ove Element box instruction copies data elements from a source address to a destination address Move Word moves up to 256 words beginning at the location designated in A to the location specified as beginning at B in a single memory scan Multiply multiplies a signed integer in memory location A by a signed integer in memory location B The product is stored in two memory locations C and C 1 C contains the most significant word and C 1 contains the least significant Move Word F rom Table moves words from a table location in V memory to
313. n n n n n n n Entering Editing Program Elements for Extended Rungs cccceeeeeeneeeeeeenans 7 11 Adding Connecting Lines for Ladders esee n n n n nnn n nnn 7 12 Making Program Changes ssnn nnne nnn Determining If an Element Is Unique seeeeenrn nnm n nnn nnn 7 16 Showing Hement Usage seuoese een nnne 7 17 Creating Documentation at Program Entry iisseeeeeeenn nn n nnn 7 18 Finding Ladders and Hement ssssesseee nnn nennen nnn 7 19 Using the V K Memory Editor eseeeen nnn I nmn mmm 7 21 Using Onscreen Cross Reference cccccccee cece e eee nennen nnn 7 24 Ong erre T m RM 7 25 Creating Keysttoke Macros cece eee cence eee enean ana 7 26 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISO FT for Discrete Programming 7 1 7 1 Ladder Programming Ladder Program Hements Using the Hement List Screen The term element designates a component used in your program for example a timer a V memory address a contact or coil X Y or C Each element requires an identifier which is the number that distinguishes one element of a particular type from another such as TMR6 TMR8 etc Many box instructions however do not require an identifier Entering your ladder programs with TISOFT is simplified by the design of the menu structure Ladder programming is accomplished through three main elements contacts coils and boxes Most contact
314. n nennen 10 15 Displaying Both Ladders and Chart ccccccee eee eee TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using StatusFunctions 10 1 10 1 Status Functions Available After you have completed entry of your program and loaded it to your controller TISOFT provides the functionality for debugging and monitoring Whether you display your ladder program or build a chart of elements status functions operate on either You can access read write force unforce or find forced elements functions from either the ladder display or the chart display In addition you have the option of displaying ladders and charts on one display by using the SELECT feature You can monitor your program either through a ladder display or a chart you have built by using the status functions with the controller in the RUN mode You can build status charts to use on line as your program executes To give you flexibility in setting up charts you can build them off line as well as on line and save them for reuse You can include the following memory types in charts e Discetel O e Analog Alarm Variables e Loop Variables e V and K Memory Addresses e Status Words e Timer Drum and Counter Current and Presets e Wordl O While in theladder status display you can observe the status of selected elements in your ladder program While in the status or chart mode you can toggle controller operating mode between PROGRAM and RUN You can initiate a single scan
315. n the alarm table are verified after you press ENTER If invalid entries are detected the field cursor is placed on the invalid field and an error message is displayed If no errors are detected the display is returned tothe Alarm Directory When you show or edit a particular alarm the control block enabled disabled status remains constant However when you press ENTER F8 the control block is automatically disabled to enter your edit The control block is restored to its original status enabled or disabled upon exit tothe directory You can also enable the control block after edit by using the EN DIS funcion key while in the Alarm Directory or the Alarm display To delete an alarm use the Block functions from the Directory Whilein the Alarm Directory complete the following steps 1 Press BLOCK F3 2 Press DELETE F4 3 When the prompt appears enter the range of the alarms that you want deleted and press Return For details on using the Block functions see Chapter 13 of this manual TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming 8 13 8 8 Special Function Program Subroutine Language Special Function Language Special Function Statements Special Function Instructions SF Programming Hements A Special Function SF program or subroutine is a sequence of SF statements An SF program may be invoked from ladder programs using the SFPGM box instruction loops or alarms An SF
316. n toNONE Simplify the expressions by dividing them into less complex elements that have intermediate solutions This message is displayed during edit of Ramp Soak table steps It occurs when the user attempts to cursor left right or to ENTER a step without first selecting the type of step for example Ramp Soak or End Press R to select a Ramp step Press S to select a Soak step Or press E to select an End step Too much data was sent to the controller The controller has malfunctioned The given error number has occurred on the TCP IP network The code number gives a detailed description of the error The store and forward buffer is in use Retry the operation This message indicates that the network at the specified rung address contains too many elements in series or parallel Re edit the network to reduce the number of elements in series or parallel Perhaps break into two simpler networks The RLL program contains more Immediate I O references than the controller can resolve The controller allows Immediate I O instructions either Immediate contact coil or I ORW to reference up to 32 8 point I O ranges Only one Immediate I O module can be assigned to points within a given I O range If you areusingthe up arrow to scroll through a status chart with synonyms this message indicates that the top of the chart is already on the screen The amount of U memory configured in the controller is too small to accommodate the UM
317. nce ssssessse eee eee nnn nn 7 24 Accessing Onscreen Cross Reference 6 enna 7 24 Cross Reference Parameters 2 0 0 0 sen 7 24 Reading the Display sisii tasai eaaa a a a Aani bokdd a keii aa bd be dnd 7 24 ZOOM ee ee ee ee ee VO ER re EAA 7 25 Creating Keysttoke MaciOS iissssssssssess ennemi 7 26 Chapter8 Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming Accessing S Memory Operations 0cccceecceee eee eee eee eee nnn Using TISOFTIn S Memory 2 petet vb UR ER ee ee ebay dita A 8 2 Using TISOETM6ends sce ede cR pe hee ERE ETUR YR iad AER RO EAR RR be 8 2 S Memory Contro l BIE Ksi uoces ben etes RRURE de d beer qi bdo 8 2 Using S Memory Directories cc cece cece cence eee nnne nnn nn Directory Informa tioN iie ce e cete d cete de une oe ge ate doit pena adr bd S memory Available sssssssessssees mn COMMON FUNCTION KEYS iii since ve wie Re teta eto ed ex DUE BORSE ed ean d orta Locating Directory Entries Displaying Loops sseeeeeee nnn nnne nna aa nn Invoking the Loop Directory sssssseseeee RI Hh Displaying the Loop Table ssssssssseeeee I Hr Fcliting LOOPS 5 1 eta E Ecem ea cdcem x Gre Dan cade Ec PR CR GRON RR RR RR Showing LOOPS eee id tie eee GGG RR KG KE YER Pee eee Res Invoking Edit Mode ssec eox pp hebt ene REOR P ar hada e ex ete aa Making Entriesto the Loop Table p iriiria iaiia mm 85 8 6 8 7 viii Status of Control Blocks during Edits Deleting LOOPS 2 e
318. nd controller password program on disk password is retained password is retained program on disk and to controller is allowed User gives No Controller is No Controller is Partial to full access to disk password protected password protected controller is allowed password depending on access level Full access is allowed to selected program on disk User gives No Selected Yes Selected Full access to controller is controller program on disk is program on disk allowed Some reads and no password password protected password is written writes are allowed to to controller and selected program on disk enabled User gives Partial to full access to no controller is allowed password depending on access level Some reads and no writes are allowed to selected program on disk H8 Using Password TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual On Line Disk Operations with Password Table H 2 shows on line disk operations that are allowed when the selected program on disk is password protected Table H 3 shows on line disk operations that are not allowed when the selected program on disk is passwor d protected Table H 2 On Line Disk Operations Allowed by Password Protection a aa Password Protected Selected Program on Disk Change selected program on disk Read current application D from selected program on disk Read print selection table Read print setup table Read title Display synonyms in la
319. nd describes the operation performed by each of the keys Function Help Function help gives a description of a particular operation For example if you ask for Function help when the Print function is displayed details on all of the printing options are provided Hement Help Element help gives a description of all the elements used in TI SOFT 3 10 TISOFT Basics TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFT HELP System continued Message Help Message help is available when an error or other message is displayed Invoking message help gives you an explanation of the message with a suggested correction for the problem NOTE You can also reference other manuals to obtain help in designing or changing your programs F or example the user manuals for your controllers explain the functionality of the instructions and give guidelines for using a particular instruction The system manuals for your controllers should be used to supplement the information provided in this manual Bement List As you enter or edit your program you can access a List display at any point that has a prompt requesting an element entry The List display lists the valid entries for that particular field Figure 3 5 shows the List display available by pressing OJ or Shift 2 at the FIND selection prompt Each of the entries shown on the display are valid entries for the current prompt To access element help for an explanation of the function of a particular box position the c
320. ndicate the parameters for printing by typing in Y at the selected element type The FROM and TO fields vary in size with memory type and size is indicated by length of the cursor when it is positioned on the field Indicate memory locations to be printed by typing in the numbers for the range to be printed f you need to change the print parameters press SETUP F3 to access the Print Setup Menu See Section 14 4 Makethe desired changes and press WRITDK F3 if you want the changes saved to disk After completion of the Cross Reference M enu press EXECUTE F2 to initiate the operation You are given messages at the prompt linetoindicate the status of the printout TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Printing 14 9 Appendix A Menu Maps The menu listings in this appendix show the primary functions as accessed from the Ladder Display illustrated below The listings are in alphabetical order On Line Off Line The first line of function keys shown below represents the Start up Screen Ladder Displays function keys oar Poms eue secon ras ore EXIT EDIT FIND DOCUM BLOCK STATUS CHART 4 SPACEBAR EXIT EDIT FIND DOCUM BLOCK REPLAC BLDCHT WRITDK eS SPACEBAR 4 Thelast menu map in this appendix is the separate TISOFT operating software Print Cross Reference TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Menu Maps A 1 ALARM ALARM On and Off Line EXIT SHOW BL
321. ndows 95 instal lation 1 741 9 Z Zoom to display edit SF programs 7 25 Customer Response We would like to know what you think about our user manuals so that we can serve you better How would you rate the quality of our manuals Excellent Good Fair Poor Accuracy Organization Clarity Completeness Graphics Examples Overall design Size Index Would you be interested in giving us more detailed comments about our manuals Yes Please send me a questionnaire No Thanks anyway Your Name Title Telephone Number Company Name Company Address Manual Name SIMATIC 505 TISOFT2 Release 6 3 User Manual Edition Seventh Text Assembly Number 2590576 0007 Date 04 98 Order Number PPX TS505 8101 7 FOLD BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRSTCLASS PERMITNO 3 JOHNSON CMY TN POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE ATTN TECHNICAL COMMUNICATIONS M S 519 SIEMENS ENERGY amp AUTOMATION INC P O BOX 1255 JOHNSON CITY TN 37605 1255 FOLD NO POSIAGE NEC ESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES SIMATIC and SINEC are trademarks of Siemens AG PowerMath Series 505 Series 500 TISOFT2 TISOFT TISTAR PCS TIWAY I UNILINK and 386 ATM are trademarks of Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Microsoft MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Windows NT and Excel a
322. nfigure TF Services if you add another application that requires them Refer to the TF User Interface section of the SINEC H1 Communication Processor User Manual for additional information 2 Connect your PC serial port cable to the CP 1434TF module using a programmable logic controller programming cable Part Number 2601094 8001 3 Select the menu command Transfer Download Configuration to CP to download the configuration file containing at least the Ethernet address to the CP 1434TF NOTE When the configurator downloads a configuration file tothe CP 1434TF module a hidden application association is also transferred This association has the name CP 1434TF and TSAP CP 1434TF Its remote address and TSAP address are unspecified allowing any host to connect to it When several CP1434TF modules are on the same network each module has this same association but the local addresses will differ 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second CP 1434TF module but this time type a different unused local Ethernet address for example 080006010002 G 10 TISOFTwith H1 Communications TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Creating a Matching Association with COML The next association that you create is for the CP1413 card allowing it to recognize and communicate with the CP 1434TF module Follow these steps to create an association for your CP 1413 that matches the TF Service that you just filled out on the CP1434TF 1 Invoke COML from W
323. nfigured by user 4 u P Remote TSAP CP1434TF Local Address 080006010002 9 y Local TSAP CP1434TF Hidden Not Remote Address 080006010002 configured by user Figure G 4 Addressing TSAPs for a Single TISOFT Station NOTE An application association represents the connection between two applications using SINEC H1 TISOFT references the application association by using the local name of the application association labeled application association name when set up in COML program TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFT with H1 Communications G 9 Steps for Installing and Configuring the CP1413 Module continued a WARNING Using the same Ethernet H1 network address more than once on the same H1 network can cause unpredictable controller behavior Unpredictable controller behavior could cause death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Ensure that you do not repeat an Ethernet H1 network address on the same H1 network Select an Ethernet Address for Each Device on the H1 Network Perform the following steps to select an Ethernet address for each device 1 Usethe505 CP1434TF H1 Configurator to create a configuration file for the first CP1434TF module in File menu Enter a unique local Ethernet address e g 080006010001 that is not already in use on your H1 network You do not need to enter a TF Service now TF Services are not needed for TI SOFT access You can co
324. ng problems when running TISOFT under Windows 95 see Appendix K If you experience any such problems restart your computer in MS DOS mode the Shut Down dialog from the Windows 95 Start menu provides this option and start TISOFT as described in Section 1 5 Another way to run TISOFT in MS DOS modeis described in Appendix K Running TISOFT in MS DOS mode optimizes communications and performance TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Installing TISO FTRelease 6 3 1 7 Installing TISOFTin Windows 95 continued Creating a TISOFT You can add a TISOFT icon on your Windows 95 desktop that starts Shortcut Icon on TISOFT in a DOS window simply by double dicking the icon Your Desktop Click the right TISOFT mouse button to icon access the pop up Arrange Icons gt H Desktop Edit Menu __ Lieupicon Nameer TISOFT Paste your choice Paste Special Properties 0 Text Document elect i New Shortcut Microsoft Word Document Bitmap Image Wave Sound Briefcase Figure 1 6 Creating a TISOFTShortcut Icon for Your Windows Desktop Follow these steps to add the shortcut icon 1 With the mouse cursor anywhere within the desktop background dick the right mouse button to access the Windows desktop edit menu 2 Select New Shortcut as shown in Figure 1 6 A Create Shortcut wizard dialog appears This wizard guides you through the steps needed to create the shortcut icon 3 Inthe Command line field type c NTINTisoft
325. ng to their functions in the program CO may be used in boxes to dear a parameter field Invokes the specified Special Function subroutine and passes up to five parameters to it for execution Convert Binary to Decimal converts binary inputs to equivalent binary coded decimal values TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual CDB COMPSE CDB CDT CEIL X CHART CHGVAL CLEAR CLRBS CLRCHT CLRLOC CMP CMPACT Ctrl L COIL COL COLOR COM COMMNT COMPAR COMPIL COMPSE Convert Decimal to BCD converts binary coded decimal to equivalent binary integer values Corrdated Data Table locates an entry in an input table that is greater than or equal to a specified input value The corresponding entry in the output table is then written to the output address Returns the smallest integer gt to X Is an on line function that allows monitoring and debugging program elements in a table form toggles status from ladder to chart In STATUS or CHART accesses the edit function for displaying forcing and entering of elements Clear used in status select erases the entry at the cursor Clear Base used in configure I O erases all the data on the screen Clear Chart erases the entire status chart or replace table Clear Location erases selected location in the status chart or replace table Compare compares a number in memory location A to a number in memory location B The comparison is made for equal to less than or greater
326. ngth of the cursor when it is positioned on the field Indicate memory locations to be printed by typing in the numbers for the range to be printed Indicate whether synonyms descriptors and comments are to be included in the printout by completing the SYN DES and COM fields Enter a Y in each of the fields to be printed TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Printing 14 5 14 4 Completing the Print Setup Menu Invoking the Print The Print Setup Menu is available after choosing a print function Press Setup Menu SETUP F3 to invoke the Print Setup menu Figure 14 4 Select the desired options from the menu by using the return and arrow keys to position the cursor in the correct column to make the selections F or the PAGE HEADER LINES PER PAGE STARTING PAGE NUMBER and FILENAME fields position the cursor in the correct field and type in the desired parameters PAGE HEADER COLUMNS 80 132 LINES PER PAGE 50 TO 132 STARTING PAGE NUMBER 1 TO 9999 DATE acd canetoune eb Rote wtdci rA bra ES a Ped boUey sens 00 00 00 USE EXTENDED ASCII CHARACTER SET YES NO FORM FEED YES NO PRINT LINE FEED ON CARRIAGE RETURN YES NO PRINT OUTPUT PRINTER FILE FILE NAME PRFILE LIS 545 LOADER EXIT F1 READDK F2 WRITDK F3 PRTCTL F4 RDDATE F5 Figure 14 4 Print Setup Menu Completing the Usethe function keys available on the Setup menu to make your selections Menu Each of the keys perform operations as indicated below e P
327. nnnsnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnn TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISO FT with TIWAY E 1 E 1 Communicating through TIWAY Setting up the TIWY I and UNILINK Host Adapters Setting up the TIWY Host Adapter Card There are three versions of the host adapter hardware TI WAY Host Adapter UNILINK Host Adapter with Host Adapter PIM and TI WAY Host Adapter Card CVU card TISOFT automatically determines the type of adapter installed and displays appropriate options NOTE Since the Network Interface Module NIM does not support some task codes when the controller is in RUN mode you cannot perform the following functions communicating through a NIM Force U nforce and Find except Find Address To communicate with TI SOFT the TI WAY Host Adapter or the UNILINK Host Adapter must conform to the following parameters e NITP protocol e Full duplex e Asynchronous e Maximum Host Baud Rate 19 200 NOTE Using TISOFT to communicate over a TI WAY network has only been tested in MS DOS mode TI SOFT may have problems running in Windows See your UNILINK Host Adapter User Manual for details on setting dipswitches for the UNILINK Host Adapter To use the TI WAY Host Adapter Card to communicate with TI SOFT follow the steps below 1 Before you begin use a memory manager program to exclude the memory range for your TI WAY Host Adapter Card The default memory range for the TI WAY Host Adapter Card is C800 C900 For example us
328. no element to be selected for a parameter in certain boxes in RLL and in S memory Null Operation is an unprogrammed coil or rung Is the logical NOT operator in SF MATH and IF statements NOT is also an RLL box to invert power flow Locates the next Dual M edia RBC after the channel and base number entered at the prompt Next Instruction is the next rung of programmed ladder logic Causes the printer to skip to the beginning of the next odd numbered page before printing a rung and its associated comment A mode of the programming device it is used when no communication with the controller is desired In AU X 82 it puts the standby unit in PROGRAM mode A mode of the programming device it is used when communication with the controller is desired In AUX 82 it puts the standby unit in RUN mode Sets PROFIBUS DP communications mode to OPERATE At PROFIBUS DP Slave Status screen toggles between OPERATE and STOP communications mode Elsewhere allows you to select between ASYNCHRONOUS and SYNCHRONOUS as well as OPERATE and STOP communications mode for PROFIBUS DP I O Is the logical OR operator in SF MATH and IF statements OneShot is a box that looks like a contact it provides an output for one controller Scan Allows the selection of special calculation on loop output Toggles between OUTPUT ONLY or unrestricted search in the Find operation Parameter designator in special function subroutine may be integer or real Is us
329. nonyms for each point Figure 6 16 illustrates the format of the display To use the SH OW function complete the following steps at the PROFIBUS DP Slave Configuration screen See Figure 6 13 for off line mode and Figure 6 15 for on line mode 1 Enter the desired slave number at the top of the PROFIBUS DP Slave Configuration screen and press the appropriate read key 2 Press SHOW F2 The Show I O Configuration screen appears See Figure 6 16 Use the PgUp PgDn keys to scroll the display one screen at a time Use the up down arrow keys to scroll the display one row at a time PROFIBUS DP I O CONFIGURATION CHART FOR SLAVE 112 1 0 POINTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MODULE 1 X0233 X0234 X0235 X0236 X0237 X0238 X0239 X0240 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MODULE 2 X0161 X0162 X0163 X0164 X0165 X0166 X0167 X0168 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MODULE 2 X0169 X0170 X0171 X0172 X0173 X0174 X0175 X0176 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MODULE 3 Y0297 YO298 Y0299 Y0300 Y0301 Y0302 Y0303 Y0304 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MODULE 3 Y0305 Y0306 Y0307 Y0308 Y0309 Y0310 Y0310 Y0311 FROM RAM 555 NETDATA EXIT F1 SYNTGL F2 Figure 6 16 Show I O Configuration Display Displaying After pressing SH OW you can choose to display the synonyms with the Synonyms points in a slave Press SYNTGL F2 to toggle the synonym display on and off With synonyms on you have up to 12 I O points and their synonyms displayed TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O 6 19 6 8 Finding I
330. ns the print operation Returns screen to previous display as a key function also an SF instruction that terminates execution of the current SF program even from within an SF subroutine and reports error status Selects the export of synonyms or comments Returns e raised tothe X in a math expression L ocates and displays various elements boxes statements and rungs In 1 0 configuration it finds the location of a particular I O point Refers to a scan timethat is a set length and does not vary Moves cursor between sub window menu and prompt fields in PGMS function Returns the largest integer less than or equal to X in a math expression Format Toggletoggles between saving and not saving the format in the V K memory editor The mode is shown on the lower right of the screen Sets an element to a specified value The element remains the same value until UNFORC is selected Only X Y C WX or WY can be forced Accesses the DOS disk formatting operation Returns portion of X tothe right of the decimal point in a math expression Forced Roll Swap does a forced roll swap between Hot Backup Units Fall Thru Shift Register I nput adds an entry to an asynchronous shift register The first of a pair of status bits is set when the register is full The second bit is set when the register is empty Used with the FTSR OUT instruction Fall Thru Shift Register Output removes an entry from an asynchronous shift register The first of a p
331. nt Element or Address Expression BCD RESULT Int Output Element or Address Expression CALL SFSUB Int Constant 1 max no SFSUBS P1 Int Real Constants Discrete or Word P2 Elements Value or Address Expressions P3 M ay be blank P4 P5 CDT INPUT Int Real Element or Address Expression OUTPUT Int Real Output Element or Addr Expression INPUT TABLE Int Real Element or Address Expression OUTPUT TABLE Int Real Element or Address Expression TABLE LENGTH Int Constant greater than zero Element or Address Expression Input Table and output table table length 1 must be within configured memory range ELSE No parameters ENDIF No parameters EXIT ERRCODE Opt Int Constant range 0 255 8 16 Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Instruction Field s Parameters FTSR IN INPUT Int Real Element or Address Expression REGISTER START Int Real Output Element or Addr Expression REGISTER LENGTH Int Constant greater than zero Element or Value or Address Expression Reg Start 4 Reg Length 1 4 words overhead must be within configured memory range STATUS BIT Y or C Element address 2 bits FTSR OUT REGISTER START Int Real Output Element or Addr Expression OUTPUT Int Real Output Element or Addr Expression REGISTER LENGTH Int Constant greater than zero Element or Value or Address Expression Reg Start Reg Length 1 4 words overhead
332. nual An alternative procedure for displaying a base configuration is as follows 1 Press SPACEBAR and then CONFIO F3 The 505 Base Status screen appears See Figure 5 1 2 Press CONFIG F2 The Basel O Configuration screen appears See Figure 5 2 3 Usethearrow keys to highlight the CHANNEL field and type in the channel number 4 Usethearrow keys to highlight the BASE field and type in the base number 5 Press READRM F3 NOTE You can change the base number either by using the PgUp PgDn keys if the last operation was a Read operation or by typing a number in the BASE field and pressing READRM F3 You can view bases by using PgUp PgDn keys for the currently selected channel number only The configuration of the selected base is displayed with the source FROM RAM indicated on the prompt line of the display See Figure 5 2 505 I O MODULE DEFINITION FOR CHANNEL 1 BASE 00 1 0 NUMBER OF BIT AND WORD I O SPECIAL BASE SLOT ADDRESS WY FUNCTION ENABLED FROM RAM 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 SHOW F2 READRM F3 WRITRM F4 EN DIS F6 DELCHN F7 CLRBS F8 Figure 5 2 Off Line Base I O Configuration Screen TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring Series 505 I O 5 3 Reading an I O Configuration continued Displaying the In on line mode complete the following steps to display a base configuration Configuration from from a disk or a controller Disk or Contoller 1 Press SPACEBAR and then CONFIO F3 The 505 Base Status s
333. nvolving U memory has been tried but thereis no U memory configured Multiple program operators have performed conflicting memory configurations Controller or TISOFT has malfunctioned The box only allows one parameter to be a constant element type Use AUX 29 to determine the error This message indicates that the selected operation has completed successfully This message indicates a problem has occurred when you use AU X 84 EEPROM programming TISOFTMessages B19 Out of Memory The requested operation requires more RAM than is available Free up some RAM within conventional 640K base memory by unloading any device drivers or memory resident programs PLC Does Not This message indicates that the current controller configuration does not Recognize Hot Back Up support Hot Back Up HBU PLC Does Not Support The controller does not support the function that TISOFT tried to This Function execute PLC Is Busy Cannot Retry operation later Complete Requested Operation PLC Is Locked Use AUX 83 from the port that performed the lock to unlock all ports Invalid Operation PLC Memory This message is displayed during an AUX partial Save operation AU X Configuration Does Not 61 67 or during an AUX Verify operation AUX 17 when the memory Match configuration on the disk is different from the memory configuration in the controller Use the CONFME operation Online to copy the controller memory configuration to the disk press
334. o delete an entire comment and dear the display Confirm by answering YES or NO tothe prompt To save the comments press ENTER F8 before exiting the comment menu TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Documenting Programs 9 17 9 8 Importing and Exporting Synonyms and Comments Setup Procedure Importing and exporting of synonyms and comments is supported both online and offline The importing and exporting of synonyms and comments depends on the file data structure parameters defined in the following set up procedure The function keys and screens used to import and export synonyms and comments are very similar minor differences are noted in the text below Before you actually import or export synonyms or comments use the following procedure to set up the file data structure 1 Press DOCUM F4 2 Press COM F2 or SYN F3 3 Press SETUP F5 toinvoke the prompt line shown in Figure 9 14 DELIMITER lt TAB gt QUOTES AROUND DATA NO EACH RECORD ENDS WITH CR LF YES EXIT F1 NO F2 YES F3 Figure 9 14 Set up Prompt Line Thefunction keys shown in Figure 9 14 are summarized as follows e EXIT F1 or Esc Press F 1 or Esc to return to the synonym or comment function key line e NO F2 Press F2to select NO on the prompt line No F2 only displays when the cursor is in the QUOTES AROUND DATA Or EACH RECORD ENDS WITH CR LF field e YES F3 Press F3 to select YES on the prompt line vES F3 only displays
335. o verify that the software has loaded correctly you can reboot or power cycle your PC to force the changes to take effect and then type ping with a valid host name or IP address as the argument If a valid response occurs the software has been installed successfully See your FTP software manual for more details After you install PC TCP Kernel on your PC you need to specify the path to the file where you will store your host table The host table is a file that you create to store IP addresses and logical names for the controllers that you want to use on your network Your FTP software package comes with a configuration utility that prompts you for the host table path To run the PC TCP configuration utility follow the procedure below 1 At the DOS prompt switch to the directory where your PC TCP files are stored For instance if you created a directory called PCTCP to hold the software you would type the following command cd petcp 2 Fromthe directory that holds your PC TCP files type the following command config This invokes the PC TCP Config utility 3 Atthe prompt Choose what you would like to configure from the list choose PC TCP Kernel The prompt Hosttable appears 4 Typethefull path to the host table file You can run the Config utility before you make the host table all you are doing is identifying the location where you plan to storethe file For instance if you are going to store your host table in a fil
336. od tue add Changing a Comment iusserit 1 Pend oe Resear BUR ER RUE cant Recovering and Rebuilding Comment Files sssssssssssseeeerree Preparing to Enter Synonyms and or Descriptors Selecting an Element 0 cect menn Using the Synonym Field to Select an Element Using the Pop up List to Selectan Element 60000 e eee SYNONYM Patrametels isses siege espe e deans nee Rat iR due Heda ER de dn ews Invoking the Synonym EditorMenu ssssssseeee eee eee ee Calling the Pop up Synonym Editor sisaria ieai tiea e Entering Synonyms and or Descriptors seseenn emn Keying iri SYNONYMS n sirat cer ewm db ee eR ER PRORA E TR ede i e i a Finding a Synonym cipe tc ede hme E Un C ud RH SAGE idc eek cR Pedic Changing a Synonym s sirce revesii io aea esee en Recovering and Rebuilding Synonym Files Ting Pliograms 42594 i eRlk eA YRETEXGERSGGERRR IDOCETRRERRRCEO CPRPTGGR GG E RN invoking the Title Editon iriodes iiei i tela rede e voee bee edo bd d bead Title Pata metets s coegi e ded Rode oe a acie gos o buone a nt dca e dig Enterng Title epe eer tigen fama tee ha ERR Eat Roe Feu kaa gs Adding Date and Version 23 2 4c64 Re RR Gein HEREE OR EXTR ERE KG e e SAVING THES iussus e ea t eve badd CURE ORC een PEU P RE aaah agate sheared Entering Comments in S Memory Programs Accessing Comment Display Comment Parametern 5 2 erc ete eres dade OR e Ra der d M Keying Ini C omtments ap oci ceo
337. of the TI SOFT operating software you selected from the list above followed by FMS e g T1505 FMS and press Return to invoke TISOFT Refer to Appendix J After you enter the TI SOFT operating software selection you wish to use the Start up Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 1 8 From the Start up Screen you can choose on line or off line operation color and programs You can also select HINTS F2 to display a list of useful key combinations for TI SOFT operations Refer to Chapter 2 for instructions on using these options Siemens TISOFT 2 PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE SIMATIC R 505 FAMILY RELEASE 6 3 ORDER NUMBER PC505 6263 SOFTWARE PART NUMBER 2587783 0032 Copyright C 1998 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc All Rights Reserved WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law PRESS ALT H FOR HELP ANYWHERE WITHIN TISOFT NETDATA EXIT F1 HINTS F2 ONLINE F4 COLOR F6 PGMS F7 OFFLINE F8 Figure 1 8 TISOFTStart up Screen TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Installing TISOFTRelease 6 3 1 11 Starting TISOFTin Windows If you have created a TISOFT shortcut icon as described on page 1 8 you can start TISOFT by double dicking on the icon TISOFT appears in a window
338. of your program from either Status or Chart mode but the controller must bein PROGRAM mode not RUN mode to execute this function If your controller supports more than one task you can select which tasks to execute during the single scan 10 2 Using Status Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 10 2 Accessing Status Functions Accessing Chart and Ladder Status Functions Accessing the List Display To access the menus for status complete the following steps from the Start up Screen l Press ONLINE F4 2 Select either STATUS F7 or CHART F8 Whether you select status or chart either of the function key menus that are then displayed enables you to toggle between Ladder Status and Chart Status with F8 Status is automatically updated in both the status and chart displays While status is on the message UPDATE IN PROGRESS is displayed Any error message you receive does not remain displayed but is replaced on the next update cyde At any point in status or chart functions that an entry of an element type is required you can access a display that gives you the valid entry types for that field Figure 10 1 shows theList nen you access from BLDCHT To invoke a display press Y or Shift STATUS CHART LOCATION STATUS LOCATION STATUS LOCATION STATUS LIST LOOP ALARM MISC LACK AACK DSP LADB AADB DSC LCFH ACFH DCP LCFL ACFL DCC LERR AERR TCP LHA AHA TCC LHHA AHHA J LPET
339. oint number This format takes two words 32 bits Recover recovers excess file space used by comments or synonyms by rebuilding the comment or synonym program files Enables renaming of program files Replaceinvokes global search and replace operation Required Application accesses a menu that allows viewing and defining applications 575 controller only Restores modules for the selected slave according to the COM PROFIBUS configuration including the image register types Restarts the Syntax Check operation Restarts print operation that has been suspended In an SF Subroutine causes execution to return to the program that invoked it In an SF Program it stops the program Deletes the selected directory if the directory is empty in PGMS function Returns integer nearest X in a math expression In ladder editor insert this key inserts a blank row at the block cursor shifting remaining rows down and extending vertical connections The down arrow does the same function Rese Coil used with Set Coil to reset a specified bit Set and Reset can flag transient conditions such as alarms or operate as a latched output Rese Coil Immediate used with Set Coil Immediate to reset a specified bit of an immediate coil The bit is then immediately updated Set Reset mmediate can flag transient conditions such as alarms or operate as a latched output In AUX 19 this key resets all peak values Return is a coil that ends ex
340. ol Relay or V Memory location and have your RLL program copy this location to the output point e RUN F4 places the controller in RUN mode beginning execution of the ladder program When you press F4 you may receive the message PROFIBUS DP IS STOPPED CONTINUE TO PLC RUN MODE Select either YES or NO e OPR ST F6 allows the changing of PROFIBUS DP communications mode OPERATE STOP e SYNTAX F8 runs a syntax check on ladder memory L memory TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions 11 25 Setting Contoller Operating Mode AUX 81 82 continued Changing Loop Mode To select loop operating mode position the cursor in the Loops field You then have the following options available PGM F2 places the loop card in PROGRAM mode and control blocks are neither running nor being queued for running NOTE Your loop card cannot bein PROGRAM mode while the discrete CPU isin RUN mode HALT F3 places the loop card in HOLD mode enabled control blocks are being queued to run but are not running Upon going to RUN mode execution resumes where it was halted RUN F4 places the loop card in the RUN mode enabled control blocks are being queued and are running When you press F4 you may receive the message PROFIBUS DP IS STOPPED CONTINUE TO PLC RUN MODE Select either YES or NO OPR ST F6 allows the changing of PROFIBUS DP communications mode OPERATE STOP SYNTAX F8 runs a syntax check on ladd
341. oller continued 6 Press UPDATE F8 to execute the U pdate function f you are prompted to supply an I O address you have two choices Typein a starting I O address for the module in question and then press CONT F6 to write the address immediately to both the controller and the selected program on disk or else press ABORT F1 to terminate the configuration session See Figure 6 7 Result When you finish updating your I O you are automatically returned to the PROFIBUS DP Slave Configuration screen STOP 545 NETDATA PG ABORT F1 CONT F6 Figure 6 7 PROHBUS DP Update Function Key Line 7 Press EXIT F1 to go back tothe PROFIBUS DP Slave Status screen 8 If necessary press OPR ST F7 to toggle PROFIBUS DP mode back to OPERATE Result When you set the PROFIBUS DP tothe OPERATE mode indicators on your slave devices should show that I O is active You are now ready to exit the PROFIBUS DP Slave Status screen and run your program 6 10 Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 6 5 Modifying an Existing I O Configuration I O Configuration Guidelines Adding or Deleting Slaves Modifying an I O Address or Enable Disable Status Before entering your I O configuration be aware of the following restrictions e For bit or bit and word modules but not for word only modules the number for the I O address must begin on an eight point boundary An eight point boundary is n 8 1 for example 1
342. oller to transition to the program mode freezing both discrete and word outputs at their current status This could cause failure of the process that could result in death or serious injury and or damage to equipment Avoid doing run time edits if you can If you cannot avoid doing a run time edit then ensure that you have read and fully understood the Doing Run Time Program Edits section in the Programming Concepts chapier of the SIMATIC 545 555 575 Programming Reference Manual and that your edits conform to the requirements of that section XXX Preface TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Additional Information Software Compatbility Related Manuals Technical Assistance TISOFT is a DOS program and runs best in a DOS operating system You may experience problems communicating with the controller when you are running TISOFT in a Windows 95 environment If this happens restart your computer in MS DOS mode for all on line TI SOFT operations Refer tothe following manuals as needed for additional information e SIMATIC 545 555 575 System Manual PPX 505 8201 x for hardware system information on current model controllers e SIMATIC 545 555 575 Programming Reference Manual PPX 505 8204 x for programming information on current model controllers e SIMATIC TI505 Programming Reference User Manual PPX 505 8104 x for programming information on earlier model controllers e SIMATIC S5 ET 200 Distributed I O Sys
343. ollow the steps below 1 Keyin TIDIAL 2 Press Return The screen displays detailed instructions on how to use TIDIAL NOTE TIDIAL will not work when your computer is running Windows 95 To use TI DIAL restart your computer in MS DOS mode the Shut Down dialog from the Windows 95 Start menu provides this option Seting Modem The modem parameters must be set to exactly the same communication Parameters parameters that you will use Use the following modem parameters eight bits no parity one stop bit and the highest baud rate that your equipment will support e When you execute TIDIAL it sends the following default setup string to the modem AT X1 El V1 QO e If these are not correct for your modem then you can change them by using the SET command at the DOS prompt For example SET M CONFIG AT amp DO amp E14 amp E3 If you want you can also put this command in the AUTOEXEC BAT file of your computer NOTE It is strongly recommended that you use exactly the same type of modem at each end of the phone line F 2 TISOFT with Modem TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual G 1 G 2 G 3 Appendix G TISO FT with H1 Communications Hardware and Software Requirements sssssssnsennnsnnnsnnnnsnnnnsnnnnnnnn Steps for Installing and Configuring the CP1413 Module ires Step 1 Selectthe I O Address sssusa nrnna cece een Sep 2 Set UMPCS es trot sae cos Rope he eoe e ca eoe c e adea fe eee
344. ommunicate on an H 1 network follow e SINEC Communications Interface Module CP 1413 for use in personal computers part number 6GK 1 141 3AE 01 e Personal Computer with at least a 386 microprocessor As well as the memory requirements and disk space required for direct connect TISOFT as identified in Section 1 1 the personal computer must also have an additional 40K bytes of available memory and an additional 5 megabytes of free hard disk space MS DOS 6 0 or later e DOS driver for SINEC communications module CP 1413 e Planning tool for creating the local database SINEC COML 1413 TF software e Knowledge of the H1 partner device that you want to communicate with the Series 505 controller with 505 CP 1434TF configurator software e Series 505 controller with base and power supply e 505H1 Communication Module 505 CP1434TF Rel 2 0 or greater with DOS or Windows configurator Windows 95 is not supported e Windows 3 1 for running COML 1413 TF and Windows version of the 505 CP 1434TF Configurator or you can use a text editor to modify COML 1413 TF parameters and the DOS version of the configurator NOTE The CP 1413 card is incompatible with a number of Compaq computer models Before you buy a personal computer ensure that it is compatible with the CP 1413 card Figure G 1 shows the hardware and software hierarchy Personal Computer H1 Configurator COML HSQET CP1434 1413 TF Software Layers H1TC
345. on display on off press Ctrl T Status Line Thefields on the status line at the bottom right of the display provide you Information with information as listed below e Controller type e Selected program on disk name e On line the third field shows PG ED or RN mode The absence of PG ED or RN indicates offline In the display shown above the status line shows that the controller is a 545 and the program name is LOADER Absence of PG RN or ED indicates that the programming device is offline 7 6 Using TISOFTfor Discrete Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual The keys listed in Table 7 1 enable you to move through the program display These keys are also available in other areas of TISOFT such as block ladder status status edit and replace unless they were previously defined for another function Table 7 1 Cursorand Editing Keys Key Function HOME M oves cursor to the upper left contact in the current rung END Moves the cursor to the first output coil in the rung Up Down Arrows Moves cursor up down one row Right Left Arrows Moves cursor right left one element PgUp PgDn Scrolls up down one full screen in ladder display Ctrl Right Arrow Scrolls the ladders left by the number of complete columns which are currently displayed on the screen Page Right Ctrl Left Arrow Scrolls the ladders right by the number of complete columns which are currently displayed on
346. onment TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Selecting a To select an existing directory follow these steps Directory 1 Press DIR F5 from the Program Selection screen 2 Movethe field cursor in the DIRECTORY sub window with the up down arrows to select the directory you want 3 Press SELECT F8 or Return The new current directory appears in the PATH line and the sub windows are updated to reflect the contents if any of the selected directory 4 Press EXIT F1 or esc to get back to the Program Selection screen Formatting a To format a floppy disk follow these steps Hoppy Disk NOTE Formatting totally erases any data on a disk l Press DIR F5 from the Program Selection screen 2 Select the appropriate drive in the DIRECTORY sub window 3 Press FORMAT F4 and follow the directions shown on the screen 4 Press EXIT F1 or Esc to get back to the Program Selection screen Creating a New To create a new program name to contain a new program follow these steps Program Name l Select the directory path wherethe new program is to reside See Selecting a Directory 2 Press FLDTGL F6 to move the field cursor to the FILENAME prompt 3 Typethe new program name 4 Press SELECT F8 or Return The program function is exited and the new program name appears on the lower right status line 5 When you access TISOFT on line or off lineto enter or edit a new program it is saved under the new pro
347. onnect Your PC to the Ethemet ssssesse Hn Install PC TCP KemelorOnNetKemel ssse n teen ete teens Verify the Installation Optional 0 0 cc cece HH Specify a Path to the Host Table File pocco tigo ena a a Build Host Ta Dle File 4 dn eee ere tle ect ce wa aac y wea ed ha Reda baies Using TISOFTwith TCP IP seseeeeeernnmH mmmm mmm mr Starting TISOFTusing TCP IP Communications 0 ccc cece cece ne MOUDIESHOOUNG oen rex eee chs pen E ONDE SERE RM ERR iC fca TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISO FT with TCP IP F1 1 1 Overview To establish TCP IP communications you must perform the following tasks Install the PPX 505 CP2572 module in a Series 505 base Configure the module assign IP addresses using one of two methods e Autostart PLC Start Power cycle the module to force configuration to take effect Physically connect with cable the module to the Ethernet y Physically connect with cable your PC to the Ethernet Install PC TCP Kernel or OnNet16 Kernel software on your PC Specify a path to the Host Table that will hold the IP address and corresponding host name for the controllers you want to use on your network Use a text editor on your PC to build a Host Table in the file specified above Install TISOFT2 Release 6 1 or higher on your PC Invoke the TCTCP task code driver Invoke TISOFT with TCP communications Select the desi
348. ons from Ladder Display Accessing Ladder Display Block FUNCTIONS 0 cece eee nnn Invoking a Block Operation 0 cca Contents Making Entries to Block Menus from Ladder Display Bloc k Parameters 5n ete ard Ce ced Waa Fr ics orci ta c bi cede zen Entering Block Parameters cece ccc cee tet e Block Functionality in Memory seennn n mmm mmm BIOCK CODY 4 EE Block MOWVe tea eoe icta acie KO oe Phe Vs Wd ove ead s Block Delete 1 cpi cce ce E Chee wed ce Ret Ha E nae i a dac a a oed PECETMWMMERAMT S Memory COMMENS ae 252 ipeo aene x e pec nies echo esci fec dB a xt b RR ED de d Accessing Block Operations in Memory s seen nn n n n n n nn nn nnn Accessing SMemory BlockOperations 6600000 Designating BlocksIn S Memory sssssssseeeeee eae Making Entries to Block Menus in SMemory enn nnn Block Parameters cedes eee epe oboe duals Ohad E e do don aO e Ecdcg Entering Block Parameters seii Leser e te De ec CR eaten Chapter14 Printing Print Functions Available s nnnm ran Printing a Screen Display eseseesee nmm Entering Print Selections eseooesee ene nnnm Accessing Print Men s sisit sinsa baka eec e dnt aede hl eT de ede Ede aed Invoking Print Selection Menu Print Selection ODtlOnS iet Eppeatiheb WR Eee ed en PEL Fe FRE Persa die Entering Print Selections eee RR ERREUR YER Sa ELE DE e Co
349. ontains the user program files to be converted to Release 6 3 Usethe DOS Change Directory command for example cd c NUSER2 Type in TICON to invoke the File Conversion software Press Return The TISOFT Start up Screen is displayed At the prompt ENTER NEW PROGRAM NAME type in the new program name and the Destination Directory if you want the program in a different directory To place the program in the current directory enter only a program name You must spedify a unique program name Press Return The message READING DOCUMENTATION PROGRAM DATA is displayed whilethe user program source files are being read The message WRITING DOCUMENTATION PROGRAM DATA is displayed whilethe user program files are written to the destination directory When the conversion is complete with no errors the following message is displayed FILE CONVERSION COMPLETE C 2 Converting Program Files TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Conversion Use the following procedure to convert user programs from TISOFT Release Procedure for 4 x to Release 6 3 Release 4 x NOTE After you have converted a program to Release 5 0 or later it is no longer compatible with earlier releases 1 Change to the Source Directory that contains the user program files to be converted to Release 6 3 Use the DOS Change Directory command for example cd c NUSER2 2 Typein TICON toinvoke the File Conversion software 3 Press
350. ontinue On Error in a SFSUB box Can bean input designated by the letter X an output used as an input designated by the letter Y or a control relay used as an input designated by the letter C X Y or C can be passed as an argument parameter to an RLL subroutine designated by the letter B Bit of word contacts are also allowed Are part of the controller internal memory and do not exist as physical input or output devices Control relay contacts or coils are represented by the letter C Duplicates a TISOFT program selected block comment etc to a specified location Returns the cosine of X in a math expression Counter counts recurring events up to a preset value 1 32767 Counters selects CTR and UDC counter types Reads and shows the application I D of the selected program on disk Reads and shows the application ID assigned tothe currently connected CPU port Selects the current Status Chart to be displayed with ladders in status select Discrete Control Alarm Timer provides feedback on status of discrete control valve Drum Counter Current is the current step count for a drum Date Compare compares the current date with a stored date Drum Counter Preset is the starting value for the drum step count This is a two part element the first part is the drum number the second is the step number It is displayed in the format DCPxxxx yy for example DCP 1 1 Del Dad ete Character deletes the character at the cursor and
351. ontroller to the destination memory block in a selected program Block functions for S memory comments are available from the Ladder Display Block functions 13 6 Performing Block Data Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 13 6 Accessing Block Operations in S Memory Accessing Access block operations in S memory from either of the Directories Loop S Memory Block Analog Alarm or Special Function Programming Figure 13 2 shows the Operations block functions available after you press BLOCK F3 BLOCK From Loop Alarm or SF ABORT COPY MOVE DELETE PUT PUT Only PUT Only so sr PUT Only peor T T Dem om To Figure 13 2 S Memory Block Functions Designating Blocks When using block operations in S memory you designate a loop alarm or In S Memory SF Program Subroutine number rather than a memory address The prompts you receive request a number for the S memory types F or example you enter L oop1 Alarm1 or SFPGM1 instead of an address such as V356 J ust as with memory addresses however the first entry sets a range If you enter Loop 4 through Loop 8 for instance each of the loops you specified will be acted on according to the block operation you are using TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Performing Block Data Functions 13 7 13 7 Making Entries to Block Menus in S Memory Block Parameters After you select the desired block function a prompt such as that show
352. or elements Refer to Section 7 7 for details on using this function 7 8 Using TISOFT for Discrete Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Entering Contacts To enter or edit a contact follow these steps 1 Position the cursor where you want the contact to appear 2 Pressthe F2or F3 contact function key to place the contact on the rung After the contact appears the cursor highlights the element identifier field as shown in Figure 7 7 3 Typein the element identifier For a list of valid element types press or Shift 2 You can also use the hard keys for example X Y C to enter a normally open contact directly 4 Press Return to write the contact to the network The editing cursor moves to the next available position C000000001 HI Rung 1 after pressing F2 Type element identifier then press ENTER Figure 7 7 Entering Contacts Entering Relational To enter a relational contact position the cursor where you want the contact Contacts to appear and follow these steps l Press R I F7 A different set of function keys appears allowing you to select the type of relational contact you want 2 Pressthe appropriate function key Therelational contact appears on the rung with two parameter fields as shown in Figure 7 8 3 Usethearrow keys to move the cursor to each field induding the INT field which you can change to UINT unsign
353. or on the BOARD ADDRESS line and type the address of the 575 board that is to bethe destination of the port configuration data 4 For each of the other fields usethe arrow keys to move the cursor to the parameter values and press Return to select the value you want 5 Press WRITE F4 to write the port configuration to the controller NOTE If the port you are changing is the port TISOFT is connected to but the settings are not what TI SOFT uses when you press WRITE F4 the following prompt appears to confirm your action TISOFT MAY NOT WORK WITH THIS PORT CONFIGURATION CONTINUE f you press YES F2 to change the port configuration TISOFT may or may not continue to communicate with the controller Press NO F1 to abort the operation 6 Press EXIT F1 toreturn tothe Application ID Table screen Figure 2 7 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Setting up the TISOFTEnvironment 2 15 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 Chapter 3 TISO FT Basics TSOFI Functionality soe se os caine E REA RREAXREREREREREEXRIEERRE sects ssccesnsaees Programming and Utilities prase 0 eens 3 2 Diagnostics Memory and I O Configuration 0 0 00 3 2 TSOP MEUS a sissies Sie ra ep pe e en EROR e rbi d V DRE eu RO Reading TISOFTDisplays eere Re RR ERR RE Red Re GERE GER RR Eu Res 3 3 Accessing TlSOFTFunctions issssseesesenne nee nan Using the Ladder Display Menus sssssse en 3 4 Dipli y SZE P
354. ork The SIMATIC 505 CP5434 F MS Communications Processor module referred to hereafter as the FMS CP module provides the interface required for a SIMATIC 505 programmable logic controller system to communicate with other devices over a common PROFIBUS network To install the FMS CP modulein a SIMATIC 505 base follow the installation instructions in the SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS FMS Communication Processor 505 CP5434 F MS User Manual The FMS CP module must be configured with the COM 5434 Configurator software included with the module The COM 5434 Configurator software operates in Windows 95 or Windows NT only To install the software follow the installation instructions in the SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS FMS Communication Processor 505 CP5434 F MS User Manual Each FMS CP module in a 505 base must be configured to communicate over the PROFIBUS network The module local configuration for each FMS CP module identifies its station address and the network communication parameters it uses to operate on the network NOTE You must define the module local configuration for each FMS CP module using the RS 232 port with the standard TISOFT programming cable before you can communicate with it using the PROFIBUS FMS port Refer to the SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS FMS Communication Processor 505 CP5434 F MS User Manual for complete information on configuring the FMS CP module with the COM 5434 Configurator software NOTE Make sureto select the bus pa
355. ou do not repeat an Ethernet H1 network address on the same H1 network TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISO FT with H1 Communications G 5 Steps for Installing and Configuring the CP1413 Module continued Step 8 Install Software from Diskette Install the CP 1413 software from diskette by following the procedures in the Software Installation section of the SINEC TF N 1413 MS DOS Windows manual Only CA SINEC BIN CA SINEC COM and CA SINEC DATA subdirectories are required by TI SOFT Once you have installed the card run the INSTALL utility located on the first TF 1413 disk provided with your card This batch program loads all software onto your hard drive and then invokes NETINST EXE The NETINST utility generates a series of prompts that must be answered so that the CP 1413 card can be correctly configured Use the answers you chose from the steps above to respond to the prompts The following is a list of selections that work for many installations Description Which software to use Enter the driveto install to Installation mode Number of installed boards Which board to install Layer 2 communications Layer 4 communications Layer 7 communications Dual port RAM address Ethernet address AT bus interrupt Configuration register Local database Select Quit Select B Full set E Your local hard drive letter Detailed mode New installation CP 1413 YES YES YES ODOOO00H 64K 4 from Step 6 08
356. ou return to the previous screen and the element type Y xxx is displayed in the SYNONYM field SeeFigure 9 6 3 Typein the identifier for the element for example type in 450 in the SYNONYM field 4 Press Return to go to the Synonym Editor M enu Figure 9 8 Your Document Title LIST ELEMENT COIL END ENDC GTS JMP JMPE LBL MCR MCRE SBR SKP MORE DATE VERSION 545 LOADER EXIT F1 HELP F4 SELECT F8 Figure 9 7 Synonym Pop up Element List Synonym Synonyms can be up to 3 lines in length with up to 11 characters per line Parameters Descriptors can be up to 3 lines long with up to 48 characters per line 9 10 Documenting Programs TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Invoking the Synonym Editor Menu Calling the Pop up Synonym Editor After you select the element for synonyms and descriptors the Synonym Editor Menu Figure 9 8 displays with function keys available for editing The element you selected and up to four locations following it are displayed ELEMENT SYNONYM DESCRIPTOR Y450 545 LOADER1 EXIT F1 DELLN F4 INSLN F5 FIND F6 DELETE F7 DESCR F8 Figure 9 8 Synonym Editor Menu You also havethe option of entering synonyms and descriptors through the pop up synonym editor which is accessible at most locations in your program This allows you the option of entering a synonym or descriptor at the point you are entering or editing your p
357. our PC at Your PC this time After you reboot your PC the AUTOEXEC BAT changes and CONFIG SYS changes that you just made will be used Step 14 Install H1 Install H1 cabling Three example installations are shown in Figure G 6 Cabling through Figure G 8 Figure G 6 shows a PC with a CP1413 module installed and up to seven Series 505 systems Each system is shown with a CP1434TF module cabled to the H1 network by a multi port transceiver If no external network exists then the multi port transceiver operates in loopback mode Multiport Transceiver SSV104 110 VAC PPX 6GK1 104 0AA00 Loopback mode 12 345678 AUI Drop D 6ES5727 1 xxx ji Personal Computer 3 Series 505 up to 7 with H1 Configurator E Programmable Controllers Software and AUI Drop 6ES5727 1xxxx with SINEC H1 CP Module CP1413 Module and 505 CP1434TF TISOFT LJ SINEC Hcp Figure G 6 Multi Port Tansceiver Cabling Using a self powered multi port transceiver configuration gives you the option to lower the power requirement from the base Refer to the SIMATIC 505 SINEC H1 Communication Processor Manual G 16 TISOFTwith H1 Communi
358. our table will not execute The THRU field does not display the ending entry for the search range if it is less than or equal to the identifier in the REPLACE field Entries tothe THRU field require the identifier only not the element type The element type is entered for the REPLACE and WITH fields Norange check is performed for the entries you make in either the REPLACE or THRU field Range checking is performed however on the entries you makein the WITH field In SF Programs Subroutines and SF Subroutine boxes loop and alarm variables can be referenced however loop and alarm variables cannot be listed individually on the search and replace table You can only replace a reference to one loop or alarm with another not the individual variables To make entries for a reference to loop or alarm use the format LVxx or AV xx where xx is the loop or alarm number A specific loop or alarm variable such as ASPxx or LPVxx is not accepted as a valid entry On entries for DCP of drums enter DCP then drum number Press then enter the step number if you want to change from the default of step r The THRU field entry is a step number the range for DCP is the steps of one drum only When replacing bit of word elements only the main identifier is changed The bit identifier is not changed Bit of word elements cannot be entered into the table or at the prompt line TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using Global Search and Replac
359. ow keys If you want the rungs displayed sequentially press NEXT F3 in each rung field after keying in the first address f you do not enter any addresses in the Selection Table the screen displays sequential rungs beginning with the cursor position With the cursor on the Chart field press SELCHT F4 to enter the filename of the chart to be loaded Or to usethe current chart already in RAM press CURRNT F3 Type in the number of lines 1 to 13 to be displayed from the chart you selected This number has no effect if there is no chart selected Press ENTER F8 to display your selection TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using StatusFunctions 10 21 Displaying both Ladders and Chart continued Saving a Selection Table Loading a Selection Table Use the up down arrow keys to scroll through the selected networks To return the ladders to a sequential display press PgUp or PgDn If you select a chart to be displayed with the ladders the chart remains until you exit the select function by pressing EXIT F1 or you exit the Status function Note in the sample entries to the Selection Table that the rungs you enter do not have to be sequential You can select any seven rungs in your ladder program for displaying You can also select rungs for display without displaying a chart To save a selection table complete the steps below from the Select Display 1 Press WRTBL F7 to write the table to disk You now have access to the Progr
360. p soak steps otherwise you cannot access the Ramp Soak Table Be sure that you have entered YES in the RAMP SOAK FOR SP field of the loop programming table for which you are creating ramp soak steps If you do not the Ramp Soak Table will not be executed in the controller TI SOFT will give a message to remind you that the field is not set 1 Select either ONLINE F4 or OFFLINE F8 2 When the Ladder Display screen appears press SPACEBAR 3 Press LOOP F6 4 Typein the desired loop number at the prompt or move the cursor to select the loop you want 5 Press R S F6 PID LOOP 4 S MEMORY AVAILABLE 384 RAMP SOAK FLAG ADDRESS NONE STATUS SETPOINT RAMP RATE SOAK TIME DEADBAND STEP R S BIT UNITS UNITS MIN MIN UNITS ENABLED 565 NETDATA EXIT F1 EDIT F2 WRITE F4 EN DIS F8 Figure 8 5 Ramp Soak Table 8 10 Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Entering To enter a flag address for a ramp soak table press EDIT F2 Enter the Ramp Soak Hag memory type of the flag access the pop up list by pressing CJ or Shift 2 Address or type the memory type then type in the identifier and press ENTER F8 f you do not wish to program an R S flag typein NONE at the address field Making Entries to To program a Ramp Soak Table complete the following steps Usethe arrow Ramp Soak Table keys or Return to move the cursor from field to field within a step U se DELLN F
361. passwords and you enter a password only for the selected program on disk at the on line prompt you will not be able to use the AUX 60 Save All and AUX 90 Load All functions You will have partial to full access to the controller depending on the controller access level You will also have full access to the selected program on disk Mode 8 _ If both the controller and the selected program on disk have passwords and you enter a password for the controller at the on line prompt you will not be allowed to use the AUX 60 Save All function You will however be able to use the AU X 90 Load All function AUX 90 will write the selected program on disk password to the controller and enable the password in the controller You will also have full access to the controller Some reads and no writes will be allowed to the selected program on disk Mode 9 If both the controller and the selected program on disk have passwords and you do not enter a password for either the controller or the selected program on disk at the on line prompt you will not be able to use either the AUX 60 Save All or the AUX 90 Load All functions You will however have partial to full access to the controller depending on the controller access level Some reads and no writes will be allowed to the selected program on disk TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using Password H 7 On Line Password Operations continued Table H 1 On Line Password Operations
362. pears CHANGE ENABLE DISABLE STATUS After responding NO F1 or YES F2 ENABLED Or DISABLED displays in the upper left corner NOTE Base 0 cannot be disabled 520 520C 530 530C and 525 are 8 slot programmable controllers Off line After completing entries for a base press WRITRM F4 to savethe configuration to RAM The configuration is also saved on disk On line After completing entries for a base press WRITDK F4 to write the configuration to disk Press WRITPC F6 to write the configuration to the controller A WARNING WRITPC takes effect immediately If you are modifying an existing configuration your process will be affected Unexpected process operation can cause death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Plan for the effect on your process before you execute WRITPC 5 8 Configuring Series 505 I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 5 3 Changing I O Configuration Clearing a Base Complete the following steps to clear an I O display on or off line I O Display 1 Start from the Base I O Configuration screen See Figure 5 2 or Figure 5 4 2 Typein the desired channel number at the cHANNEL field at the top of the screen 3 Typein the desired base number at the BASE field at the top of the screen 4 Press CLRBS F8 Clearing a Base To clear the configuration from the controller or the selected program on I O Configuration disk complete the following steps On Line 1
363. port export synonym text data PROFIBUS DP binary export data TISOFT Program Files and Properties K 3 K 2 Windows 95 Properties Setup for TISOFT The following list shows the Windows 95 properties for TISOFT that may work for you Select the TISOFT shortcut icon click the right mouse button and select Properties as shown in Figure K 1 The list shows the settings for each tab in the dialog Many of the settings listed are the defaults Click the right Select A mouse button to TISOFT icon B S access the pop up TISO a a oa Object Edit Menu Send To Cut Copy Create Shortcut Delete Rename Select Properties Properties Figure K 1 Accessing TISOFT Properties Dialog Program TISOFT or other suitable name Cmd line C TI TI505 BAT P1 or wherever it is located Working CATI or wherever it is located Batch file blank Shortcut key None Run Normal window Close on exit checked Advanced button Prevent MS DOS based programs from detecting windows checked Suggest MS DOS mode as necessary checked MS DOS mode not checked see note bel ow Change I con button Filename CA TI TISOFT ICO or wherever it is located NOTE You may find that running TISOFT in MS DOS mode provides better performance in P C to controller communications Click on the Advanced button and check MS DOS mode The computer exits Windows and starts TISOFT in MS DOS mode You can also create an additional s
364. press WRITE F6 to enter the time slices To reset the display of peak times for the total scan and the discrete portion of the scan Press RSTPKS F7 To access AU X 16 to set the number of SF module task codes processed per Scan Press TSCAN F8 You receive the pop up display just as you do in accessing the operation from the Auxiliary Function menu Seethe section on AUX 16 for more details 11 20 Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 11 10 Performing I O Diagnostics AUX 21 AUX 25 Run Remote Base Diagnostics AUX 21 Use AUX 21 to run diagnostics on the I O bases To invoke the operation type in 21 at the AUX menu prompt and press Return This invokes the display shown in Figure 11 10 To run base diagnostics on one base complete the following steps 1 At the prompt type in the channel and base number desired 2 Press RUNDIA F8 3 Press YES F2 in response to the prompt DISABLE BASE AND CONTINUE DIAGNOSTICS CHECK Torun base diagnostics on all bases follow the steps below 1 Press RUNALL F5 to run diagnostics on all bases 2 Press YES F2 in response to the prompt DISABLE BASE AND CONTINUE DIAGNOSTICS CHECK REMOTE BASE CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL BASE MESSAGE 1 0 DIAGNOSTICS PASSED Could be blank or one of the following strings DUAL RBC DUAL POWER SUPPLY DUAL RBC DUAL POWER SUPPLY NO DUAL RBC FOUND CHANNEL 1 BASE 00 SSSSS
365. program on disk See Figure 6 11 PROFIBUS DP I O MODULE DEFINITION FOR SLAVE 15 1 0 NUMBER OF BIT AND WORD I O SLAVE IDENT MODULE ADDRESS X Y WX WY 15 BCDO 32 16 16 0 32 ENABLED 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 FROM RAM OPERATE 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 READRM F3 WRITRM F4 EN DIS F7 ft FROM RAM P OPERATE 545 NETDATA RESTOR F8 X lt gt WX F3 Y WY F4 CMPACT F5 UNIFY F6 Figure 6 11 Off Line PROHBUS DP Slave Edit Screen NOTE After you change the enable disable status or O address es of your slave s for the edit to take effect you must issue a write command You can write to the controller to the selected program on disk or to both on line Off line you can write only to RAM TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O 6 13 Modifying an Existing I O Configuration continued Table 6 2 describes the operations performed by the function keys available in PROFIBUS DP Slave Edit mode Function READDK F3 Table 6 2 PRORBUS DP Slave Edit Function Keys Reads a particular slave I O configuration from the selected program on disk On line only READRM F3 Reads a particular slave I O configuration from the selected program in the programming device RAM Off line only WRITDK F4 Writes the currently displayed slave I O configuration to the selected program on disk On line only WRITRM F4 Writes the currently displayed I O configu
366. protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law MHIU HIU 000 MAX SECONDARY ADDRESS nnn ABORT F1 ENTER F8 Figure E 2 UNILINK Host Adapter Configuration Screen TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISO FT with TIWAY E 5 EA Select Secondary with UNILINK Host Adapter or TIWAY Host Adapter Card When your programming device is connected through UNILINK Host Adapter or the TI WAY Host Adapter Card not configured as a Network Manager and you choose the on line option you will be prompted to enter the Secondary Address of the controller NOTE If your UNILINK Host Adapter or TI WAY Host Adapter Card is not confi gured you will be prompted first to select configuration parameters SeeFigure E 2 To changethe UNILINK Host Adapter configuration press CONFIG F2 for theUNILINK Host Adapter Configuration screen menu IftheUNILINK Host Adapter is not configured as a Network Manager 1 Typein the controller secondary address at the prompt as shown in Figure E 3 Your valid entries are from 1 to 254 Minimum value is 1 which is the default 2 Press ENTER F8 to complete the configuration Siemens TISOFT 2 PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE SIMATIC R 505 FAMILY RELEASE 6 3 ORDER NUMBER PC505 6263 SOFTWARE PART NUMBER 2587783
367. r Manual Menu Maps A 9 LOOP On and Off Line On Line Only EXIT SHOW BLOCK EN DIS PG RN ms ALARM SFPGM aje e Ig wje ew D I I I I eee I SS oe ee atl Vary with cursor position to display valid options Memory Editor Access V memory editor by pressing Ctrl V CTRL V CRTLK On and Off Line access K memory editor by pressing Ctrl K EXIT FIND I STRING SYNTGL FMTGL READ WRITE SPACEBAR 4 A 10 Menu Maps TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual PG RN PG RN EXIT PGMFRZ PGMOFF Rw omen SYNTAX OR Access available by pressing arrow keys only when S memory is configured EXIT PGM HALT RUN OPR ST SYNTAX OR EXIT UNLOCK LOCK OPR ST SYNTAX Operate Stop and Synchronous Asynchronous apply only to PROFIBUS DP I O communications ee oe e T PGMS ABORT COPY DELETE RENAME DIR FLDTGL EN SELECT EXIT MKDIR RMDIR Format FLDTGL MEM SELECT TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Menu Maps A 11 PRINT On and Off Line EXIT EXECUTE SETUP EE READDK WRITDK Not in Print Screen ABORT SUSPEND EXIT READDK WRITDK PRTCTL RDDATE ABORT PAGE RESUME QUIT EXIT DELETE INSERT 0 pr d SEND A 12 MenuMaps TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual REPLACE onja oma eme er T SF P
368. r Manual TISOFT Program Files and Properties K 1 K 1 TISOFT Program Files Table K 1 TISOFT Program Files Alphabetically Listed Alarm data 575 applications Bit of word synonym pointer for K memory Bit of word synonym pointer for TCP TCC Bit of word synonym pointer for V memory Bit of word synonym pointer for word I O Comment pointer for CR Comment pointer for bit 1 0 Comment pointer for J MP MCR SSI END SKP LBL GTS LBL Comment data K memory data Comment pointer for S memory LOP Loop data PFB PROFIBUS DP data PGM SF program data PRT Printer setup and selection data SCP Synonym pointer for CR SIP Synonym pointer for bit I O SJ P Synonym pointer for J MP M CR SSI EN D SK P LBL GTS LBL SKP Word synonym pointer for K memory STP Word synonym pointer for TCP TCC SUB SF subroutine data SVP Word synonym pointer for V memory SWP Word synonym pointer for word I O SYN Synonym data TTL Title data UMM U memory data VMM V memory data VP5 General disk information ladders memory and I O configuration Aux 17 I O value data scan time Table K 2 lists the same TISOFT files as Table K 1 grouped by function K 2 TISOFT Program Files and Properties TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Table K 2 TISOFTProgram Files Listed by Function Synonyms BKP BTP BVP BWP
369. r each field to select the desired option LADDERS PROG LOOPS PROG LOOP MODE LOCKED TO FOLLOW LADDER MODE When you position the cursor on the LADDER field your options arethen as follows With no S memory configured the LADDER field is the only option for changing program mode and no cursor is displayed e PGMFRZ F2 places the controller in PROGRAM FREEZE mode All outputs are frozen in their current states However intelligent I O modules still can update outputs When you press F2 you receive the message GO TO PROGRAM MODE WITHOUT CLEARING OUTPUTS Select YES or NO e PGMOFF F3 places the controller in PROGRAM OFF mode Discrete outputs are set to zero and all word outputs are frozen However intelligent I O modules still can update outputs When you press F3 you receive the message GO TO PROGRAM MODE Select YES or NO A WARNING Intelligent I O modules e g the 386 ATM module the Programmable BASIC module the Servo Axis module or the High Speed Pulse Input module can update outputs even when the controller is in PROGRAM mode if your code permits If an intelligent I O module writes directly to an image register point its write takes precedence even when PGMFRZ PGMOFF is in effect This could cause unexpected control action resulting in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Do not write directly to output image register points from an intelligent I O module Instead write to a Contr
370. r page it is a hard key Horizontal draws a horizontal line beginning at the position of the cursor A line cannot be drawn over a box It can however overwrite a contact Horizontal Del amp e deletes the line contact coil or box under the cursor in the ladder editor Is used in conjunction with ELSE ENDIF instructions to control conditional execution of SF statements If the conditional expression is true non 0 all SF statements between thelF and ELSE or ENDIF if no ELSE are executed Otherwise the statements between the ELSE and ENDIF are executed Integer IF same as IF for integer math in SF statements allows you to code IF THEN ELSE blocks using an integer expression for the conditional nteger expressions execute faster than equivalent floating point expressions Indexed Matrix Compare compares the bit pattern of a user specified step to the current state of up to 15 I O points Specify the step number index the instruction by loading a step number 1 16 into the location specified for PTR ThelMC compares a 15 bit mask pattern against the image register status of up to 15 discrete points Is a bit input or output element with X or Y Immediatel O Read Write reads or writes immediately to a block of discrete I O or to either a single point or blocks of word I O Integer Math is used to evaluate integer math expressions Selects the import of synonyms or comments In line Togglein SFPGM and SF SUB boxes sets the
371. r settings in the TISOFT Properties dialog refer to Section K 2 in Appendix K TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Installing TISO FT Release 6 3 1 9 15 Starting TISOFT Selecting TISOFT After TISOFT is installed you are ready to select the TISOFT operating Operating Software software you need The listing below defines the command options available Options TI505 selects main TISOFT operating software and proceeds to start up screen TIXREF selects print cross reference and proceeds to start up screen TICON selects and runs the file conversion program See Appendix C for details on this upgrade procedure TI505 CVU selects TISOFT onlineto TIWAY using the CVU Host Adapter Card See Appendix E for information on setting up TI WAY communications T1505 H1 selects TI SOFT online over an H1 Ethernet network using the SINEC H1 Communication Processor PPX 505 CP 1434TF See Appendix G for information on setting up H 1 communications TI505 TCP selects TISOFT online over an Ethernet network using TCP IP protocol and the PPX 505 CP2572 TCP I P module See Appendix for information on setting up TCP IP communications T1505 FMS selects TISOFT online over a PROFIBUS network using Fieldbus Message Specification FMS protocol and the CP5434 F MS module See Appendix J for information on FMS communications RO505 selects the read only version of TISOFT LO505 selects the load only version of TISOFT similar to the rea
372. r the Cannot Be before SFSUB box in RLL P1 P5 or the CALL P1 P5 PACKLOOP Another Parameter PARAMETERS or PACKAA PARAMETERS SF statements in an SF Program or Subroutine The parameter fields must be programmed in order For example this error message will be displayed if the P2 field is programmed while the P1 field has been left blank End of Memory This message indicates that the end of the valid memory range has been reached for example when you page up or down in RLL or V K memory editor Entry Required This message indicates that the SF statement just entered has a at This Field parameter field that has been left blank Type in a valid response for the field and enter the statement again Error Closing File This error should not occur except under extenuating circumstances TISOFT attempted to dose a file on the disk and failed The file may have been accidently deleted the disk drive may have been popped open or a disk hardware failure may have occurred Error Compiling aaannn When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB a conditional block or the block INSTxxx Block bracketed by a LABEL GOTO pair is larger than 32K when compiled Exceeds 32K Error Compiling aaannn When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB SF compiled code exceeded INSTxxx CS Memory configured CS memory Overflow TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFTMessages B7 Error Compiling aaannn INSTxxx Duplicate Label Error Compiling aaannn INSTxxx Expression
373. racters 2 characters per word selected To display the characters in ASCII select ASCII format when building the chart for status displays See Chapter 10 for details on building displays in ASCII format STARTING ADDRESS V000000 NUMBER OF WORDS 16 SWAP BYTES NO CLEAR DATA NO 545 LOADER1 ABORT F1 ENTER F8 Figure 7 22 Sting Entry Fields TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Discrete Programming 7 23 7 13 Using Onscreen Cross Reference Accessing You can access a cross reference display at any network in your ladder Onscreen program either on or off line at the Ladder Display Select the rung to Cross Reference cross reference by positioning the cursor on the rung to be displayed Then press Ctrl X Figure 7 23 illustrates an on screen cross reference Up to five rows can be displayed X22 C61 p 0005 0 vi SFPGM6 RUNG CROSS REFERENCE aris 78 MCAT 971 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 Figure 7 23 Cross Reference Display Cross Reference The cross reference operates within the following parameters Parameters e Sorts display by element type and label e Displays a contact only once if used multiple times within a rung e Displays only elements that have cross reference information e Shows references for outputs in the rung used in any element e Shows references for inputs in the rung used as outputs or box paramete
374. ram changes Program Changes that have not been activated Perform a syntax check before going to before Selecting Run RUN mode If the program contains errors and you attempt to go to RUN mode without correcting those errors the controller automatically goes to Program mode and the process stops running B 20 TISOFTMessages TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Printer out of Paper Printing Suspended Printer Timeout Printing Suspended Program Load in Progress or Invalidated Program Selected RAM Segment Not Allocated Ramp Soak for SP Not Selected in Corresponding Loop Ramp Soak Step Type Mismatch RBC Swapped at Selected Base Read only Variable in Output Field Receive Error Rename across Drives Not Allowed Request Exceeds Available Memory Requested Configuration Smaller than Active Program Requested Data Not Found TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Add paper to the printer and continue the print operation The printer has stopped working for some reason Check the printer and the connections to it and continue the print operation A load operation has been started but for some reason has not been completed Reset the PLC and redo the last load operation A program on disk has been selected The name of the program has been updated in the lower right corner of the screen This is an internal TISOFT error and should not occur except under extenuating circumstances This message is displayed upon in
375. rameters the baud rate and the highest station address H SA that match those of all the other modules on the network Also be sureto select a unique station address for each FMS CP module on the network Once each FMS CP module has been configured to operate on the network connect each FMS CP station and the CP 5412 card in your PC tothe PROFIBUS network using the PROFIBUS cables and connectors described in theSIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS FMS Communication Processor 505 CP5434 F MS User Manual j 4 Using TISO FT with FMS TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual J 4 Building an FMS Node List Whatis a Node List Using a Text Editor to Create the Node List Change the Extension to FNL Each node list file that you create consists of the station address of each device on a PROFIBUS network and a namethat you want to associate with each station address as shown in the example in Figure 1 File Edit Search Help 1 Primer Station 1 Comment for Station 1 2 Primer Station 2 3 Undercoat Station Each name 4 Spray paint 1 amp 2 can be up to 5 Spray paint 3 amp 4 32 characters 6 Clearcoat Station 7 Finishing Use space or tab to add comments 13 Final Assembly Station 14 Inspection Station 15 Delivery Preparation Station Comments on new line must begin with pound i4 sign Y lt HZ Figure J 1 FMS Network Names Node List Example You can create a node list file for each network using an ASCII text editor
376. ration is invoked from the DOS Operating Cross Reference System prompt which is available just after installing TISOFT If you have already selected another TI SOFT operating software and want to return to select Print Cross Reference press the F1 Exit or Abort key until you have stepped back through all the menus After you have exited the TISOFT operating software type in TIXREF or TIXREF P2 Then select On line or Off line The menu shown in Figure 14 6 then appears for selecting the elements to cross reference You will not see the Loop Alarm and SF selections if S memory is not configured PRINT CROSS REFERENCE Y N FROM TO TITLE LADDER RANGE LOOP RANGE ALARM RANGE SF PROGRAM RANGE SF SUBROUTINE RANGE 000001 0012000 01 64 001 128 0001 1023 0001 1023 O ELEMENTS CONTROL RELAYS EXCLUDE CR V MEMORY K MEMORY RLL BOXES STATUS WORDS DRUM TIMER VARIABLES SF ERROR CODES LOOP ALARM VARIABLES WITH SYNONYMS 0001 1023 00001 1023 00000 00000 000001 005120 000000 000000 22222222222 zzzzzz 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 EXECUTE F2 SETUP F3 TITLE F4 READDK F5 WRITDK F6 Figure 14 6 Print Cross Reference Menu 14 8 Printing TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Completing Cross Reference Menu Setting up Print Parameters Exec uting the Printout To enter the desired options for cross reference use the arrow keys to position the cursor in the fields The Y N field is one character long I
377. ration to the selected program in the programming device RAM Off line only READPC F5 Reads a particular slave I O configuration from the controller On line only WRITPC F6 Writes the currently displayed I O configuration to the controller On line only EN DIS F7 X lt gt WX F3 Toggles the display of enable or disable status of a slave Toggles the image register type for the selected module between discrete and word inputs Y lt gt WY F4 Toggles the image register type for the selected module between discrete and word outputs CMPACT F5 Moves all discrete image register types to word image register types for every module of the selected slave It also unifies all the modules intothe first module Only the first address is retained UNIFY F6 Moves all modules for the selected slave into the first module Only the first address is retained RESTOR F8 614 Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O Restores modules for the selected slave according to the COM PROFIBUS configuration including the image register types Zero addresses are assumed for all but the first address which is kept TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 6 6 Reading an I O Configuration Displaying a In off line mode complete the following steps to display a PROFIBUS DP PROABUS DP Slave slave configuration from RAM Configuration from RAM 1 Press SPACEBAR and then CONFIO F3 The PROFIBUS DP Slave Status screen app
378. rd function REPLAC enables you to search for and replace single and multiple elements in a program BLDCHT allows you to build and save status charts off line WRITDK writes your program to disk under the selected program name Most of your off line programming is done in the programming device RAM until you save it by pressing WRITDK at the ladder display menu These functions are available only from the on line ladder display menu AUX or A enables access to controller auxiliary functions STATUS or S allows you to monitor the status of elements in ladder rungs CHART allows you to monitor and initialize selected I O values and variables in a table format You can also access the BLDCHT function on line through chart TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 35 TSOFTKeys Using Function Keys Using Hard Keys Initiating TISOFT Functions with Hard Keys TISOFT uses programming device function keys F1 to F8 toinitiate operations from the various menus When additional functions are available the plus sign appears in the lower right corner of the screen To access the additional functions press the spacebar Press the spacebar again to return tothe original group of functions You have quick access to many frequently used operations through keys on the programming device keyboard Table 3 1 provides a complete list of hard key equivalents You can also press HINTS F2 from the start up screen for a complete list of function
379. re trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Compaq is a registered trademark of Compaq Computer Corporation FTP PC TCP and OnNet are registered trademarks of FTP Software Inc QEMM is a registered trademark of Quarterdeck Office Systems
380. read Cursor Not When you attempt to see if an element is unique using the UNIQUE Positioned Properly operation in EDIT of ladder logic the cursor must be positioned over a valid element for example over an existing contact coil or box Move the cursor to the contact coil or box you wish to verify as unique B 4 TISOFT Messages TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Data File Not Found Data Not Inserted Data Not Written DEU Initialization Error DEU Not in Operate State DEU Online Error DEU Security Error DEU TIWAY Communication Error Diagnostics Failed upon Powerup Directory Is Not Empty Directory Not Initialized Disk Access Error Disk File Not Found Disk File Not Open Disk Full Disk Is Write Protected TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Make sure the directory containing the TISOFT operating software files is in the path Check that program memory size is not exceeded if so reconfigure to needed size Verify also that you are attempting to write to RAM not EPROM Check that program memory size is not exceeded if so reconfigure to needed size Verify also that you are attempting to write to RAM not EPROM Check TISTAR Model 20 or Model 70 cable connection Enter TISTAR Model 20 or Model 70 and change system to Operate State Start TISTAR Model 20 or Model 70 software before running TI SOFT Exit TISOFT and ge appropriate TISTAR Model 20 or Model 70 security privileges assigned In T
381. red network connection for this TISOFT session These tasks are described in more detail on the pages that follow r2 Using TISO FT with TCP IP TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 1 2 Setting Up the TC P IP Module Install the TC P IP To use TI SOFT over an Ethernet network with the TCP IP protocol you Module ona need to purchase and install the PPX 505 CP 2572 module in a Series 505 Series 505 Base base Refer to the SIMATIC 505 Ethernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP 2572 User Manual PPX 505 8132 x for instructions NOTE The CP2572 is a Special Function SF module If you have more than one SF module installed in a base you should set the PLC Task Codes per Scan AUX 16 to 8 to ensure maximum performance for data transfer between the CP 2572 and the controller Assign an IP There are two ways to configure the IP address for your PPX 505 CP 2572 Address to the module Each procedure has different advantages as outlined in Table l 1 Module Table I 1 Altematives for Loading IP Address Advantages Disadvantages Must reprogram EEPROM whenever CP2572 module is replaced Communications are functional any m time CPU GOOD LED is on A CP2572 module programmed in one application and Autostart installed in another would respond to the wrong IP address unless reprogrammed Can re use same ladder logic rogram for multiple controllers iud E Cannot swap CP2572 modules without reprogramming EEPROMs through serial port
382. remainder are stored in two memory locations C and C 1 The dividend and divisor values are not affected and retain their values in memory after the division is complete Document allows you to display and edit titles comments and synonyms Is a signed integer between 42147483647 and 2147483648 Entries outside this range default to either the upper or lower limit depending on the sign or This format takes two words 32 bits it is also called long Refers to drums and event drums Is a box that simulates operation of an electromechanical drum Drum Step Current identifies the current step of the drum Date Set sets the date portion of the real time dock to values contained in designated V memory locations Drum Step Preset is the starting drum step number Toggles enable disable of the current base when configuring I O it is a hard key Allows you to change ladder logic in ladder display In comment or title does not insert a new line after pressing Return Allows the changing of S memory data Also allows editing of a PROFIBUS DP 1 O configuration Event Drum simulates operation of an electromechanical drum The event drum provides up to 15 output coils and 16 steps that are indexed by a timer alone by an event contact alone or a combination of the two Each of the 15 output coils are available for use on each of the 16 steps Element accesses variable types for Find operation in SFPGMs and SFSUBs U
383. ress EXIT F1 toreturn to the main print display e Press READDK F2 to read the print set up information from disk e Press WRITDK F3 to write the print set up information to disk e Press PRTCTL F4 to edit and send control characters to your printer Entries must be in hexadecimal See your printer manual to determine the sequence numbers to use e Press RDDATE F5 to read date from the PC system clock and display it in the date field of the Print Setup menu for inclusion in the printout 14 6 Printing TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 14 5 Printing Extended Networks When you print a network that is larger than a single display the printout is formatted as shown in Figure 14 5 The columns of numbers above the elements designate the placement of synonyms in the printed copy Each printed line of the network ends with a letter of the alphabet to show continuation of the rung the next line of the network begins with that letter The top row of the network is indicated by two gt symbols and additional rows contain only the letter of the alphabet You can select a printout in this format for up to 132 columns 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789
384. ression Accesses the Task Codes Per Scan function in AUX 19 Time Set sets the time portion of the real time clock to the values contained in designated V memory locations Table to Word duplicates a specified word in a table to another word location Table Exclusive OR exclusively ORs the corresponding bits in a specified word and a word from a source table The resultant word is placed in a destination table In the ladder editor it is a hard key that draws a vertical line up from the top left edge of the cursor In SF U is a suffix that indicates a 16 bit unsigned word such as V23U 427U Memory type used for storing external subroutines in 545 555 and 575 controllers only Up Down Counter counts the number of events that have occurred up or down between 0 and 32767 A relational contact parameter indicating an unsigned integer compare U nforces All 1 0 elements Unddeerestores a deleted element at the current position of the cursor U nforce removes the forced condition from an element previously forced Moves all modules for the selected slave into the first module Initiates a search for a like element of a specified type A box that unlocks a previously set lock Allows the loop card operating mode to be set differently from the discrete CPU Converts engineering units into binary Updates the controller with the PROFIBUS DP I O configuration from the selected program on disk Designates variable memory in
385. ries 505 CPU Load bus parameters and slaves Toggle between operate and stop mode and between synchronous and asynchronous communications Enable or disable slaves The configuration tasks that you perform in TISOFT are described beginning with Section 6 3 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O 6 3 6 2 Configuring I O Modules in COM PRORBUS This section is not intended as a tutorial in COM PROFIBUS The SIMATIC ET 200 Distributed I O System M anual describes how to use COM PROFIBUS consult that manual for detailed information Also COM PROFIBUS has extensive context sensitive hel p Your objective in creating a configuration file with COM PROFIBUS is to define module types for each slave Once you accomplish that you can export the configuration file in binary form to TI SOFT where you assign starting I O addresses to each module Table 6 1 provides the information you need in order to configure your slave devices in COM PROFIBUS 64 Configuring PROFIBUS DP I O TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Table 6 1 Configuring Slaves in COM PROABUS Open a filein COM PROFIBUS You can modify an existing configuration file if appropriate or create a new file Select a master Required Choose the 505 CP5434 DP Select a host Required Choose the appropriate Series 505 CPU Optional You can accept the default settings unless you wish to modify one such as baud rate Assign slave s Requ
386. rmation Print current screen display Print programs or selected addresses Print element usage Print cross reference separate TI SOFT operating software Printin line cross reference Prints the information currently showing on the screen Provides hard copies of ladder programs including documentation cross reference O and variables Shows a listing of elements and indicates if used in the program Prints a cross reference of program elements that gives a list of usage locations for each element in the program Prints a cross reference listing of inputs and outputs with the rungs in which they appear TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 14 2 Printing a Screen Display To print the current display press the PRINT SCREEN or CNTL PRINT SCREEN key on the programming device keyboard Figure 14 1 shows the functions available after pressing PRINT SCREEN e Press SETUP F3 to make changes to the print setup parameters e Press EXECUTE F2 to initiate the printout of the display PRINT SCREEN 545 LOADER1 EXIT F1 EXECUTE F2 SETUP F3 Figure 14 1 PrintScreen Function Key Menu When you press EXECUTE F2 the display on the screen is sent to your printer or a file according to your print setup parameters If you need to change the print setup press SETUP F3 and make your changes before executing the printout TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Printing 14 3 14 3 Entering Print Selections Acc
387. rogram Your synonyms and descriptors are saved when you exit the display To access the pop up synonym editor press Cntl L Then at the SYNONYM prompt type in the element you want tied to a synonym or descriptor and press Return For example after you press Cntl L enter C25 at the prompt and press Retum you see a display similar to that shown in Figure 9 9 To select a bit of word element for a synonym type the word element followed by a period and the bit number for example V 100 9 You can also place the cursor on the element for which you want to create a synonym or descriptor and then press Cntl L This way the SYNONYM prompt will have your selected element displayed then press Return TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Documenting Programs 911 9 5 Entering Synonyms and or Desc riptors ELEMENT SYNONYM DESCRIPTOR C25 Control Relay 25 545 LOADER1 EXIT F1 DELLN F4 INSLN F5 FIND F6 DELETE F7 DESCR F8 Figure 9 9 Pop up Synonym Editor Keying in At the initial display the cursor is positioned for you to type in a synonym Synonyms Usethe alphanumeric keyboard on your programming device to type in the synonyms and descriptors The following keys are available for editing e Delete Press DEL to delete a single character Use with the cursor at the end of a line to delete the Return and append the following line by fillingtheline at the cursor position
388. rogram and SF Subroutine On Line Only EXIT EDIT HE FIND DELST INSST COMMNT DIS CP Access available in a pelore EXIT Lk FIND DELST INSST COMMNT DIS CP OR Access available in edit mode while editing ABORT ENTER OR ABORT DELLN INSLN EDIT ENTER COMPSE Ee FIND EXIT ENABLE DISABL NEN COMPIL NOCMPL TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual ABORT STMTNO INSTR ELEMNT MenuMaps A 13 p e rom e sm Te SPACEBAR COMTGL SYNTGL EXIT CLEAR NEXT EE RDTBL WRTBL ENTER OR r Accessed by EXIT CLEAR CURRNT SELCHT RDTBL WRTBL ENTER Arrow Keys L OR r EXIT RDTBL WRTBL ENTER L CHGVAL On Line Only EXIT READ SEEK FORCE UNFORC una WRITE SPACEBAR 4 A 14 Menu Maps TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Print Cross Reference NT Operating Software On and Off Line EXIT EXECUTE SETUP TITLE READDK WRITDK ABORT SUSPEND EXIT READDK WRITDK PRTCTL RDDATE ABORT PAGE RESUME QUIT EXIT DELETE sent SEND TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Menu Maps A 15 Appendix B TISOFT Messages This appendix contains a listing of programming error messages that may be displayed on the TISOFT screen when you attempt various functions The messages are a
389. rogram source e Select RAM as the program source NOTE Certain controller models support EPROMs as well as EEPROMs other controllers have on board flash EPROMs Refer to the hardware system manual or the release notes for your particular controller for specific information on memory storage media From the AU X menu complete the following steps to select either EEPROM or controller RAM as your program source l Typein 84 2 Press Return 3 Press SRCTGL F2 to select either EEPROM or RAM From the AU X menu complete the following steps to copy the controller RAM data tothe EEPROM 1 Typein 84 2 Press Return 3 Ifthe prompt line reads PROGRAM SOURCE EEPROM press SRCTGL F2 to select RAM 4 Press COPY F3 You receive the message COPY RAM TO EEPROM 5 Press YES F2 to execute the copy or NO F1 to abort TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions 11 29 Programming EEPROMs AUX 84 continued Copying from To copy an EEPROM tocontroller RAM complete the following steps from EEPROM to RAM the AUX menu 1 Typein 84 2 Press Return 3 Ifthe prompt line reads PROGRAM SOURCE RAM press SRCTGL F2 to select EEPROM 4 Press COPY F3 You receive the message COPY EEPROM TO RAM 5 Press YES F2 to execute the copy or NO F1 to abort Erasing an EEPROM Toerase an EEPROM complete the following steps from the AU X menu l Typein 84
390. rs Reading the The elements cross referenced are displayed in a pop up window Use the Display arrow keys to scroll through the listing The listing displays only the first three usage addresses per element and a plus if used more times 7 24 Using TISOFT for Discrete Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 7 14 Zoom If your controller has S memory you can use zoom to display and or edit SF programs or subroutines To do this place the cursor on the SF PGM or SF SUB box in ladders Press Ctrl O To return to the ladder display press EXIT F1 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Discrete Programming 7 25 7 15 Creating Keystroke Macros You have the option of recording keystrokes for replaying or writing to a file for later use Use the keys described in Table 7 3 to perform the record play macro functions Press the Alt key and the letter key R S P L O or W simultaneously Table 7 3 Keystioke Macros Key Sequence Action Alt R Records keystrokes until ALT S is pressed Alt S Stops recording of the keystrokes Alt P Plays the recorded keystrokes Press any key to stop replay at end of current cycle Press ESC to abort playback Alt L Initiates continuous replay of recorded macros Press any key to stop the replay Press ESC to abort playback Alt W Writes the recorded keystroke macros to the filename you specify Alt O Reads a recorded keystroke macro from a file
391. rsor positioned automatically at a new line use compose mode DELETE F7 Press F 7 to delete an entire comment and clear the display After keying in your comment use the down arrow key to position the cursor at the PAGING field Press ODD F1 to have the comment and rung appear on separate pages when printed ODD causes the page to feed to the top of the next odd page before the comment has printed Press BEFORE F2 to have the comment and rung appear on separate pages when printed BEF ORE causes the page to feed to the top of the next page before printing the comment Press NONE F3 to have the comment and rung print without pagebreaks To save the comments press ENTER F8 before exiting the Comment E ditor Menu TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Documenting Programs 9 7 Entering Comments continued Finding a Comment Changing a Comment Recovering and Rebuilding Comment Files After entering a comment you may want to edit it later When you do follow the same procedure to find the comment as you used at entry 1 Press DOCUM FA 2 Press COM F2 3 At the prompt type in the element and identifier to be located as C123 Y 256 etc 4 Press Return After you display the comment the edit function keys are available Use the arrow keys to position the cursor at the point you are changing Then insert or delete text as desired The Recover function RECOVR F8 recovers space used by com
392. rted opcode in internal request block 4 CP5412 A2 has no configured address or its database resources depleted 6 Connection reference value is invalid 7 Parameter in internal request block is not correct 8 Receive buffer supplied by user is too small for task code response 10 User data length exceeds the maximum permitted size 11 Passive connection establishment error 12 Attempted to send expedited data 14 505 CP5434 F MS aborted the connection establishment 16 The addressed 505 CP5434 F MS not yet connected to the network 18 Invalid conn_class in internal request block 20 Duplicate await_close_req 22 505 CP5434 F MS aborted the connection establishment 24 Improper connection negotiation by CP5412 A2 26 Invalid local or remote address or TSAP 28 Not used in current revision 29 Invalid protocol response received 30 Not used in current revision 32 Not used in current revision 4660 Communication with CP5412 A2 lost attempting to re establish These errors should not occur and may be an indication of a factory repair problem j 8 Using TISO FT with FMS TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Appendix K TISOFT Program Files and Properties Kl TISOFT Program FileS ccccccec cence eee e scene eee nnnm orn rra K 2 K2 Windows 95 Properties Setup for TISOFT ccceee eee eee e eee nnnm nnnm TISOFT Release 6 3 Use
393. s 9 2 Documenting Programs TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Accessing From the TISOFT start up screen press the keys as listed below to invoke Documentation the Documentation M enu If you are already at the Ladder Display press Functions DOCUM F4 The function key menu shown in Figure 9 1 invokes all documentation operations 1 Press either ONLINE F4 or OFFLINE F8 2 Press DOCUM F4 DATE VERSION EXIT F1 COM F2 SYN F3 TITLE F4 Figure 9 1 Documentation Menu 545 LOADER1 TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Documenting Programs 9 3 9 2 Preparing to Enter Comments Selecting an Element Using the Comment Field to Select an Hement To create comments after pressing DOCUM F4 press COM F2 to display the prompt line shown in Figure 9 2 You can select the element in one of the following two ways e Usethe comment field to enter an element e Or use the pop up list to select an element Details of the ways to select an element are shown in the next two sections To select an element by using the COMMENT field use the following procedure l Typeinthe element type at the COMMENT field For example type in Y SeeFigure 9 2 2 Typeintheidentifier at the COMMENT field For example type in 450 3 Press Return to go to the Comment Editor Menu Figure 9 4 Your Document Title DATE VERSION COMMENT Y000450 545 LOADER EXIT F1 IMPORT F2 EXPORT F3 SETUP F5 RECOVR F8
394. s Syntax Check is currently available only on 545 555 and 575 controllers To use AUX 22 enter 22 at the AUX menu prompt or highlight Syntax Check and press Return Syntax Check reports progress and lists any errors found See Figure 11 11 Up to 16 errors can be displayed on the Syntax Check screen if more than 16 errors are detected the prompt line announces ADDITIONAL ERRORS DETECTED To display the additional errors press MORE F2 If no errors are detected Syntax Check reports PASSED on the prompt line SYNTAX CHECK LABEL ADDRESS MESSAGE 894 WARNING INSTRUCTION WILL NOT BE EXECUTED FAILED PLC MAY NOT GO TO RUN MODE 545 LOADER1 RN EXIT F1 RESTRT F8 Figure 11 11 Syntax Check Screen Pressing EXIT F1 at any time during Syntax Check aborts the check and returns to the AU X function menu Pressing RESTRT F8 restarts the Syntax Check from the beginning TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions 11 23 11 12 Converting S Record Format to Binary AUX 40 Converting Files to Use AUX 40 to convert your externally created programming files to binary Binary format for loading into U memory Using AUX 40 Type in 40 at the AU X menu prompt You receivetheFile Selection Display as shown in Figure 11 12 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS 3 TISOFT FILE SELECTION DIAGNOSTI SAVEPLC PATH CATI LOAD PLC CLEAR PLC S RECORD FILES
395. s 8 6 ramp soak operations 8 10 special function accessing special functions entering Index 1 B d exporting from COM PROFIBUS Block functions accessing block operations from ladder display 1 2 accessing S memor block copy 13 3 13 6 13 6 133 Box instructions entering C Cable eira modem pinouts F 1HF 2 requi wile era Charts See Status chart Coils enteri ng 7 10 Color accessing 2 2 configuring 2 242 3 TISOFT colors COM PROFIBUS with TISOFT binary file configuring Slaves 6 4 overview 633 COM 5434 Configurator software installing 4 Comment field 9 4 Comment pop up element list 9 5 Comments accessing in S memory 9 16 adding paging instructions 9 7 changing 9 8 creating at program entr batch 8 26 displaying in status entering in S memory 9 16 finding 9 8 Index 2 in global search and replace invoking screen batch 8 26 invoking screen ladders 7 18 keying in parameters in S memory 9 16 saving 9 7 9 17 Compiling SF Programs Subroutines 8 31 Configuration 1 0 adding a slave 6 11 5 9 5 10 clearing a base 5 9 comparing controller and base 5 13 controller functionalit deleting a channel 5 11 deleting a slave displaying base from disk and controller 5 4 displaying base from RAM 5 2 displaying slave from disk and controller 6 17 displaying slave from RAM 6 15 displaying synonyms PROFIBUS DP Ser
396. s and SF programs subroutines Chapter 4 provides details on configuring memory Using TISOFTMenus Display and edit loops analog alarms and special function programs or subroutines with the S memory menus which are grouped for access by type of operation Each operation has a separate directory e g loops alarms and special function programs subroutines Figure 8 1 illustrates the key sequence to reach the S memory directories Lewes Teu eros prae EXIT EDIT FIND DOCUM BLOCK STATUS CHART SPACEBAR EXIT EDIT FIND DOCUM BLOCK REPLAC BLDCHT WRITDK SPACEBAR 4 rer eec rers oo Tuner Figure 8 1 Menu Chartto S Memory Functions S Memory Contol S memory is accessed through control blocks specific loop alarm or SF Blocks numbers rather than memory addresses For example use Loop 1 2 etc or alarm 6 7 etc when you are making entries at S memory prompts 8 2 Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 8 2 Using S Memory Directories Directory Each S memory directory displays the number and title of programmed Information entries bytes of S memory available and whether the control block is enabled or disabled The function key menus provide access to the S memory programming and editing functions Figure 8 2 shows a Loop Directory Figure 8 3 shows an SF Program Subroutine Directory PID LOOP DIRECTORY S MEMORY AVAILABLE 384 ENABLE
397. s and enhancements described in the following pages TISOFT now allows you to program over a PROFIBUS network using Fieldbus Message Specification FMS network protocol communications TISOFT can display multiple lists of network nodes you create to select the station you want to program Each list consists of a network station address and a name that you choose to associate with each station address See Appendix J for details TISOFT now supports PowerMath on SIMATIC 555 and 575 CPUs that are equipped with this feature PowerMath provides new floating point math functions and compiled Special Function execution Compiled SF execution translates the SF program or subroutine to the native instruction set of the CPU s microprocessor The compiled code is then executed on the 68882 floating point math coprocessor whenever the SF program or subroutine is scheduled for execution making execution several times faster PowerM ath includes the following features e New IN LINE attribute for SFPGM and SFSUB boxes An SFPGM or SF SUB box instruction can be marked for in line execution if the SF program or subroutine has been compiled When power flow is on for an in line SFPGM or SFSUB box it executes immediately as part of the ladder scan The result of the box s execution is available to the next element of the current rung e New memory type allocation Compiled Special CS memory e Twoinstructions have been added to SF programs and SF
398. s in an SF Program Subroutine this message indicates that the specified SF instruction name is either invalid or not supported Press the Shift keys to display a screen listing valid SF instruction names for the current field The named TI STAR Model 20 or Model 70 secondary is unknown Verify that correct secondary name was entered or someone else may be connected to this secondary This message is displayed during AU X 82 Hot Back Up operations when a message received from the standby unit is unrecognized This message is displayed when you edit a LOOP ALARM or Ramp Soak step The specified parameter must be a positive value In a LOOP the SAMPLE RATE RESET TIME and DERIVATIVE GAIN LIMITING COEFFICIENT values must be greater than zero n an ALARM the SAMPLE RATE must be greater than zero The RAMP RATE of a Ramp step must be greater than zero And the SOAK TIME and DEADBAND values of a Soak step must be greater than zero This message is displayed when you edit an ALARM If the REMOTE SETPOINT field is a constant value and if CLAMP SETPOINT LIMITS have been specified enabled then the REMOTE SETPOINT value must be greater than or equal tothe CLAMP SETPOINT LOW and less than or equal tothe CLAMP SETPOINT HIGH TISOFTMessages B25 Value Written Values Must Be within PV Range Values Must Be within PV Span Variable Address Required Warning Instruction Will Not Be Executed Yellow Must Be Less than or
399. s the variable as an integer value Integer Only Variable as a Real Attempt to Divide by Check the parameters in your IMATH statements Zero Attempt to Execute L ead lag statement can only be invoked from a loop analog alarm or a Cyclic Statement in cyclic SFPGM Either remove the LEAD LAG statement or make the Non Cyclic SFPGM SFPGM cydic by entering C after the program type prompt in the SFPGM header TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFTMessages B1 Attempt to Modify Control Block Control Information Attempt to Write a Read Only Variable Attempted to Write to a Protected Variable Attempted Write Operation Did Not Verify Automatic Rung Insert Off Automatic Rung Insert On Base Not Configured on Channel Bit of Word Not Allowed Bit of Word Required Bottom of Screen Box Accesses Unconfigured CR Range Box Crosses Global Local CR Boundary Box Parameter Overflow at Address Box Writes to Multiple Memory Values Maximum Limit Exceeded Cannot Copy File to Itself B2 TISOFTMessages An invalid attempt was made to change control information of a loop alarm SF program or SF subroutine An attempt was made to edit the value of a read only variable via the CHGVAL operation under STATUS or CHART Cannot write to protected variables such as TCC and TCP until you unlock the CPU keylock Retry the operation Indicates that RUNG INSERT modeis inactive This is the default See a
400. sed in conjunction with IF IIF ENDIF instructions to control conditional executions of SF statements ELSE precedes the statements that are executed when the IF or IIF condition is false Sets a loop alarm SFPGM or SFSUB control block to be functional TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Glossary 5 END G END ENDC ENDIF EN DIS ENPSW ENTER ERASE ESC EXECUTE EXIT EXPORT EXP X FIND FIXED FLDTGL FLOOR X FMTGL FORCE FORMAT FRAC X FRS FTSR IN FTSR OUT FULL 6 Glossary Is a coil that unconditionally terminates the program memory scan and is also an end of R S marker It is a hard key on a PC that moves the cursor to the top of the output column of the current rung in RLL or moves the cursor tothe end of the line or page End Conditional is a coil that terminates the current memory scan and clears any active MCR and MP instructions when the input tothe ENDC is on Terminates an IF IIF or ELSE control structure Enableand Disable permit selection between functioning or inoperative S memory loop or alarm control blocks also can toggle selected base or slave enable disable status in the controller Enables Password Protection in the controller and the selected program on disk Is a hard or soft key that writes data or performs a particular function Is used with AUX 84 to erase the contents of the controller EEPROM Escape performs an exit or abort on a personal computer it is a hard key Begi
401. signing identifiers to your program elements use the TI SOFT Unique function Unique determines if an element already exists in your ladder program and if so gives you the location For example if a TIMER is needed for a new feature you can usethe Unique function to see if TMRnnnn is already used Sincea TMR is a global memory box TISOFT also checks to see if any TMR TMRF CTR UDC MCAT or DCAT has the same nnnn designator NOTE Unique checks only for occurrences of the designated element in L memory It does not search for an element in Loops Analog Alarms SFPGMs SFSUBs Intelligent I O or Operator Interface devices To access the Unique function complete the steps below from the edit function with your cursor positioned on the element you wish to check 1 Press SPACEBAR 2 Press UNIQUE F6 After the check is complete you receive one of the following messages about the element you selected ELEMENT NOT FOUND ELEMENT EXISTS ONLY AT CURRENT RUNG ELEMENT EXISTS AT RUNG NNNN where NNNN gives the ladder address of another rung containing the element Using TISOFTfor Discrete Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 7 9 Showing Element Usage Valid Bement To show if specific elements are used in your program you can build an Types element usage listing The following element types can be shown in the Ladder Element Usage Table X WX C K TC SHR OS Y WY V STW DRM MWT Creating an To create
402. sing Contoller Auxiliary Functions eesernn n nnn nnn Controller Auxiliary Functions sireni eiie kia Inns Accessing Auxiliary Functions Menu sssssssee eee eee 11 2 Powering up Restarting the Controller AUX 10 12 een nnn nn Powering up the Controller AUX 10 sssssssseee eet ee eee nnee Performing a Partial Restart AUX 11 cece n Performing a Complete Restart AUX 12 ccc n 11 3 Loading Program to Contoller AUX 43 90 99 enn nn nnn Loading Memory Types AUX 43 90 99 0 ccc cc ccc eee eee nnee Executing Program Loads 0 cece cece ene nes 11 4 Clearing Controller Memory AUX 13 31 37 41 74 77 enn nnn Clear PLC AUX 13 oet eret e peor HORRORE RA RU a uaa KE Ead d Clearing Memory Types AUX 31 37 41 74 77 sissssse nnes xii Contents 11 5 1L6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 11 14 Saving Controller Memory Data to Disk AUX 42 60 67 eer Saving Memory Types AUX 42 60 67 ssssssssee HH 11 9 Executing Program Sa Ves s cce cos ad creed Face qe PO e he Eee Pen ed Ra RR doce ded 11 9 Setting Time Functions AUX 14 16 18 sseeeeeerrn nnm n nnn Setting Watchdog Timer AUX 14 00 enel 11 10 Setting Task Codes Processed perScan AUX 16 cc cece eee eens 11 11 Reading Setting Controller Time Display AUX 18 000 11 12 Per
403. sing ENTER F8 The comment is tied to the loop alarm or SF Program Subroutine that you selected PAGING NONE DISABLED 565 NETDATA ABORT F1 DELLN F4 INSLN F5 EDIT F6 DELETE F7 ENTER F8 Figure 8 9 Comment Screen Fields Keying in When the comment display appears the loop number alarm number etc Comments you selected for comment appears at the top of the screen The cursor is positioned for you to begin typing in your comment Type in the comment and enter it by pressing ENTER F8 Documenting Your For detailed instructions on complete documentation of your program with Program comments synonyms and descriptors see Chapter 9 of this manual TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming 8 27 8 13 Setting Controller Operating Mode Changing Usethe PG RN function to change controller operating mode while you are Operating Mode working in S memory directories To invoke the operation press PG RN F5 When you have S memory configured you receive a display with three fields as shown in bold type below to change operating mode Usethe arrow keys to position the cursor in the desired field Function keys are available for each field to select the desired option LADDERS PROG LOOPS PROG LOOP MODE LOCKED TO FOLLOW LADDER MODE Changing Ladder When you position the cursor on the LADDERS field the following options Mode are available With no S memory configured the LADDERS field is the only option for chan
404. sing TISOFTfor Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual PID LOOP 64 TITLE POS NONE 1 00000 POS VEL PID ALGORITHM LOOP VFLAG ADDRESS SAMPLE RATE SECS NONE 0 00000 100 000 PROCESS VARIABLE ADDRESS PV RANGE LOW HIGH PV IS BIPOLAR NO SQUARE ROOT OF PV NO 20 OFFSET ON PV YES LOOP OUTPUT ADDRESS NONE OUTPUT IS BIPOLAR NO 20 OFFSET ON OUTPUT YES RAMP SOAK PROGRAMMED NO RAMP SOAK FOR SP NO S MEMORY AVAILABLE 384 EXIT F1 EDIT F2 ALARM DEADBAND MONITOR LOW LOW HI HI NO MONITOR LOW HIGH NO PV ALARMS LOW LOW 0 00000 LOW 0 00000 HIGH 100 000 HIGH HIGH 100 000 S MEMORY AVAILABLE 384 EXIT F1 X EDIT F2 REMOTE SETPOINT CLAMP SP LIMITS LOW HIGH NONE 0 00000 0 00000 LOOP GAIN RESET INTEGRAL TIME INF RATE DERIVATIVE TIME 0 00000 FREEZE BIAS NO 1 00000 DERIVATIVE GAIN LIMITING NO LIMITING COEFFICIENT 10 0000 NONE NONE SPECIAL CALCULATION ON SPECIAL FUNCTION LOCK SETPOINT NO LOCK AUTO MANUAL NO LOCK CASCADE NO ERROR OPERATION NONE REVERSE ACTING NO ENABLED 565 NETDATA COMMNT F7 EN DIS F8 Page Up MONITOR DEVIATION NO DEVIATION ALARM YELLOW 100 000 ORANGE 100 000 MONITOR RATE OF CHANGE NO RATE OF CHANGE ALARM 0 00000 MONITOR BROKEN XMITTER NO ENABLED 565 NETDATA COMMNT F7 EN DIS F8 Figure 8 4 Loop Table Using TISO FT for Batch Programmin
405. sk in the scan or _n_ to exclude the task from the scan See Figure 10 7 SAVE F4 saves the task box selection but does not execute the single scan START F8 saves the task box selection and executes the single scan Alt Q executes a single scan according to the single scan task configuration without displaying it ROW 1 COL 1 NETWORK STARTING ADDRESS 1 X12 X13 TASK SCAN OMONOOBRWND lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 545 NETDATA PG ABORT F1 SAVE F4 START F8 Figure 10 7 Single Scan Task Selection Pop up Menu TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using StatusFunctions 10 13 10 10 Using the Edit Function Accessing the Change Value Function You have an element edit function available after you have selected either STATUS F7 or CHART F8 from the main ladder display The edit functions are the same from either entry point as illustrated in Figure 10 8 below The CHGVAL function provides access to the read write force unforce and find force functions CHART On line Only EXIT CHGVAL FIND PG RN S SCAN SELECT o CHART SPACEBAR COMTGL SYNTGL EXIT CLEAR NEXT o RDTBL WRTBL ENTER OR T T q EXIT CLEAR CURRNT SELCHT RDTBL WRTBU ENTER ENS J OR d T EXIT RDTBL WRTBL ENTERI L CHGVAL EXIT READ SEEK FOR
406. splaying Synonyms and Comments in Ladder Status Displaying TISOFT allows you to display synonyms for your ladder rungs while in the Synonyms status operation To enable the synonym display complete the following steps from your ladder status display 1 Press SPACEBAR 2 Press SYNTGL F2 Displaying TISOFT allows you to display comments for your ladder rungs while in the Comments status operation To enable the comment display complete the following steps from your ladder status display 1 Press SPACEBAR 2 Press COMTGL F1 10 12 Using Status Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 10 9 Using Single Scan Initiating a Single Scan Selecting Tasks to Execute during Single Scan Using a single scan allows you to view a single execution of your program You must have the controller in program mode in order to execute a single scan If you need to change to program mode use PG RN F4 from either the Ladder or the Chart status display to make the change See Section 10 14 To perform a single scan of your program complete the following steps from either the Ladder or the Chart status display 1 Place the controller in program mode 2 Press either S SCAN F5 or Alt Q If your programmable controller supports the Single Scan pop up task box for more than one task you can select which tasks to execute during the single scan Use the Up Down arrow keys to position the cursor then press v to include a ta
407. sssee n eens H 3 On Line Password Operations ccc cece nnne nan On Line Password Operational Modes ssssssseeee nnn On Line Disk Operations with Password ssssssssssssss nnn TISOFT with Modem p a Modem Link eie aee Coe ET dob Eee eed i Modem Parameters oo ccc ee TISOFT with H1 Communic ations Select the I O Addiess 2 esie bk ertet aere ee dde dea 4 Set UMPCS x Emm Installthe CPT413 Card e eerte Dre ere ee hee a tato Selectan Intemupt lsssssssssssssses esee eese Selecta DRAM Address sesuunan Configure Extended Memory Manager 06 0c eee Select Unique Local Ethemet Address sussun eea Install Software from Diskette 2 0 cece cece eee m Ensure That the DRAM Address Does Not Conflict cee eee eee Preparing to Configure the H1 Network 0 00 c ccc Use COMLto Set up CP1413 Local Database Fora Single TISOFT Station Use COMLto Set up CP1413 Local Database For Multiple TISOFT Stations Reboot YOUt PG uci ape ner iaaa a aii aaa aa dha thin ACRIOR nian InstalAL Cabling seseris uisa iiid i caw ehde iad eee hina ead bade s Load CP1413 DrWeIS uncecexecir meccee eane aa ie mises lies Rick YR teas Load Hl Task Codie DIVER cs cack tite weal RC Far aea Access H1 Devices Using TISOFT 0 ccc eee eee Display TISOFT Start Up Screen 2 ett nn Select the H1 Network Node Names ccc cect eee Using Password d and Enabl
408. stallation you must use the H 1 configurator to set up a new TSAP in the CP1434TF such as PC1 for the first station PC2 for the second station etc The steps arethe same as those outlined for the single user installation except that these PC1 PC2 etc TSAPs must be substituted for the hidden CP 1434TF TSAP in the precedure Refer to your SINEC H1 Communication Processor User Manual for more information PC1 TISOFT CP1413 Card Configurator CP1434TF TISOFT Optional TF DDE Optional Local Address 0800060100FF UnitA Controller PC TISOFT Application Association1 UnitA Local TSAP UnitA Remote TSAP PC1 Remote Address 080006010001 505 CP1434TF Local Address 080006010001 CP1413 Card Configurator CP1434TF TISOFT Optional TF DDE Optional Local Address 0800060100DD Local TSAP PC1 Local TSAP PC2 Application Association2 UnitB Local TSAP UnitB Remote TSAP PC1 Remote Address 080006010002 UnitB Controller Application Association1 UnitA Local TSAP UnitA Remote TSAP PC2 Remote Address 080006010001 505 CP1434TF Local Address 080006010002 Local TSAP PC1 Local TSAP PC2 Application Association2 UnitB Local TSAP UnitB Remote TSAP PC2 Remote Address 080006010002 Figure G 5 Addressing TSAPs for Multiple TISOFT Stations NOTE An application association represents the connection betw
409. stalled If you use a Windows text editor such as Notepad use the command File Open and browse to the appropriate drive Select All Files in the Files of type field to enable the Open browser to display the AUTOEXEC BAT file 2 AddtheTCPFB task code driver path with an unused interrupt from 82 to FF to the file For example type the following path C TI TCPFB 0x82 If the interrupt is already in use pick any unused value above 0x82 3 Savethe changeto your AUTOEXEC BAT file and restart your computer to initialize the FMS task code driver To invoke TISOFT using FM S communications follow these steps l Typethe following command at the DOS prompt TI505 FMS 2 Press ONLINE F4 to access the FMS node list You can add another TI SOFT icon on your Windows 95 desktop that starts TISOFT in a DOS window using FMS communications Refer to Section 1 4 for the basic procedure of creating a shortcut icon Give the new icon a unique name for example TI SOFT FMS Then follow these steps 1 Usea single click to select the newly created TI SOFT icon then click the right mouse button to access the pop up menu and select Properties A TISOFT Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Program tab in the TISOFT Properties dialog 3 Inthe Cmd line field enter FMS in the path For example the command line might read C NTINTI505 BAT fms 4 Click on OK Now every time you double click on the new TISOFT shor
410. status and chart it executes a single scan A scan time that takes as long as necessary and not any longer Vertical draws a vertical line to the left and below the cursor in the ladder editor Vertical Delete deletes a vertical line in the ladder editor A24 VME address space Supervisor and non supervisory 575 controllers only A16 VME address space non supervisory 575 controllers only Indicates a word parameter passed to a subroutine with PGTS and PGTSZ instructions Glossary 17 WAND WY WAND WDBTGL WIO WOR WRCHT WRITDK WRITE WRITPC WRITRM WROT WRTBL WTOT WTTA WTTO WTTXO WX WXOR WY 18 Glossary In ladders a box instruction that logically AN Ds a word in memory location A with a word in memory location B The result is placed in memory location C The words located in memory location A and B are not affected by the WAND instruction and retain their original values In SF replaced by amp Word Bit of word Toggle toggles between BIT ONLY bit of word only WORD ONLY and unrestricted search in the Find operation A Word Input or Output element with WX or WY In ladders a box instruction that logically ORs a word in memory location A with a word in memory location B The result is placed in memory location C The words located in memory locations A and B arenot affected by the WOR instruction and retain their original values In SF replaced by Write Chart saves the displayed
411. synonyms by rebuilding the synonym program files It does this by writing all synonyms and descriptors in the selected program on disk to a temporary text file All of the synonym files in the selected program are then deleted and rebuilt using the data in the temporary text file The temporary text file is then deleted This reduces the size of the synonym files and may also fix some synonym editing problems To execute the Recover function follow these steps 1 Press RECOVR F8 at the synonym selection prompt see Figure 9 10 TheTISOFT File Selection screen appears The default directory is the selected program on disk and the default file name is TEMPFILE 2 Press SELECT F8 or Return to accept the default file and directory or choose another drive directory or filename TISOFT executes the Recover function as described above NOTE If thereis not enough space in the default drive and directory to temporarily store the synonym data choose another drive and or directory Select SYNONYM Y000000450 RECOVR F8 LOADER1 EXIT F1 IMPORT F2 EXPORT F3 SETUP F5 RECOVR F8 Figure 9 10 Using the Recover Function TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Documenting Programs 9 13 9 6 Titling Programs Invoking the Title To enter a title press TITLE F4 at the Documentation Menu shown in Editor Figure 9 11 The Title Editor Menu shown in Figure 9 12 is then available with function keys for editing and entering the title D
412. t precedence Is used toindicate element indexing in a math expression Is the division operator in a math expression If an integer any remainder is discarded Is the exponentiation operator in a math expression Indirect address indicator e g Y 100 refers to the address stored within V 100 Specifies bit of word and DCP Drum Step elements in RLL For example WY 23 16 specifies bit 16 of WY 23 and DCP 10 3 specifies step 3 of Drum 10 In SF specifies a real address or real number for example V23 or 2 74 Operator in SF math expressions that performs logical bit by bit AND of two words 16 or 32 bits long Replaces WAND in SF programs and subroutines TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Operator in SF math expressions that performs logical bit by bit OR of two words 16 or 32 bits long Replaces WOR in SF programs and subroutines Operator in SF math expressions that performs logical bit by bit exclusive OR of two words 16 or 32 bits long Replaces WXOR in SF programs and subroutines TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Glossary 21 Hard Key Listing Table L TISOFTKeys Invokes AU X screen Creates a box or edits an existing box when the cursor is positioned on the box Valid if cursor is in an output column Contacts Valid if cursor isin an input column wxwy Open closed contact coil toggle Toggle cursor position display Valid CHGVAL in Status
413. t to Binary AUX 40 ccc cece cece eee Converting Filesto Binary 0 I nnn 11 24 Using AUX 40 iode needed bci ect a n he A e n e Bu icon TUE Rogero d en ev ie 11 24 Setting Controller Operating Mode AUX 81 82 seeeeeennennn nnn Changing Operating Mode AUX 81 sssssssssssees nns Changing LadderMode e eee ete es e CERCA RO ERA Changing Loop Mode essere peste eee See da ated Pes e Selecting Hot Backup Status AUX 82 0 cece cece Locking out Programming Ports AUX 83 Programming Port Lockout AUX 83 1 cece cette eee nnea Contents xiii 11 15 11 16 11 17 Programming EEPROMs AUX 84 AUX 84 F nctiOns ee teet erc ee da AC cien Rn ce D ER E e f Selecting RAM or EEPROM srame ratere en EREE PORE e eR E e pt ed Copying from RAM to EEPROM sepiii lisa aiaia sees Copying from EEPROM to RAM cent ens Erasing an EEPROM siaaa ot oce EC net de etch aed qe v Ue acu le Peter aeu Password Selection and Access Level AUX 85 sseeennn nnne 11 31 Password Selection Access Level AUX 85 ssss RII 11 31 Setting PROABUS DP Communications Mode AUX 86 eee AUX 86 Functions cli RR c ERO RR REA RO dad EATEN ENERALE E ERGO E ado 11 32 Chapter12 Using Global Search and Replace 12 1 Using Global Search and Replace for One Element eese 12 2 Search and Replace Functions 0 cece ccna Invoking Search and Replace
414. ta eet eee ne aO Rd ODER ERE Y Gs ed epatis s Entering Ramp Soak Steps ssssssseee nnne nr nn Displaying Ramp SoakTable ssssssssee ee a AEEA EREA Entering Ramp Soak Flag Address 66 eike EE i E a Making Entriesto Ramp Soak Table Displaying Analog Alamms sssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Invoking the Alarm Directory 6 eee Displaying the Alarm Table 0 cece ccna Editing Analog Alans ii iaiiiid ceia iia sek CREROOA tee CREE RCR iiri i rE ieee ae Invoking the Edit Mode sifu ree seek a a A EE a adds Making Entriesto the Alarm Table sssssssssssseeeeeee eae Status of Control Blocks during Edits Deleting Alarms oi sede ehe edi eor I Rex Rex o Athena Rd orc Contents 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 15 Special Function Program Subroutine Language Special Function Language x od ertet ated tacere acie Arica backed ae Special Function Statements ccc cece enn Special Function INSHUCTIONS 00 cece eee n SF Programming Elements 0 cece ccc eeee n Realand Integer Values iege bete te re ear ae Re Mai e Daci Using Expressions iaaieo aani i aana aoa hh SF Instructions and Parameters s nnne raura rara Program Headers fis s b oce RR A ee oe COR ea a moa a ec oe ea SF Instr c tionis ciii tte e eed dara dati doa atid Viri ed edu Displaying Special Function Programs Subroutines
415. tained in designated V memory locations Timer Counter Preset is the starting value for a counter or timer Table Complement inverts the status of each bit in a table and places results in a second table Timer Counter Word element represents TCP and or TCC elements A box that stores up to five lines of 40 characters each in L memory Accesses the title function to program or display thetitle date and version of the program In AUX it displays thetitle in Block it selects title data Timer is a box instruction that times at a rate of 0 1 second Timer Fast is a box instruction that times at the rate of 1 millisecond Timer 1 Millisecond is a number format that shows 1 millisecond resolution This format takes one word 16 bits Timer 0 1 Second is a number format that shows 0 1 second resolution This format takes one word 16 bits Timers selects TMR and TMRF timer types TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TOR W TOR TPETn TRUNC X TSCAN TSET TTOW TXOR U memory UDC UINT UN ALL UNDEL UNFORC UNIFY UNIQUE UNLCK UNLOCK UNSCALE UPDATE V VAR VERT VERTD VMM VMS TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Tableto Table OR ORs the corresponding bits in two tables and places results in a third table Task Peak Elapsed Time provides for each task a peak elapsed time defining the time from scheduling the task until the process completes execution n Task 1 16 Returns integer part of X in a math exp
416. tcut icon TISOFT starts automatically in FMS communications mode J 6 Using TISO FT with FMS TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Selecting an FMS After starting TISOFT online the FMS node list appears as shown in Station from the Figure 2 Node List Siemens FMS NETWORK NAMES Primer Station 1 Primer Station 2 Undercoat Station Spray paint 1 amp 2 Spray paint 3 amp 4 Clearcoat Station Finishing Final Assembly Station Inspection Station Delivery Preparation Station NEWORK1 ABORT F1 NODLST F3 PAGE F5 ENTER F8 Figure J 2 FMS Network Names Screen 1 If you have created more than one node list file press NODLST F3 to access the list of files and select the one you want to access Press SELECT F8 or Return 2 Fromthelist of station names displayed select the station you want to communicate with and press ENTER F8 or Return TISOFT will go on line tothe selected station TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFT with FMS J 7 Troubleshooting If the FMS task code driver encounters an error during TISOFT operation you may see a prompt in the lower left hand corner that follows this syntax FMS NETWORK ERROR x CODE y where x corresponds to an error number in Table 1 and y corresponds to an internal error code value that provides more detailed diagnostics for factory assistance Table J 1 FMS Network Enor Codes Error Description 2 Unsuppo
417. ted locations are set to 0 Data shifted out of the register is lost The status bit is set when all locations in the register have been set to 0 Starts the verify operation in AUX 17 in Replace it starts the search and replace operation in Single Scan Status it starts the single scan function An on line function that allows monitoring and debugging ladder programs Search Table For Equal locates the next occurrence of the word in a table that is equal to the source word Search Table For Not Equal locates the next occurrence of the word in a table that is not equal to the source word Statement Number is in Find in SF programs and SF subroutines it allows the selection of statement numbers Sets PROFIBUS DP communications mode to STOP Selects Stop On Error in a SFSUB box Accesses the menu to write characters to V or K memory locations Status Word designates status word elements must be an integer Subtracts a signed integer positive or negative in memory location B from a signed integer in memory location A and stores the result in memory location C The signed integers on which the subtraction is performed are not affected by the operation and retain their values in the original locations Halts the print operation TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Glossary 15 SWAP TMRS SWAP SWITCH SWPRBC SYN SYNC SYNTAX SYNTGL T Tab TAND TAN X TASK TC TCC TCMP TCP TCPL TCW TEXT TITLE TMR
418. tem Manual PPX 505 8206 x for information on COM PROFIBUS e SIMATIC TI505 SINEC H1 Communication Processor User Manual PPX 505 8126 x for information on operating and configuring the SINEC H1 CP module SIMATIC 505 Ethernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP 2572 User Manual PPX 505 8132 x for information on setting up and operating the TCP IP module e SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS FMS Communications Processor U ser Manual PPX 505 8129 x for information on operating and configuring the FMS CP module For technical assistance contact your Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc distributor or sales office If you need assistance in contacting your distributor or sales office in the United States call 800 964 4114 For additional technical assistance call the Siemens Technical Services Group in J ohnson City Tennessee at 423 461 2522 or contact them by e mail at simatic hotline sea siemens com For technical assistance outside the United States call 49 911 895 7000 You can also find information about Siemens automation products at our website at http Awww aut sea siemens com TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Preface xxxi 1 1 12 13 14 1 5 Chapter 1 Installing TISOFT Release 6 3 Programming Device Requirements Hardware Requirements ssssssssssss eene Memory Requirements skrase iiiaae a eee Expanded Memory in DOS sssssssssesseee eee eere Expanded Memory in Windows 95 sairis miiie ke
419. th the controller in RUN mode 1 In RUN mode edit a rung of RLL and press ENTER F8 2 Confirm going to RUN TIME EDIT ED mode 3 Edit other rungs as required press ENTER F8 for each rung Press ESC or EXIT F1 when complete Press SYNTAX F8 to perform a syntax check of RLL before returning to RUN mode Then EXIT to return to mode selection 5 Return to RUN mode by pressing RUN F4 Figure 7 3 Task How for Run time Edits 7 4 Using TISOFT for Discrete Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Figure 7 4 shows the basic steps in going to RUN TIME EDIT mode and returning to RUN mode Refer also to Section 11 13 for discussion of setting controller operating mode X12 C113 O een Press ENTER F8 to write rung to controller Y PLC IN RUN MODE SWITCH TO RUNTIME EDIT MODE TO CONTINUE Press YES F2 to switch to 545 NETDATA RN RUN TIME EDIT ED mode NO Fi YES F2 e EXIT F1 Press EXIT F1 or ESC after editing other rungs as required LADDERS EDIT LOOPS RUN LOOPMODE LOCKED TO FOLLOW LADDER MODE PRESS SYNTAX TO VERIFY PROGRAM CHANGES BEFORE SELECTING RUN 545 NETDATA ED EXIT F1 PGMFRZ F2 PGMOFF F3 RUN F4 _Grarst ro SYNTAX F8 Return to RUN mode Check Syntax Exiting Ladder Edit while in __ RUN TIME EDIT mode Z results in this warning Activate Program Changes in PLC
420. than Values in the A and B memory locations are not affected Compact moves all discrete image register types to word image register types for every module of the selected slave and unifies all modules intothe first module Control L invokes the pop up Synonym Editor function Represents an output Coils are designated by the letter Y followed by a number or by control relay coils designated by the letter C followed by a number Other coil types include MP J MPE MCR MCRE END ENDC SKP LBL GTS SBR RTN SSI and B Bit of word coils are also allowed In ladder editor insert this key inserts a blank column at the block cursor shifting remaining columns to the right and extending horizontal connections Theright arrow does the same function Accesses the menu to select background and foreground colors for TISOFT displays Comment provides information for a rung in the program Only one comment is allowed per rung and it is tied tothe first output element for the rung A comment may be up to 16 lines long with 60 characters on each line Comment can also be used for loop alarm SFPGM and SFSUB Comment either accesses comment functions for documenti ng programs or selects comment data See COM Compare compares the I O configuration in the controller with the actual configuration of the I O modules in a selected base Any differences are shown in bright intensity in the chart and two symbols appear tothe left of the
421. the H hard key for drawing horizontal lines Figure 7 12 Lines shows positioning of the cursor before and after the line is drawn Cursor after line drawn Line Drawn Figure 7 12 Creating Horizontal Lines Drawing Vertical To draw a vertical line down to the left of the cursor press VERT F2 or the J Lines hard key To draw a vertical line up to the left of the cursor press U Figure 7 13 shows positioning of the cursor to draw the line down from the cursor Cursor before F2 Line Drawn Cursor after F2 Figure 7 13 Creating Vertical Lines 7 12 Using TISOFT for Discrete Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Z7 Making Program Changes Editing Programs Saving Edits Inserting Rungs Deleting Rungs Accessing edit functions to make changes to your program is as simple as first entering the program You only add the step of finding the point in the program you wish to edit First position the cursor at the point where you want changes You may need to use the Find function to help locate the ladder address or element see Section 7 11 After locating the element s you wish to change press EDIT F2 To save changes to your program disk off line press WRITDK F8 at the ladder display menu You also havethe option of saving program changes when you exit from ladder edit mode You can either insert a single empty rung in your program or you can a
422. the header fields the following default values are assumed e Title None e Continue on Error No e Error Status Address None e Program Type Normal e CydeTime 0 0 Entering SF From the SF header title field begin entry of statements by pressing the Statements down arrow to position the cursor in the statement field Type in the instruction name and press Return Use the alphanumeric keys to complete the parameter prompts for the SF instruction you requested Movethe cursor from prompt to prompt with Return or the arrow keys Thefollowing keys are available for editing e Delete Press DEL to delete a single character Use with the cursor at the end of a lineto delete the RETURN and append the following line by fillingtheline at the cursor position e Insert Press INS to invoke the insert mode Add a return after the insert to split a line at any point and move the text after the RETURN to the following line Toggle off the insert mode by pressing INS again e DELST F5 Press F5 to delete the line on which your cursor is positioned e INSST F6 Press F6toinsert a blank line Parameter entries are verified individually each time you move the cursor off a parameter Verify each statement at completion by pressing ENTER F8 If noerrors are found the statement is saved If errors exist you receivea message and the cursor is positioned on the parameter containing the error 8 24 Using TISOFT
423. the operation you wish to perform on the selection For example position the cursor on Loop 6 and press SHOW F2 to display L oop 6 e Youcantypein a LOOP SFPGM ALARM or SFSUB type and identifier at the SELECT prompt in any S memory directory F or instance you can type in SFPGM2 at the SELECT prompt in the loop directory and press SHOW F2 to display Special Function Program 2 without going through the step of changing directories first NOTE If an Alarm or SF program subroutine directory screen contains more entries than it can display on a single screen view press PgDn to view the remaining entries TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming 8 5 8 3 Displaying Loops Invoking the Loop To invoke the Loop Directory complete the steps below If you are at the Directory Ladder Display screen begin with Step 2 1 Select either ONLINE F4 or OFFLINE F8 2 When the Ladder Display screen appears press SPACEBAR 3 Press LOOP F6 Displaying the To display the Loop Table for a particular loop complete the steps below Loop Table from the Loop Directory Figure 8 4 shows the format of the table and the functions available 1 At the prompt enter the loop number 1 64 you want to program or move the cursor with the arrow keys to select the loop you want 2 Press SHOW F2 3 Asshown in Figure 8 4 only part of the Loop Table can be shown on one screen Press PgDn to see the remainder of the table 8 6 U
424. the screen Page L eft RETURN If editing an element RETURN enters the element otherwise RETURN moves to the left power rail of the next row If editinga rung RETURN on last row of rung appends a new row to the rung Ctrl T Toggles the cursor position display on off TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFT for Disc rete Programming 7 7 7 4 Entering Editing Ladder Program Elements Getting into To enter or edit a ladder logic program first press EDIT F2 to enter edit Edit Mode mode Figure 7 6 shows the ladder screen in edit mode ROW 1 COL 1 NETWORK STARTING ADDRESS 1 L MEMORY AVAILABLE 12293 NOP N NOP C 2 NOP C 2 NOP C 2 NOP amp 2 NOP 545 LOADER1 EXIT F1 F2 y F3 F4 F5 BOX F6 R I F7 f SEDEM 545 LOADER1 HORZ F1 VERT F2 HORZD F3 VERTD F4 DELNET F5 UNIQUE F6COMMNT F7 INSERT F8 Figure 7 6 EditMode for Ladder Logic The primary ladder editing function keys include the following e Thefirst string of function keys provides the basic elements of a ladder program contacts coils and box instructions e Additional function keys accessed by pressing the SPACEBAR provide the means to draw or delete horizontal or vertical connecting lines in your ladder program Refer to Section 7 6 for details on using these function keys e You can use the INSERT F8 or INS key to insert networks or elements between existing networks
425. ther the message INVALID BLOCK PARAMETERS Or S MEMORY OVERFLOW 13 8 Performing Block Data Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Chapter 14 Printing Print Functions Available s nnnm nenne raras Printing a Screen Display eeeseeee enm Entering Print Selections esesoeeee enn nmn Accessing Print Menus x iei eae de ee d c n ER UP Re Invoking Print Selection Menu Print Selection OPUONS riiseni maaie aaiae eae RO Ee aceite Bede oe doa Entering Print Selections ssssssssssssseeeeeeeee emer Completing the Print Setup Menu s een n mmn Invoking the Print Setup Menu ssssssseeeeee ee eee nee 14 6 Completing the Menu ce Re eee ka C Rr CR EROR KORR Reece e RR 14 6 Printing Extended Networks s sssssrssssnsnssnsnnsnnnnnnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnn Using Print Cross Reference Operation s seen n nn n nnn nn nnn CrossReference Options arasia itii iea ka aA nnn Cross Reference Contents lissssuussssssssssssssss sn nnn Invoking Print Cross Reference iais aiiin i aa a eene ener Completing Cross Reference Menu Setting up Print Parameters casein cise RC ea a ee Pata da Executing the Printout 0 cece cece eee eer TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Printing 141 14 1 14 2 Print Functions Available Printing TISOFT offers you several printing options for printing program information Each provides a different type of printout info
426. ting CONFME F2 from the primary menus invokes the Configure Memory functions as illustrated by Figure 3 2 PLC TYPE 575 MEMORY CONFIGURATION USER MEMORY SYSTEM MEMORY LADDER 30 KBYTES 90 KBYTES VARIABLE 32 KBYTES 32 KBYTES CONSTANT 0 KBYTES 0 KBYTES SPECIAL 32 KBYTES 32 KBYTES COMPILED SF CS 0 KBYTES 0 KBYTES USERSUB U 0 KBYTES 0 KBYTES GLOBAL G TMR CTR 5 KBYTES DRUMS 3 KBYTES SHIFT REG ja 1 KBYTES TABLE MOVE TE 2 KBYTES ONE SHOTS 2s 1 KBYTES CONTROL RELAYS 1 0 X Y WX WY TOTAL SYSTEM MEMORY 320 KBYTES CONFIGURED SYSTEM MEMORY 166 KBYTES REMAINING SYSTEM MEMORY 154 KBYTES FROM RAM REQUESTED OPERATION IN PROGRESS 555 NETDATA EXIT F1 READRM F2 WRITRM F3 545 F4 545L F5 575 F6 555 F7 REQAPP F8 Figure 3 2 Memory Configuration Menu e The first line of the display gives the display title for example Auxiliary Functions Memory Configuration if any e The main body of the screen shows information about the function you select it may be either a listing of options or a blank display for making entries e The source of the display from RAM from PLC is given at the bottom left of the screen e TISOFT displays messages that help you detect syntax errors illegal operations and similar problems See Appendix B for a listing of error messages and possible corrections e Status is shown on the lower right side of the screen In off line mode there aretwo fi
427. ting range number must be less than or equal to the ending range number The REPLACE field designates the element type and identifier you are replacing The entry in the wITH field designates the element type and identifier of the replacement element for the one designated in the replace field The replacement continues for the range you indicated When you designate ladder memory type the search defaults the first ti me to the beginning and ending numbers of the network that the cursor is on For loops alarms and SF programs subroutines the search range is corrected to the maximum number for each type if the number you enter exceeds the maximum that can be programmed for each type Norange check is performed on the entry for the REPLACE field Range checking is performed however on the entries you make in the WITH field Replacing an To replace a single element within a designated search range complete the Hement following steps 1 At the prompt first select memory type To do this press the function key that corresponds to the desired memory type Skip this step if your controller does not have S memory 2 Typein the beginning memory address for the search 3 Usetheright arrow key to position cursor in the field for THRU to set the search range 4 Typein the specific element type and identifier to replace in the REPLACE field If needed press C or Shift for a list of valid element types
428. tions 11 9 11 6 Setting Time Functions AUX 14 16 18 NOTE Your controller will list only the AUX numbers for that particular model Not all AUX functions are available in all models Setting Watc hdog Use AUX 14 toset the time out on the controller watchdog timer To invoke Timer AUX 14 the function typein 14 at the AUX menu prompt and press Return To read the time press READ F2 To enter a new time out type in the desired value at the prompt The minimum time out supported by the controller is 500 ms You can enter any number between that and 32767 Press WRITE F3 to enter the new value 11 10 Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Setting Task Codes Use AUX 16 to set the number of task codes processed per scan for SF Processed per modules on each channel To invoke the function type in 16 at the AUX Scan AUX 16 menu prompt and press Return The window display appears as shown in Figure 11 2 Only numbers for the channels you have configured are displayed for example if you have four channels the numbering goes to 4 Type in the number of task codes for SF modules per scan use the arrow keys to move from channel to channel Press WRITE F3 to enter the new numbers To read current entries on the display press READ F2 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS DIAGNOSTICS SAVE PLC LOAD PLC CLEAR PLC RESETS AND RESTARTS MISCELLANEOUS
429. tory For example after invoking the directory for loops analog alarms or special function programs the keys listed in Table 8 1 are common to each Table 8 1 S Memory Function Keys EXIT F1 Returns to Ladder Display SHOW F2 Displays selected control block BLOCK F3 Invokes S memory block operations EN DIS F4 Accesses the Enable Disable functions in the selected control block for Loops and Alarms DIS CP F4 Accesses the Enable Disable and Compile NoCompile functions for SF Programs and SF Subroutines PG RN F5 Selects PLC operating mode on line only LOOP F6 Selects PID Loop Directory R S F6 Selects Ramp Soak Table ALARM F7 Selects Analog Alarm Directory SFPGM F8 Selects Special Function Program Directory SFSUB F8 Selects Special Function Subroutine Directory PageUp PageDown Scrolls through directory screens when a directory contains more entries than can be displayed on a single screen Return Initiates find of selection entered at the prompt Arrow Keys Move cursor on display 8 4 Using TISOFT for Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Locating Directory You have a choice of methods to use in selecting entries in an S memory Entries directory You can select a particular loop alarm or SF program subroutine in either of the following ways e Usethearrow keys to position the cursor on any entry in the directory then press the function key for
430. turn Table 11 1 shows a list of auxiliary functions available for each category TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxiliary Functions 11 3 Accessing Controller Auxiliary Functions continued Table 11 1 Auxiliary Functions Diagnostics 20 PLC Diagnostics 28 Memory Availability 21 Remote Base Diagnostics 29 PLC Operational Status 22 Syntax Check 17 Compare PLC to Disk 25 Display Failed I O 15 System Part Number 27 PLC Card Failure 23 RBC Part Number Save Controller 60 All 64 Loops 61 Ladder 65 Analog Alarms 62 Variable 66 SF Programs 63 Constant 67 SF Subroutines 42 Save U memory Load Controller 90 All without IR 95 Analog Alarms 91 Ladder 96 SF Programs 92 Variable 97 SF Subroutines 93 Constant 98 Forced IR 94 Loops 99 Word I O 43 Load U memory Clear Controller 13 Clear All 37 DSP DCP 31 Ladder 74 Loops 32 Variable 75 Analog Alarms 33 Constant 76 SF Programs 35 Word 77 SF Subroutines 36 TCC TCP 41 Clear U memory Resets and Restarts 10 Power up 12 Complete Restart 11 Partial Restart Miscellaneous 14 Watchdog Timer 82 Hot Backup 16 Task Codes per Scan 83 Port Lockout 18 PLC Time of Day 84 EEPROM Programming 19 Set PLC Scan Time 85 Password Operations 81 PLC Operational Modes 40 Convert S records 86 PROFIBUS DP Mode NOTE f no S memory is configured AU X 64 67 74 77 and 94 97 are not displayed If no U memory is config
431. u are entering a ladder program pressing EDIT F2 gives you access to the ladder programming functions The menu chart in Figure 3 1 below illustrates the ease of access to editing functions On and Off Line Ee 3E T T0 Te T9 9 Tro 545 555 560 Online Only amp 575 only not in 580 530 C _ SPACEBAR HORZ VERT HORZD VERTD DELNET UNIQUE COMMNT INSERT Figure 3 1 Accessing Program Functions e When additional functions are available the plus sign appears in the lower right corner of the screen To access the additional functions press the spacebar Press the spacebar again to return tothe original group of functions e You can press es from any function key line to exit to the next higher level or previous screen Diagnostics In addition to programming related tasks TISOFT provides access to Memory and I O controller functions such as diagnostics and configuration of O and Configuration memory 3 2 TISO FT Basics TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 3 2 TISOFT Menus Reading TISOFT TISOFT menus are arranged for easy access to all functions Ladder Displays instructions are accessed by element type Selecting a contact coil or box invokes menus or prompts for each element type Loop Analog Alarm and Special Function programming are also accessed from the primary function menus available after selection of on or off line mode For example selec
432. u receive the function key display shown in Figure 7 10 545 LOADER1 EXIT F1 ROW F2 COL F3 INSMOD F4 RUNG F5 AUTORN F6 Figure 7 10 Insert Function Keys 3 Press INSMOD F4 The editing cursor changes as shown in Figure 7 11 Editing cursor after pressing INSERT F8 followed by INSMOD F4 Figure 7 11 Insert Mode When auto insert element mode is on all ladder elements at and tothe right of the block cursor position are shifted tothe right when a new contact is created It performs an INSERT COLUMN for each column required to display the new ladder element You remain in the insert mode until you press INSMOD F4 again When a network is complete press ENTER F8 If you attempt to enter a network that exceeds the maximum number of elements allowed 120 contact sized nodes you receive the following message ELEMENT TOO LARGE TO FIT INTO NETWORK Tocorrect the entry either delete some ladder elements or break the logic into two networks TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFT for Discrete Programming 7 11 7 6 Adding Connecting Lines for Ladders Drawing Lines for Use HORZ F1 or theH hard key and VERT F2 or the J hard key to add Networks the connecting lines when you are entering a complex network You cannot draw a horizontal line in the last column of a row With the vertical line key you cannot draw a line from the first column on the last row or on the top of a box Drawing Honzontal Use HORZ F1 or
433. ual Setting up the TISOFTEnvironment 2 13 Selecting On Line Operation continued Reading 575 Port To read the 575 port configuration follow these steps Configuration 1 Select PORTCF F6 from the Application ID Table to access the Port Configuration chart shown in Figure 2 8 PORT 1 CONFIGURATION BOARD ADDRESS 00 K BAUD 0 3 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 1152 CHARACTER SIZE WITHOUT PARITY 7 8 PARITY NONE EVEN ODD MARK SPACE NUMBER OF STOP BITS 1 1 5 2 FLOW CONTROL NONE DSR DTR XON XOFF BOTH FROM PORT NETDATA EXIT F1 READ F2 WRITE F4 Figure 2 8 Port Configuration Screen for 575 Contollers 2 Movethe field cursor tothe PORT CONFIGURATION line and type the port number to read 3 Put the field cursor on the BOARD ADDRESS line and type the board address to read 4 Press READ F2 The port configuration for the selected port and address is read from the controller and displayed 5 Press EXIT F1 toreturn tothe Application ID Table screen Figure 2 7 2 14 Setting up the TISOFT Environment TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Whiting 575 Port To write the 575 port configuration follow these steps Configuration 1 Select PORTCF F6 from the Application ID Table to access the Port Configuration chart shown in Figure 2 8 2 Movethe field cursor tothe PORT CONFIGURATION line and type the number of the port that you want to be the destination of the port configuration data 3 Put the field curs
434. ubleshooting If the TCTCP task code driver encounters an error during TISOFT operation you may see a prompt in the lower left hand corner that follows this syntax TCP IP NETWORK ERROR x CODE y where x corresponds to an error number in Table l 2 and y corresponds to an internal error code value that provides more detailed diagnostics for factory assistance Table l 2 Enor Numbers HostN um index is larger than the number of hosts minus one that is currently recognized by the TSR program The FTP kernel was unable to match the indexed host name with an IP address TheFTP kernel was unable to return a global descriptor The FTP kernel was unable to connect with the requested host The FTP kernel was unable to set the requested timeout value 6 The FTP kernel experienced an error while trying to write a request to the host 7 The FTP kernel experienced an error while trying to read a response from the host 8 The FTP kernel was unable to globalize a local descriptor 9 The FTP kernel experienced an error while trying to access the host table The CP2572 module returned an error due toa CAMP protocol error The number of host names returned in RecvBufferPtr is larger than RecvBufferSize Thereis no host on the command line and the number of hosts in the host table exceeds the maximum hosts parameter I 10 Using TISO FT with TCP IP TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual The error numbers x most likely to
435. ump is a coil that freezes all outputs in its field of control Each J MP instruction must be numbered 1 8 Numbers may be used more than once J ump End is a coil that terminates a jump instruction Designates read only memory locations in the controller Memory area designated for ladder programs In SF programs or subroutines L is a suffix that indicates a long double word or address such as V23L 427L Specifies the destination of a GOTO statement where program execution resumes Loop Alarm Acknowledge Flags must be an integer Loop Alarm Deadband may be integer or real Selects the ladder rung data in Replace or Block Labe is a coil that ends a Skip function Loop C Flags 32 bits Loop C Flags High most significant word of loop C flags must be an integer Loop C Flags Low least significant word of loop C flag must be an integer Load Address copies the address of a memory location into a memory location Load Data Constant is a box that loads the indicated data constant into a designated memory location Performs signal processing on an analog variable Available only when invoked from a Loop Alarm or Cydic SF Program Loop Error may be integer or real Loop High Limit Alarm may be integer or real Loop High High Limit Alarm may be integer or real Refers to a scan time that varies up to a set limit Loop Gain must be real Loop Derivative Gain li miting Coefficient must be real Loop Low Limit Alarm
436. ungs after entering until you abort the rung edit or press AUTORN again Analog Alarm V Flags must be an integer Analog Alarm V Flags Address Ydlow Deviation for Analog Alarm may be integer or real Accesses the BOX function it is a hard key As an element type B represents a bit parameter passed to a subroutine in RLL via the PGTS PGTSZ or XSUB box Deletes the character tothe left of the cursor position a hard key Binary Coded Decimal is a number with four binary bits representing a decimal digit See HEX Converts a four digit BCD value into a binary value Causes the printer to skip to the beginning of a page before printing a rung and the associated comment Binary displays up to 16 1s and Os in any combination This format takes one word 16 bits Converts a binary value into a four digit BCD value Bit Clear clears a selected bit of a word to 0 Bit Pick tests a selected bit of a specified memory word to determine its status The bit is not affected by the BITP instruction and retains its value in memory Bit Set sets a selected bit of a word to one Build Chart allows building a status chart Build Tableaccesses build table function in global search and replace Moves copies puts or deletes a selected segment of data in either ladder or S memory Allows access to preprogrammed modules in the controller Represents a control relay Control relays may be either contacts coils or box parameters accordi
437. uration Menu Off Line Configuring Controller Memory TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Displaying On Line To show the memory configuration from your program disk complete the following steps Refer also to Figure 4 2 1 Press ONLINE F4 2 Press SPACEBAR 3 Press CONFME F2 4 Press READDK F2 To see the memory configuration that is in the controller complete the following steps Refer also to Figure 4 2 1 Press ONLINE F4 2 Press SPACEBAR 3 Press CONFME F2 4 Press READPC F4 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 EDIT F2 FIND F3 DOCUM F4 BLOCK F5 AUX F6 STATUS F7 CHART F8 Li SPACEBAR Jj 545 NETDATA PG PRINT F1 CONFME F2 CONFIO F3 COMTGL F4 SYNTGL F5 LOOP F6 ALARM F7 SFPGM F8 FROM PLC 545 NETDATA PG EXIT F1 READDK F2 WRITDK F3 READPC F4 WRITPC F5 REQAPP F8 Figure 4 2 Accessing Memory Configuration Menu On Line TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Configuring Controller Memory 4 3 4 2 Configuring Memory Off Line Accessing Access the off line memory configuration menu from the TISOFT Start up Configuration Screen by completing the steps listed below If you are already off line at the Menu ladder display begin with step 2 Figure 4 3 shows the off line menu 1 Press OFFLINE F8 2 Press SPACEBAR 3 Press CONFME F2 PLC TYPE 555 MEMORY CONFIGURATION USER MEMORY SYSTEM MEMORY LADDER L 32 KBYTES 96 KBYTES VARIABLE V 52 KBYTES 52 KBYTES CONSTANT K 0 KBYTES 0 KBYTES SPECIAL S 32 KB
438. ured AU X 40 43 are not displayed If a hot back up card is not present AUX 82 is not displayed If your controller model does not support EEPROM programming AU X 84 is not displayed If your controller does not support PROFIBUS DP I O AUX 86 is nat displayed The 520 530 520C 530C and 525 controllers do not display the following AUX functions 14 16 18 21 22 27 33 40 43 63 67 74 77 82 83 86 93 97 11 4 Executing Controller Auxilia ry Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 11 2 Powering up Restarting the Controller AUX 10 12 Powering up the Contoller AUX 10 Use AUX 10 to clear all unforced X Y and non retentive C elements on power up or restart of the controller Retentive control relays are not cleared The WX and WY elements are not affected A CAUTION If you execute AUX 10 with the controller battery switch set to Off all programs residing in the controller will be cleared Be certain to check battery switch position before using AUX 10 To execute AU X 10 usethe numeric keys to enter 10 at the menu prompt then press Return When you receive the message PLC POWER UP RESTART confirm by pressing YES F2 For 575 controllers you are also prompted with COORDINATE RESET WITH OTHER APPLICATIONS and COORDINATE RESET WITH ENTIRE SYSTEM For each of these prompts press NO F1 or YES F2 as required for your process TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Executing Controller Auxiliar
439. ursor on the box name and press HELP F4 ROW 1 COL 1 NEIWORKSIARTING ADDRESS 1 L MEMORY AVAILABLE 8192 NOP G LIST COIL BOX LOOP ALARM MISC END ABSV LACK AACK OUTC ENDC ADD LADB AADB OUTY GTS BITC LCFH ACFH NEXT JMP BITP LCFL ACFL NXTIN JMPE BITS LERR AERR L LBL CBD LHA AHA ADDR MCR CDB LHHA AHHA DSP MCRE CMP LKC ALA DSC RTN CTR LKD ALLA DCP SBR DCAT LLA AODA DCC JMORE JMORE JMORE MORE MORE 545 NETDATA EXIT F1 HELP F4 SELECT F8 Figure 3 5 Element List Screen TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFTBasics 3 11 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 Chapter 4 Configunng Controller Memory Reading Memory Configuration s eene Displaying Memory Configuration isssssssssseeeeeeeee Displaying OLNE zs eda ice ctc edic eden e a de ge ael esee a de ee BH a A cd Displaying OneLine use cte REOR RC DURER CERRO DR GU SUR RCRUM dca lie dans Configuring Memory Off Line ssssssssseeee nmm sen Accessing Configuration Menu ssssssssseee eene Configuration Menu Field Sesser e nnn Selecting the Controller ri rete eR ERE bra ee ae eka ed ed en Roe Ren Configuration Procedure Ree ee RR KT ERROR Re a ROG ICE RR RC Entering Configuration siesta ox eee mr Eee eR ERE RE dab Rete Ee s a teca teg Configuring Memory On Line seeeeesere nnns Accessing Configuration Menu Configuration Procedure certos exa d
440. us injury to personnel and or equipment damage Safety devices and techniques must be used in all industrial control systems to guard against sudden equipment startup Step 3 Install the Install the CP 1413 card into your personal computer CP1413 Card Step 4 Selectan Select an available interrupt for the CP1413 This number should be one of Interrupt the following INT 5 INT 10 INT 12 or INT 15 Try INT 12 first The interrupt number chosen should be one that is not already being used on your computer Step 5 Selecta Select an available DRAM address This number should be either D0000 or DRAM Address E0000 Try DRAM address D0000 first if you are unsure which DRAM address is available on your computer NOTE Ensure that the DRAM address selection D0000 or E 0000 does not conflict with any other boards or software in your PC Address E0000 often conflicts with shadowed BIOS and VGA ROMs caches and optional ROMs G 4 TISO FT with H1 Communications TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Step 6 Configure Extended Memory Manager Step 7 Select Unique Local Ethemet Address In order to run TISOFT with H 1 you need to install a memory manager TISOFT has been successfully configured with H1 using CEMM QEMM DOS 5 x EMM 386 or DOS 6 x MEMMAKER When you edit your CONFIG SYS toinstall the memory manager of your choice you must include a memory exclusion command which identifies the region you have set aside for use by the CP
441. utines complete the following SF Directory steps from the Start up Screen to display the directory l Select either ONLINE F4 or OFFLINE F8 2 When the Ladder Display screen appears press SPACEBAR 3 Press SFPGM F8 Displaying the To display the Special Function Program or Subroutine table complete the SF Table steps below from the SF directory Figure 8 7 shows the SF Program table 1 At the prompt enter the program or subroutine number you want to program or move the cursor to select the program 2 Press SHOW F2 SF PROGRAM 1 CONTINUE ON ERROR Y N NO ERROR STATUS ADDR Y C WY V PROGRAM TYPE N P C R NORMAL CYCLE TIME SEC 0 0 eo END S MEMORY AVAILABLE 12288 DISABLED 565 NETDATA EXIT F1 EDIT F2 FIND F4 DELST F5 INSST F6 COMMNT F7 EN DIS F8 Figure 8 7 SF Program Table 8 20 Using TISOFTfor Batch Programming TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Finding SF After you have displayed a program or subroutine with the Show function Statements use the Find operation to locate a particular statement or element within your program for display Complete the following steps to find a specific statement or element 1 Press FIND F4 2 Useone of the following function keys to select the type of Find to be performed Press STMTNO F2 to enter a statement number or Press INSTR F3 to enter an SF instruction name or Press ELEMNT F4 to enter an element address within an SF statement 3 Enter the d
442. uto insert to save time when adding several networks Figure 7 14 illustrates the positioning of inserted networks Toinsert an empty rung in a display press either the INS hardkey or INSERT F8 then RUNG F5 in the insert mode function keys Toinsert more than one empty rung press either the INS hardkey or INSERT F8 then AUTORN F6 in the insert mode function keys Figure 7 10 Rung and cursor before INSERT Cursor X22 a 46 ung after INSERT Previous rung moved down and new address will be assigned after editing new rung and pressing ENTER F8 Figure 7 14 Inserting Networks To delete an entire network position the cursor on the network to be deleted and press DELNET F5 in the edit mode function keys TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Discrete Programming 7 13 Making Program Changes continued Inserting Elements To insert elements in an existing network press either the INS hardkey or INSERT F8 then ROW F2 H or down arrow or COL F3 J or right arrow Figure 7 15 and Figure 7 16 show examples of how the inserts are made To toggle between insert and edit modes for elements press INSMOD F4 Rung 62 after pressing ROW F2 m Cursor Cursor before pressing F2 Figure 7 15 Inserting a Row Rung 62 after pressing COL F3 I 62 1 E n N Bibles Cursor before pressing F3 Figure 7 16 Inserting a
443. valid Data Type Code Invalid Directory Invalid Drive Invalid Element Data After Element aaaannnnn Invalid Element Data at First Element TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not valid An example appears below END z This message is displayed when you try to FIND an SF statement number in an SF Program Subroutine that is beyond the end of the program Use FIND INSTRUCTION END to find the end of your program quickly This message is displayed during edit of SF statement parameters in an SF Program Subroutine Either the specified field requires an INTEGER response and the user has entered a REAL response or elsethe specified field requires a REAL response and the user has entered an INTEGER response Enter the correct INTEGER REAL response During edit of a loop alarm table this message indicates that HNF positive infinity or INF negative infinity are invalid values for the specified entry field Enter a value between NF and INF During insertion of a row or a column in an RLL network this message indicates that either the block cursor is incorrectly positioned or there is insufficient room to perform the insert This error occurs when BLOCK operations involve invalid source beginning ending and destination addresses for the controller Some code in an SF program such as the scaled integer type code 0 offset 2096 offset bipolar in a SCALE or U
444. voking the Ramp Soak Table editor from the Loop Directory It is intended to remind the user to make sure the current R S table has been selected in the corresponding Loop table The current step type does not match the step type of the step being modified This message indicates that the request in AUX 21 to perform a Dual Media RBC role swap has been successfully completed If you are editing parameters in an SFSUB box in RLL or SF statements in an SF Program Subroutine this message indicates that the specified parameter is an Output field Read only element addresses for example X1 K 1 are not permitted on the left side of the assignment operator in an expression nor arethey valid as the destination Table Address in a Pack operation Some type of receive error has occurred communicating with TI STAR Model 20 or Model 70 You cannot rename a file from one drive to another drive Usethe COPY operation The instruction or rung exceeds program memory size ncrease L memory allocation This message can also mean that PROFIBUS DP O configuration data has exceeded its memory size Reduce the size of the PROFIBUS DP configuration An area of memory for example U memory bei ng reduced during controller Memory Configuration contains data in the range being truncated Before writing the reduced memory configuration to the controller delete the data in the memory area to be reduced During execution of BLOCK operations on
445. want or type the name at the FILENAME prompt 3 Press RENAME F4 The prompt RENAME TO appears 4 Typein the new program name and press ENTER F8 or Return The renamed program appears in the TISOFT PROGRAMS sub window 2 8 Setting up the TISOFTEnvironment TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Copying a To copy an existing program follow these steps Program 1 Select the directory path where the program resides See Selecting a Directory 2 Movethe field cursor in the TISOFT PROGRAMS sub window to select the program you want or type the name at the FILENAME prompt 3 Press COPY F2 The prompt COPY TO appears 4 Typein the new program name or new path and name and press ENTER F8 or Return The new program appears in the TISOFT PROGRAMS sub window if it is copied to the same directory Non Program File When you save load a chart or table or import export you also have access Selection to the program management DOS related functions but not TI SOFT programs All program management function keys are available for use with chart and table files in the status chart function or the import export text file Figure 2 4 shows the file management display in the Status function NOTE The chart table import export and certain other files are not part of the program and are not copied deleted or renamed when the program is See Appendix K for a list of program and non program files xi TISOFT FI
446. will see are given in Step 8 Then continue with the if configuration fails section in Step 8 If the system did not lock up and no errors were displayed on the Screen you can continue From the DOS command line at the C gt SINEC BIN prompt enter scp mon s This returns a box describing the status of the CP 1413 card Verify that the database is consistent and that all tasks are running NOTE You can obtain additional information about starting the module and the driver and using the SCP monitor by consulting the Software Installation chapter Sections 3 2 and 3 3 of the SINEC TF NET1413 MS DOS Windows Manual G 18 TISOFTwith H1 Communications TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Load Drivers To automatically load the CP1413 drivers initialize the CP1413 and allow TISOFT to use the CP1413 NOTE The commands are listed below but do not enter them into your AUTOEXEC BAT file until you have completed the configuration of your CP1413 card and all conflicts are resolved ed c sinec bin tfnetdrv Loads the CP 1413 driver scp mon c Loads the CP 1413 firmware scp mon 1 Loads the CP 1413 local database ed TI Usecd TI for TISOFT H1TC 0x82 Loads the H 1 Series 505 task code driver cd Returns default directory to root TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual TISOFT with H1 Communications G 19 Steps for Installing and Configuring the CP1413 Module continued Step 16 Load H1 If the H1 task code driver has not b
447. xisting box when the cursor is positioned on the box Valid if cursor is in an output column Contacts Valid if cursor isin an input column Contact Coil Toggle Open closed contact coil toggle Cursor Position Display Toggle Ctrl T PT Address Delete Character EnablerDisable ENTER Edit moves to next row current rung or appends new row torung Display moves to next row or rung Equal to Equal to Relational Contact Greater Than or Equal to HELP System Coo SSS Element List HOME HORZ 3 8 TISO FT Basics TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual HORZD Immediate I O Increment Address Insert Character INSERT K Memory Editor L Memory Address Macro Functions Table 3 1 TISOFTKeys continued Alt R Deletes horizontal line O O Less than Relational Contact Record macro Alt S Stop macro Alt P Play macro Alt W Write macro to file ALL Loop macro play until key press Writemacotofile Alt O Open macro file NO N For a YES NO response Not Equal to Not Equal Relational Contact pee VERT VERTD XREF TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Ctrl PrtSc PrtSc Access password functions offline Create edit output coil Edits synonym descri ptor Goto SF to show or edit Perform single scan TISOFT Basics 3 9 3 6 TISOFT HELP System Accessing Help You can access information about
448. y Functions 11 5 Powering up Restarting the Controller AUX 10 12 continued Performing a Partial Restart AUX 11 Performing a Complete Restart AUX 12 Use AUX 11 to clear all discrete elements except retentive C and forced elements The word elements and presets are not reset To execute AUX 11 use the numeric keys to enter 11 at the menu prompt then press Return When you receive the message PLC PARTIAL RESTART confirm by pressing YES F2 For 575 controllers you are also prompted with COORDINATE RESET WITH OTHER APPLICATIONS and COORDINATE RESET WITH ENTIRE SYSTEM For each of these prompts press NO F1 or YES F2 as required for your process Use AUX 12 to clear all discrete elements and word elements including retentive C elements AU X 12 also clears controller fatal errors F orced discrete elements and forced word elements are not reset To execute AU X 12 usethe numeric keys to enter 12 at the menu prompt then press Return When you receive the message PLC COMPLETE RESTART confirm by pressing YES F2 For 575 controllers you are also prompted with COORDINATE RESET WITH OTHER APPLICATIONS and COORDINATE RESET WITH ENTIRE SYSTEM For each of these prompts press NO F1 or YES F2 as required for your process 11 6 Executing Controller Auxilia ry Functions TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual 11 3 Loading Program to Controller AUX 43 90 99 Loading Memory Types AUX 43
449. ystem level operations should enter or modify a program with the controller in RUN mode TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Using TISOFTfor Discrete Programming 7 3 Accessing Program Entry Functions continued Run time Edits Some of the 545 555 and 575 controllers have a RUN TIME EDIT ED mode in addition to PROGRAM PG and RUN RN modes RUN TIME EDIT mode allows the editing of your RLL program while the process is running Returning to RUN mode updates the program in the programmable controller to reflect the modifications made during RUN TIME EDIT SeeFigure 7 3 for a typical task flow Before returning to RUN mode from RUN TIME EDIT always press SYNTAX F8 to check the syntax of the RLL program Syntax check looks for invalid instructions that could cause the process to go to PROGRAM mode a WARNNG O TISOFT allows program entry and modification while the controller is in RUN mode If your controller supports RUN TIME EDIT mode and Syntax Check always check the syntax of the modifications using SYNTAX F8 before returning to RUN mode If your controller does not support Syntax Check remember that all entries made to the program in RUN mode immediately affect the execution of the program Failure to follow appropriate safety precautions could result in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Only qualified personnel authorized to perform system level operations should enter or modify a program wi
450. ze has been exceeded MATH IMATH IF expressions may contain a maximum of 74 tokens A comment may contain a maximum of 1021 characters assuming 66 characters per line A PRINT statement may contain a maximum of 1017 buds characters in quotes element addresses require 4 6 characters each If you are entering RAMP SOAK steps this message indicates that the table already contains the maximum number of steps Maximum Number of During I O Configuration this message indicates that the number of Points Exceeded points specified for a given element type X Y WX WY exceeds the maxi mum allowed for example 32 Maximum SF Check to see that subroutines are not nested beyond 4 levels Subroutine Nesting Level Exceeded B 16 TISOFTMessages TISOFT Release 6 3 User Manual Memory Size Exceeds Total Available Memory Memory Size Is Larger than Maximum Defined Value Memory Size Is Less than Minimum Defined Value Memory Size Is Not Multiple of Allocation Size Missing Required Application a Mode Lock Application Refusal by a Modified Values Entered Module in Slot xx Is Already Configured by Application a Multiple Outputs with Stand alone Output Not Allowed Network Contains Extra STR Element at Address Network Contains Invalid Large Box at HHHHH Network Contains Invalid Multiple Input Box at Network Contains Invalid Output at Address TISOFT Release 6 3

505 TISOFT2 Rel. 6.3 User Manual - Internet

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents